CFR 2011 Title49 Vol3 Part178

PART 178—SPECIFICATIONS FOR 178.
47 Specification 4DS welded stainless

steel cylinders for aircraft use.
PACKAGINGS 178.50 Specification 4B welded or brazed
steel cylinders.
Sec. 178.51 Specification 4BA welded or brazed
178.1 Purpose and scope. steel cylinders.
178.2 Applicability and responsibility. 178.53 Specification 4D welded steel cyl-
178.3 Marking of packagings. inders for aircraft use.
178.55 Specification 4B240ET welded or
Subpart A [Reserved] brazed cylinders.
178.56 Specification 4AA480 welded steel cyl-
Subpart B—Specifications for Inside inders.
Containers, and Linings 178.57 Specification 4L welded insulated cyl-
178.33 Specification 2P; inner nonrefillable inders.
metal receptacles. 178.58 Specification 4DA welded steel cyl-
178.33–1 Compliance. inders for aircraft use.
178.33–2 Type and size. 178.59 Specification 8 steel cylinders with
178.33–3 Inspection. porous fillings for acetylene.
178.33–4 Duties of inspector. 178.60 Specification 8AL steel cylinders
178.33–5 Material. with porous fillings for acetylene.
178.33–6 Manufacture. 178.61 Specification 4BW welded steel cyl-
178.33–7 Wall thickness. inders with electric-arc welded longitu-
178.33–8 Tests. dinal seam.
178.33–9 Marking. 178.65 Specification 39 non-reusable (non-re-
178.33a Specification 2Q; inner nonrefillable fillable) cylinders.
metal receptacles. 178.68 Specification 4E welded aluminum
178.33a–1 Compliance. cylinders.
178.33a–2 Type and size. 178.69 Responsibilities and requirements for
178.33a–3 Inspection. manufacturers of UN pressure recep-
178.33a–4 Duties of inspector. tacles.
178.33a–5 Material. 178.70 Approval of UN pressure receptacles.
178.33a–6 Manufacture. 178.71 Specifications for UN pressure recep-
178.33a–7 Wall thickness. tacles.
178.33a–8 Tests.
178.74 Approval of MEGCs.
178.33a–9 Marking.
178.33b Specification 2S; inner nonrefillable 178.75 Specifications for MEGCs.
plastic receptacles APPENDIX A TO SUBPART C—ILLUSTRATIONS:
178.33b–1 Compliance. CYLINDER TENSILE SAMPLE
178.33b–2 Type and size.
178.33b–3 Inspection. Subparts D–G [Reserved]
178.33b–4 Duties of inspector.
178.33b–5 Material. Subpart H—Specifications for Portable
178.33b–6 Manufacture. Tanks
178.33b–7 Design qualification test.
178.33b–8 Production tests. 178.251—178.253–5 [Reserved]
178.33b–9 Marking. 178.255 Specification 60; steel portable
tanks.
Subpart C—Specifications for Cylinders 178.255–1 General requirements.
178.255–2 Material.
178.35 General requirements for specifica-
178.255–3 Expansion domes.
tion cylinders.
178.255–4 Closures for manholes and domes.
178.36 Specification 3A and 3AX seamless
178.255–5 Bottom discharge outlets.
steel cylinders.
178.37 Specification 3AA and 3AAX seamless 178.255–6 Loading and unloading accessories.
steel cylinders. 178.255–7 Protection of valves and acces-
178.38 Specification 3B seamless steel cyl- sories.
inders. 178.255–8 Safety devices.
178.39 Specification 3BN seamless nickel 178.255–9 Compartments.
cylinders. 178.255–10 Lining.
178.42 Specification 3E seamless steel cyl- 178.255–11 Tank mountings.
inders. 178.255–12 Pressure test.
178.44 Specification 3HT seamless steel cyl- 178.255–13 Repair of tanks.
178.255–14 Marking.
wreier-aviles on DSK3TPTVN1PROD with CFR
inders for aircraft use.

178.45 Specification 3T seamless steel cyl- 178.255–15 Report.
inders. 178.273 Approval of Specification UN port-
178.46 Specification 3AL seamless alu- able tanks.
minum cylinders. 178.274 Specification for UN portable tanks.
VerDate Mar<15>2010 14:56 Jan 03, 2012 Jkt 223216 PO 00000 Frm 00019 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\223216.XXX 223216
Pt. 178 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
178.275 Specification for UN Portable Tanks 178.338–15 Cleanliness.
intended for the transportation of liquid 178.338–16 Inspection and testing.
and solid hazardous materials. 178.338–17 Pumps and compressors.
178.276 Requirements for the design, con- 178.338–18 Marking.
struction, inspection and testing of port- 178.338–19 Certification.
able tanks intended for the transpor- 178.340–178.343 [Reserved]
tation of non-refrigerated liquefied com- 178.345 General design and construction re-
pressed gases. quirements applicable to Specification
178.277 Requirements for the design, con- DOT 406 (§ 178.346), DOT 407 (§ 178.347), and
struction, inspection and testing of port- DOT 412 (§ 178.348) cargo tank motor vehi-
able tanks intended for the transpor- cles.
tation of refrigerated liquefied gases. 178.345–1 General requirements.
178.345–2 Material and material thickness.
Subpart I [Reserved] 178.345–3 Structural integrity.
178.345–4 Joints.
Subpart J—Specifications for Containers for 178.345–5 Manhole assemblies.
Motor Vehicle Transportation 178.345–6 Supports and anchoring.
178.345–7 Circumferential reinforcements.
178.318 Specification MC 201; container for 178.345–8 Accident damage protection.
detonators and percussion caps. 178.345–9 Pumps, piping, hoses and connec-
178.318–1 Scope. tions.
178.318–2 Container. 178.345–10 Pressure relief.
178.318–3 Marking.
178.345–11 Tank outlets.
178.320 General requirements applicable to
178.345–12 Gauging devices.
all DOT specification cargo tank motor
178.345–13 Pressure and leakage tests.
vehicles.
178.345–14 Marking.
178.337 Specification MC 331; cargo tank
178.345–15 Certification.
motor vehicle primarily for transpor-
178.346 Specification DOT 406; cargo tank
tation of compressed gases as defined in
motor vehicle.
subpart G of part 173 of this subchapter.
178.346–1 General requirements.
178.337–2 Material. 178.346–2 Material and thickness of mate-
178.337–3 Structural integrity. rial.
178.337–4 Joints. 178.346–3 Pressure relief.
178.337–5 Bulkheads, baffles and ring stiff- 178.346–4 Outlets.
eners. 178.346–5 Pressure and leakage tests.
178.337–6 Closure for manhole. 178.347 Specification DOT 407; cargo tank
178.337–7 Overturn protection. motor vehicle.
178.337–8 Openings, inlets and outlets. 178.347–1 General requirements.
178.337–9 Pressure relief devices, piping, 178.347–2 Material and thickness of mate-
valves, hoses, and fittings. rial.
178.337–10 Accident damage protection. 178.347–3 Manhole assemblies.
178.337–11 Emergency discharge control. 178.347–4 Pressure relief.
178.337–12 [Reserved] 178.347–5 Pressure and leakage test.
178.337–13 Supporting and anchoring. 178.348 Specification DOT 412; cargo tank
178.337–14 Gauging devices. motor vehicle.
178.337–15 Pumps and compressors. 178.348–1 General requirements.
178.337–16 Testing. 178.348–2 Material and thickness of mate-
178.337–17 Marking. rial.
178.337–18 Certification. 178.348–3 Pumps, piping, hoses and connec-
178.338 Specification MC–338; insulated tions.
cargo tank motor vehicle. 178.348–4 Pressure relief.
178.338–1 General requirements. 178.348–5 Pressure and leakage test.
178.338–2 Material.
178.338–3 Structural integrity. Subpart K—Specifications for Packagings
178.338–4 Joints. for Class 7 (Radioactive) Materials
178.338–5 Stiffening rings.
178.338–6 Manholes. 178.350 Specification 7A; general packaging,
178.338–7 Openings. Type A.
178.338–8 Pressure relief devices, piping, 178.356 Specification 20PF phenolic-foam in-
valves, and fittings. sulated, metal overpack.
178.338–9 Holding time. 178.356–1 General requirements.
178.338–10 Accident damage protection. 178.356–2 Materials of construction and

178.338–11 Discharge control devices. other requirements.
178.338–12 Shear section. 178.356–3 Tests.
178.338–13 Supporting and anchoring. 178.356–4 Required markings.
178.338–14 Gauging devices. 178.356–5 Typical assembly detail.
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 178
178.358 Specification 21PF fire and shock re- 178.608 Vibration standard.
sistant, phenolic-foam insulated, metal 178.609 Test requirements for packagings for
overpack. infectious substances.
178.358–2 Materials of construction and Subpart N—IBC Performance-Oriented
other requirements. Standards
178.358–3 Modification of Specification
21PF–1 overpacks. 178.700 Purpose, scope and definitions.
178.358–4 Construction of Specification 178.702 IBC codes.
21PF–1B overpacks. 178.703 Marking of IBCs.
178.358–5 Required markings. 178.704 General IBC standards.
178.358–6 Typical assembly detail. 178.705 Standards for metal IBCs.
178.360 Specification 2R; inside containment 178.706 Standards for rigid plastic IBCs.
vessel. 178.707 Standards for composite IBCs.
178.360–1 General requirements. 178.708 Standards for fiberboard IBCs.
178.360–2 Manufacture. 178.709 Standards for wooden IBCs.
178.360–3 Dimensions. 178.710 Standards for flexible intermediate
178.360–4 Closure devices. bulk containers.
Subpart L—Non-bulk Performance- Subpart O—Testing of IBCs

Oriented Packaging Standards 178.800 Purpose and scope.
178.801 General requirements.
178.500 Purpose, scope and definitions.
178.802 Preparation of fiberboard IBCs for
178.502 Identification codes for packagings.
testing.
178.503 Marking of packagings.
178.803 Testing and certification of IBCs.
178.504 Standards for steel drums.
178.810 Drop test.
178.505 Standards for aluminum drums.
178.811 Bottom lift test.
178.506 Standards for metal drums other
178.812 Top lift test.
than steel or aluminum.
178.813 Leakproofness test.
178.507 Standards for plywood drums. 178.814 Hydrostatic pressure test.
178.508 Standards for fiber drums. 178.815 Stacking test.
178.509 Standards for plastic drums and 178.816 Topple test.
jerricans. 178.817 Righting test.
178.510 Standards for wooden barrels. 178.818 Tear test.
178.511 Standards for aluminum and steel 178.819 Vibration test.
jerricans.
178.512 Standards for steel or aluminum Subpart P—Large Packagings Standards
boxes.
178.513 Standards for boxes of natural wood. 178.900 Purpose and scope.
178.514 Standards for plywood boxes. 178.905 Large Packaging identification
178.515 Standards for reconstituted wood codes.
boxes. 178.910 Marking of Large Packagings.
178.516 Standards for fiberboard boxes. 178.915 General Large Packaging standards.
178.517 Standards for plastic boxes. 178.920 Standards for metal Large Pack-
178.518 Standards for woven plastic bags. agings.
178.519 Standards for plastic film bags. 178.925 Standards for rigid plastic Large
178.520 Standards for textile bags. Packagings.
178.521 Standards for paper bags. 178.930 Standards for fiberboard Large
178.522 Standards for composite packagings Packagings.
with inner plastic receptacles. 178.935 Standards for wooden Large Pack-
178.523 Standards for composite packagings agings.
with inner glass, porcelain, or stoneware 178.940 Standards for flexible Large Pack-
receptacles. agings.
Subpart M—Testing of Non-bulk Subpart Q—Testing of Large Packagings

Packagings and Packages
178.950 Purpose and scope.
178.600 Purpose and scope. 178.955 General requirements.
178.601 General requirements. 178.960 Preparation of Large Packagings for
178.602 Preparation of packagings and pack- testing.
ages for testing. 178.965 Drop test.
178.603 Drop test. 178.970 Bottom lift test.
178.975 Top lift test.
178.604 Leakproofness test.

178.605 Hydrostatic pressure test. 178.980 Stacking test.
178.606 Stacking test. 178.985 Vibration test.
178.607 Cooperage test for bung-type wooden APPENDIX A TO PART 178—SPECIFICATIONS FOR
barrels. STEEL
§ 178.1 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
APPENDIX B TO PART 178—ALTERNATIVE (c) Notification. (1) Except as specifi-
LEAKPROOFNESS TEST METHODS cally provided in §§ 178.337–18 and
APPENDIX C TO PART 178—NOMINAL AND MIN- 178.345–10 of this part, the manufac-
IMUM THICKNESSES OF STEEL DRUMS AND
JERRICANS turer or other person certifying com-
APPENDIX D TO PART 178—THERMAL RESIST- pliance with the requirements of this
ANCE TEST part, and each subsequent distributor
APPENDIX E TO PART 178—FLAME PENETRA- of that packaging must:
TION RESISTANCE TEST (i) Notify each person to whom that
AUTHORITY: 49 U.S.C. 5101–5128; 49 CFR 1.53. packaging is transferred—
(A) Of all requirements in this part
§ 178.1 Purpose and scope. not met at the time of transfer, and
This part prescribes the manufac- (B) With information specifying the
turing and testing specifications for type(s) and dimensions of the closures,
packaging and containers used for the including gaskets and any other com-
transportation of hazardous materials ponents needed to ensure that the
in commerce. packaging is capable of successfully
[Amdt. 178–40, 42 FR 2689, Jan. 13, 1977. Redes- passing the applicable performance
ignated by Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52715, Dec. 21, tests. This information must include
1990] any procedures to be followed, includ-
ing closure instructions for inner pack-
§ 178.2 Applicability and responsi- agings and receptacles, to effectively
bility.
assemble and close the packaging for
(a) Applicability. (1) The requirements the purpose of preventing leakage in
of this part apply to packagings manu- transportation. Closure instructions
factured— must provide for a consistent and re-
(i) To a DOT specification, regardless peatable means of closure that is suffi-
of country of manufacture; or cient to ensure the packaging is closed
(ii) To a UN standard, for packagings in the same manner as it was tested.
manufactured within the United For packagings sold or represented as
States. For UN standard packagings being in conformance with the require-
manufactured outside the United ments of this subchapter applicable to
States, see § 173.24(d)(2) of this sub- transportation by aircraft, this infor-
chapter. For UN standard packagings mation must include relevant guidance
for which standards are not prescribed to ensure that the packaging, as pre-
in this part, see § 178.3(b). pared for transportation, will with-
(2) A manufacturer of a packaging
stand the pressure differential require-
subject to the requirements of this part
ments in § 173.27 of this subchapter.
is primarily responsible for compliance
with the requirements of this part. (ii) Retain copies of each written no-
However, any person who performs a tification for the amount of time that
function prescribed in this part shall aligns with the packaging’s periodic
perform that function in accordance retest date, i.e., every 12 months for
with this part. single or composite packagings and
(b) Specification markings. When this every 24 months for combination pack-
part requires that a packaging be agings; and
marked with a DOT specification or UN (iii) Make copies of all written notifi-
standard marking, marking of the cations available for inspection by a
packaging with the appropriate DOT or representative of the Department.
UN markings is the certification that— (2) The notification required in ac-
(1) Except as otherwise provided in cordance with this paragraph (c) may
this section, all requirements of the be in writing or by electronic means,
DOT specification or UN standard, in- including e-mailed transmission or
cluding performance tests, are met; transmission on a CD or similar device.
and If a manufacturer or subsequent dis-
(2) All functions performed by, or on tributor of the packaging utilizes elec-
behalf of, the person whose name or tronic means to make the required no-
symbol appears as part of the marking tifications, the notification must be
conform to requirements specified in specific to the packaging in question
this part. and must be in a form that can be
10
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.3
printed in hard copy by the person re- (3) The markings must be stamped,
ceiving the notification. embossed, burned, printed or otherwise
(d) Except as provided in paragraph marked on the packaging to provide
(c) of this section, a packaging not con- adequate accessibility, permanency,
forming to the applicable specifica- contrast, and legibility so as to be
tions or standards in this part may not readily apparent and understood.
be marked to indicate such conform- (4) Unless otherwise specified, letters
ance. and numerals must be at least 12.0 mm
(e) Definitions. For the purpose of this (0.47 inches) in height except that for
part— packagings of less than or equal to 30 L
Manufacturer means the person whose (7.9 gallons) capacity for liquids or 30
name and address or symbol appears as kg (66 pounds) capacity for solids the
part of the specification markings re- height must be at least 6.0 mm (0.2
quired by this part or, for a packaging inches). For packagings having a ca-
marked with the symbol of an approval pacity of 5 L (1 gallon) or 5 kg (11
agency, the person on whose behalf the pounds) or less, letters and numerals
approval agency certifies the pack- must be of an appropriate size.
aging. (5) For packages with a gross mass of
Specification markings mean the pack- more than 30 kg (66 pounds), the mark-
aging identification markings required ings or a duplicate thereof must appear
by this part including, where applica- on the top or on a side of the pack-
ble, the name and address or symbol of aging.
the packaging manufacturer or ap-
(b) A UN standard packaging for
proval agency.
which the UN standard is set forth in
(f) No packaging may be manufac-
this part may be marked with the
tured or marked to a packaging speci-
United Nations symbol and other speci-
fication that was in effect on Sep-
fication markings only if it fully con-
tember 30, 1991, and that was removed
forms to the requirements of this part.
from this part 178 by a rule published
A UN standard packaging for which the
in the FEDERAL REGISTER on December
21, 1990 and effective October 1, 1991. UN standard is not set forth in this
part may be marked with the United
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52715, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR Nations symbol and other specification
66284, Dec. 20, 1991, as amended by Amdt. No. markings for that standard as provided
178–106, 59 FR 67519, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 178– in the ICAO Technical Instructions or
117, 62 FR 14338, Mar. 26, 1997; 68 FR 45041,
July 31, 2003; 69 FR 34612, June 22, 2004; 75 FR
the IMDG Code subject to the following
5395, Feb. 2, 2010; 75 FR 60339, Sept. 30, 2010] conditions:
(1) The U.S. manufacturer must es-
§ 178.3 Marking of packagings. tablish that the packaging conforms to
(a) Each packaging represented as the applicable provisions of the ICAO
manufactured to a DOT specification Technical Instructions (IBR, see § 171.7
or a UN standard must be marked on a of this subchapter) or the IMDG Code
non-removable component of the pack- (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), re-
aging with specification markings con- spectively.
forming to the applicable specification, (2) If an indication of the name of the
and with the following: manufacturer or other identification of
(1) In an unobstructed area, with let- the packaging as specified by the com-
ters, and numerals identifying the petent authority is required, the name
standards or specification (e.g. UN 1A1, and address or symbol of the manufac-
DOT 4B240ET, etc.). turer or the approval agency certifying
(2) Unless otherwise specified in this compliance with the UN standard must
part, with the name and address or be entered. Symbols, if used, must be
symbol of the packaging manufacturer registered with the Associate Adminis-
or, where specifically authorized, the trator.
symbol of the approval agency certi- (3) The letters ‘‘USA’’ must be used
fying compliance with a UN standard. to indicate the State authorizing the

Symbols, if used, must be registered allocation of the specification marks if
with the Associate Administrator. Du- the packaging is manufactured in the
plicative symbols are not authorized. United States.
11
§ 178.33 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(c) Where a packaging conforms to § 178.33–3 Inspection.

more than one UN standard or DOT (a) By competent inspector.
specification, the packaging may bear (b) [Reserved]
more than one marking, provided the
packaging meets all the requirements § 178.33–4 Duties of inspector.
of each standard or specification.
(a) To inspect material and com-
Where more than one marking appears
pleted containers and witness tests,
on a packaging, each marking must ap-
and to reject defective materials or
pear in its entirety.
containers.
(d) No person may mark or otherwise (b) [Reserved]
certify a packaging or container as
meeting the requirements of a manu- § 178.33–5 Material.
facturing special permit unless that
(a) Uniform quality steel plate such
person is the holder of or a party to
as black plate, electro-tin plate, hot
that special permit, an agent of the dipped tin plate, tern plate or other
holder or party for the purpose of commercially accepted can making
marking or certification, or a third plate; or nonferrous metal of uniform
party tester. drawing quality.
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR (b) Material with seams, cracks, lam-
66284, Dec. 20, 1991, as amended by Amdt. No. inations or other injurious defects not
178–106, 59 FR 67519, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 178– authorized.
113, 61 FR 21102, May 9, 1996; 65 FR 50462, Aug.
18, 2000; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61015, § 178.33–6 Manufacture.
Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003; 70 FR
73166, Dec. 9, 2005]
(a) By appliances and methods that
will assure uniformity of completed
containers; dirt and scale to be re-
Subpart A [Reserved] moved as necessary; no defect accept-
able that is likely to weaken the fin-
Subpart B—Specifications for ished container appreciably; reason-
Inside Containers, and Linings ably smooth and uniform surface finish
required.
SOURCE: 29 FR 18823, Dec. 29, 1964, unless
(b) Seams when used must be as fol-
otherwise noted. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, lows:
Apr. 5, 1967. (1) Circumferential seams: By weld-
ing, swedging, brazing, soldering, or
§ 178.33 Specification 2P; inner non- double seaming.
refillable metal receptacles. (2) Side seams: By welding, brazing,
or soldering.
§ 178.33–1 Compliance. (c) Ends: The ends shall be of pres-
(a) Required in all details. sure design.
(b) [Reserved] [29 FR 18823, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended by
Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig-
§ 178.33–2 Type and size. nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
(a) Single-trip inside containers. § 178.33–7 Wall thickness.
Must be seamless, or with seams, weld-
ed, soldered, brazed, double seamed, or (a) The minimum wall thickness for
swedged. any container shall be 0.007 inch.
(b) The maximum capacity of con- (b) [Reserved]
tainers in this class shall not exceed [Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig-
one liter (61.0 cubic inches). The max- nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
imum inside diameter shall not exceed
3 inches. § 178.33–8 Tests.
[29 FR 18813, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended by
(a) One out of each lot of 25,000 con-
Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- tainers or less, successively produced
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended per day shall be pressure tested to de-
by Amdt. 178–101, 58 FR 50237, Sept. 24, 1993; struction and must not burst below 240
66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] psig gauge pressure. The container
12
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.33a–7
tested shall be complete with end as- § 178.33a–3 Inspection.

sembled.
(a) By competent inspector.
(b) Each such 25,000 containers or
less, successively produced per day, (b) [Reserved]
shall constitute a lot and if the test [Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig-
container shall fail, the lot shall be re- nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
jected or ten additional containers may
be selected at random and subjected to § 178.33a–4 Duties of inspector.
the test under which failure occurred. (a) To inspect material and com-
These containers shall be complete pleted containers and witness tests,
with ends assembled. Should any of the and to reject defective materials or
ten containers thus tested fail, the en- containers.
tire lot must be rejected. All con- (b) [Reserved]
tainers constituting a lot shall be of
like material, size, design construc- [Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig-
tion, finish, and quality. nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- § 178.33a–5 Material.
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, as amended
by 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001] (a) Uniform quality steel plate such
as black plate, electrotin plate, hot
§ 178.33–9 Marking. dipped tinplate, ternplate or other
(a) By means of printing, commercially accepted can making
lithographing, embossing, or stamping, plate; or nonferrous metal of uniform
each container must be marked to drawing quality.
show: (b) Material with seams, cracks, lam-
(1) DOT-2P. inations or other injurious defects not
(2) Name or symbol of person making authorized.
the mark specified in paragraph (a)(1)
[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig-
of this section. Symbol, if used, must nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
be registered with the Associate Ad-
ministrator. § 178.33a–6 Manufacture.
(b) [Reserved]
(a) By appliances and methods that
[Amdt. 178–40, 41 FR 38181, Sept. 9, 1976, as will assure uniformity of completed
amended by Amdt. 178–97, 56 FR 66287, Dec.
containers; dirt and scale to be re-
20, 1991; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
moved as necessary; no defect accept-
§ 178.33a Specification 2Q; inner non- able that is likely to weaken the fin-
refillable metal receptacles. ished container appreciably; reason-
ably smooth and uniform surface finish
§ 178.33a–1 Compliance. required.
(a) Required in all details. (b) Seams when used must be as fol-
(b) [Reserved] lows:
[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig-
(1) Circumferential seams. By weld-
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] ing, swedging, brazing, soldering, or
double seaming.
§ 178.33a–2 Type and size. (2) Side seams. By welding, brazing or
(a) Single-trip inside containers. soldering.
Must be seamless, or with seams weld- (c) Ends. The ends shall be of pres-
ed, soldered, brazed, double seamed, or sure design.
swedged. [Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig-
(b) The maximum capacity of con- nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
tainers in this class shall not exceed 1
L (61.0 cubic inches). The maximum in- § 178.33a–7 Wall thickness.
side diameter shall not exceed 3 inches.
(a) The minimum wall thickness for
[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- any container shall be 0.008 inch.
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended (b) [Reserved]
by Amdt. 178–43, 42 FR 42208, Aug. 22, 1977;
Amdt. 178–101, 58 FR 50237, Sept. 24, 1993; 66 [Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig-
FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001] nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
13
§ 178.33a–8 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
§ 178.33a–8 Tests. § 178.33b–3 Inspection.

(a) One out of each lot of 25,000 con- (a) By competent inspector.
tainers or less, successively produced (b) [Reserved]
per day, shall be pressure tested to de- [74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009]
struction and must not burst below 270
psig gauge pressure. The container § 178.33b–4 Duties of inspector.
tested shall be complete with end as-
(a) To inspect material and com-
sembled.
pleted containers and witness tests,
(b) Each such 25,000 containers or
and to reject defective materials or
less, successively produced per day,
containers.
shall constitute a lot and if the test
(b) [Reserved]
container shall fail, the lot shall be re-
jected or ten additional containers may [74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009]
be selected at random and subjected to
the test under which failure occurred. § 178.33b–5 Material.
These containers shall be complete (a) The receptacles must be con-
with ends assembled. Should any of the structed of polyethylene terephthalate
ten containers thus tested fail, the en- (PET), polyethylene napthalate (PEN),
tire lot must be rejected. All con- polyamide (Nylon) or a blend of PET,
tainers constituting a lot shall be of PEN, ethyl vinyl alcohol (EVOH) and/
like material, size, design, construc- or Nylon.
tion, finish and quality. (b) Material with seams, cracks, lam-
[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- inations or other injurious defects are
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, as amended forbidden.
by 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001] [74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009]
§ 178.33a–9 Marking. § 178.33b–6 Manufacture.
(a) By means of printing, (a) Each container must be manufac-
lithographing, embossing, or stamping, tured by thermoplastic processes that
each container must be marked to will assure uniformity of the com-
show: pleted container. No used material
(1) DOT-2Q. other than production residues or
(2) Name or symbol of person making regrind from the same manufacturing
the mark specified in paragraph (a)(1) process may be used. The packaging
of this section. Symbol, if used, must must be adequately resistant to aging
be registered with the Associate Ad- and to degradation caused either by
ministrator. the substance contained or by ultra-
(b) [Reserved] violet radiation.
[Amdt. 178–40, 41 FR 38181, Sept. 9, 1976, as (b) [Reserved]
[74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009]
20, 1991; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
§ 178.33b–7 Design qualification test.
§ 178.33b Specification 2S; inner non-
refillable plastic receptacles. (a) Drop testing. (1) To ensure that
creep does not affect the ability of the
§ 178.33b–1 Compliance. container to retain the contents, each
(a) Required in all details. new design must be drop tested as fol-
(b) [Reserved] lows: Three groups of twenty-five filled
containers must be dropped from 1.8 m
[74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009]
(5.9 ft) on to a rigid, non-resilient, flat
§ 178.33b–2 Type and size. and horizontal surface. One group must
be conditioned at 38 °C (100 °F) for 26
(a) Single-trip inside containers. weeks, the second group for 100 hours
(b) The maximum capacity of con- at 50 °C (122 °F) and the third group for
tainers in this class shall not exceed 18 hours at 55 °C (131 °F), prior to per-
one liter (61.0 cubic inches). The max- forming the drop test. The closure, or
imum inside diameter shall not exceed sealing component of the container,
3 inches. must not be protected during the test.
[74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009] The orientation of the test container
14
at drop must be statistically random, (b) Inspections and analyses. Chemical

but direct impact on the valve or valve analyses and tests required by this sub-
closure must be avoided. chapter must be made within the
(2) Criteria for passing the drop test: United States, unless otherwise ap-
The containers must not break or leak. proved in writing by the Associate Ad-
(b) Design qualification testing must ministrator, in accordance with sub-
be completed if the design is manufac- part I of part 107 of this chapter. In-
tured with a new mold or if there is spections and verification must be per-
any change in the properties of the ma- formed by—
terial of construction. (1) An independent inspection agency
[75 FR 73, Jan. 4, 2010] approved in writing by the Associate
Administrator, in accordance with sub-
§ 178.33b–8 Production tests. part I of part 107 of this chapter; or
(a) Burst Testing. (1) One out of each (2) For DOT Specifications 3B, 3BN,
lot of 5,000 containers or less, succes- 3E, 4B, 4BA, 4D (water capacity less
sively produced per day must be pres- than 1,100 cubic inches), 4B240ET,
sure tested to destruction and must not 4AA480, 4L, 8, 8AL, 4BW, 39 (marked
burst below 240 psig. The container service pressure 900 p.s.i.g. or lower)
tested must be complete as intended and 4E manufactured in the United
for transportation. States, a competent inspector of the
(2) Each such 5,000 containers or less, manufacturer.
successively produced per day, shall (c) Duties of inspector. The inspector
constitute a lot and if the test con- shall determine that each cylinder
tainer shall fail, the lot shall be re- made is in conformance with the appli-
jected or ten additional containers may cable specification. Except as other-
be selected at random and subjected to wise specified in the applicable speci-
the test under which failure occurred. fication, the inspector shall perform
These containers shall be complete as the following:
intended for transportation. Should (1) Inspect all material and reject
any of the ten containers thus tested any not meeting applicable require-
fail, the entire lot must be rejected. All ments. For cylinders made by the bil-
containers constituting a lot shall be let-piercing process, billets must be in-
of like material, size, design construc- spected and shown to be free from pipe,
tion, finish, and quality. cracks, excessive segregation and other
(b) [Reserved] injurious defects after parting or, when
[74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009, as amended at 75 applicable, after nick and cold break.
FR 74, Jan. 4, 2010] (2) Verify the material of construc-
tion meets the requirements of the ap-
§ 178.33b–9 Marking. plicable specification by—
(a) Each container must be clearly (i) Making a chemical analysis of
and permanently marked to show: each heat of material;
(1) DOT–2S. (ii) Obtaining a certified chemical
(2) Name or symbol of person making analysis from the material manufac-
the mark specified in paragraph (a)(1) turer for each heat of material (a ladle
of this section. Symbol, if used, must analysis is acceptable); or
be registered with the Associate Ad- (iii) If an analysis is not provided for
ministrator. each heat of material by the material
(b) [Reserved] manufacturer, by making a check anal-
[74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009] ysis of a sample from each coil, sheet,
or tube.
Subpart C—Specifications for (3) Verify compliance of cylinders
Cylinders with the applicable specification by—
(i) Verifying identification of mate-
§ 178.35 General requirements for rial is proper;
specification cylinders. (ii) Inspecting the inside of the cyl-

(a) Compliance. Compliance with the inder before closing in ends;
requirements of this subpart is re- (iii) Verifying that the heat treat-
quired in all details. ment is proper;
15
§ 178.35 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(iv) Obtaining samples for all tests (1) Each cylinder must be marked
and check chemical analyses (NOTE: with the following information:
Recommended locations for test speci- (i) The DOT specification marking
mens taken from welded cylinders are must appear first, followed imme-
depicted in Figures 1 through 5 in Ap- diately by the service pressure. For ex-
pendix C to this subpart for the specific ample, DOT-3A1800.
construction design.); (ii) The serial number must be placed
(v) Witnessing all tests; just below or immediately following
(vi) Verify threads by gauge; the DOT specification marking.
(vii) Reporting volumetric capacity (iii) A symbol (letters) must be
placed just below, immediately before
and tare weight (see report form) and
or following the serial number. Other
minimum thickness of wall noted; and
variations in sequence of markings are
(viii) Verifying that each cylinder is
authorized only when necessitated by a
marked in accordance with the applica- lack of space. The symbol and numbers
ble specification. must be those of the manufacturer.
(4) Inspector’s report. Prepare a report The symbol must be registered with
containing, at a minimum, the applica- the Associate Administrator; duplica-
ble information listed in CGA C–11 tions are not authorized.
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). (iv) The inspector’s official mark and
Any additional information or mark- date of test (such as 5–95 for May 1995)
ings that are required by the applicable must be placed near the serial number.
specification must be shown on the test This information must be placed so
report. The signature of the inspector that dates of subsequent tests can be
on the reports certifies that the proc- easily added. An example of the mark-
esses of manufacture and heat treat- ings prescribed in this paragraph (f)(1)
ment of cylinders were observed and is as follows:
found satisfactory. The inspector must
furnish the completed test reports re- DOT-3A1800
1234
quired by this subpart to the maker of
XY
the cylinder and, upon request, to the AB 5–95
purchaser. The test report must be re-
Or;
tained by the inspector for fifteen
years from the original test date of the DOT-3A1800–1234–XY
AB 5–95
cylinder.
Where:
(d) Defects and attachments. Cylinders
must conform to the following: DOT-3A = specification number
1800 = service pressure
(1) A cylinder may not be constructed 1234 = serial number
of material with seams, cracks or lam- XY = symbol of manufacturer
inations, or other injurious defects. AB = inspector’s mark
(2) Metal attachments to cylinders 5–95 = date of test
must have rounded or chamfered cor- (2) Additional required marking must
ners or must be protected in such a be applied to the cylinder as follows:
manner as to prevent the likelihood of (i) The word ‘‘spun’’ or ‘‘plug’’ must
causing puncture or damage to other be placed near the DOT specification
hazardous materials packages. This re- marking when an end closure in the
quirement applies to anything tempo- finished cylinder has been welded by
rarily or permanently attached to the the spinning process, or effected by
cylinder, such as metal skids. plugging.
(e) Safety devices. Pressure relief de- (ii) As prescribed in specification 3HT
vices and protection for valves, safety (§ 178.44) or 3T (§ 178.45), if applicable.
devices, and other connections, if ap- (3) Marking exceptions. A DOT 3E cyl-
plied, must be as required or author- inder is not required to be marked with
ized by the appropriate specification, an inspector’s mark or a serial number.
and as required in § 173.301 of this sub- (4) Unless otherwise specified in the
chapter. applicable specification, the markings

(f) Markings. Markings on a DOT on each cylinder must be stamped
Specification cylinder must conform to plainly and permanently on the shoul-
applicable requirements. der, top head, or neck.
16
(5) The size of each marking must be (iii) To calculate the maximum lon-
at least 0.25 inch or as space permits. gitudinal tensile stress due to hydro-
(6) Other markings are authorized static test pressure, the following for-
provided they are made in low stress mula must be used:
areas other than the side wall and are S = A1 P/A2
not of a size and depth that will create
harmful stress concentrations. Such where:
marks may not conflict with any DOT S = tensile stress—p.s.i.;
required markings. M = bending moment-inch pounds—(wl2)/8;
(g) Manufacturer’s reports. At or be- w = weight per inch of cylinder filled with
fore the time of delivery to the pur- water;
l = length of cylinder-inches;
chaser, the cylinder manufacturer c = radius (D)/(2) of cylinder-inches;
must have all completed certification I = moment of inertia—0.04909 (D4¥d4) inches
documents listed in CGA C–11. The fourth;
manufacturer of the cylinders must re- D = outside diameter-inches;
tain the reports required by this sub- d = inside diameter-inches;
part for 15 years from the original test A1 = internal area in cross section of cyl-
date of the cylinder. inder-square inches;
A2 = area of metal in cross section of cyl-
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as inder-square inches;
amended at 66 FR 45185, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR P=hydrostatic test pressure-psig.
51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003;
76 FR 43531, July 20, 2011] (b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel
of uniform quality must be used. Con-
§ 178.36 Specification 3A and 3AX tent percent may not exceed the fol-
seamless steel cylinders. lowing: Carbon, 0.55; phosphorous, 0.045;
(a) Type size and service pressure. In sulphur, 0.050.
addition to the requirements of § 178.35, (c) Identification of material. Material
cylinders must conform to the fol- must be identified by any suitable
lowing: method, except that plates and billets
(1) A DOT-3A cylinder is a seamless for hot-drawn cylinders must be
steel cylinder with a water capacity marked with the heat number.
(nominal) not over 1,000 pounds and a (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be
service pressure of at least 150 psig. manufactured using equipment and
(2) A DOT–3AX is a seamless steel processes adequate to ensure that each
cylinder with a water capacity not less cylinder produced conforms to the re-
than 1,000 pounds and a service pres- quirements of this subpart. No fissure
sure of at least 500 psig, conforming to or other defect is permitted that is
the following requirements: likely to weaken the finished cylinder
appreciably. A reasonably smooth and
(i) Assuming the cylinder is to be
uniform surface finish is required. If
supported horizontally at its two ends
not originally free from such defects,
only and to be uniformly loaded over
the surface may be machined or other-
its entire length consisting of the
wise treated to eliminate these defects.
weight per unit of length of the
The thickness of the bottoms of cyl-
straight cylindrical portion filled with
inders welded or formed by spinning is,
water and compressed to the specified
under no condition, to be less than two
test pressure; the sum of two times the
times the minimum wall thickness of
maximum tensile stress in the bottom
the cylindrical shell; such bottom
fibers due to bending, plus that in the
thicknesses must be measured within
same fibers (longitudinal stress), due to
an area bounded by a line representing
hydrostatic test may not exceed 80 per-
the points of contact between the cyl-
cent of the minimum yield strength of
inder and floor when the cylinder is in
the steel at such maximum stress. Wall
a vertical position.
thickness must be increased when nec-
(e) Welding or brazing. Welding or
essary to meet the requirement.
brazing for any purpose whatsoever is
(ii) To calculate the maximum longi-
prohibited except as follows:

tudinal tensile stress due to bending,
(1) Welding or brazing is authorized
the following formula must be used:
for the attachment of neckrings and
S=Mc/I footrings which are non-pressure parts
17
§ 178.36 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
and only to the tops and bottoms of pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per-
cylinders having a service pressure of cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
500 psig or less. Cylinders, neckrings, (2) Pressure must be maintained for
and footrings must be made of weldable at least 30 seconds and sufficiently
steel, the carbon content of which may longer to ensure complete expansion.
not exceed 0.25 percent except in the Any internal pressure applied after
case of 4130X steel which may be used heat-treatment and previous to the of-
with proper welding procedures. ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of
(2) As permitted in paragraph (d) of the test pressure. If, due to failure of
this section. the test apparatus the test pressure
(3) Cylinders used solely in anhy- cannot be maintained the test may be
drous ammonia service may have a 1⁄2 repeated at a pressure increased by 10
inch diameter bar welded within their percent or 100 psig, whichever is the
concave bottoms. lower.
(f) Wall thickness. For cylinders with (3) Permanent, volumetric expansion
service pressure less than 900 psig, the may not exceed 10 percent of the total
wall stress may not exceed 24,000 psig. volumetric expansion at test pressure.
A minimum wall thickness of 0.100 inch (4) Each cylinder must be tested to at
is required for any cylinder over 5 least 5⁄3 times service pressure.
inches outside diameter. Wall stress
(j) Flattening test. A flattening test
calculation must be made by using the
must be performed on one cylinder
following formula:
taken at random out of each lot of 200
S = [P(1.3D2+0.4d2)]/(D2¥d2) or less, by placing the cylinder between
Where: wedge shaped knife edges having a 60°
included angle, rounded to 1⁄2-inch ra-
S = wall stress in psi;
P = minimum test pressure prescribed for
dius. The longitudinal axis of the cyl-
water jacket test or 450 psig whichever is inder must be at a 90-degree angle to
the greater; knife edges during the test. For lots of
D = outside diameter in inches; 30 or less, flattening tests are author-
d = inside diameter in inches. ized to be made on a ring at least 8
inches long cut from each cylinder and
(g) Heat treatment. The completed cyl-
subjected to same heat treatment as
inder must be uniformly and properly
the finished cylinder.
heat-treated prior to tests.
(h) Openings in cylinders and connec- (k) Physical test. A physical test must
tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those be conducted to determine yield
openings. Threads are required on open- strength, tensile strength, elongation,
ings. and reduction of area of material as
(1) Threads must be clean cut, even, follows:
without checks, and to gauge. (1) The test is required on 2 speci-
(2) Taper threads, when used, must be mens cut from 1 cylinder taken at ran-
of length not less than as specified for dom out of each lot of 200 or less. For
American Standard taper pipe threads. lots of 30 or less, physical tests are au-
(3) Straight threads having at least 6 thorized to be made on a ring at least
engaged threads are authorized. 8 inches long cut from each cylinder
Straight threads must have a tight fit and subjected to same heat treatment
and calculated shear strength of at as the finished cylinder.
least 10 times the test pressure of the (2) Specimens must conform to the
cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent following:
leakage, are required. (i) Gauge length of 8 inches with a
(i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder width of not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge
must successfully withstand a hydro- length of 2 inches with a width of not
static test, as follows: over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length of at
(1) The test must be by water-jacket, least 24 times thickness with width not
or other suitable methods, operated so over 6 times thickness is authorized
as to obtain accurate data. The pres- when cylinder wall is not over 3⁄16 inch
sure gauge must permit reading to an thick.
accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
gauge must permit reading of total ex- ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
18
may be flattened to within 1 inch of strength. In this instance, the flat-

each end of the reduced section. tening test is not required.
(iii) When size of cylinder does not (2) An elongation at least 20 percent
permit securing straight specimens, for a 2-inch gauge length or 10 percent
the specimens may be taken in any lo- in other cases and a yield strength not
cation or direction and may be over 73 percent of tensile strength. In
straightened or flattened cold, by pres- this instance, the flattening test is re-
sure only, not by blows. When speci- quired, without cracking, to 6 times
mens are so taken and prepared, the in- the wall thickness.
spector’s report must show in connec- (m) Leakage test. All spun cylinders
tion with record of physical tests de- and plugged cylinders must be tested
tailed information in regard to such for leakage by gas or air pressure after
specimens. the bottom has been cleaned and is free
(iv) Heating of a specimen for any from all moisture subject to the fol-
purpose is not authorized. lowing conditions and limitations:
(3) The yield strength in tension (1) Pressure, approximately the same
must be the stress corresponding to a as but no less than service pressure,
permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
must be applied to one side of the fin-
gauge length. The following conditions
ished bottom over an area of at least
apply: 1⁄16 of the total area of the bottom but
(i) The yield strength must be deter-
not less than 3⁄4 inch in diameter, in-
mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or
cluding the closure, for at least 1
the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as
minute, during which time the other
prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7
of this subchapter). side of the bottom exposed to pressure
(ii) In using the ‘‘extension under must be covered with water and closely
load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- examined for indications of leakage.
tension under load’’) corresponding to Except as provided in paragraph (n) of
the stress at which the 0.2-percent per- this section, a cylinder that is leaking
manent strain occurs may be deter- must be rejected.
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- (2) A spun cylinder is one in which an
culating the elastic extension of the end closure in the finished cylinder has
gauge length under appropriate load been welded by the spinning process.
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the (3) A plugged cylinder is one in which
gauge length. Elastic extension cal- a permanent closure in the bottom of a
culations must be based on an elastic finished cylinder has been effected by a
modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of plug.
controversy the entire stress-strain (4) As a safety precaution, if the
diagram must be plotted and the yield manufacturer elects to make this test
strength determined from the 0.2 per- before the hydrostatic test, the manu-
cent offset. facturer should design the test appa-
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- ratus so that the pressure is applied to
urement, the initial strain must be set the smallest area practicable, around
while the specimen is under a stress of the point of closure, and so as to use
12,000 psig and the strain indicator
the smallest possible volume of air or
reading must be set at the calculated
gas.
corresponding strain.
(n) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat-
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing
ment is authorized for rejected cyl-
machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per
minute during yield strength deter- inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders
mination. must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
(l) Acceptable results for physical and ceptable. Repair by welding or spinning
flattening tests. Either of the following is not authorized. Spun cylinders re-
is an acceptable result: jected under the provisions of para-
(1) An elongation at least 40 percent graph (m) of this section may be re-
for a 2-inch gauge length or at least 20 moved from the spun cylinder category
percent in other cases and yield
strength not over 73 percent of tensile
19
§ 178.37 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
by drilling to remove defective mate- (iii) To calculate the maximum lon-

rial, tapping and plugging. gitudinal tensile stress due to hydro-
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
static test pressure, the following for-
amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR mula must be used:
45185, 45386–45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51652, S = A1P/A2
Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003; 73 FR
57006, Oct. 1, 2008] Where:
S = tensile stress-p.s.i.;
§ 178.37 Specification 3AA and 3AAX
seamless steel cylinders. M = bending moment-inch pounds (wl2)/8;
w = weight per inch of cylinder filled with
(a) Type, size and service pressure. In water;
addition to the requirements of § 178.35, l = length of cylinder-inches;
cylinders must conform to the fol- c = radius (D)/(2) of cylinder-inches;
lowing: I = moment of inertia-0.04909 (D4¥d4) inches
(1) A DOT-3AA cylinder is a seamless fourth;
steel cylinder with a water capacity D = outside diameter-inches;
(nominal) of not over 1,000 pounds and d = inside diameter-inches;
a service pressure of at least 150 psig. A1 = internal area in cross section of cyl-
(2) A DOT-3AAX cylinder is a seam- inder-square inches;
less steel cylinder with a water capac- A2 = area of metal in cross section of cyl-
ity of not less than 1,000 pounds and a inder-square inches;
service pressure of at least 500 psig, P = hydrostatic test pressure-psig.
conforming to the following require- (b) Authorized steel. Open-hearth,
ments: basic oxygen, or electric steel of uni-
(i) Assuming the cylinder is to be form quality must be used. A heat of
supported horizontally at its two ends steel made under the specifications in
only and to be uniformly loaded over table 1 of this paragraph (b), check
its entire length consisting of the chemical analysis of which is slightly
weight per unit of length of the out of the specified range, is accept-
straight cylindrical portion filled with able, if satisfactory in all other re-
water and compressed to the specified spects, provided the tolerances shown
test pressure; the sum of two times the in table 2 of this paragraph (b) are not
maximum tensile stress in the bottom exceeded. When a carbon-boron steel is
fibers due to bending, plus that in the used, a hardenability test must be per-
same fibers (longitudinal stress), due to formed on the first and last ingot of
hydrostatic test pressure may not ex- each heat of steel. The results of this
ceed 80 percent of the minimum yield test must be recorded on the Record of
strength of the steel at such maximum Chemical Analysis of Material for Cyl-
stress. Wall thickness must be in- inders required by § 178.35. This hard-
creased when necessary to meet the re- ness test must be made 5⁄16-inch from
quirement. the quenched end of the Jominy quench
(ii) To calculate the maximum ten- bar and the hardness must be at least
sile stress due to bending, the following Rc 33 and no more than Rc 53. The fol-
formula must be used: lowing chemical analyses are author-
S = Mc/I ized:
TABLE 1—AUTHORIZED MATERIALS
4130X (per- NE–8630 (per- Inter- mediate
9115 (percent) 9125 (percent) Carbon-boron
Designation cent) (see Note cent) (see Note manganese
(see Note 1) (see Note 1) (percent)
1) 1) (percent)
Carbon ................... 0.25/0.35 ......... 0.28/0.33 ......... 0.10/0.20 ......... 0.20/0.30 ......... 0.27–0.37 ........ 0.40 max.
Manganese ............ 0.40/0.90 ......... 0.70/0.90 ......... 0.50/0.75 ......... 0.50/0.75 ......... 0.80–1.40 ........ 1.35/1.65.
Phosphorus ........... 0.04 max ......... 0.04 max ......... 0.04 max ......... 0.04 max ......... 0.035 max ....... 0.04 max.
Sulfur ..................... 0.05 max ......... 0.04 max ......... 0.04 max ......... 0.04 max ......... 0.045 max ....... 0.05 max.
Silicon .................... 0.15/0.35 ......... 0.20/0.35 ......... 0.60/0.90 ......... 0.60/0.90 ......... 0.3 max. .......... 0.10/0.30.
Chromium .............. 0.80/1.10 ......... 0.40/0.60 ......... 0.50/0.65 ......... 0.50/0.65.
Molybdenum .......... 0.15/0.25 ......... 0.15/0.25

Zirconium ............... ......................... ......................... 0.05/0.15 ......... 0.05/0.15
Nickel ..................... ......................... 0.40/0.70.
Boron ..................... ......................... ......................... ......................... ......................... 0.0005/0.003.
NOTE 1: This designation may not be restrictive and the commercial steel is limited in analysis as shown in this table.
20
TABLE 2—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES

Tolerance (percent) over
the maximum limit or
Limit or maximum specified under the minimum limit
Element (percent)
Under min- Over max-
imum limit imum limit
Carbon ...................................................... To 0.15 incl .................................................................... 0.02 0.03

Over 0.15 to 0.40 incl .................................................... .03 .04
Manganese ............................................... To 0.60 incl .................................................................... .03 .03
Over 0.60 to 1.15 incl .................................................... 0.04 0.04
Over 1.15 to 2.50 incl .................................................... 0.05 0.05
Phosphorus1 ............................................. All ranges ....................................................................... .................... .01
Sulphur ..................................................... All ranges ....................................................................... .................... .01
Silicon ....................................................... To 0.30 incl .................................................................... .02 .03
Over 0.30 to 1.00 incl .................................................... .05 .05
Nickel ........................................................ To 1.00 incl .................................................................... .03 .03
Chromium ................................................. To 0.90 incl .................................................................... .03 .03
0.90 to 2.90 incl ............................................................. .05 .05
Molybdenum ............................................. To 0.20 incl .................................................................... .01 .01
Over 0.20 to 0.40 ........................................................... .02 .02
Zirconium .................................................. All ranges ....................................................................... .01 .05
1 Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for phosphorus.
(c) Identification of material. Material not exceed 0.25 percent except in the
must be identified by any suitable case of 4130X steel which may be used
method except that plates and billets with proper welding procedure.
for hot-drawn cylinders must be (2) As permitted in paragraph (d) of
marked with the heat number. this section.
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be (f) Wall thickness. The thickness of
manufactured using equipment and each cylinder must conform to the fol-
processes adequate to ensure that each lowing:
cylinder produced conforms to the re-
(1) For cylinders with a service pres-
quirements of this subpart. No fissure
or other defects is permitted that is sure of less than 900 psig, the wall
likely to weaken the finished cylinder stress may not exceed 24,000 psi. A min-
appreciably. A reasonably smooth and imum wall thickness of 0.100 inch is re-
uniform surface finish is required. If quired for any cylinder with an outside
not originally free from such defects, diameter of over 5 inches.
the surface may be machined or other- (2) For cylinders with service pres-
wise treated to eliminate these defects. sure of 900 psig or more the minimum
The thickness of the bottoms of cyl- wall must be such that the wall stress
inders welded or formed by spinning is, at the minimum specified test pressure
under no condition, to be less than two may not exceed 67 percent of the min-
times the minimum wall thickness of imum tensile strength of the steel as
the cylindrical shell; such bottom determined from the physical tests re-
thicknesses must be measured within quired in paragraphs (k) and (l) of this
an area bounded by a line representing section and must be not over 70,000 psi.
the points of contact between the cyl- (3) Calculation must be made by the
inder and floor when the cylinder is in formula:
a vertical position.
(e) Welding or brazing. Welding or S = [P(1.3D2+0.4d2)]/(D2¥d2)
brazing for any purpose whatsoever is Where:
prohibited except as follows:
(1) Welding or brazing is authorized S = wall stress in psi;
for the attachment of neckrings and P = minimum test pressure prescribed for
water jacket test or 450 psig whichever is
footrings which are non-pressure parts,
the greater;
and only to the tops and bottoms of
D = outside diameter in inches;

cylinders having a service pressure of d = inside diameter in inches.
500 psig or less. Cylinders, neckrings,
and footrings must be made of weldable (g) Heat treatment. The completed cyl-
steel, the carbon content of which may inders must be uniformly and properly
21
§ 178.37 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
heat treated prior to tests. Heat treat- for American Standard taper pipe
ment of cylinders of the authorized threads.
analyses must be as follows: (3) Straight threads having at least 6
(1) All cylinders must be quenched by engaged threads are authorized.
oil, or other suitable medium except as Straight threads must have a tight fit
provided in paragraph (g)(5) of this sec- and a calculated shear strength of at
tion. least 10 times the test pressure of the
(2) The steel temperature on quench- cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent
ing must be that recommended for the leakage, are required.
steel analysis, but may not exceed 1750 (i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder
°F. must successfully withstand a hydro-
(3) All steels must be tempered at a static test as follows:
temperature most suitable for that (1) The test must be by water-jacket,
steel. or other suitable method, operated so
(4) The minimum tempering tempera- as to obtain accurate data. The pres-
ture may not be less than 1000 °F ex- sure gauge must permit reading to an
cept as noted in paragraph (g)(6) of this accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion
section. gauge must permit reading of total ex-
(5) Steel 4130X may be normalized at pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per-
a temperature of 1650 °F instead of cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
being quenched and cylinders so nor-
(2) Pressure must be maintained for
malized need not be tempered.
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently
(6) Intermediate manganese steels
longer to ensure complete expansion.
may be tempered at temperatures not
less than 1150 °F., and after heat treat- Any internal pressure applied after
ing each cylinder must be submitted to heat-treatment and previous to the of-
a magnetic test to detect the presence ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of
of quenching cracks. Cracked cylinders the test pressure. If, due to failure of
must be rejected and destroyed. the test apparatus, the test pressure
(7) Except as otherwise provided in cannot be maintained, the test may be
paragraph (g)(6) of this section, all cyl- repeated at a pressure increased by 10
inders, if water quenched or quenched percent or 100 psig, whichever is the
with a liquid producing a cooling rate lower.
in excess of 80 percent of the cooling (3) Permanent volumetric expansion
rate of water, must be inspected by the may not exceed 10 percent of total vol-
magnetic particle, dye penetrant or ul- umetric expansion at test pressure.
trasonic method to detect the presence (4) Each cylinder must be tested to at
of quenching cracks. Any cylinder de- least 5⁄3 times the service pressure.
signed to the requirements for speci- (j) Flattening test. A flattening test
fication 3AA and found to have a must be performed on one cylinder
quenching crack must be rejected and taken at random out of each lot of 200
may not be requalified. Cylinders de- or less, by placing the cylinder between
signed to the requirements for speci- wedge shaped knife edges having a 60°
fication 3AAX and found to have included angle, rounded to 1⁄2-inch ra-
cracks must have cracks removed to dius. The longitudinal axis of the cyl-
sound metal by mechanical means. inder must be at a 90-degree angle to
Such specification 3AAX cylinders will knife edges during the test. For lots of
be acceptable if the repaired area is 30 or less, flattening tests are author-
subsequently examined to assure no de- ized to be made on a ring at least 8
fect, and it is determined that design inches long cut from each cylinder and
thickness requirements are met. subjected to the same heat treatment
(h) Openings in cylinders and connec- as the finished cylinder. Cylinders may
tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those be subjected to a bend test in lieu of
openings. Threads are required on open- the flattening test. Two bend test
ings. specimens must be taken in accordance
(1) Threads must be clean cut, even, with ISO 9809–1 or ASTM E 290 (IBR, see
without checks, and to gauge. § 171.7 of this subchapter), and must be
(2) Taper threads, when used, must be subjected to the bend test specified
of a length not less than as specified therein.
22
(k) Physical test. A physical test must gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
be conducted to determine yield culations must be based on an elastic
strength, tensile strength, elongation, modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of
and reduction of area of material as controversy, the entire stress-strain
follows: diagram must be plotted and the yield
(1) The test is required on 2 speci- strength determined from the 0.2 per-
mens cut from 1 cylinder taken at ran- cent offset.
dom out of each lot of 200 or less. For (iii) For the purpose of strain meas-
lots of 30 or less, physical tests are au- urement, the initial strain must be set
thorized to be made on a ring at least while the specimen is under a stress of
8 inches long cut from each cylinder 12,000 psi, the strain indicator reading
and subjected to the same heat treat- being set at the calculated cor-
ment as the finished cylinder. responding strain.
(2) Specimens must conform to the (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing
following: machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per
(i) Gauge length of 8 inches with a minute during yield strength deter-
width of not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge mination.
length of 2 inches with a width of not (l) Acceptable results for physical, flat-
over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length of at tening and bend tests. An acceptable re-
least 24 times the thickness with width sult for physical and flattening tests is
not over 6 times thickness when the elongation of at least 20 percent for 2
thickness of the cylinder wall is not inches of gauge length or at least 10
over 3⁄16 inch. percent in other cases. Flattening is re-
(ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip quired, without cracking, to 6 times
ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends the wall thickness of the cylinder. An
may be flattened to within 1 inch of acceptable result for the alternative
each end of the reduced section. bend test is no crack when the cylinder
(iii) When size of cylinder does not is bent inward around the mandrel
permit securing straight specimens, until the interior edges are not further
the specimens may be taken in any lo- apart than the diameter of the man-
cation or direction and may be drel.
straightened or flattened cold, by pres- (m) Leakage test. All spun cylinders
sure only, not by blows. When speci- and plugged cylinders must be tested
mens are so taken and prepared, the infor leakage by gas or air pressure after
spector’s report must show in connec- the bottom has been cleaned and is free
tion with record of physical tests de- from all moisture. Pressure, approxi-
tailed information in regard to such mately the same as but no less than
specimens. the service pressure, must be applied to
(iv) Heating of a specimen for any one side of the finished bottom over an
purpose is not authorized. area of at least 1⁄16 of the total area of
(3) The yield strength in tension the bottom but not less than 3⁄4 inch in
must be the stress corresponding to a diameter, including the closure, for at
permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the least one minute, during which time
gauge length. The following conditions the other side of the bottom exposed to
apply: pressure must be covered with water
(i) The yield strength must be deter- and closely examined for indications of
mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or leakage. Except as provided in para-
the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as graph (n) of this section, a cylinder
prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 must be rejected if there is any leak-
of this subchapter). ing.
(ii) In using the ‘‘extension under (1) A spun cylinder is one in which an
load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- end closure in the finished cylinder has
tension under load’’) corresponding to been welded by the spinning process.
the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- (2) A plugged cylinder is one in which
manent strain occurs may be deter- a permanent closure in the bottom of a
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- finished cylinder has been effected by a
culating the elastic extension of the plug.
gauge length under appropriate load (3) As a safety precaution, if the
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the manufacturer elects to make this test
23
§ 178.38 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
before the hydrostatic test, the manu- thicknesses to be measured within an

facturer should design the test appa- area bounded by a line representing the
ratus so that the pressure is applied to points of contact between the cylinder
the smallest area practicable, around and floor when the cylinder is in a
the point of closure, and so as to use vertical position.
the smallest possible volume of air or (e) Welding or brazing. Welding or
gas. brazing for any purpose whatsoever is
(n) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- prohibited except as follows:
ment is authorized for rejected cyl- (1) Welding or brazing is authorized
inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders for the attachment of neckrings and
must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- footrings which are non-pressure parts,
ceptable. Repair by welding or spinning and only to the tops and bottoms of
is not authorized. Spun cylinders re- cylinders having a service pressure of
jected under the provision of paragraph 500 psig or less. Cylinders, neckrings,
(m) of this section may be removed and footrings must be made of weldable
from the spun cylinder category by steel, carbon content of which may not
drilling to remove defective material, exceed 0.25 percent except in the case
tapping and plugging. of 4130X steel which may be used with
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as proper welding procedure.
amended at 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR (2) As permitted in paragraph (d) of
45386–45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, this section.
2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003; 76 FR 43531, (f) Wall thickness. The wall stress may
July 20, 2011] not exceed 24,000 psi. The minimum
wall thickness is 0.090 inch for any cyl-
§ 178.38 Specification 3B seamless
steel cylinders. inder with an outside diameter of 6
inches. Calculation must be made by
(a) Type, size, and service pressure. A the following formula:
DOT 3B cylinder is seamless steel cyl-
inder with a water capacity (nominal) S = [P(1.3D2+0.4d2)]/(D2¥d2)
of not over 1,000 pounds and a service Where:
pressure of at least 150 to not over 500
psig. P = at least two times service pressure or 450
(b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel psig, whichever is the greater;
of uniform quality must be used. Con- D = outside diameter in inches;
tent percent may not exceed the fol- d = inside diameter in inches.
lowing: carbon, 0.55; phosphorus, 0.045;
sulphur, 0.050. (g) Heat treatment. The completed cyl-
(c) Identification of material. Material inders must be uniformly and properly
must be identified by any suitable heat-treated prior to tests.
method except that plates and billets (h) Openings in cylinders and connec-
for hot-drawn cylinders must be tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those
marked with the heat number. openings. Threads, conforming to the
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be following, are required on all openings:
manufactured using equipment and (1) Threads must be clean cut, even,
processes adequate to ensure that each without checks, and to gauge.
cylinder produced conforms to the re- (2) Taper threads when used, must be
quirements of this subpart. No fissure of a length not less than as specified
or other defect is permitted that is for American Standard taper pipe
likely to weaken the finished cylinder threads.
appreciably. A reasonably smooth and (3) Straight threads having at least 4
uniform surface finish is required. If engaged threads are authorized.
not originally free from such defects, Straight threads must have a tight fit,
the surface may be machined or other- and calculated shear strength at least
wise treated to eliminate these defects. 10 times the test pressure of the cyl-
The thickness of the bottoms of cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent
inders welded or formed by spinning is, leakage, are required.

under no condition, to be less than two (i) Hydrostatic test. Cylinders must
times the minimum wall thickness of successfully withstand a hydrostatic
the cylindrical shell; such bottom test, as follows:
24
(1) The test must be by water-jacket, (2) Specimens must conform to the
or other suitable method, operated so following:
as to obtain accurate data. The pres- (i) Gauge length of 8 inches with a
sure gauge must permit reading to an width of not over 11⁄2 inches; or a gauge
accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion length of 2 inches with a width of not
gauge must permit reading of total ex- over 11⁄2 inches; or a gauge length at
pansion to an accuracy either of 1 per- least 24 times the thickness with a
cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. width not over 6 times thickness is au-
(2) Pressure must be maintained for thorized when a cylinder wall is not
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently over 3⁄16 inch thick.
longer to insure complete expansion. (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
Any internal pressure applied after ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
heat-treatment and previous to the of- may be flattened to within one inch of
ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of each end of the reduced section.
the test pressure. If, due to failure of (iii) When size of cylinder does not
the test apparatus, the test pressure permit securing straight specimens,
cannot be maintained, the test may be the specimens may be taken in any lo-
repeated at a pressure increased by 10 cation or direction and may be
percent or 100 psig, whichever is the straightened or flattened cold, by pres-
lower. sure only, not by blows. When speci-
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion mens are so taken and prepared, the in-
may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- spector’s report must show in connec-
umetric expansion at test pressure. tion with record of physical tests de-
(4) Cylinders must be tested as fol- tailed information in regard to such
lows: specimens.
(i) Each cylinder; to at least 2 times (iv) Heating of a specimen for any
service pressure; or purpose is not authorized.
(ii) 1 cylinder out of each lot of 200 or (3) The yield strength in tension
less; to at least 3 times service pres- must be the stress corresponding to a
sure. Others must be examined under permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
pressure of 2 times service pressure and gauge length. The following conditions
show no defect. apply:
(j) Flattening test. A flattening test (i) The yield strength must be deter-
must be performed on one cylinder mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or
taken at random out of each lot of 200 the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as
or less, by placing the cylinder between prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7
wedge shaped knife edges having a 60° of this subchapter).
included angle, rounded to 1⁄2-inch ra- (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under
dius. The longitudinal axis of the cyl- load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex-
inder must be at a 90-degree angle to tension under load’’) corresponding to
knife edges during the test. For lots of the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
30 or less, flattening tests are author- manent strain occurs may be deter-
ized to be made on a ring at least 8 mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
inches long cut from each cylinder and culating the elastic extension of the
subjected to same heat treatment as gauge length under appropriate load
the finished cylinder. and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
(k) Physical test. A physical test must gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
be conducted to determine yield culations must be based on an elastic
strength, tensile strength, elongation, modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of
and reduction of area of material, as controversy, the entire stress-strain
follows: diagram must be plotted and the yield
(1) The test is required on 2 speci- strength determined from the 0.2 per-
mens cut from 1 cylinder taken at ran- cent offset.
dom out of each lot of 200 or less. For (iii) For the purpose of strain meas-
lots of 30 or less, physical tests are au- urement, the initial strain must be set
thorized to be made on a ring at least while the specimen is under a stress of

8 inches long cut from each cylinder 12,000 psi, and the strain indicator
and subjected to same heat treatment reading being set at the calculated cor-
as the finished cylinder. responding strain.
25
§ 178.39 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing is not authorized. Spun cylinders re-
machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per jected under the provisions of para-
minute during yield strength deter- graph (m) of this section may be re-
mination. moved from the spun cylinder category
(l) Acceptable results for physical and by drilling to remove defective mate-
flattening tests. Either of the following rial, tapping and plugging.
is an acceptable result: (o) Marking. Markings may be
(1) An elongation of at least 40 per- stamped into the sidewalls of cylinders
cent for a 2-inch gauge length or at having a service pressure of 150 psig if
least 20 percent in other cases and all of the following conditions are met:
yield strength not over 73 percent of (1) Wall stress at test pressure may
tensile strength. In this instance, the not exceed 24,000 psi.
flattening test is not required. (2) Minimum wall thickness must be
(2) An elongation of at least 20 per- not less than 0.090 inch.
cent for a 2-inch gauge length or 10 per- (3) Depth of stamping must be no
cent in other cases and yield strength greater than 15 percent of the min-
not over 73 percent of tensile strength. imum wall thickness, but may not ex-
Flattening is required, without crack- ceed 0.015 inch.
ing, to 6 times the wall thickness. (4) Maximum outside diameter of cyl-
(m) Leakage test. All spun cylinders inder may not exceed 5 inches.
and plugged cylinders must be tested (5) Carbon content of cylinder may
for leakage by gas or air pressure after not exceed 0.25 percent. If the carbon
the bottom has been cleaned and is free content exceeds 0.25 percent, the com-
from all moisture, subject to the fol- plete cylinder must be normalized after
lowing conditions and limitations: stamping.
(1) Pressure, approximately the same
(6) Stamping must be adjacent to the
as but no less than service pressure,
top head.
must be applied to one side of the fin-
ished bottom over an area of at least [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
1⁄16 of the total area of the bottom but amended by 66 FR 45185, 45386–45388, Aug. 28,
not less than 3⁄4 inch in diameter, in- 2001; 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748,
cluding the closure, for at least one Dec. 31, 2003]
minute, during which time the other
§ 178.39 Specification 3BN seamless
side of the bottom exposed to pressure nickel cylinders.
must be covered with water and closely
examined for indications of leakage. (a) Type, size and service pressure. A
Except as provided in paragraph (n) of DOT 3BN cylinder is a seamless nickel
this section, a cylinder must be re- cylinder with a water capacity (nomi-
jected if there is any leaking. nal) not over 125 pounds water capacity
(2) A spun cylinder is one in which an (nominal) and a service pressure at
end closure in the finished cylinder has least 150 to not over 500 psig.
been welded by the spinning process. (b) Nickel. The percentage of nickel
(3) A plugged cylinder is one in which plus cobalt must be at least 99.0 per-
a permanent closure in the bottom of a cent.
finished cylinder has been effected by a (c) Identification of material. The ma-
plug. terial must be identified by any suit-
(4) As a safety precaution, if the able method except that plates and bil-
manufacturer elects to make this test lets for hot-drawn cylinders must be
before the hydrostatic test, he should marked with the heat number.
design his apparatus so that the pres- (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be
sure is applied to the smallest area manufactured using equipment and
practicable, around the point of clo- processes adequate to ensure that each
sure, and so as to use the smallest pos- cylinder produced conforms to the re-
sible volume of air or gas. quirements of this subpart. No defect is
(n) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- permitted that is likely to weaken the
ment of rejected cylinders is author- finished cylinder appreciably. A rea-

ized. Subsequent thereto, cylinders sonably smooth and uniform surface
must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- finish is required. Cylinders closed in
ceptable. Repair by welding or spinning by spinning process are not authorized.
26
(e) Welding or brazing. Welding or longer to ensure complete expansion.

brazing for any purpose whatsoever is Any internal pressure applied after
prohibited except that welding is au- heat-treatment and previous to the of-
thorized for the attachment of ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of
neckrings and footrings which are non- the test pressure. If, due to failure of
pressure parts, and only to the tops and the test apparatus, the test pressure
bottoms of cylinders. Neckrings and cannot be maintained, the test may be
footrings must be of weldable material, repeated at a pressure increased by 10
the carbon content of which may not percent or 100 psig, whichever is the
exceed 0.25 percent. Nickel welding rod lower.
must be used. (3) Permanent volumetric expansion
(f) Wall thickness. The wall stress may may not exceed 10 percent of total vol-
not exceed 15,000 psi. A minimum wall umetric expansion at test pressure.
thickness of 0.100 inch is required for (4) Each cylinder must be tested to at
any cylinder over 5 inches in outside least 2 times service pressure.
diameter. Wall stress calculation must (j) Flattening test. A flattening test
be made by using the following for- must be performed on one cylinder
mula: taken at random out of each lot of 200
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) or less, by placing the cylinder between
wedge shaped knife edges having a 60°
Where:
included angle, rounded to 1⁄2-inch ra-
dius. The longitudinal axis of the cyl-
water jacket test or 450 psig whichever is inder must be at a 90-degree angle to
the greater; knife edges during the test. For lots of
D = outside diameter in inches; 30 or less, flattening tests are author-
d = inside diameter in inches. ized to be made on a ring at least 8
inches long cut from each cylinder and
(g) Heat treatment. The completed cyl-
subjected to same heat treatment as
inders must be uniformly and properly
the finished cylinder.
heat-treated prior to tests.
(h) Openings in cylinders and connec- (k) Physical test. A physical test must
tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those be conducted to determine yield
openings. Threads conforming to the strength, tensile strength, elongation,
following are required on openings: and reduction of area of material, as
follows:
(1) Threads must be clean cut, even,
without checks, and to gauge. (1) The test is required on 2 speci-
(2) Taper threads, when used, to be of mens cut from 1 cylinder taken at ran-
length not less than as specified for dom out of each lot of 200 or less. For
American Standard taper pipe threads. lots of 30 or less, physical tests are au-
(3) Straight threads having at least 6 thorized to be made on a ring at least
engaged threads are authorized. 8 inches long cut from each cylinder
Straight threads must have a tight fit and subjected to same heat treatment
and a calculated shear strength of at as the finished cylinder.
least 10 times the test pressure of the (2) Specimens must conform to the
cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent following:
leakage, are required. (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a
(i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder width of not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge
must successfully withstand a hydro- length of 2 inches with a width of not
static test, as follows: over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length of at
(1) The test must be by water-jacket, least 24 times the thickness with a
or other suitable method, operated so width not over 6 times thickness is au-
as to obtain accurate data. The pres- thorized when a cylinder wall is not
sure gauge must permit reading to an over 3⁄16 inch thick.
accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
gauge must permit reading of total ex- ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
pansion to an accuracy either of 1 per- may be flattened to within one inch of

cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. each end of the reduced section.
(2) Pressure must be maintained for (iii) When size of cylinder does not
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently permit securing straight specimens,
27
§ 178.42 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
the specimens may be taken in any lo- not over 50 percent of tensile strength.
cation or direction and may be Flattening is required, without crack-
straightened or flattened cold, by pres- ing, to 6 times the wall thickness.
sure only, not by blows. When speci- (m) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat-
mens are so taken and prepared, the in- ment is authorized for rejected cyl-
spector’s report must show in connec- inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders
tion with record of physical tests de- must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
tailed information in regard to such ceptable. Repair by welding is not au-
specimens. thorized.
(iv) Heating of a specimen for any [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
purpose is not authorized. amended by 66 FR 45185, 45386, 45388, Aug. 28,
(3) The yield strength in tension 2001; 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748,
must be the stress corresponding to a Dec. 31, 2003]
gauge length. The following conditions § 178.42 Specification 3E seamless steel
apply: cylinders.
(i) The yield strength must be deter- (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A
mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or DOT 3E cylinder is a seamless steel
the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as cylinder with an outside diameter not
prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 greater than 2 inches nominal, a length
of this subchapter). less than 2 feet and a service pressure
(ii) In using the ‘‘extension under of 1,800 psig.
load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- (b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel
tension under load’’) corresponding to of uniform quality must be used. Con-
the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- tent percent may not exceed the fol-
manent strain occurs may be deter- lowing: Carbon, 0.55; phosphorus, 0.045;
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- sulphur, 0.050.
culating the elastic extension of the (c) Identification of steel. Materials
gauge length under appropriate load must be identified by any suitable
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the method.
gauge length. Elastic extension cal- (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be
culations must be based on an elastic manufactured by best appliances and
modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of methods. No defect is permitted that is
controversy, the entire stress-strain likely to weaken the finished cylinder
diagram must be plotted and the yield appreciably. A reasonably smooth and
strength determined from the 0.2 per- uniform surface finish is required. The
cent offset. thickness of the spun bottom is, under
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- no condition, to be less than two times
urement, the initial strain must be set the minimum wall thickness of the cy-
while the specimen is under a stress of lindrical shell; such bottom thickness
12,000 psi, and the strain indicator must be measured within an area
reading must be set at the calculated bounded by a line representing the
corresponding strain. points of contact between the cylinder
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing and floor when the cylinder is in a
machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per vertical position.
minute during yield strength deter- (e) Openings in cylinders and connec-
mination. tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those
(l) Acceptable results for physical and openings. Threads conforming to the
flattening tests. Either of the following following are required on openings.
is an acceptable result: (1) Threads must be clean cut, even,
(1) An elongation of at least 40 per- without checks, and to gauge.
cent for a 2 inch gauge length or at (2) Taper threads, when used, must be
least 20 percent in other cases and of length not less than as specified for
yield point not over 50 percent of ten- American Standard taper pipe threads.
sile strength. In this instance, the flat- (3) Straight threads having at least 4
tening test is not required. engaged threads are authorized.

(2) An elongation of at least 20 per- Straight threads must have a tight fit
cent for a 2 inch gauge length or 10 per- and a calculated shear strength of at
cent in other cases and a yield point least 10 times the test pressure of the
28
cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent finished cylinder has been effected by a

leakage, are required. plug.
(f) Hydrostatic test. Cylinders must be (4) As a safety precaution, if the
tested as follows: manufacturer elects to make this test
(1) One cylinder out of each lot of 500 before the hydrostatic test, the manu-
or less must be subjected to a hydro- facturer shall design the test apparatus
static pressure of 6,000 psig or higher. so that the pressure is applied to the
(2) The cylinder referred to in para- smallest area practicable, around the
graph (f)(1) of this section must burst point of closure, and so as to use the
at a pressure higher than 6,000 psig smallest possible volume of air or gas.
without fragmenting or otherwise (h) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat-
showing lack of ductility, or must hold ment is authorized for rejected cyl-
a pressure of 12,000 psig for 30 seconds inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders
without bursting. In which case, it must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
must be subjected to a flattening test ceptable. Repair by welding or spinning
is not authorized. Spun cylinders re-
without cracking to six times wall
jected under the provisions of para-
thickness between knife edges, wedge
graph (g) of this section may be re-
shaped 60 degree angle, rounded out to
moved from the spun cylinder category
a 1⁄2 inch radius. The inspector’s report
by drilling to remove defective mate-
must be suitably changed to show re-
rial, tapping and plugging.
sults of latter alternate and flattening
(i) Marking. Markings required by
test.
§ 178.35 must be stamped plainly and
(3) Other cylinders must be examined permanently on the shoulder, top head,
under pressure of at least 3,000 psig and neck or sidewall of each cylinder.
not to exceed 4,500 psig and show no de-
fect. Cylinders tested at a pressure in [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
excess of 3,600 psig must burst at a amended by 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
pressure higher than 7,500 psig when § 178.44 Specification 3HT seamless
tested as specified in paragraph (f)(2) of steel cylinders for aircraft use.
this section. The pressure must be
maintained for at least 30 seconds and (a) Type, size and service pressure. A
sufficiently longer to ensure complete DOT 3HT cylinder is a seamless steel
examination. cylinder with a water capacity (nomi-
nal) of not over 150 pounds and a serv-
(g) Leakage test. All spun cylinders
ice pressure of at least 900 psig.
and plugged cylinders must be tested
(b) Authorized steel. Open hearth or
for leakage by gas or air pressure after
electric furnace steel of uniform qual-
the bottom has been cleaned and is free
ity must be used. A heat of steel made
from all moisture subject to the fol-
under the specifications listed in Table
lowing conditions and limitations:
1 in this paragraph (b), a check chem-
(1) A pressure, approximately the ical analysis that is slightly out of the
same as but not less than the service specified range is acceptable, if satis-
pressure, must be applied to one side of factory in all other respects, provided
the finished bottom over an area of at the tolerances shown in Table 2 in this
least 1⁄16 of the total area of the bottom paragraph (b) are not exceeded. The
but not less than 3⁄4 inch in diameter, maximum grain size shall be 6 or finer.
including the closure, for at least one The grain size must be determined in
minute, during which time the other accordance with ASTM E 112–88 (IBR,
side of the bottom exposed to pressure see § 171.7 of this subchapter). Steel of
must be covered with water and closely the following chemical analysis is au-
examined for indications of leakage. thorized:
Accept as provided in paragraph (h) of
this section, a cylinder must be re- TABLE 1—AUTHORIZED MATERIALS
jected if there is any leakage.
AISI 4130
(2) A spun cylinder is one in which an Designation (percent)
end closure in the finished cylinder has

been welded by the spinning process. Carbon ............................................... 0.28/0.33
Manganese ........................................ 0.40/0.60
(3) A plugged cylinder is one in which Phosphorus ........................................ 0.040 maximum
a permanent closure in the bottom of a Sulfur ................................................. 0.040 maximum
29
§ 178.44 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
TABLE 1—AUTHORIZED MATERIALS—Continued ispherical or ellipsoidal with a ratio of

major-to-minor axis not exceeding two
AISI 4130
Designation (percent) to one and with the concave side to
pressure.
Silicon ................................................ 0.15/0.35
(e) Welding or brazing. Welding or
Chromium .......................................... 0.80/1.10
Molybdenum ...................................... 0.15/0.25 brazing for any purpose whatsoever is
prohibited, except that welding by
spinning is permitted to close the bot-
tom of spun cylinders. Machining or
Tolerance grinding to produce proper surface fin-
(percent) over the ish at point of closure is required.
maximum limit or
under the (f) Wall thickness. (1) Minimum wall
Limit or maximum minimum limit
Element specified (percent) thickness for any cylinder must be
Under Over 0.050 inch. The minimum wall thick-
min- max-
imum imum ness must be such that the wall stress
limit limit at the minimum specified test pressure
may not exceed 75 percent of the min-
Carbon ........... Over 0.15 to 0.40 incl .03 .04
Manganese .... To 0.60 incl ................ .03 .03 imum tensile strength of the steel as
Phosphorus1 .. All ranges .................. .............. .01 determined from the physical tests re-
Sulphur .......... All ranges .................. .............. .01 quired in paragraph (m) of this section
Silicon ............ To 0.30 incl ................ .02 .03
Over 0.30 to 1.00 incl .05 .05
and may not be over 105,000 psi.
Chromium ...... To 0.90 incl ................ .03 .03 (2) Calculations must be made by the
Over 0.90 to 2.10 incl .05 .05 formula:
Molybdenum .. To 0.20 incl ................ .01 .01
Over 0.20 to 0.40 incl .02 .02 S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2)
1 Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for
phosphorus. Where:
S = Wall stress in psi;
(c) Identification of material. Material P = Minimum test pressure prescribed for
must be identified by any suitable water jacket test;
method. Steel stamping of heat identi- D = Outside diameter in inches;
fications may not be made in any area d = Inside diameter in inches.
which will eventually become the side
wall of the cylinder. Depth of stamping (3) Wall thickness of hemispherical
may not encroach upon the minimum bottoms only permitted to 90 percent
prescribed wall thickness of the cyl- of minimum wall thickness of cylinder
inder. sidewall but may not be less than 0.050
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be inch. In all other cases, thickness to be
manufactured using equipment and no less than prescribed minimum wall.
processes adequate to ensure that each (g) Heat treatment. The completed cyl-
cylinder produced conforms to the re- inders must be uniformly and properly
quirements of this subpart. No fissure heated prior to tests. Heat treatment
or other defect is permitted that is of the cylinders of the authorized anal-
likely to weaken the finished container ysis must be as follows:
appreciably. The general surface finish (1) All cylinders must be quenched by
may not exceed a roughness of 250 oil, or other suitable medium.
RMS. Individual irregularities such as (2) The steel temperature on quench-
draw marks, scratches, pits, etc., ing must be that recommended for the
should be held to a minimum con- steel analysis, but may not exceed
sistent with good high stress pressure 1750 °F.
vessel manufacturing practices. If the (3) The steel must be tempered at a
cylinder is not originally free of such temperature most suitable for the par-
defects or does not meet the finish re- ticular steel analysis but not less than
quirements, the surface may be ma- 850 °F.
chined or otherwise treated to elimi- (4) All cylinders must be inspected by
nate these defects. The point of closure the magnetic particle or dye penetrant
of cylinders closed by spinning may not method to detect the presence of

be less than two times the prescribed quenching cracks. Any cylinder found
wall thickness of the cylindrical shell. to have a quenching crack must be re-
The cylinder end contour must be hem- jected and may not be requalified.
30
(h) Openings in cylinders and connec- to be left unattended for periods of

tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those time.
openings. Threads conforming to the (2) Tests prescribed in paragraph
following are required on openings: (j)(1) of this section must be repeated
(1) Threads must be clean cut, even, on one random sample out of each lot
without cracks, and to gauge. of cylinders. The cylinder may then be
(2) Taper threads, when used, must be subjected to a burst test.
of length not less than as specified for (3) A lot is defined as a group of cyl-
National Gas Tapered Thread (NGT) as inders fabricated from the same heat of
required by American Standard Com- steel, manufactured by the same proc-
pressed Gas Cylinder Valve Outlet and ess and heat treated in the same equip-
Inlet Connections. ment under the same conditions of
(3) Straight threads having at least 6 time, temperature, and atmosphere,
engaged threads are authorized. and may not exceed a quantity of 200
Straight threads must have a tight fit cylinders.
and a calculated shear stress of at least (4) All cylinders used in cycling tests
10 times the test pressure of the cyl- must be destroyed.
inder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent (k) Burst test. One cylinder taken at
leakage, are required. random out of each lot of cylinders
(i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder must be hydrostatically tested to de-
must withstand a hydrostatic test, as struction.
follows: (l) Flattening test. A flattening test
(1) The test must be by water-jacket, must be performed on one cylinder
or other suitable method, operated so taken at random out of each lot of 200
as to obtain accurate data. Pressure or less, by placing the cylinder between
gauge must permit reading to an accu- wedge shaped knife edges having a 60°
racy of 1 percent. The expansion gauge included angle, rounded to 1⁄2-inch ra-
must permit reading of total expansion dius. The longitudinal axis of the cyl-
to an accuracy either of 1 percent of 0.1 inder must be at a 90-degree angle to
cubic centimeter. knife edges during the test. For lots of
(2) Pressure must be maintained for 30 or less, flattening tests are author-
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently ized to be made on a ring at least 8
longer to ensure complete expansion. inches long cut from each cylinder and
Any internal pressure applied after subjected to same heat treatment as
heat treatment and previous to the of- the finished cylinder.
ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of (m) Physical tests. A physical test
the test pressure. If, due to failure of must be conducted to determine yield
the test apparatus, the test pressure strength, tensile strength, elongation,
cannot be maintained, the test may be and reduction of area of material, as
repeated at a pressure increased by 10 follows:
percent or 100 psig, which ever is the (1) Test is required on 2 specimens
lower. cut from 1 cylinder taken at random
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion out of each lot of cylinders.
may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- (2) Specimens must conform to the
umetric expansion at test pressure. following:
(4) Each cylinder must be tested to at (i) A gauge length of at least 24 times
least 5⁄3 times service pressure. the thickness with a width not over six
(j) Cycling tests. Prior to the initial times the thickness. The specimen, ex-
shipment of any specific cylinder de- clusive of grip ends, may not be flat-
sign, cyclic pressurization tests must tened. Grip ends may be flattened to
have been performed on at least three within one inch of each end of the re-
representative samples without failure duced section. When size of cylinder
as follows: does not permit securing straight
(1) Pressurization must be performed specimens, the specimens may be
hydrostatically between approximately taken in any location or direction and
zero psig and the service pressure at a may be straightened or flattened cold
rate not in excess of 10 cycles per by pressure only, not by blows. When
minute. Adequate recording instrumen- specimens are so taken and prepared,
tation must be provided if equipment is the inspector’s report must show in
31
§ 178.44 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
connection with the record of physical must be applied to one side of the fin-
tests detailed information in regard to ished bottom over an area of at least
such specimens. 1⁄16 of the total area of the bottom but
(ii) Heating of a specimen for any not less than 3⁄4 inch in diameter, in-
purpose is not authorized. cluding the closure, for at least one
(3) The yield strength in tension minute, during which time the other
must be the stress corresponding to a side of the bottom exposed to pressure
permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the must be covered with water and closely
gauge length. examined for indications of leakage.
(i) The yield strength must be deter- Except as provided in paragraph (q) of
mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or this section, a cylinder must be re-
the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as jected if there is leakage.
prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 (2) A spun cylinder is one in which an
of this subchapter). end closure in the finished cylinder has
(ii) In using the ‘‘extension under been welded by the spinning process.
load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex-
(3) A plugged cylinder is one in which
tension under load’’) corresponding to
a permanent closure in the bottom of a
the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
finished cylinder has been effected by a
manent strain occurs may be deter-
plug.
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
culating the elastic extension of the (4) As a safety precaution, if the
gauge length under appropriate load manufacturer elects to make this test
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the before the hydrostatic test, the manu-
gauge length. Elastic extension cal- facturer should design the test appa-
culations must be based on an elastic ratus so that the pressure is applied to
modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of the smallest area practicable, around
controversy, the entire stress-strain the point of closure, and so as to use
diagram must be plotted and the yield the smallest possible volume of air or
strength determined from the 0.2 per- gas.
cent offset. (p) Acceptable results of tests. Results
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- of the flattening test, physical tests,
urement, the initial strain must be set burst test, and cycling test must con-
while the specimen is under a stress of form to the following:
12,000 psi, the strain indicator reading (1) Flattening required without
being set at the calculated cor- cracking to ten times the wall thick-
responding strain. ness of the cylinder.
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing (2) Physical tests:
machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per (i) An elongation of at least 6 percent
minute during yield strength deter- for a gauge length of 24 times the wall
mination. thickness.
(n) Magnetic particle inspection. In- (ii) The tensile strength may not ex-
spection must be performed on the in- ceed 165,000 p.s.i.
side of each container before closing
(3) The burst pressure must be at
and externally on each finished con-
least 4⁄3 times the test pressure.
tainer after heat treatment. Evidence
of discontinuities, which in the opinion (4) Cycling-at least 10,000 pressuriza-
of a qualified inspector may appre- tions.
ciably weaken or decrease the dura- (q) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat-
bility of the cylinder, must be cause for ment is authorized for rejected cyl-
rejection. inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders
(o) Leakage test. All spun cylinders must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
and plugged cylinders must be tested ceptable. Repair by welding or spinning
for leakage by dry gas or dry air pres- is not authorized. For each cylinder
sure after the bottom has been cleaned subjected to reheat treatment during
and is free from all moisture, subject original manufacture, sidewall meas-
to the following conditions and limita- urements must be made to verify that
tions: the minimum sidewall thickness meets
(1) Pressure, approximately the same specification requirements after the
as but not less than service pressure, final heat treatment.
32
(r) Marking. (1) Cylinders must be ANALYSIS TOLERANCES—Continued

marked by low stress type steel stamp-
Check Analysis
ing in an area and to a depth which Element Ladle analysis
will insure that the wall thickness Under Over
measured from the root of the stamp- Manganese ................. 0.75 to 1.05 ...... 0.04 0.04
ing to the interior surface is equal to Phosphorus (max) ...... 0.035 ................. ............ 0.01
or greater than the minimum pre- Sulphur (max) ............. 0.04 ................... ............ 0.01
Silicon ......................... 0.15 to 0.35 ...... 0.02 0.03
scribed wall thickness. Stamping must Chromium ................... 0.80 to 1.15 ...... 0.05 0.05
be permanent and legible. Stamping on Molybdenum ............... 0.15 to 0.25 ...... 0.02 0.02
side wall not authorized.
(2) The rejection elastic expansion (1) A heat of steel made under the
(REE), in cubic cm (cc), must be specifications in the table in this para-
marked on the cylinder near the date graph (b), the ladle analysis of which is
of test. The REE for a cylinder is 1.05 slightly out of the specified range, is
times its original elastic expansion. acceptable if satisfactory in all other
(3) Name plates are authorized, pro- aspects. However, the check analysis
vided that they can be permanently tolerances shown in the table in this
and securely attached to the cylinder. paragraph (b) may not be exceeded ex-
Attachment by either brazing or weld- cept as approved by the Department.
ing is not permitted. Attachment by (2) Material with seams, cracks, lam-
soldering is permitted provided steel inations, or other injurious defects is
temperature does not exceed 500 °F. not permitted.
(s) Inspector’s report. In addition to (3) Material used must be identified
the requirements of § 178.35, the inspec- by any suitable method.
tor’s report must indicate the rejection (c) Manufacture. General manufac-
elastic expansion (REE), in cubic cm turing requirements are as follows:
(cc). (1) Surface finish must be uniform
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as and reasonably smooth.
amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 65 FR (2) Inside surfaces must be clean, dry,
58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45385, Aug. 28, 2001; and free of loose particles.
67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, 75749, (3) No defect of any kind is permitted
Dec. 31, 2003] if it is likely to weaken a finished cyl-
inder.
§ 178.45 Specification 3T seamless steel (4) If the cylinder surface is not origi-
cylinder.
nally free from the defects, the surface
(a) Type, size, and service pressure. A may be machined or otherwise treated
DOT 3T cylinder is a seamless steel to eliminate these defects provided the
cylinder with a minimum water capac- minimum wall thickness is main-
ity of 1,000 pounds and a minimum tained.
service pressure of 1,800 psig. Each cyl- (5) Welding or brazing on a cylinder
inder must have integrally formed is not permitted.
heads concave to pressure at both ends. (d) Wall thickness. The minimum wall
The inside head shape must be hemi- thickness must be such that the wall
spherical, ellipsoidal in which the stress at the minimum specified test
major axis is two times the minor axis, pressure does not exceed 67 percent of
or a dished shape falling within these the minimum tensile strength of the
two limits. Permanent closures formed steel as determined by the physical
by spinning are prohibited. tests required in paragraphs (j) and (k)
(b) Material, steel. Only open hearth, of this section. A wall stress of more
basic oxygen, or electric furnace proc- than 90,500 p.s.i. is not permitted. The
ess steel of uniform quality is author- minimum wall thickness for any cyl-
ized. The steel analysis must conform inder may not be less than 0.225 inch.
to the following: (1) Calculation of the stress for cyl-
inders must be made by the following
ANALYSIS TOLERANCES formula:
Check Analysis S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2)

Element Ladle analysis
Under Over
Where:
Carbon ........................ 0.35 to 0.50 ...... 0.03 0.04 S = Wall stress in psi;
33
§ 178.45 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
P = Minimum test pressure, at least 5⁄3 serv- (1) Each cylinder must be heated and
ice pressure; held at the proper temperature for at
D = Outside diameter in inches; least one hour per inch of thickness
d = Inside diameter in inches.
based on the maximum thickness of
(2) Each cylinder must meet the fol- the cylinder and then quenched in a
lowing additional requirement which suitable liquid medium having a cool-
assumes a cylinder horizontally sup- ing rate not in excess of 80 percent of
ported at its two ends and uniformly water. The steel temperature on
loaded over its entire length. This load quenching must be that recommended
consists of the weight per inch of for the steel analysis, but it must
length of the straight cylindrical por- never exceed 1750 °F.
tion filled with water compressed to (2) After quenching, each cylinder
the specified test pressure. The wall must be reheated to a temperature
thickness must be increased when nec- below the transformation range but
essary to meet this additional require- not less than 1050 °F., and must be held
ment: at this temperature for at least one
(i) The sum of two times the max- hour per inch of thickness based on the
imum tensile stress in the bottom fi- maximum thickness of the cylinder.
bers due to bending (see paragraph Each cylinder must then be cooled
(d)(2)(ii) of this section), plus the max- under conditions recommended for the
imum tensile stress in the same fibers steel.
due to hydrostatic testing (see para- (f) Openings. Openings in cylinders
graph (d)(2)(iii) of this section) may must comply with the following:
not exceed 80 percent of the minimum (1) Openings are permitted on heads
yield strength of the steel at this max- only.
imum stress. (2) The size of any centered opening
(ii) The following formula must be in a head may not exceed one half the
used to calculate the maximum tensile outside diameter of the cylinder.
stress due to bending: (3) Openings in a head must have lig-
S = Mc / I aments between openings of at least
three times the average of their hole
Where:
diameter. No off-center opening may
S = Tensile stress in psi; exceed 2.625 inches in diameter.
M = Bending moment in inch-pounds (wl2/8);
(4) All openings must be circular.
I = Moment of inertia—0.04909 (D4¥d4) in
inches fourth; (5) All openings must be threaded.
c = Radius (D/2) of cylinder in inches; Threads must be in compliance with
w = Weight per inch of cylinder filled with the following:
water; (i) Each thread must be clean cut,
l = Length of cylinder in inches; even, without any checks, and to
D = Outside diameter in inches; gauge.
d = Inside diameter in inches.
(ii) Taper threads, when used, must
(iii) The following formula must be be the American Standard Pipe thread
used to calculate the maximum longi- (NPT) type and must be in compliance
tudinal tensile stress due to hydro- with the requirements of NBS Hand-
static test pressure: book H–28 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
chapter).
S = A1 P / A2
(iii) Taper threads conforming to Na-
Where: tional Gas Taper thread (NGT) stand-
S = Tensile stress in psi; ards must be in compliance with the
A1 = Internal area in cross section of cyl- requirements of NBS Handbook H–28.
inder in square inches; (iv) Straight threads conforming
P = Hydrostatic test pressure-psig; with National Gas Straight thread
A2 = Area of metal in cross section of cyl- (NGS) standards are authorized. These
inder in square inches. threads must be in compliance with the
(e) Heat treatment. Each completed requirements of NBS Handbook H–28.

cylinder must be uniformly and prop- (g) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder
erly heat treated prior to testing, as must be tested at an internal pressure
follows: by the water jacket method or other
34
suitable method, conforming to the fol- specimens must be tested from one of
lowing requirements: the cylinders or a test ring from each
(1) The testing apparatus must be op- four hours or less of production. How-
erated in a manner that will obtain ac- ever, in no case may a test lot based on
curate data. Any pressure gauge used this production period exceed 200 cyl-
must permit reading to an accuracy of inders.
one percent. Any expansion gauge used (3) Each specimen for the tension and
must permit reading of the total ex- Charpy impact tests must be taken
pansion to an accuracy of one percent. from the side wall of a cylinder or from
(2) Any internal pressure applied to a ring which has been heat treated
the cylinder after heat treatment and with the finished cylinders of which
before the official test may not exceed the specimens must be representative.
90 percent of the test pressure. The axis of the specimens must be par-
(3) The pressure must be maintained allel to the axis of the cylinder. Each
sufficiently long to assure complete ex- cylinder or ring specimen for test must
pansion of the cylinder. In no case may be of the same diameter, thickness, and
the pressure be held less than 30 sec- metal as the finished cylinders they
onds. represent. A test ring must be at least
(4) If, due to failure of the test appa- 24 inches long with ends covered during
ratus, the required test pressure can- the heat treatment process so as to
not be maintained, the test must be re- simulate the heat treatment process of
peated at a pressure increased by 10 the finished cylinders it represents.
percent or 100 psig, whichever is lower (4) A test cylinder or test ring need
or, the cylinder must be reheat treated. represent only one of the heats in a
(5) Permanent volumetric expansion furnace batch provided the other heats
of the cylinder may not exceed 10 per- in the batch have previously been test-
cent of its total volumetric expansion ed and have passed the tests and that
at the required test pressure. such tests do not represent more than
(6) Each cylinder must be tested to at 200 cylinders from any one heat.
least 5⁄3 times its service pressure. (5) The test results must conform to
(h) Ultrasonic examination. After the the requirements specified in para-
hydrostatic test, the cylindrical sec- graphs (j) and (k) of this section.
tion of each vessel must be examined in (6) When the test results do not con-
accordance with ASTM E 213 for shear form to the requirements specified, the
wave and E 114 for straight beam (IBR, cylinders represented by the tests may
Standard see § 171.7 of this subchapter). be reheat treated and the tests re-
The equipment used must be calibrated peated. Paragraph (i)(5) of this section
to detect a notch equal to five percent applies to any retesting.
of the design minimum wall thickness. (j) Basic conditions for acceptable phys-
Any discontinuity indication greater ical testing. The following criteria must
than that produced by the five percent be followed to obtain acceptable phys-
notch must be cause for rejection of ical test results:
the cylinder, unless the discontinuity (1) Each tension specimen must have
is repaired within the requirements of a gauge length of two inches with a
this specification. width not exceeding one and one-half
(i) Basic requirements for tension and inches. Except for the grip ends, the
Charpy impact tests. Cylinders must be specimen may not be flattened. The
subjected to a tension and Charpy im- grip ends may be flattened to within
pact as follows: one inch of each end of the reduced sec-
(1) When the cylinders are heat treat- tion.
ed in a batch furnace, two tension (2) A specimen may not be heated
specimens and three Charpy impact after heat treatment specified in para-
specimens must be tested from one of graph (d) of this section.
the cylinders or a test ring from each (3) The yield strength in tension
batch. The lot size represented by these must be the stress corresponding to a
tests may not exceed 200 cylinders. permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
(2) When the cylinders are heat treat- gage length.
ed in a continuous furnace, two tension (i) This yield strength must be deter-
specimens and three Charpy impact mined by the ‘‘offset’’ method or the
35
§ 178.46 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
‘‘extension under load’’ method de- number obtained may not be more than
scribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 of 165,000 p.s.i. (Rc 36). When the result of
this subchapter). a hardness test exceeds the maximum
(ii) For the ‘‘extension under load’’ permitted, two or more retests may be
method, the total strain (or extension made; however, the hardness number
under load) corresponding to the stress obtained in each retest may not exceed
at which the 0.2 percent permanent the maximum permitted.
strain occurs may be determined with (l) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat-
sufficient accuracy by calculating the ment is authorized for rejected cyl-
elastic extension of the gage length inders. However, each reheat treated
under appropriate load and adding
cylinder must subsequently pass all the
thereto 0.2 percent of the gage length.
prescribed tests. Repair by welding is
Elastic extension calculations must be
based on an elastic modulus of not authorized.
30,000,000. However, when the degree of (m) Markings. Marking must be done
accuracy of this method is question- by stamping into the metal of the cyl-
able the entire stress-strain diagram inder. All markings must be legible and
must be plotted and the yield strength located on a shoulder.
determined from the 0.2 percent offset. (n) Inspector’s report. In addition to
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- the requirements of § 178.35, the inspec-
urement, the initial strain must be set tor’s report for the physical test re-
with the specimen under a stress of port, must indicate the average value
12,000 p.s.i. and the strain indicator for three specimens and the minimum
reading set at the calculated cor- value for one specimen for each lot
responding strain. number.
(iv) The cross-head speed of the test-
ing machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
amended at 66 FR 45385, 43588, Aug. 28, 2001;
minute during the determination of
67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 48571, Aug. 14,
yield strength.
2003; 68 FR 75748, 75749, Dec. 31, 2003]
(4) Each impact specimen must be
Charpy V-notch type size 10 mm × 10 § 178.46 Specification 3AL seamless
mm taken in accordance with para- aluminum cylinders.
graph 11 of ASTM A 333 (IBR, see § 171.7
of this subchapter). When a reduced (a) Size and service pressure. A DOT
size specimen is used, it must be the 3AL cylinder is a seamless aluminum
largest size obtainable. cylinder with a maximum water capac-
(k) Acceptable physical test results. Re- ity of 1000 pounds and minimum service
sults of physical tests must conform to pressure of 150 psig.
the following: (b) Authorized material and identifica-
(1) The tensile strength may not ex- tion of material. The material of con-
ceed 155,000 p.s.i. struction must meet the following con-
(2) The elongation must be at least 16 ditions:
percent for a two-inch gage length. (1) Starting stock must be cast stock
(3) The Charpy V-notch impact prop- or traceable to cast stock.
erties for the three impact specimens (2) Material with seams, cracks, lam-
which must be tested at 0 °F may not inations, or other defects likely to
be less than the values shown as fol- weaken the finished cylinder may not
lows: be used.
Size of specimen Average value Minimum value (3) Material must be identified by a
for acceptance (1 specimen only suitable method that will identify the
(mm) (3 specimens) of the 3)
alloy, the aluminum producer’s cast
10.0×10.0 .............. 25.0 ft. lbs. ........... 20.0 ft. lbs. number, the solution heat treat batch
10.0×7.5 ................ 21.0 ft. lbs. ........... 17.0 ft. lbs.
10.0×5.0 ................ 17.0 ft. lbs. ........... 14.0 ft. lbs. number and the lot number.
(4) The material must be of uniform
(4) After the final heat treatment, quality. Only the following heat treat-
each vessel must be hardness tested on able aluminum alloys in table 1 and 2
the cylindrical section. The tensile are permitted as follows:
strength equivalent of the hardness
36
TABLE 1—HEAT OR CAST ANALYSIS FOR ALUMINUM; SIMILAR TO ‘‘ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION’’1 ALLOY
6061
[CHEMICAL ANALYSIS IN WEIGHT PERCENT2]
Other
Si Mg
Fe Cu Mn Cr Zn Ti Pb Bi
min/ min/ A1
max min/max max min/max max max max max each total
max max max max
0.4/0.8 0.7 0.15/0.4 0.15 0.8/1.2 0.04/0.35 0.25 0.15 0.005 0.005 0.05 0.15 Bal.
1 The‘‘Aluminum Association’’ refers to ‘‘Aluminum Standards and Data 1993’’, published by the Aluminum Association Inc.
2 Except for ‘‘Pb’’ and ‘‘Bi’’, the chemical composition corresponds with that of Table 1 of ASTM B 221 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this
subchapter) for Aluminum Association alloy 6061.
TABLE 2—MECHANICAL PROPERTY LIMITS

Tensile strength—PSI Elongation—percent
Alloy and temper minimum for 2″ or
Ultimate—minimum Yield—minimum 4D 1 size specimen
6061–T6 .................................................................................. 38,000 35,000 214
1 ‘‘D’’
represents specimen diameters. When the cylinder wall is greater than 3⁄16 inch thick, a retest without reheat treatment
using the 4D size specimen is authorized if the test using the 2 inch size specimen fails to meet elongation requirements.
2 When cylinder wall is not over 3⁄16-inch thick, 10 percent elongation is authorized when using a 24t×6t size test specimen.
(5) All starting stock must be 100 per- have a basic torispherical, hemi-
cent ultrasonically inspected, along spherical, or ellipsoidal interior base
the length at right angles to the cen- configuration where the dish radius is
tral axis from two positions at 90° to no greater than 1.2 times the inside di-
one another. The equipment and con- ameter of the shell. The knuckle radius
tinuous scanning procedure must be ca- may not be less than 12 percent of the
pable of detecting and rejecting inter- inside diameter of the shell. The inte-
nal defects such as cracks which have rior base contour may deviate from the
an ultrasonic response greater than true torispherical, hemispherical or el-
that of a calibration block with a 5⁄64- lipsoidal configuration provided that—
inch diameter flat bottomed hole. (i) Any areas of deviation are accom-
(6) Cast stock must have uniform panied by an increase in base thick-
equiaxed grain structure not to exceed ness;
500 microns maximum. (ii) All radii of merging surfaces are
(7) Any starting stock not complying equal to or greater than the knuckle
with the provisions of paragraphs (b)(1) radius;
through (b)(6) of this section must be (iii) Each design has been qualified
rejected. by successfully passing the cycling
(c) Manufacture. Cylinders must be tests in this paragraph (c); and
manufactured in accordance with the (iv) Detailed specifications of the
following requirements: base design are available to the inspec-
(1) Cylinder shells must be manufac- tor.
tured by the backward extrusion meth- (3) For free standing cylinders, the
od and have a cleanliness level ade- base thickness must be at least two
quate to ensure proper inspection. No times the minimum wall thickness
fissure or other defect is acceptable along the line of contact between the
that is likely to weaken the finished cylinder base and the floor when the
cylinder below the design strength re- cylinders are in the vertical position.
quirements. A reasonably smooth and (4) Welding or brazing is prohibited.
uniform surface finish is required. If (5) Each new design and any signifi-
not originally free from such defects, cant change to any acceptable design
the surface may be machined or other- must be qualified for production by
wise conditioned to eliminate these de- testing prototype samples as follows:
fects. (i) Three samples must be subjected
(2) Thickness of the cylinder base to 100,000 pressure reversal cycles be-
may not be less than the prescribed tween zero and service pressure or
minimum wall thickness of the cylin- 10,000 pressure reversal cycles between
drical shell. The cylinder base must zero and test pressure, at a rate not in
37
§ 178.46 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
excess of 10 cycles per minute without times the average of the diameters of
failure. the two openings.
(ii) Three samples must be pressur- (4) All openings must be circular.
ized to destruction and failure may not (5) All openings must be threaded.
occur at less than 2.5 times the marked Threads must comply with the fol-
cylinder service pressure. Each cyl- lowing:
inder must remain in one piece. Fail- (i) Each thread must be clean cut,
ure must initiate in the cylinder side- even, without checks, and to gauge.
wall in a longitudinal direction. Rate (ii) Taper threads, when used, must
of pressurization may not exceed 200 conform to one of the following:
psig per second. (A) American Standard Pipe Thread
(6) In this specification ‘‘significant (NPT) type, conforming to the require-
change’’ means a 10 percent or greater ments of NBS Handbook H–28 (IBR, see
change in cylinder wall thickness, serv- § 171.7 of this subchapter);
ice pressure, or diameter; a 30 percent (B) National Gas Taper Thread (NGT)
or greater change in water capacity or type, conforming to the requirements
base thickness; any change in material; of NBS Handbook H–28; or
over 100 percent increase in size of (C) Other taper threads conforming
openings; or any change in the number to other standards may be used pro-
of openings. vided the length is not less than that
(d) Wall thickness. The minimum wall specified for NPT threads.
thickness must be such that the wall (iii) Straight threads, when used,
stress at the minimum specified test must conform to one of the following:
pressure will not exceed 80 percent of (A) National Gas Straight Thread
the minimum yield strength nor exceed (NGS) type, conforming to the require-
67 percent of the minimum ultimate ments of NBS Handbook H–28;
tensile strength as verified by physical (B) Unified Thread (UN) type, con-
tests in paragraph (i) of this section. forming to the requirements of NBS
The minimum wall thickness for any Handbook H–28;
cylinder with an outside diameter (C) Controlled Radius Root Thread
greater than 5 inches must be 0.125 (UN) type, conforming to the require-
inch. Calculations must be made by the ments of NBS Handbook H–28; or
following formula: (D) Other straight threads con-
forming to other recognized standards
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) may be used provided that the require-
Where: ments in paragraph (e)(5)(iv) of this
S = Wall stress in psi;
section are met.
P = Prescribed minimum test pressure in (iv) All straight threads must have at
psig (see paragraph (g) of this section); least 6 engaged threads, a tight fit, and
D = Outside diameter in inches; and a factor of safety in shear of at least 10
d = Inside diameter in inches. at the test pressure of the cylinder.
Shear stress must be calculated by
(e) Openings. Openings must comply using the appropriate thread shear area
with the following requirements: in accordance with NBS Handbook H–
(1) Openings are permitted in heads 28.
only. (f) Heat treatment. Prior to any test,
(2) The size of any centered opening all cylinders must be subjected to a so-
in a head may not exceed one-half the lution heat treatment and aging treat-
outside diameter of the cylinder. ment appropriate for the aluminum
(3) Other openings are permitted in alloy used.
the head of a cylinder if: (g) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder
(i) Each opening does not exceed 2.625 must be subjected to an internal test
inches in diameter, or one-half the out- pressure using the water jacket equip-
side diameter of the cylinder; which- ment and method or other suitable
ever is less; equipment and method and comply
(ii) Each opening is separated from with the following requirements:

each other by a ligament; and (1) The testing apparatus must be op-
(iii) Each ligament which separates erated in a manner so as to obtain ac-
two openings must be at least three curate data. The pressure gauge used
38
must permit reading to an accuracy of wall thickness is authorized to qualify

one percent. The expansion gauge must lots that fail the flattening test of this
permit reading the total expansion to section without reheat treatment. If
an accuracy of either one percent or 0.1 used, this test must be performed on
cubic centimeter. two samples from one cylinder taken
(2) The test pressure must be main- at random out of each lot of 200 cyl-
tained for a sufficient period of time to inders or less.
assure complete expansion of the cyl- (3) Each test cylinder must withstand
inder. In no case may the pressure be flattening to nine times the wall thick-
held less than 30 seconds. If, due to fail- ness without cracking. When the alter-
ure of the test apparatus, the required nate bend test is used, the test speci-
test pressure cannot be maintained, mens must remain uncracked when
the test may be repeated at a pressure bent inward around a mandrel in the
increased by 10 percent or 100 psig, direction of curvature of the cylinder
whichever is lower. If the test appa- wall until the interior edges are at a
ratus again fails to maintain the test distance apart not greater than the di-
pressure, the cylinder being tested
ameter of the mandrel.
must be rejected. Any internal pressure
applied to the cylinder before any offi- (i) Mechanical properties test. Two test
cial test may not exceed 90 percent of specimens cut from one cylinder rep-
the test pressure. resenting each lot of 200 cylinders or
(3) The minimum test pressure is the less must be subjected to the mechan-
greatest of the following: ical properties test, as follows:
(i) 450 psig regardless of service pres- (1) The results of the test must con-
sure; form to at least the minimum accept-
(ii) Two times the service pressure able mechanical property limits for
for cylinders having service pressure aluminum alloys as specified in para-
less than 500 psig; or graph (b) of this section.
(iii) Five-thirds times the service (2) Specimens must be 4D bar or
pressure for cylinders having a service gauge length 2 inches with width not
pressure of at least 500 psig. over 11⁄2 inch taken in the direction of
(4) Permanent volumetric expansion extrusion approximately 180° from each
may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- other; provided that gauge length at
umetric expansion at test pressure. least 24 times thickness with width not
(h) Flattening test. One cylinder taken over 6 times thickness is authorized,
at random out of each lot must be sub- when cylinder wall is not over 3⁄16 inch
jected to a flattening test as follows: thick. The specimen, exclusive of grip
(1) The test must be between knife ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
edges, wedge shaped, having a 60° in- may be flattened to within one inch of
cluded angle, and rounded in accord- each end of the reduced section. When
ance with the following table. The lon- the size of the cylinder does not permit
gitudinal axis of the cylinder must be securing straight specimens, the speci-
at an angle 90° to the knife edges dur- mens may be taken in any location or
ing the test. The flattening test table direction and may be straightened or
is as follows: flattened cold by pressure only, not by
TABLE 3—FLATTENING TEST TABLE blows. When such specimens are used,
the inspector’s report must show that
Radius the specimens were so taken and pre-
Cylinder wall thickness in inches in
inches pared. Heating of specimens for any
purpose is forbidden.
Under .150 ............................................................... .500
.150 to .249 ............................................................. .875
(3) The yield strength in tension
.250 to .349 ............................................................. 1.500 must be the stress corresponding to a
.350 to .449 ............................................................. 2.125 permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
.450 to .549 ............................................................. 2.750
.550 to .649 ............................................................. 3.500
gauge length.
.650 to .749 ............................................................. 4.125 (i) The yield strength must be deter-
mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or

(2) An alternate bend test in accord- the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as
ance with ASTM E 290 using a mandrel prescribed in ASTM B 557 (IBR, see
diameter not more than 6 times the § 171.7 of this subchapter).
39
§ 178.47 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(ii) In using the ‘‘extension under (3) The inspector must also deter-
load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- mine that each cylinder complies with
tension under load’’) corresponding to this specification by:
the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- (i) Selecting the samples for check
manent strain occurs may be deter- analyses performed by other than the
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- material producer;
culating the elastic extension of the (ii) Verifying that the prescribed
gauge length under appropriate load minimum thickness was met by meas-
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the uring or witnessing the measurement
gauge length. Elastic extension cal- of the wall thickness; and
culations must be based on an elastic (iii) Verifying that the identification
modulus of 10,000,000 psi. In the event of material is proper.
of controversy, the entire stress-strain (4) Prior to initial production of any
diagram must be plotted and the yield design or design change, verify that the
strength determined from the 0.2 per- design qualification tests prescribed in
cent offset. paragraph (c)(6) of this section have
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- been performed with acceptable re-
urement, the initial strain must be set sults.
while the specimen is under a stress of (l) Definitions. (1) In this specifica-
6,000 psi, the strain indicator reading tion, a ‘‘lot’’ means a group of cyl-
being set at the calculated cor- inders successively produced having
responding strain. the same:
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing (i) Size and configuration;
machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per
(ii) Specified material of construc-
minute during yield strength deter-
tion;
mination.
(iii) Process of manufacture and heat
(j) Rejected cylinder. Reheat treat-
treatment;
ment of rejected cylinders is author-
ized one time. Subsequent thereto, cyl- (iv) Equipment of manufacture and
inders must pass all prescribed tests to heat treatment; and
be acceptable. (v) Conditions of time, temperature
(k) Duties of inspector. In addition to and atmosphere during heat treatment.
the requirements of § 178.35, the inspec- (2) In no case may the lot size exceed
tor shall: 200 cylinders, but any cylinder proc-
(1) Verify compliance with the provi- essed for use in the required destruc-
sions of paragraph (b) of this section tive physical testing need not be count-
by: ed as being one of the 200.
(i) Performing or witnessing the per- (m) Inspector’s report. In addition to
formance of the chemical analyses on the information required by § 178.35, the
each melt or cast lot or other unit of record of chemical analyses must also
starting material; or include the alloy designation, and ap-
(ii) Obtaining a certified chemical plicable information on iron, titanium,
analysis from the material or cylinder zinc, magnesium and any other appli-
manufacturer for each melt, or cast of cable element used in the construction
material; or of the cylinder.
(iii) Obtaining a certified check anal- [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
ysis on one cylinder out of each lot of amended at 66 FR 45386–45388, Aug. 28, 2001; 67
200 cylinders or less, if a certificate FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75749, Dec. 31,
containing data to indicate compliance 2003]
with the material specification is ob-
tained. § 178.47 Specification 4DS welded
(2) The inspector shall verify ultra- stainless steel cylinders for aircraft
sonic inspection of all material by in- use.
spection or by obtaining the material (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A
producer’s certificate of ultrasonic in- DOT 4DS cylinder is either a welded
spection. Ultrasonic inspection must be stainless steel sphere (two seamless

performed or verified as having been hemispheres) or circumferentially
performed in accordance with para- welded cylinder both with a water ca-
graph (c) of this section. pacity of not over 100 pounds and a
40
service pressure of at least 500 but not specified range, is acceptable, if satis-
over 900 psig. factory in all other respects, provided
(b) Steel. Types 304, 321 and 347 stain- the tolerances shown in table 2 in this
less steel are authorized with proper paragraph (b) are not exceeded, except
welding procedure. A heat of steel as approved by Associate Adminis-
made under the specifications in table trator. The following chemical anal-
1 in this paragraph (b), check chemical yses are authorized:
analysis of which is slightly out of the
TABLE 1—AUTHORIZED MATERIALS
Stainless steels
304 (percent) 321 (percent) 347 (percent)
Carbon (max) ....................................................... 0.08 0.08 0.08

Manganese (max) ................................................ 2.00 2.00 2.00
Phosphorus (max) ............................................... .030 .030 .030
Sulphur (max) ...................................................... .030 .030 .030
Silicon (max) ........................................................ .75 .75 .75
Nickel ................................................................... 8.0/11.0 9.0/13.0 9.0/13.0
Chromium ............................................................ 18.0/20.0 17.0/20.0 17.0/20.0
Molybdenum
Titanium ............................................................... (1)
Columbium ........................................................... (2)
1 Titaniummay not be more than 5C and not more than 0.60%.
2 Columbium may not be less than 10C and not more than 1.0%.

under the minimum limit
Element Limit or maximum specified (percent)
Carbon ..................................................... To 0.15 incl ...................................................................... 0.01 0.01

Manganese .............................................. Over 1.15 to 2.50 incl ..................................................... 0.05 0.05
Phosphorus1 ............................................ All ranges ........................................................................ .................... .01
Sulphur .................................................... All ranges ........................................................................ .................... .01
Silicon ...................................................... Over 0.30 to 1.00 incl ..................................................... .05 .05
Nickel ....................................................... Over 5.30 to 10.00 incl .................................................... .10 .10
Over 10.00 to 14.00 incl .................................................. .15 .15
Chromium ................................................ Over 15.00 to 20.00 incl .................................................. .20 .20
Titanium ................................................... All ranges ........................................................................ .05 .05
Columbium .............................................. All ranges ........................................................................ .05 .05
1Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for phosphorus.
(c) Identification of material. Materials butt type and means must be provided
must be identified by any suitable for accomplishing complete penetra-
method. tion of the joint.
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be (e) Attachments. Attachments to the
manufactured using equipment and container are authorized by fusion
processes adequate to ensure that each welding provided that such attach-
cylinder produced conforms to the re- ments are made of weldable stainless
quirements of this subpart. No defect is
steel in accordance with paragraph (b)
permitted that is likely to weaken the
of this section.
finished cylinder appreciably, a reason-
ably smooth and uniform surface finish (f) Wall thickness. The minimum wall
is required. No abrupt change in wall thickness must be such that the wall
thickness is permitted. Welding proce- stress at the minimum specified test
dures and operators must be qualified pressure may not be over 60,000 psig. A
in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C–3 minimum wall thickness of 0.040 inch is
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). All required for any diameter container.
seams of the sphere or cylinder must be Calculations must be made by the fol-
fusion welded. Seams must be of the lowing formulas:
41
§ 178.47 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(1) Calculation for sphere must be but not more than 110 percent, of the
made by the formula: test pressure and maintained at this
pressure for a minimum of 3 minutes.
S = PD / 4tE Total and permanent expansion must
Where: be recorded and included in the inspec-
S = Wall stress in psi; tor’s report.
P = Test pressure prescribed for water jacket (j) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder
test, i.e., at least two times service pres- must successfully withstand a hydro-
sure, in psig; static test as follows:
D = Outside diameter in inches; (1) The test must be by water-jacket,
t = Minimum wall thickness in inches;
E = 0.85 (provides 85 percent weld efficiency operated so as to obtain accurate data.
factor which must be applied in the girth The pressure gauge must permit read-
weld area and heat zones which zone must ing to an accuracy of 1 percent. The ex-
extend a distance of 6 times wall thickness pansion gauge must permit reading of
from center of weld); total expansion to an accuracy either
E = 1.0 (for all other areas). of 1 percent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
(2) Calculation for a cylinder must be (2) Pressure must be maintained for
made by the formula: at least 30 seconds and sufficiently
longer to ensure complete expansion.
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) If, due to failure of the test apparatus,
Where: the test pressure cannot be main-
S = Wall stress in psi; tained, the test may be repeated at a
P = Test pressure prescribed for water jacket pressure increased by 10 percent or 100
test, i.e., at least two times service pres- psig, whichever is the lower.
sure, in psig; (3) Permanent volumetric expansion
D = Outside diameter in inches; may not exceed 10 percent of total vol-
d = Inside diameter in inches. umetric expansion at test pressure.
(g) Heat treatment. The seamless (4) Each container must be tested to
hemispheres and cylinders may be at least 2 times service pressure.
stress relieved or annealed for forming. (5) Container must then be inspected.
Welded container must be stress re- Any wall thickness lower than that re-
lieved at a temperature of 775 °F ±25° quired by paragraph (f) of this section
after process treatment and before hy- must be cause for rejection. Bulges and
drostatic test. cracks must be cause for rejection.
(h) Openings in container. Openings Welded joint defects exceeding require-
must comply with the following: ments of paragraph (k) of this section
(1) Each opening in the container must be cause for rejection.
must be provided with a fitting, boss or (k) Radiographic inspection. Radio-
pad of weldable stainless steel securely graphic inspection is required on all
attached to the container by fusion welded joints which are subjected to in-
welding. ternal pressure, except that at the dis-
(2) Attachments to a fitting, boss, or cretion of the disinterested inspector,
pad must be adequate to prevent leak- openings less than 25 percent of the
age. Threads must comply with the fol- container diameter need not be sub-
lowing: jected to radiographic inspection. Evi-
(i) Threads must be clean cut, even, dence of any defects likely to seriously
without checks, and tapped to gauge. weaken the container is cause for re-
(ii) Taper threads to be of length not jection. Radiographic inspection must
less than as specified for American be performed subsequent to the hydro-
Standard taper pipe threads. static test.
(iii) Straight threads having at least (l) Burst test. One container taken at
4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and random out of 200 or less must be
calculated shear strength at least 10 hydrostatically tested to destruction.
times the test pressure of the con- Rupture pressure must be included as
tainer; gaskets required, adequate to part of the inspector’s report.
prevent leakage. (m) Flattening test. A flattening test

(i) Process treatment. Each container must be performed as follows:
must be hydraulically pressurized in a (1) For spheres the test must be at
water jacket to at least 100 percent, the weld between parallel steel plates
42
on a press with welded seam at right (c) Identification of material. Material

angles to the plates. Test one sphere must be identified by any suitable
taken at random out of each lot of 200 method except that plates and billets
or less after the hydrostatic test. Any for hotdrawn cylinders must be marked
projecting appurtenances may be cut with the heat number.
off (by mechanical means only) prior to (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be
crushing. manufactured using equipment and
(2) For cylinders the test must be be- processes adequate to ensure that each
tween knife edges, wedge shaped, 60° cylinder produced conforms to the re-
angle, rounded to 1⁄2-inch radius. Test quirements of this subpart. No defect is
one cylinder taken at random out of permitted that is likely to weaken the
each lot of 200 or less, after the hydro- finished cylinder appreciably. A rea-
static test. sonably smooth and uniform surface
(n) Acceptable results for flattening and finish is required. Exposed bottom
burst tests. Acceptable results for flat- welds on cylinders over 18 inches long
tening and burst tests are as follows: must be protected by footrings. Weld-
(1) Flattening required to 50 percent ing procedures and operators must be
of the original outside diameter with- qualified in accordance with CGA Pam-
out cracking. phlet C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
(2) Burst pressure must be at least 3 chapter). Seams must be made as fol-
times the service pressure. lows:
(o) Rejected containers. Repair of weld- (1) Welded or brazed circumferential
ed seams by welding prior to process seams. Heads attached by brazing must
treatment is authorized. Subsequent have a driving fit with the shell, unless
thereto, containers must be heat treat- the shell is crimped, swedged, or curled
ed and pass all prescribed tests. over the skirt or flange of the head,
(p) Duties of inspector. In addition to and be thoroughly brazed until com-
the requirements of § 178.35, the inspec- plete penetration by the brazing mate-
tor must verify that all tests are con- rial of the brazed joint is secured.
ducted at temperatures between 60 °F Depth of brazing from end of shell must
and 90 °F. be at least four times the thickness of
(q) Marking. Markings must be shell metal.
stamped plainly and permanently on a (2) Longitudinal seams in shells. Longi-
permanent attachment or on a metal tudinal seams must be forged lap weld-
nameplate permanently secured to the ed, by copper brazing, by copper alloy
container by means other than soft sol- brazing, or by silver alloy brazing. Cop-
der. per alloy composition must be: Copper,
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
95 percent minimum; Silicon, 1.5 per-
amended at 66 FR 45386, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001; cent to 3.85 percent; Manganese, 0.25
67 FR 51653, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, percent to 1.10 percent. The melting
2003] point of the silver alloy brazing mate-
rial must be in excess of 1000 °F. When
§ 178.50 Specification 4B welded or brazed, the plate edge must be lapped
brazed steel cylinders. at least eight times the thickness of
(a) Type, size, and service pressure. A plate, laps being held in position, sub-
DOT 4B is a welded or brazed steel cyl- stantially metal to metal, by riveting
inder with longitudinal seams that are or electric spot-welding; brazing must
forged lap-welded or brazed and with be done by using a suitable flux and by
water capacity (nominal) not over 1,000 placing brazing material on one side of
pounds and a service pressure of at seam and applying heat until this ma-
least 150 but not over 500 psig. Cyl- terial shows uniformly along the seam
inders closed in by spinning process are of the other side.
not authorized. (e) Welding or brazing. Only the at-
(b) Steel. Open-hearth, electric or tachment of neckrings, footrings, han-
basic oxygen process steel of uniform dles, bosses, pads, and valve protection
quality must be used. Content percent rings to the tops and bottoms of cyl-
may not exceed the following: Carbon, inders by welding or brazing is author-
0.25; phosphorus, 0.045; sulphur, 0.050. ized. Such attachments and the portion
43
§ 178.50 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
of the container to which they are at- (ii) Taper threads to be of length not
tached must be made of weldable steel, less than as specified for American
the carbon content of which may not Standard taper pipe threads.
exceed 0.25 percent except in the case (iii) Straight threads, having at least
of 4130X steel which may be used with 4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and
proper welding procedure. calculated shear strength at least 10
(f) Wall thickness. The wall thickness times the test pressure of the cylinder;
of the cylinder must comply with the gaskets required, adequate to prevent
following requirements: leakage.
(1) For cylinders with outside diame- (iv) A brass fitting may be brazed to
ters over 6 inches the minimum wall the steel boss or flange on cylinders
thickness must be 0.090 inch. In any used as component parts of hand fire
case, the minimum wall thickness extinguishers.
must be such that calculated wall (2) The closure of a fitting, boss, or
stress at minimum test pressure (para- pad must be adequate to prevent leak-
graph (i)(4) of this section) may not ex- age.
ceed the following values: (i) Hydrostatic test. Cylinders must
(i) 24,000 psi for cylinders without withstand a hydrostatic test as follows:
longitudinal seam. (1) The test must be by water-jacket,
(ii) 22,800 psig for cylinders having or other suitable method, operated so
copper brazed or silver alloy brazed as to obtain accurate data. The pres-
longitudinal seam. sure gauge must permit reading to an
(iii) 18,000 psi for cylinders having accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion
forged lapped welded longitudinal gauge must permit reading of total ex-
seam. pansion to an accuracy either of 1 per-
cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
(2) Calculation must be made by the
formula:
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) longer to ensure complete expansion.
Any internal pressure applied after
Where:
heat-treatment and previous to the of-
S = wall stress in psi; ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of
the test pressure. If, due to failure of
water jacket test or 450 psig whichever is
the greater; the test apparatus, the test pressure
D = outside diameter in inches; cannot be maintained, the test may be
d = inside diameter in inches. repeated at a pressure increased by 10
percent or 100 psig, whichever is the
(g) Heat treatment. Cylinder body and lower.
heads, formed by drawing or pressing, (3) Permanent volumetric expansion
must be uniformly and properly heat may not exceed 10 percent of total vol-
treated prior to tests. umetric expansion at test pressure.
(h) Opening in cylinders. Openings in (4) Cylinders must be tested as fol-
cylinders must conform to the follows:
lowing: (i) At least one cylinder selected at
(1) Each opening in cylinders, except random out of each lot of 200 or less
those for safety devices, must be pro- must be tested as outlined in para-
vided with a fitting, boss, or pad, se- graphs (i)(1), (i)(2), and (i)(3) of this sec-
curely attached to cylinder by brazing tion to at least two times service pres-
or by welding or by threads. Fitting, sure.
boss, or pad must be of steel suitable (ii) All cylinders not tested as out-
for the method of attachment em- lined in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of this sec-
ployed, and which need not be identi- tion must be examined under pressure
fied or verified as to analysis except of at least two times service pressure
that if attachment is by welding, car- and show no defect.
bon content may not exceed 0.25 per- (j) Flattening test. After the hydro-
cent. If threads are used, they must static test, a flattening test must be
comply with the following: performed on one cylinder taken at
(i) Threads must be clean cut, even random out or each lot of 200 or less, by
without checks, and tapped to gauge. placing the cylinder between wedge
44
shaped knife edges having a 60° in- prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7
cluded angle, rounded to 1⁄2-inch radius. of this subchapter).
The longitudinal axis of the cylinder (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under
must be at a 90-degree angle to knife load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex-
edges during the test. For lots of 30 or tension under load’’) corresponding to
less, flattening tests are authorized to the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
be made on a ring at least 8 inches long manent strain occurs may be deter-
cut from each cylinder and subjected to mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
same heat treatment as the finished culating the elastic extension of the
cylinder. gauge length under appropriate load
(k) Physical test. A physical test must and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
be conducted to determine yield gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
strength, tensile strength, elongation, culations must be based on an elastic
and reduction of area of material as modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of
follows: controversy, the entire stress-strain
(1) The test is required on 2 speci- diagram must be plotted and the yield
mens cut from 1 cylinder, or part strength determined from the 0.2 per-
thereof heat-treated as required, taken cent offset.
at random out of each lot of 200 or less. (iii) For the purpose of strain meas-
For lots of 30 or less, physical tests are urement, the initial strain must be set
authorized to be made on a ring at while the specimen is under a stress of
least 8 inches long cut from each cyl- 12,000 psi, and strain indicator reading
inder and subjected to same heat treat- must be set at the calculated cor-
ment as the finished cylinder. responding strain.
(2) Specimens must conform to the (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing
following: machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per
(i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a minute during yield strength deter-
width of not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge mination.
length of 2 inches with a width of not (l) Acceptable results for physical and
over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length at flattening tests. Either of the following
least 24 times the thickness with a is an acceptable result:
width not over 6 times the thickness is (1) An elongation of at least 40 per-
authorized when a cylinder wall is not cent for a 2-inch gauge length or at
over 3⁄16 inch thick. least 20 percent in other cases and
(ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip yield strength not over 73 percent of
ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends tensile strength. In this instance, a
may be flattened to within one inch of flattening test is not required.
each end of the reduced section. (2) When cylinders are constructed of
(iii) When size of cylinder does not lap welded pipe, flattening test is re-
permit securing straight specimens, quired, without cracking, to 6 times
the specimens may be taken in any lo- the wall thickness. In such case, the
cation or direction and may be rings (crop ends) cut from each end of
straightened or flattened cold, by pres- pipe, must be tested with the weld 45°
sure only, not by blows. When speci- or less from the point of greatest
mens are so taken and prepared, the in- stress. If a ring fails, another from the
spector’s report must show in connec- same end of pipe may be tested.
tion with record of physical tests de- (m) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat-
tailed information in regard to such ment is authorized for rejected cyl-
specimens. inder. Subsequent thereto, cylinders
(iv) Heating of a specimen for any must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
purpose is not authorized. ceptable. Repair of brazed seams by
(3) The yield strength in tension brazing and welded seams by welding is
must be the stress corresponding to a authorized.
permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the (n) Markings. Markings must be
gauge length. The following conditions stamped plainly and permanently in
apply: any of the following locations on the

(i) The yield strength must be deter- cylinder:
mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or (1) On shoulders and top heads when
the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as they are not less than 0.087-inch thick.
45
§ 178.51 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(2) On side wall adjacent to top head (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be
for side walls which are not less than manufactured using equipment and
0.090 inch thick. processes adequate to ensure that each
(3) On a cylindrical portion of the cylinder produced conforms to the re-
shell which extends beyond the requirements of this subpart. No defect is
cessed bottom of the cylinder, consti- permitted that is likely to weaken the
tuting an integral and non-pressure finished cylinder appreciably. A rea-
part of the cylinder. sonably smooth and uniform surface
(4) On a metal plate attached to the finish is required. Exposed bottom
top of the cylinder or permanent part welds on cylinders over 18 inches long
thereof; sufficient space must be left on must be protected by footrings.
the plate to provide for stamping at (1) Seams must be made as follows:
least six retest dates; the plate must be (i) Minimum thickness of heads and
at least 1⁄16-inch thick and must be at- bottoms must be not less than 90 per-
tached by welding, or by brazing. The cent of the required thickness of the
brazing rod must melt at a tempera- side wall.
ture of 1100 °F. Welding or brazing (ii) Circumferential seams must be
must be along all the edges of the made by welding or by brazing. Heads
plate. must be attached by brazing and must
(5) On the neck, neckring, valve boss, have a driving fit with the shell, unless
valve protection sleeve, or similar part the shell is crimped, swedged or curled
permanently attached to the top of the over the skirt or flange of the head and
cylinder. must be thoroughly brazed until com-
(6) On the footring permanently at- plete penetration by the brazing mate-
tached to the cylinder, provided the rial of the brazed joint is secured.
water capacity of the cylinder does not Depth of brazing from end of the shell
exceed 25 pounds. must be at least four times the thick-
ness of shell metal.
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as (iii) Longitudinal seams in shells
amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR must be made by copper brazing, cop-
45385, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51653, Aug. 8, per alloy brazing, or by silver alloy
2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003]
brazing. Copper alloy composition
§ 178.51 Specification 4BA welded or must be: Copper 95 percent minimum,
brazed steel cylinders. Silicon 1.5 percent to 3.85 percent, Man-
ganese 0.25 percent to 1.10 percent. The
(a) Type, size, and service pressure. A melting point of the silver alloy braz-
DOT 4BA cylinder is a cylinder, either ing material must be in excess of 1,000
spherical or cylindrical in shape, with °F. The plate edge must be lapped at
a water capacity of 1,000 pounds or less least eight times the thickness of
and a service pressure of at least 225 plate, laps being held in position, sub-
and not over 500 psig. Closures made by stantially metal to metal, by riveting
the spinning process are not author- or by electric spot-welding. Brazing
ized. must be done by using a suitable flux
(1) Spherical type cylinders must be and by placing brazing material on one
made from two seamless hemispheres side of seam and applying heat until
joined by the welding of one circum- this material shows uniformly along
ferential seam. the seam of the other side. Strength of
(2) Cylindrical type cylinders must be longitudinal seam: Copper brazed lon-
of circumferentially welded or brazed gitudinal seam must have strength at
construction. least 3⁄2 times the strength of the steel
(b) Steel. The steel used in the con- wall.
struction of the cylinder must be as (2) Welding procedures and operators
specified in table 1 of appendix A to must be qualified in accordance with
this part. CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of
(c) Identification of material. Material this subchapter).
must be identified by any suitable (e) Welding and brazing. Only the
method except that plates and billets welding or brazing of neckrings,
for hotdrawn cylinders must be marked footrings, handles, bosses, pads, and
with the heat number. valve protection rings to the tops and
46
bottoms of cylinders is authorized. zone must extend a distance of 6 times wall

Provided that such attachments and thickness from center line of weld);
the portion of the container to which E = 1.0 (for all other areas).
they are attached are made of weldable (4) For a cylinder with a wall thick-
steel, the carbon content of which may ness less than 0.100 inch, the ratio of
not exceed 0.25 percent except in the tangential length to outside diameter
case of 4130× steel which may be used may not exceed 4.1.
with proper welding procedure. (g) Heat treatment. Cylinders must be
(f) Wall thickness. The minimum wall heat treated in accordance with the
thickness of the cylinder must meet following requirements:
the following conditions: (1) Each cylinder must be uniformly
(1) For any cylinder with an outside and properly heat treated prior to test
diameter of greater than 6 inches, the by the applicable method shown in
minimum wall thickness is 0.078 inch. table 1 of appendix A to this part. Heat
In any case the minimum wall thick- treatment must be accomplished after
ness must be such that the calculated all forming and welding operations, ex-
wall stress at the minimum test pres- cept that when brazed joints are used,
sure may not exceed the lesser value of heat treatment must follow any form-
any of the following: ing and welding operations, but may be
(i) The value shown in table 1 of ap- done before, during or after the brazing
pendix A to this part, for the particular operations.
material under consideration; (2) Heat treatment is not required
(ii) One-half of the minimum tensile after the welding or brazing of weldable
strength of the material determined as low carbon parts to attachments of
required in paragraph (j) of this sec- similar material which have been pre-
tion; viously welded or brazed to the top or
(iii) 35,000 psi; or bottom of cylinders and properly heat
(iv) Further provided that wall stress treated, provided such subsequent
for cylinders having copper brazed lon- welding or brazing does not produce a
gitudinal seams may not exceed 95 per- temperature in excess of 400 °F in any
cent of any of the above values. Meas- part of the top or bottom material.
ured wall thickness may not include (h) Openings in cylinders. Openings in
galvanizing or other protective coat- cylinders must comply with the fol-
ing. lowing requirements:
(2) Cylinders that are cylindrical in (1) Any opening must be placed on
shape must have the wall stress cal- other than a cylindrical surface.
culated by the formula: (2) Each opening in a spherical type
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) cylinder must be provided with a fit-
ting, boss, or pad of weldable steel se-
Where:
curely attached to the container by fu-
S = wall stress in psi; sion welding.
(3) Each opening in a cylindrical type
water jacket test;
cylinder must be provided with a fit-
d = inside diameter in inches. ting, boss, or pad, securely attached to
container by brazing or by welding.
(3) Cylinders that are spherical in (4) If threads are used, they must
shape must have the wall stress cal- comply with the following:
culated by the formula: (i) Threads must be clean-cut, even,
S = PD / 4tE without checks and tapped to gauge.
(ii) Taper threads must be of a length
Where:
not less than that specified for Amer-
S = wall stress in psi; ican Standard taper pipe threads.
(iii) Straight threads, having at least
water jacket test;
D = outside diameter in inches; 4 engaged threads, must have a tight
t = minimum wall thickness in inches; fit and a calculated shear strength of

E = 0.85 (provides 85 percent weld efficiency at least 10 times the test pressure of
factor which must be applied in the girth the cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to pre-
weld area and heat affected zones which vent leakage, are required.
47
§ 178.51 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length at
must successfully withstand a hydro- least 24 times the thickness with a
static test, as follows: width not over 6 times the thickness is
(1) The test must be by water jacket, authorized when a cylinder wall is not
or other suitable method, operated so over 3⁄16 inch thick.
as to obtain accurate data. A pressure (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
gauge must permit reading to an accu- ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
racy of 1 percent. An expansion gauge may be flattened to within one inch of
must permit reading of total expansion each end of the reduced section.
to an accuracy of either 1 percent or 0.1 (iii) When size of the cylinder does
cubic centimeter. not permit securing straight speci-
(2) Pressure must be maintained for mens, the specimens may be taken in
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently any location or direction and may be
longer to ensure complete expansion. straightened or flattened cold, by pres-
Any internal pressure applied after sure only, not by blows. When speci-
heat treatment and previous to the of- mens are so taken and prepared, the in-
ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of spector’s report must show in connec-
the test pressure. tion with record of physical tests de-
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion tailed information in regard to such
may not exceed 10 percent of the total specimens.
volumetric expansion at test pressure.
(iv) Heating of a specimen for any
(4) Cylinders must be tested as fol-
purpose is not authorized.
lows:
(i) At least one cylinder selected at
random out of each lot of 200 or less must be the stress corresponding to a
must be tested as outlined in para- permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
graphs (i)(1), (i)(2), and (i)(3) of this sec- gauge length. The following conditions
tion to at least two times service pres- apply:
sure. (i) The yield strength must be deter-
(ii) All cylinders not tested as out- mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or
lined in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of this sec- the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as
tion must be examined under pressure prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7
of at least two times service pressure of this subchapter).
and show no defect. (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under
(j) Physical test. A physical test must load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex-
be conducted to determine yield tension under load’’), corresponding to
strength, tensile strength, elongation, the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
and reduction of area of material, as manent strain occurs may be deter-
follows: mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
(1) The test is required on 2 speci- culating the elastic extension of the
mens cut from one cylinder or part gauge length under appropriate load
thereof having passed the hydrostatic and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
test and heat-treated as required, gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
taken at random out of each lot of 200 culations must be based on an elastic
or less. Physical tests for spheres are modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of
required on 2 specimens cut from flat controversy, the entire stress-strain
representative sample plates of the diagram must be plotted and the yield
same heat taken at random from the strength determined from the 0.2 per-
steel used to produce the spheres. This cent offset.
flat steel from which 2 specimens are (iii) For the purpose of strain meas-
to be cut must receive the same heat urement, the initial strain reference
treatment as the spheres themselves. must be set while the specimen is
Sample plates must be taken from each under a stress of 12,000 psi, and the
lot of 200 or less spheres. strain indicator reading must be set at
(2) Specimens must conform to the the calculated corresponding strain.
following: (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing

(i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per
width not over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge minute during yield strength deter-
length of 2 inches with a width not mination.
48
(k) Elongation. Physical test speci- psig, as provided in paragraph (k) of

mens must show at least a 40 percent this section.
elongation for a 2-inch gauge length or (m) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat-
at least 20 percent in other cases. Ex- ment is authorized for rejected cyl-
cept that these elongation percentages inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders
may be reduced numerically by 2 for 2- must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
inch specimens, and by 1 in other cases, ceptable. Repair of brazed seams by
for each 7,500 psi increment of tensile brazing and welded seams by welding is
strength above 50,000 psi to a maximum authorized.
of four such increments. (n) Markings. Markings must be
(l) Tests of welds. Except for brazed stamped plainly and permanently in
seams, welds must be tested as follows: one of the following locations on the
(1) Tensile test. A specimen must be cylinder:
cut from one cylinder of each lot of 200 (1) On shoulders and top heads not
or less, or welded test plate. The weld- less than 0.087 inch thick.
ed test plate must be of one of the (2) On side wall adjacent to top head
heats in the lot of 200 or less which it for side walls not less than 0.090 inch
represents, in the same condition and thick.
(3) On a cylindrical portion of the
approximately the same thickness as
shell which extends beyond the re-
the cylinder wall except that in no case
cessed bottom of the cylinder consti-
must it be of a lesser thickness than
tuting an integral and non-pressure
that required for a quarter size Charpy
part of the cylinder.
impact specimen. The weld must be
(4) On a plate attached to the top of
made by the same procedures and sub-
the cylinder or permanent part thereof;
jected to the same heat treatment as
sufficient space must be left on the
the major weld on the cylinder. The
plate to provide for stamping at least
specimen must be taken from across six retest dates; the plate must be at
the major seam and must be prepared least 1⁄16 inch thick and must be at-
and tested in accordance with and tached by welding, or by brazing at a
must meet the requirements of CGA temperature of at least 1100 °F.,
Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this throughout all edges of the plate.
subchapter). Should this specimen fail (5) On the neck, neckring, valve boss,
to meet the requirements, specimens valve protection sleeve, or similar part
may be taken from two additional cyl- permanently attached to the top of the
inders or welded test plates from the cylinder.
same lot and tested. If either of the lat- (6) On the footring permanently at-
ter specimens fail to meet the require- tached to the cylinder, provided the
ments, the entire lot represented must water capacity of the cylinder does not
be rejected. exceed 25 pounds.
(2) Guided bend test. A root bend test
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
specimen must be cut from the cyl-
amended at 66 FR 4535, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR
inder or welded test plate, used for the 16015, Sept. 27, 2002; 67 FR 51653, Aug. 8, 2002;
tensile test specified in paragraph (l)(1) 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003]
of this section. Specimens must be
taken from across the major seam and § 178.53 Specification 4D welded steel
must be prepared and tested in accord- cylinders for aircraft use.
ance with and must meet the require- (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A
ments of CGA Pamphlet C–3. DOT 4D cylinder is a welded steel
(3) Alternate guided-bend test. This sphere (two seamless hemispheres) or
test may be used and must be as re- circumferentially welded cylinder (two
quired by CGA Pamphlet C–3. The spec- seamless drawn shells) with a water ca-
imen must be bent until the elongation pacity not over 100 pounds and a serv-
at the outer surface, adjacent to the ice pressure of at least 300 but not over
root of the weld, between the lightly 500 psig. Cylinders closed in by spin-
scribed gage lines a to b, must be at ning process are not authorized.

least 20 percent, except that this per- (b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel
centage may be reduced for steels hav- of uniform and weldable quality must
ing a tensile strength in excess of 50,000 be used. Content may not exceed the
49
§ 178.53 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
following: Carbon, 0.25; phosphorus, sociate Administrator. The following

0.045; sulphur, 0.050, except that the fol- chemical analyses are authorized:
lowing steels commercially known as
4130X and Type 304, 316, 321, and 347 TABLE 1—4130X STEEL
stainless steels may be used with prop- 4130X Percent
er welding procedure. A heat of steel
Carbon ........................................................... 0.25/0.35.
made under table 1 in this paragraph Manganese .................................................... 0.40/0.60.
(b), check chemical analysis of which is Phosphorus .................................................... 0.04 max.
slightly out of the specified range, is Sulphur .......................................................... 0.05 max
Silicon ............................................................ 0.15/0.35.
acceptable, if satisfactory in all other Chromium ...................................................... 0.80/1.10.
respects, provided the tolerances shown Molybdenum .................................................. 0.15/0.25.
in table 2 in this paragraph (b) are not Zirconium ....................................................... None.
Nickel ............................................................. None.
exceeded, except as approved by the As-
TABLE 2—AUTHORIZED STAINLESS STEELS
Stainless steels
304 316 321 347

(percent) (percent) (percent) (percent)
Carbon (max) ........................................................................ 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08

Manganese (max) ................................................................. 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
Phosphorus (max) ................................................................. .030 .045 .030 .030
Sulphur (max) ........................................................................ .030 .030 .030 .030
Silicon (max) ......................................................................... .75 1.00 .75 .75
Nickel ..................................................................................... 8.0/11.0 10.0/14.0 9.0/13.0 9.0/13.0
Chromium .............................................................................. 18.0/20.0 16.0/18.0 17.0/20.0 17.0/20.0
Molybdenum .......................................................................... ........................ 2.0/3.0 ........................ ........................
Titanium ................................................................................. ........................ ........................ (1) ........................
Columbium ............................................................................ ........................ ........................ ........................ (2)
1 Titanium may not be less than 5C and not more than 0.60%.
2 Columbium may not be less than 10C and not more than 1.0%.

Limit or maximum specified under the minimum limit
Element (percent)
Carbon ..................................................... To 0.15 incl ...................................................................... 0.01 0.01

Over 0.15 to 0.40 incl ...................................................... .03 .04
Manganese .............................................. To 0.60 incl ...................................................................... .03 .03
Over 1.15 to 2.50 incl ...................................................... .05 .05
Phosphorus 1 ........................................... All ranges ........................................................................ .................... .01
Sulphur .................................................... All ranges ........................................................................ .................... .01
Silicon ...................................................... To 0.30 incl ...................................................................... .02 .03
Over 0.30 to 1.00 incl ...................................................... .05 .05
Nickel ....................................................... Over 5.30 to 10.00 incl .................................................... .10 .10
Over 10.00 to 14.00 incl .................................................. .15 .15
Chromium ................................................ To 0.90 incl ...................................................................... .03 .03
Over 0.90 to 2.10 incl ...................................................... .05 .05
Over 15.00 to 20.00 incl .................................................. .20 .20
Molybdenum ............................................ To 0.20 incl ...................................................................... .01 .01
Over 0.20 to 0.40 incl ...................................................... .02 .02
Over 1.75 to 3.0 incl ........................................................ .10 .10
Titanium ................................................... All ranges ........................................................................ .05 .05
Columbium .............................................. All ranges ........................................................................ .05 .05
(c) Identification of material. Material (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be

must be identified by any suitable manufactured using equipment and

method except that plates and billets processes adequate to ensure that each
for hotdrawn cylinders must be marked cylinder produced conforms to the re-
with the heat number. quirements of this subpart. No defect is
50
permitted that is likely to weaken the threads are used, they must comply
finished container appreciably. A rea- with the following:
sonably smooth and uniform surface (i) Threads must be clean cut, even,
finish is required. Welding procedures without checks, and tapped to gauge.
and operators must be qualified in ac- (ii) Taper threads must be of a length
cordance with CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, not less than that specified for Amer-
see § 171.7 of this subchapter). ican Standard taper pipe threads.
(e) Wall thickness. The wall stress at (iii) Straight threads, having at least
the minimum test pressure may not ex- 4 engaged threads, must have a tight
ceed 24,000 psi, except where steels fit and calculated shear strength of at
commercially known as 4130X, types least 10 times the test pressure of the
304, 316, 321, and 347 stainless steels are container. Gaskets, adequate to pre-
used, stress at the test pressures may vent leakage, are required.
not exceed 37,000 psi. The minimum (2) Closure of a fitting, boss, or pad
wall thickness for any container hav- must be adequate to prevent leakage.
ing a capacity of 1,100 cubic inches or (h) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder
less is 0.04 inch. The minimum wall must successfully withstand a hydro-
thickness for any container having a static test, as follows:
capacity in excess of 1,100 cubic inches (1) The test must be by water-jacket,
is 0.095 inch. Calculations must be done or other suitable method, operated so
by the following: as to obtain accurate data. A pressure
(1) Calculation for a ‘‘sphere’’ must gauge must permit a reading to an ac-
be made by the formula: curacy of 1 percent. An expansion
gauge must permit reading of total ex-
S = PD / 4tE
pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per-
Where: cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
S = wall stress in psi; (2) Pressure must be maintained for
P = test pressure prescribed for water jacket at least 30 seconds and sufficiently
test, i.e., at least two times service pres- longer to ensure complete expansion.
sure, in psig; Any internal pressure applied after
D = outside diameter in inches; heat-treatment and previous to the of-
t = minimum wall thickness in inches;
E = 0.85 (provides 85 percent weld efficiency
ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of
factor which must be applied in the girth the test pressure. If, due to failure of
weld area and heat affected zones which the test apparatus, the test pressure
zone must extend a distance of 6 times wall cannot be maintained, the test may be
thickness from center line of weld); repeated at a pressure increased by 10
E = 1.0 (for all other areas). percent or 100 psig, whichever is the
(2) Calculation for a cylinder must be lower.
made by the formula: (3) Permanent volumetric expansion
may not exceed 10 percent of the total
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ dT12) volumetric expansion at test pressure.
Where: (4) Containers must be tested as fol-
S = wall stress in psi; lows:
P = test pressure prescribed for water jacket (i) Each container to at least 2 times
test, i.e., at least two times service pres- service pressure; or
sure, in psig; (ii) One container out of each lot of
D = outside diameter in inches; 200 or less to at least 3 times service
d = inside diameter in inches. pressure. Others must be examined
(f) Heat treatment. The completed cyl- under pressure of 2 times service pres-
inders must be uniformly and properly sure and show no defects.
heat-treated prior to tests. (i) Flattening test for spheres and cyl-
(g) Openings in container. Openings in inders. Spheres and cylinders must be
cylinders must comply with the fol- subjected to a flattening test as fol-
lowing: lows:
(1) Each opening in the container, ex- (1) One sphere taken at random out
cept those for safety devices, must be of each lot of 200 or less must be sub-
provided with a fitting, boss, or pad, se- jected to a flattening test as follows:
curely attached to the container by (i) The test must be performed after
brazing or by welding or by threads. If the hydrostatic test.
51
§ 178.53 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(ii) The test must be between parallel (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
steel plates on a press with a welded ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
seam at right angles to the plates. Any may be flattened to within 1 inch of
projecting appurtenances may be cut each end of the reduced section. Heat-
off (by mechanical means only) prior to ing of the specimen for any purpose is
crushing. not authorized.
(2) One cylinder taken at random out (5) The yield strength in tension
of each lot of 200 or less must be sub- must be the stress corresponding to a
jected to a flattening test, as follows: permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
(i) The test must be performed after gauge length. The following conditions
the hydrostatic test. apply:
(ii) The test must be between knife (i) The yield strength must be deter-
edges, wedge shaped, 60° angle, rounded mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or
to 1⁄2 inch radius. For lots of 30 or less, the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as
physical tests are authorized to be prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7
made on a ring at least 8 inches long of this subchapter).
cut from each cylinder and subjected to (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under
the same heat treatment as the fin- load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex-
ished cylinder. tension under load’’) corresponding to
(j) Physical test and specimens for the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
spheres and cylinders. Spheres and cyl- manent strain occurs may be deter-
inders must be subjected to a physical mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
test as follows: culating the elastic extension of the
(1) Physical test for spheres are re- gauge length under appropriate load
quired on 2 specimens cut from a flat and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
representative sample plate of the gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
same heat taken at random from the culations must be based on an elastic
steel used to produce the sphere. This modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of
flat steel from which the 2 specimens controversy, the entire stress-strain
are to be cut must receive the same diagram must be plotted and the yield
heat-treatment as the spheres them- strength determined from the 0.2 per-
selves. Sample plates must be taken for cent offset.
each lot of 200 or less spheres. (iii) For the purpose of strain meas-
(2) Specimens for spheres must have urement, the initial strain must be set
a gauge length 2 inches with a width while the specimen is under a stress of
not over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length 12,000 psi and the strain indicator read-
at least 24 times the thickness with a ing being set at the calculated cor-
width not over 6 times the thickness is responding strain.
authorized when a wall is not over 3⁄16 (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing
inch thick. machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per
(3) Physical test for cylinders is re- minute during yield strength deter-
quired on 2 specimens cut from 1 cyl- mination.
inder taken at random out of each lot (k) Acceptable results for physical and
of 200 or less. For lots of 30 or less, flattening tests. Either of the following
physical tests are authorized to be is an acceptable result:
made on a ring at least 8 inches long (1) An elongation of at least 40 per-
cut from each cylinder and subjected to cent for a 2 inch gauge length or at
the same heat treatment as the fin- least 20 percent in other cases and
ished cylinder. yield strength not over 73 percent of
(4) Specimens for cylinders must con- tensile strength. In this instance, the
form to the following: flattening test is not required.
(i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a (2) An elongation of at least 20 per-
width not over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge cent for a 2 inch gauge length or 10 per-
length of 2 inches with a width not cent in other cases. Flattening is re-
over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length at quired to 50 percent of the original out-
least 24 times the thickness with a side diameter without cracking.

width not over 6 times the thickness is (l) Rejected cylinders. Reheat-treat-
authorized when a cylinder wall is not ment is authorized for rejected cyl-
over 3⁄16 inch thick. inders. Subsequent thereto, containers
52
must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- between the cylinder and the floor
ceptable. Repair of welded seams by when the cylinder is in a vertical posi-
welding prior to reheat-treatment is tion. Seams must conform to the fol-
authorized. lowing:
(m) Marking. Marking on each con- (1) Circumferential seams must be by
tainer by stamping plainly and perma- brazing only. Heads must be attached
nently are only authorized where the to shells by the lap brazing method and
metal is at least 0.09 inch thick, or on must overlap not less than four times
a metal nameplate permanently se- the wall thickness. Brazing material
cured to the container by means other must have a melting point of not less
than soft solder, or by means that than 1000 °F. Heads must have a driving
would not reduce the wall thickness. fit with the shell unless the shell is
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as crimped, swedged, or curled over the
amended at 66 FR 45386, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001; skirt or flange of the head and be thor-
67 FR 51653, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, oughly brazed until complete penetra-
2003] tion of the joint by the brazing mate-
rial is secured. Brazed joints may be re-
§ 178.55 Specification 4B240ET welded paired by brazing.
or brazed cylinders. (2) Longitudinal seams in shell must
(a) Type, spinning process, size and be by electric resistance welded joints
service pressure. A DOT 4B240ET cyl- only. No repairs to longitudinal joints
inder is a brazed type cylinder made is permitted.
from electric resistance welded tubing. (3) Welding procedures and operators
The maximum water capacity of this must be qualified in accordance with
cylinder is 12 pounds or 333 cubic CGA C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
inches and the service must be 240 psig. chapter).
The maximum outside diameter of the (e) Welding or brazing. Only the at-
shell must be five inches and maximum tachment, by welding or brazing, to the
length of the shell is 21 inches. Cyl- tops and bottoms of cylinders of
inders closed in by a spinning process neckrings, footrings, handles, bosses,
are authorized. pads, and valve protection rings is au-
(b) Steel. Open-hearth, basic oxygen, thorized. Provided that such attach-
or electric steel of uniform quality ments and the portion of the container
must be used. Plain carbon steel con- to which they are attached are made of
tent may not exceed the following: Car- weldable steel, the carbon content of
bon, 0.25; phosphorus, 0.045; sulfur, which may not exceed 0.25 percent.
0.050. The addition of other elements (f) Wall thickness. The wall stress
for alloying effect is prohibited. must be at least two times the service
(c) Identification of material. Material pressure and may not exceed 18,000 psi.
must be identified by any suitable The minimum wall thickness is 0.044
method. inch. Calculation must be made by the
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be following formula:
manufactured using equipment and
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2)
processes adequate to ensure that each
cylinder produced conforms to the re- Where:
quirements of this subpart. No defect is S = wall stress in psig;
permitted that is likely to weaken the P = 2 times service pressure;
finished cylinder appreciably. A rea- D = outside diameter in inches;
sonably smooth and uniform surface d = inside diameter in inches.
finish is required. Heads may be at- (g) Heat treatment. Heads formed by
tached to shells by lap brazing or may drawing or pressing must be uniformly
be formed integrally. The thickness of and properly heat treated prior to
the bottom of cylinders welded or tests. Cylinders with integral formed
formed by spinning is, under no condi- heads or bases must be subjected to a
tion, to be less than two times the min- normalizing operation. Normalizing
imum wall thickness of the cylindrical and brazing operations may be com-
shell. Such bottom thicknesses must be bined, provided the operation is carried
measured within an area bounded by a out at a temperature in excess of the
line representing the points of contact upper critical temperature of the steel.
53
§ 178.55 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(h) Openings in cylinders. Openings in must be tested as outlined in para-

cylinders must comply with the fol- graphs (i)(1), (i)(2), and (i)(3) of this sec-
lowing: tion to at least two times service pres-
(1) Each opening in cylinders, except sure.
those for safety devices, must be pro- (ii) All cylinders not tested as out-
vided with a fitting, boss, or pad, se- lined in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of this sec-
curely attached to the cylinder by tion must be examined under pressure
brazing or by welding or by threads. A of at least two times service pressure
fitting, boss, or pad must be of steel and show no defect.
suitable for the method of attachment (5) Each 1000 cylinders or less succes-
employed, and which need not be iden- sively produced each day must con-
tified or verified as to analysis, except stitute a lot. One cylinder must be se-
that if attachment is by welding, car- lected from each lot and
bon content may not exceed 0.25 per- hydrostatically tested to destruction.
cent. If threads are used, they must If this cylinder bursts below five times
comply with the following: the service pressure, then two addi-
(i) Threads must be clean cut, even tional cylinders must be selected and
without checks, and tapped to gauge. subjected to this test. If either of these
(ii) Taper threads to be of length not cylinders fails by bursting below five
less than as specified for American times the service pressure then the en-
Standard taper pipe threads. tire lot must be rejected. All cylinders
(iii) Straight threads, having at least constituting a lot must be of identical
4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and size, construction heat-treatment, fin-
calculated shear strength at least 10 ish, and quality.
times the test pressure of the cylinder; (j) Flattening test. Following the hy-
gaskets required, adequate to prevent drostatic test, one cylinder taken at
leakage. random out of each lot of 200 or less,
(2) Closure of a fitting, boss, or pad must be subjected to a flattening test
must be adequate to prevent leakage. that is between knife edges, wedge
(i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder shaped, 60° angle, rounded to 1⁄2 inch ra-
must successfully withstand a hydro- dius.
static test as follows: (k) Physical test. A physical test must
(1) The test must be by water-jacket, be conducted to determine yield
or other suitable method, operated so strength, tensile strength, elongation,
as to obtain accurate data. The pres- and reduction of area of material, as
sure gauge must permit reading to an follows:
accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion (1) The test is required on 2 speci-
gauge must permit reading of total ex- mens cut from 1 cylinder, or part
pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per- thereof heat-treated as required, taken
cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. at random out of each lot of 200 or less
(2) Pressure must be maintained for in the case of cylinders of capacity
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently greater than 86 cubic inches and out of
longer to ensure complete expansion. each lot of 500 or less for cylinders hav-
Any internal pressure applied after ing a capacity of 86 cubic inches or
heat-treatment and previous to the of- less.
ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of (2) Specimens must conform to the
the test pressure. If, due to failure of following:
the test apparatus, the test pressure (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a
cannot be maintained, the test may be width not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge
repeated at a pressure increased by 10 length of 2 inches with a width not
percent or 100 psig, whichever is the over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length at
lower. least 24 times the thickness with a
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion width not over 6 times the thickness is
may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- authorized when a cylinder wall is not
umetric expansion at test pressure. over 3⁄16 inch thick.
(4) Cylinders must be tested as fol- (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
lows: ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
(i) At least one cylinder selected at may be flattened to within one inch of
random out of each lot of 200 or less each end of the reduced section.
54
(iii) When size of cylinder does not the direction of the applied load. Two
permit securing straight specimens, rings cut from the ends of length of
the specimens may be taken in any lo- pipe used in production of a lot may be
cation or direction and may be used for the flattening test provided
straightened or flattened cold by pres- the rings accompany the lot which
sure only, not by blows. When speci- they represent in all thermal proc-
mens are so taken and prepared, the in- essing operations. At least one of the
spector’s report must show in connec- rings must pass the flattening test.
tion with record of physical tests de- (m) Leakage test. All spun cylinders
tailed information in regard to such and plugged cylinders must be tested
specimens. for leakage by gas or air pressure after
(iv) Heating of a specimen for any the bottom has been cleaned and is free
purpose is not authorized. from all moisture, subject to the fol-
(3) The yield strength in tension lowing conditions:
must be the stress corresponding to a (1) Pressure, approximately the same
permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the as but no less than service pressure,
gauge length. The following conditions must be applied to one side of the fin-
apply: ished bottom over an area of at least
(i) The yield strength must be deter- 1⁄16 of the total area of the bottom but
mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or not less than 3⁄4 inch in diameter, in-
the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as cluding the closure, for at least 1
prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 minute, during which time the other
of this subchapter). side of the bottom exposed to pressure
(ii) In using the ‘‘extension under must be covered with water and closely
load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- examined for indications of leakage.
tension under load’’) corresponding to Except as provided in paragraph (n) of
the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- this section, cylinders which are leak-
manent strain occurs may be deter- ing must be rejected.
(2) A spun cylinder is one in which an
culating the elastic extension of the
end closure in the finished cylinder has
gauge length under appropriate load
been welded by the spinning process.
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
(3) A plugged cylinder is one in which
gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
a permanent closure in the bottom of a
culations must be based on an elastic
finished cylinder has been effected by a
modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of
plug.
controversy, the entire stress-strain
diagram must be plotted and the yield (4) As a safety precaution, if the
strength determined from the 0.2 per- manufacturer elects to make this test
cent offset. before the hydrostatic test, he should
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- design his apparatus so that the pres-
urement, the initial strain must be set sure is applied to the smallest area
while the specimen is under a stress of practicable, around the point of clo-
12,000 psi and the strain indicator read- sure, and so as to use the smallest pos-
ing being set at the calculated cor- sible volume of air or gas.
responding strain. (n) Rejected cylinders. Repairs of re-
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing jected cylinders is authorized. Cyl-
machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per inders that are leaking must be re-
minute during yield strength deter- jected, except that:
mination. (1) Spun cylinders rejected under the
(l) Acceptable results for physical and provisions of paragraph (m) of this sec-
flattening tests. Acceptable results for tion may be removed from the spun
the physical and flattening tests are an cylinder category by drilling to remove
elongation of at least 40 percent for a 2 defective material, tapping, and plug-
inch gauge length or at least 20 percent ging.
in other cases and a yield strength not (2) Brazed joints may be rebrazed.
over 73 percent of tensile strength. In (3) Subsequent to the operations

this instance the flattening test is re- noted in paragraphs (n)(1) and (n)(2) of
quired, without cracking, to six times this section, acceptable cylinders must
the wall thickness with a weld 90° from pass all prescribed tests.
55
§ 178.56 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(o) Marking. Markings on each cyl- bottoms of cylinders is authorized.

inder must be by stamping plainly and Provided that such attachments are
permanently on shoulder, top head, made of weldable steel, the carbon con-
neck or valve protection collar which tent of which does not exceed 0.25 per-
is permanently attached to the cyl- cent.
inders and forming an integral part (f) Wall thickness. The wall thickness
thereof, provided that cylinders not of the cylinder must conform to the
less than 0.090 inch thick may be following:
stamped on the side wall adjacent to (1) For cylinders with an outside di-
top head. ameter over 5 inches, the minimum
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as wall thickness is 0.078 inch. In any
amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR case, the minimum wall thickness
51653, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, 75749, Dec. 31, must be such that the calculated wall
2003] stress at the minimum test pressure (in
paragraph (i) of this section) may not
§ 178.56 Specification 4AA480 welded exceed the lesser value of either of the
steel cylinders. following:
(a) Type, size, and service pressure. A (i) One-half of the minimum tensile
DOT 4AA480 cylinder is a welded steel strength of the material determined as
cylinder having a water capacity required in paragraph (j) of this sec-
(nominal) not over 1,000 pounds water tion; or
capacity and a service pressure of 480 (ii) 35,000 psi.
psig. Closures welded by spinning proc- (2) Calculation must be made by the
ess not permitted. formula:
(b) Steel. The limiting chemical com-
position of steel authorized by this S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2)
specification must be as shown in table Where:
I of appendix A to this part.
(c) Identification of material. Material P = minimum test pressure prescribed for
must be identified by any suitable water jacket test;
method except that plates and billets D = outside diameter in inches;
for hotdrawn cylinders must be marked d = inside diameter in inches.
with the heat number.
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be (3) The ratio of tangential length to
manufactured using equipment and outside diameter may not exceed 4.0 for
processes adequate to ensure that each cylinders with a wall thickness less
cylinder produced conforms to the re- than 0.100 inch.
quirements of this subpart. No defect is (g) Heat treatment. Each cylinder
permitted that is likely to weaken the must be uniformly and properly heat
finished cylinder appreciably. A rea- treated prior to tests. Any suitable
sonably smooth and uniform surface heat treatment in excess of 1100 °F is
finish is required. Exposed bottom authorized except that liquid quench-
welds on cylinders over 18 inches long ing is not permitted. Heat treatment
must be protected by footrings. Min- must be accomplished after all forming
imum thickness of heads and bottoms and welding operations. Heat treat-
may not be less than 90 percent of the ment is not required after welding
required thickness of the side wall. weldable low carbon parts to attach-
Seams must be made as follows: ments of similar material which have
(1) Circumferential seams must be been previously welded to the top or
welded. Brazing is not authorized. bottom of cylinders and properly heat
(2) Longitudinal seams are not per- treated, provided such subsequent
mitted. welding does not produce a tempera-
(3) Welding procedures and operators ture in excess of 400 °F., in any part of
must be qualified in accordance with the top or bottom material.
CGA C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- (h) Openings in cylinders. Openings in
chapter). cylinders must conform to the fol-

(e) Welding. Only the welding of lowing:
neckrings, footrings, bosses, pads, and (1) All openings must be in the heads
valve protection rings to the tops and or bases.
56
(2) Each opening in the cylinder, ex- (ii) Each cylinder not tested as pre-
cept those for safety devices, must be scribed in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of this sec-
provided with a fitting boss, or pad, se- tion must be examined under pressure
curely attached to the cylinder by of at least two times service pressure
welding or by threads. If threads are and must show no defect. A cylinder
used they must comply with the fol- showing a defect must be rejected un-
lowing: less it may be requalified under para-
(i) Threads must be clean-cut, even graph (m) of this section.
without checks and cut to gauge. (j) Physical test. A physical test must
(ii) Taper threads to be of length not be conducted to determine yield
less than as specified for American strength, tensile strength, elongation,
Standard taper pipe threads. and reduction of area of material, as
(iii) Straight threads having at least follows:
6 engaged threads, must have a tight (1) The test is required on 2 speci-
fit and a calculated shear strength at mens cut from one cylinder having
least 10 times the test pressure of the passed the hydrostatic test, or part
cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent thereof heat-treated as required, taken
leakage, are required. at random out of each lot of 200 or less.
(3) Closure of a fitting, boss or pad (2) Specimens must conform to the
must be adequate to prevent leakage. following:
(i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder
(i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a
must successfully withstand a hydro-
width not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge
static test as follows:
length of 2 inches with a width not
(1) The test must be by water jacket,
over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length at
or other suitable method, operated so
least 24 times the thickness with a
as to obtain accurate data. The pres-
width not over 6 times thickness is au-
sure gauge must permit reading to an
thorized when the cylinder wall is not
accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion
over 3⁄16 inch thick.
gauge must permit reading of total ex-
(ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per-
ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
may be flattened to within one inch of
each end of the reduced section.
at least 30 seconds or sufficiently
longer to assure complete expansion. (iii) When size of cylinder does not
Any internal pressure applied after permit securing straight specimens,
heat-treatment and before the official the specimens may be taken in any lo-
test may not exceed 90 percent of the cation or direction and may be
test pressure. If, due to failure of test straightened or flattened cold, by pres-
apparatus, the test pressure cannot be sure only, not by blows. When speci-
maintained, the test may be repeated mens are so taken and prepared, the in-
at a pressure increased by 10 percent or spector’s report must show in connec-
100 psig, whichever is lower. tion with record of physical tests de-
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion tailed information in regard to such
may not exceed 10 percent of the total specimens.
volumetric expansion at test pressure. (iv) Heating of a specimen for any
(4) Cylinders must be tested as fol- purpose is not authorized.
lows: (3) The yield strength in tension
(i) At least one cylinder selected at must be the stress corresponding to a
random out of each lot of 200 or less permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
must be tested as described in para- gauge length. The following conditions
graphs (i)(1), (i)(2), and (i)(3) of this sec- apply:
tion, to at least two times service pres- (i) The yield strength must be deter-
sure. If a selected cylinder fails, then mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or
two additional specimens must be se- the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as
lected at random from the same lot and prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7
subjected to the prescribed test. If ei- of this subchapter).

ther of these fails the test, then each (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under
cylinder in that lot must be so tested; load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex-
and tension under load’’), corresponding to
57
§ 178.56 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- fail to meet the requirements, the en-
manent strain occurs may be deter- tire lot represented must be rejected.
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- (2) Guided bend test. A root bend test
culating the elastic extension of the specimen must be cut from the cyl-
gauge length under appropriate load inder or a welded test plate, used for
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the the tensile test specified in paragraph
gauge length. Elastic extension cal- (l)(1) of this section. Specimens must
culations must be based on an elastic be taken from across the major seam
modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of and must be prepared and tested in ac-
controversy, the entire stress-strain cordance with and must meet the re-
diagram must be plotted and the yield
quirements of CGA Pamphlet C–3.
strength determined from the 0.2 per-
cent offset. (3) Alternate guided-bend test. This
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- test may be used and must be as re-
urement, the initial strain reference quired by CGA Pamphlet C–3. The spec-
must be set while the specimen is imen must be bent until the elongation
under a stress of 12,000 psi and the at the outer surface, adjacent to the
strain indicator reading being set at root of the weld, between the lightly
the calculated corresponding strain. scribed gage lines-a to b, is at least 20
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing percent, except that this percentage
machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per may be reduced for steels having a ten-
minute during yield strength deter- sile strength in excess of 50,000 psi, as
mination. provided in paragraph (k) of this sec-
(k) Elongation. Physical test speci- tion.
mens must show at least a 40 percent (m) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat-
elongation for 2-inch gauge lengths or ment of rejected cylinders is author-
at least a 20 percent elongation in ized. Subsequent thereto, cylinders
other cases. Except that these elon- must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
gation percentages may be reduced nu- ceptable. Repair of welded seams by
merically by 2 for 2-inch specimens and welding is authorized.
by 1 in other cases for each 7,500 psi in-
(n) Markings. Markings must be
crement of tensile strength above 50,000
stamped plainly and permanently in
psi to a maximum of four such incre-
ments. one of the following locations on the
(l) Tests of welds. Welds must be test- cylinder:
ed as follows: (1) On shoulders and top heads not
(1) Tensile test. A specimen must be less than 0.087 inch thick.
cut from one cylinder of each lot of 200 (2) On neck, valve boss, valve protec-
or less, or a welded test plate. The tion sleeve, or similar part perma-
welded test plate must be of one of the nently attached to top end of cylinder.
heats in the lot of 200 or less which it (3) On a plate attached to the top of
represents, in the same condition and the cylinder or permanent part thereof:
approximately the same thickness as sufficient space must be left on the
the cylinder wall except that it may plate to provide for stamping at least
not be of a lesser thickness than that six retest dates: the plate must be at
required for a quarter size Charpy im- least 1⁄16 inch thick and must be at-
pact specimen. The weld must be made tached by welding or by brazing at a
by the same procedures and subjected temperature of at least 1100 °F,
to the same heat treatment as the throughout all edges of the plate.
major weld on the cylinder. The speci- (4) Variations in location of mark-
mens must be taken across the major
ings authorized only when necessitated
seam and must be prepared and tested
by lack of space.
in accordance with and must meet the
requirements of CGA Pamphlet C–3. [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
Should this specimen fail to meet the amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR
requirements, specimens may be taken 51653, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, 75749, Dec. 31,
from two additional cylinders or weld- 2003]
ed test plates from the same lot and
tested. If either of the latter specimens
58
§ 178.57 Specification 4L welded insu- thickness of heads may not be less

lated cylinders. than 90 percent of the required thick-
(a) Type, size, service pressure, and de- ness of the sidewall. The heads must be
sign service temperature. A DOT 4L cyl- reasonably true to shape, have no ab-
inder is a fusion welded insulated cyl- rupt shape changes, and the skirts
inder with a water capacity (nominal) must be reasonably true to round.
not over 1,000 pounds water capacity (3) The surface of the cylinder must
and a service pressure of at least 40 but be insulated. The insulating material
not greater than 500 psig conforming to must be fire resistant. The insulation
the following requirements: on non-evacuated jackets must be cov-
(1) For liquefied hydrogen service, ered with a steel jacket not less than
the cylinders must be designed to stand 0.060-inch thick or an aluminum jacket
on end, with the axis of the cylindrical not less than 0.070 inch thick, so con-
portion vertical. structed that moisture cannot come in
(2) The design service temperature is contact with the insulating material. If
the coldest temperature for which a a vacuum is maintained in the insula-
cylinder is suitable. The required de- tion space, the evacuated jacket must
sign service temperatures for each be designed for a minimum collapsing
cryogenic liquid is as follows: pressure of 30 psig differential whether
made of steel or aluminum. The con-
Cryogenic liquid Design service temperature struction must be such that the total
Argon ...................... Minus 320 °F or colder. heat transfer, from the atmosphere at
Helium .................... Minus 452 °F or colder. ambient temperature to the contents
Hydrogen ................ Minus 42 3 °F or colder. of the cylinder, will not exceed 0.0005
Neon ....................... Minus 411 °F or colder.
Nitrogen .................. Minus 320 °F or colder.
Btu per hour, per Fahrenheit degree
Oxygen ................... Minus 320 °F or colder. differential in temperature, per pound
of water capacity of the cylinder. For
(b) Material. Material use in the con- hydrogen, cryogenic liquid service, the
struction of this specification must total heat transfer, with a temperature
conform to the following: differential of 520 Fahrenheit degrees,
(1) Inner containment vessel (cylinder). may not exceed that required to vent
Designations and limiting chemical 30 SCF of hydrogen gas per hour.
compositions of steel authorized by (4) For a cylinder having a design
this specification must be as shown in service temperature colder than minus
table 1 in paragraph (o) of this section. 320 °F, a calculation of the maximum
(2) Outer jacket. Steel or aluminum weight of contents must be made and
may be used subject to the require- that weight must be marked on the
ments of paragraph (o)(2) of this sec- cylinder as prescribed in § 178.35.
tion. (5) Welding procedures and oper-
(c) Identification of material. Material ations must be qualified in accordance
must be identified by any suitable with CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, see
method. § 171.7 of this subchapter). In addition,
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be an impact test of the weld must be per-
manufactured using equipment and formed in accordance with paragraph
processes adequate to ensure that each (l) of this section as part of the quali-
cylinder produced conforms to the re- fication of each welding procedure and
quirements of this subpart and to the operator.
following requirements: (e) Welding. Welding of the cylinder
(1) No defect is permitted that is must be as follows:
likely to weaken the finished cylinder (1) All seams of the cylinder must be
appreciably. A reasonably smooth and fusion welded. A means must be pro-
uniform surface finish is required. The vided for accomplishing complete pene-
shell portion must be a reasonably true tration of the joint. Only butt or joggle
cylinder. butt joints for the cylinder seams are
(2) The heads must be seamless, con- authorized. All joints in the cylinder
cave side to the pressure, hemi- must have reasonably true alignment.
spherical or ellipsoidal in shape with (2) All attachments to the sidewalls
the major diameter not more than and heads of the cylinder must be by
twice the minor diameter. Minimum fusion welding and must be of a
59
§ 178.57 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
weldable material complying with the curely attached to, the cylinder body
impact requirements of paragraph (l) of by fusion welding. Attachments to a
this section. fitting, boss or pad may be made by
(3) For welding the cylinder, each welding, brazing, mechanical attach-
procedure and operator must be quali- ment, or threading.
fied in accordance with the sections of (2) Threads must comply with the fol-
CGA Pamphlet C–3 that apply. In addi- lowing:
tion, impact tests of the weld must be (i) Threads must be clean-cut, even,
performed in accordance with para- without checks and cut to gauge.
graph (l) of this section as part of the (ii) Taper threads to be of a length
qualification of each welding procedure not less than that specified for NPT.
and operator.
(iii) Straight threads must have at
(4) Brazing, soldering and threading
least 4 engaged threads, tight fit and
are permitted only for joints not made
calculated shear strength at least 10
directly to the cylinder body. Threads
must comply with the requirements of times the test pressure of the cylinder.
paragraph (h) of this section. Gaskets, which prevent leakage and
(f) Wall thickness. The minimum wall are inert to the hazardous material,
thickness of the cylinder must be such are required.
that the calculated wall stress at the (i) Pressure test. Each cylinder, before
minimum required test pressure may insulating and jacketing, must be ex-
not exceed the least value of the fol- amined under a pressure of at least 2
lowing: times the service pressure maintained
(1) 45,000 psi. for at least 30 seconds without evidence
(2) One-half of the minimum tensile of leakage, visible distortion or other
strength across the welded seam deter- defect. The pressure gauge must permit
mined in paragraph (l) of this section. reading to an accuracy of 1 percent.
(3) One-half of the minimum tensile (j) Physical test. A physical test must
strength of the base metal determined be conducted to determine yield
as required in paragraph (j) of this sec- strength, tensile strength, and elon-
tion. gation as follows:
(4) The yield strength of the base (1) The test is required on 2 speci-
metal determined as required in para- mens selected from material of each
graph (l) of this section. heat and in the same condition as that
(5) Further provided that wall stress in the completed cylinder.
for cylinders having longitudinal (2) Specimens must conform to the
seams may not exceed 85 percent of the following:
above value, whichever applies. (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a
(6) Calculation must be made by the width not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge
following formula: length of 2 inches with width not over
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length at least 24
times thickness with a width not over
where:
6 times thickness (authorized when cyl-
S = wall stress in pounds psi;
inder wall is not over 1⁄16 inch thick).
pressure test in psig; (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
D = outside diameter in inches; ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
d = inside diameter in inches. may be flattened to within one inch of
(g) Heat treatment. Heat treatment is each end of the reduced section.
not permitted. (iii) When size of the cylinder does
(h) Openings in cylinder. Openings in not permit securing straight speci-
cylinders must conform to the fol- mens, the specimens may be taken in
lowing: any location or direction and may be
(1) Openings are permitted in heads straightened or flattened cold by pres-
only. They must be circular and may sure only, not by blows. When speci-
not exceed 3 inches in diameter or one mens are so taken and prepared, the in-
third of the cylinder diameter, which- spector’s report must show in connec-
ever is less. Each opening in the cyl- tion with record of physical tests de-
inder must be provided with a fitting, tailed information in regard to such
boss or pad, either integral with, or se- specimens.
60
(iv) Heating of a specimen for any heats in the lot of 200 or less which it
purpose is not authorized. represents, in the same condition and
(3) The yield strength in tension approximately the same thickness as
must be the stress corresponding to a the cylinder wall except that it may
permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the not be of a lesser thickness than that
gauge length. The following conditions required for a quarter size Charpy im-
apply: pact specimen. The weld must be made
(i) The yield strength must be deter- by the same procedures and subjected
mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or to the same heat treatment as the
the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as major weld on the cylinder. The speci-
prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 men must be taken across the major
of this subchapter). seam and must be prepared in accord-
(ii) In using the ‘‘extension under ance with and must meet the require-
load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- ments of CGA Pamphlet C–3. Should
tension under load’’), corresponding to
this specimen fail to meet the require-
the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
ments, specimens may be taken from
manent strain occurs may be deter-
two additional cylinders or welded test
culating the elastic expansion of the plates from the same lot and tested. If
gauge length under appropriate load either of the latter specimens fails to
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the meet the requirements, the entire lot
gauge length. Elastic extension cal- represented must be rejected.
culations must be based on the elastic (2) Guided bend test. A ‘‘root’’ bend
modulus of the material used. In the test specimen must be cut from the
event of controversy, the entire stress- cylinder or welded test plate, used for
strain diagram must be plotted and the the tensile test specified in paragraph
yield strength determined from the 0.2 (l)(1) of this section and from any other
percent offset. seam or equivalent welded test plate if
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- the seam is welded by a procedure dif-
urement, the initial strain reference ferent from that used for the major
must be set while the specimen is seam. Specimens must be taken across
under a stress of 12,000 psi and the the particular seam being tested and
strain indicator reading being set at must be prepared and tested in accord-
the calculated corresponding strain. ance with and must meet the require-
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing ments of CGA Pamphlet C–3.
machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per (3) Alternate guided-bend test. This
minute during yield strength deter- test may be used and must be as speci-
mination. fied in CGA Pamphlet C–3. The speci-
(k) Acceptable results for physical tests. men must be bent until the elongation
Physical properties must meet the lim- at the outer surface, adjacent to the
its specified in paragraph (o)(1), table 1, root of the weld, between the lightly
of this section, for the particular steel scribed gage lines a to b, is at least 20
in the annealed condition. The speci- percent, except that this percentage
mens must show at least a 20 percent may be reduced for steels having a ten-
elongation for a 2-inch gage length. Ex-
sile strength in excess of 100,000 psig, as
cept that the percentage may be re-
provided in paragraph (c) of this sec-
duced numerically by 2 for each 7,500
tion.
psi increment of tensile strength above
100,000 psi to a maximum of 5 such in- (4) Impact tests. One set of three im-
crements. Yield strength and tensile pact test specimens (for each test)
strength must meet the requirements must be prepared and tested for deter-
of paragraph (o)(1), table 1, of this sec- mining the impact properties of the de-
tion. posited weld metal—
(l) Tests of welds. Welds must be test- (i) As part of the qualification of the
ed as follows: welding procedure.
(1) Tensile test. A specimen must be (ii) As part of the qualification of the
cut from one cylinder of each lot of 200 operators.
or less, or welded test plate. The weld- (iii) For each ‘‘heat’’ of welding rodor
ed test plate must be of one of the wire used.
61
§ 178.57 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(iv) For each 1,000 feet of weld made Minimum Minimum

impact value
with the same heat of welding rod or required for impact value
permitted on
wire. Size of specimen avg. of each one only of a
set of three
(v) All impact test specimens must be set of three
specimens (ft.-lb.)
of the charpy type, keyhole or milled (ft.-lb.)
U-notch, and must conform in all re- 10 mm×10 mm ...................... 15 10
spects to ASTM E 23 (IBR, see § 171.7 of 10 mm×7.5 mm ..................... 12.5 8.5
this subchapter). Each set of impact 10 mm×5 mm ........................ 10 7.0
10 mm×2.5 mm ..................... 5 3.5
specimens must be taken across the
weld and have the notch located in the (viii) When the average value of the
weld metal. When the cylinder mate- three specimens equals or exceeds the
rial thickness is 2.5 mm or thicker, im- minimum value permitted for a single
pact specimens must be cut from a cyl- specimen and the value for more than
inder or welded test plate used for the one specimen is below the required av-
tensile or bend test specimens. The di- erage value, or when the value for one
mension along the axis of the notch specimen is below the minimum value
must be reduced to the largest possible permitted for a single specimen, a
of 10 mm, 7.5 mm, 5 mm or 2.5 mm, de- retest of three additional specimens
pending upon cylinder thickness. When must be made. The value of each of
the material in the cylinder or welded these retest specimens must equal or
test plate is not of sufficient thickness exceed the required average value.
to prepare 2.5 mm impact test speci- When an erratic result is caused by a
mens, 2.5 mm specimens must be pre- defective specimen, or there is uncer-
pared from a welded test plate made tainty in test procedure, a retest is au-
from 1⁄8 inch thick material meeting thorized.
the requirements specified in para- (m) Radiographic examination. Cyl-
graph (o)(1), table 1, of this section and inders must be subject to a radio-
having a carbon analysis of .05 min- graphic examination as follows:
imum, but not necessarily from one of (1) The techniques and acceptability
the heats used in the lot of cylinders. of radiographic inspection must con-
form to the standards set forth in CGA
The test piece must be welded by the
Pamphlet C–3.
same welding procedure as used on the
(2) One finished longitudinal seam
particular cylinder seam being quali-
must be selected at random from each
fied and must be subjected to the same lot of 100 or less successively produced
heat treatment. and be radiographed throughout its en-
(vi) Impact test specimens must be tire length. Should the radiographic
cooled to the design service tempera- examination fail to meet the require-
ture. The apparatus for testing the ments of paragraph (m)(1) of this sec-
specimens must conform to require- tion, two additional seams of the same
ments of ASTM Standard E 23. The test lot must be examined, and if either of
piece, as well as the handling tongs, these fail to meet the requirements of
must be cooled for a length of time suf- (m)(1) of this section, only those pass-
ficient to reach the service tempera- ing are acceptable.
ture. The temperature of the cooling (n) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat-
device must be maintained within a ment of rejected cylinders is author-
range of plus or minus 3 °F. The speci- ized. Subsequent thereto, cylinders
men must be quickly transferred from must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
the cooling device to the anvil of the ceptable. Welds may be repaired by
testing machine and broken within a suitable methods of fusion welding.
time lapse of not more than six sec- (o) Authorized materials of construc-
onds. tion. Authorized materials of construc-
(vii) The impact properties of each tion are as follows:
(1) Inner containment vessel (cylinder).
set of impact specimens may not be
Electric furnace steel of uniform qual-

less than the values in the following
ity must be used. Chemical analysis
table: must conform to ASTM A 240/A 240M
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter),
62
Type 304 stainless steel. Chemical anal- an outer jacket made of steel or alu-
ysis must conform to ASTM A240, Type minum.
304 Stainless Steel. A heat of steel (ii) Flammable cryogenic liquids.
made under table 1 and table 2 in this Cylinders intended for use in the trans-
paragraph (o)(1) is acceptable, even portation of flammable cryogenic liq-
though its check chemical analysis is uid must have an outer jacket made of
slightly out of the specified range, if it steel.
is satisfactory in all other respects, (p) Markings. (1) Markings must be
provided the tolerances shown in table stamped plainly and permanently on
3 in this paragraph (o)(1) are not ex-
shoulder or top head of jacket or on a
ceeded. The following chemical anal-
permanently attached plate or head
yses and physical properties are au-
thorized: protective ring.
(2) The letters ‘‘ST’’, followed by the
TABLE 1—AUTHORIZED MATERIALS design service temperature (for exam-
ple, ST–423F), must be marked on cyl-
Chemical analysis,
Designation inders having a design service tempera-
limits in percent
ture of colder than minus 320 °F only.
Carbon 1 ............................................. 0.08 max.
Manganese ........................................ 2.00 max. Location to be just below the DOT
Phosphorus ........................................ 0.045 max. mark.
Sulphur .............................................. 0.030 max. (3) The maximum weight of contents,
Silicon ................................................ 1.00 max.
Nickel ................................................. 8.00–10.50. in pounds (for example, ‘‘Max. Content
Chromium .......................................... 18.00–20.00. 51 #’’), must be marked on cylinders
Molybdenum ...................................... None.
Titanium ............................................. None. having a design service temperature
Columbium ......................................... None. colder than minus 320 °F only. Loca-
1 The carbon analysis must be reported to the nearest hun- tion to be near symbol.
dredth of one percent. (4) Special orientation instructions
must be marked on the cylinder (for
TABLE 2—PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
example, THIS END UP), if the cyl-
Physical inder is used in an orientation other
properties
(annealed) than vertical with openings at the top
of the cylinder.
Tensile strength, p.s.i. (minimum) ....................... 75,000
Yield strength, p.s.i. (minimum) ........................... 30,000
(5) If the jacket of the cylinder is
Elongation in 2 inches (minimum) percent .......... 30.0 constructed of aluminum, the letters
Elongation other permissible gauge lengths ‘‘AL’’ must be marked after the service
(minimum) percent ........................................... 15.0
pressure marking. Example: DOT-4L150
AL.
TABLE 3—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES (6) Except for serial number and jack-
Tolerance et material designation, each marking
over the prescribed in this paragraph (p) must
Limit or specified range maximum
Elements be duplicated on each cylinder by any
(percent) limit or under
the minimum suitable means.
limit
(q) Inspector’s report. In addition to
Carbon ............... To 0.030, incl ................... 0.005 the information required by § 178.35, the
Over 0.30 to 0.20, incl ..... 0.01
Manganese ........ To 1.00 incl ...................... .03 inspector’s reports must contain infor-
Over 1.00 to 3.00, incl ..... 0.04 mation on:
Phosphorus 1 ..... To 0.040, incl ................... 0.005
Over 0.040 to 0.020 incl .. 0.010
(1) The jacket material and insula-
Sulphur .............. To .40 incl ........................ 0.005 tion type;
Silicon ................ To 1.00, incl ..................... 0.05 (2) The design service temperature
Nickel ................. Over 5.00 to 10.00, incl ... 0.10
Over 10.00 to 20.00, incl 0.15 ( °F); and
Chromium .......... Over 15.00 to 20.00, incl 0.20
(3) The impact test results, on a lot
1 Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for
basis.
phosphorus.
(2) Outer jacket. (i) Nonflammable [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
amended at 66 FR 45386–45388, Aug. 28, 2001; 67
cryogenic liquids. Cylinders intended
FR 51653, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31,
for use in the transportation of non- 2003]
flammable cryogenic liquid must have
63
§ 178.58 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
§ 178.58 Specification 4DA welded steel (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be

cylinders for aircraft use. manufactured in accordance with the
(a) Type, size, and service pressure. A following requirements:
DOT 4DA is a welded steel sphere (two (1) By best appliances and methods.
seamless hemispheres) or a circum- No defect is acceptable that is likely to
ferentially welded cylinder (two seam- weaken the finished container appre-
less drawn shells) with a water capac- ciably. A reasonably smooth and uni-
ity not over 100 pounds and a service form surface finish is required. No ab-
pressure of at least 500 but not over 900 rupt change in wall thickness is per-
psig. mitted. Welding procedures and opera-
tors must be qualified in accordance
(b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel
with CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, see
of uniform quality must be used. A
§ 171.7 of this subchapter).
heat of steel made under table 1 in this
(2) All seams of the sphere or cyl-
paragraph (b), check chemical analysis
inders must be fusion welded. Seams
of which is slightly out of the specified
must be of the butt or joggle butt type
range, is acceptable, if satisfactory in
and means must be provided for accom-
all other respects, provided the toler-
plishing complete penetration of the
ances shown in table 2 in this para-
joint.
graph (b) are not exceeded except as ap-
(e) Welding. Attachments to the con-
proved by the Associate Administrator.
tainer are authorized by fusion welding
The following chemical analyses are
provided that such attachments are
authorized:
made of weldable steel, the carbon con-
TABLE 1—AUTHORIZED MATERIALS tent of which may not exceed 0.25 per-
cent except in the case of 4130 steel.
4130 Percent (f) Wall thickness. The minimum wall
thickness must be such that the wall
Carbon ........................................................ 0.28/0.33.
Manganese ................................................. 0.40/0.60.
stress at the minimum specified test
Phosphorus ................................................ 0.040 max. pressure may not exceed 67 percent of
Sulfur .......................................................... 0.040 max. the minimum tensile strength of the
Silicon ......................................................... 0.15/0.35. steel as determined from the physical
Chromium ................................................... 0.80/1.10. and burst tests required and may not
Molybdenum ............................................... 0.15/0.25.
be over 70,000 p.s.i. For any diameter
container, the minimum wall thickness
TABLE 2—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES is 0.040 inch. Calculations must be
made by the formulas in (f)(1) or (f)(2)
Tolerance (per-
cent) over the of this section:
maximum limit or (1) Calculation for a sphere must be
under the min-
Limit or maximum imum limit made by the following formula:
Element specified (percent)
Under Over S = PD / 4tE
min- max-
imum imum Where:
limit limit
Carbon ............ Over 0.15 to 0.40 incl .03 ....... .04 P = test pressure prescribed for water jacket
Manganese ..... To 0.60 incl ................. .03 ....... .03 test, i.e., at least 2 times service pressure,
Phosphorus1 ... All ranges .................... .............. .01 in psig;
Sulphur ........... All ranges .................... .............. .01 D = outside diameter in inches;
Silicon ............. To 0.30 incl ................. .02 ....... .03 t = minimum wall thickness in inches;
Over 0.30 to 1.00 incl .05 ....... .05 E = 0.85 (provides 85 percent weld efficiency
Chromium ....... To 0.90 incl ................. .03 ....... .03 factor which must be applied in the girth
Over 0.90 to 2.10 incl .05 ....... .05 weld area and heat affected zones which
Molybdenum ... To 0.20 incl ................. .01 ....... .01 zone must extend a distance of 6 times wall
Over 0.20 to 0.40, incl .02 ....... .02 thickness from center line of weld);
1 Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for E = 1.0 (for all other areas).
phosphorus.
(2) Calculation for a cylinder must be
(c) Identification of material. Materials made by the following formula:
must be identified by any suitable

S = [P(1.3D 2 + 0.4d 2)] / (D 2 ¥ d 2)
method except that plates and billets
for hot-drawn containers must be Where:
marked with the heat number. S = wall stress in pounds psi;
64
P = test pressure prescribed for water jacket (i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder
test, i.e., at least 2 times service pressure, must successfully withstand a hydro-
in psig; static test as follows:
d = inside diameter in inches. (1) The test must be by water-jacket,
or other suitable method, operated so
(g) Heat treatment. The completed as to obtain accurate data. The pres-
containers must be uniformly and sure gauge must permit reading to an
properly heat-treated prior to tests. accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion
Heat-treatment of containers of the au- gauge must permit reading of total ex-
thorized analysis must be as follows: pansion to accuracy either of 1 percent
(1) All containers must be quenched or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
by oil, or other suitable medium except (2) Pressure must be maintained for
as provided in paragraph (g)(4) of this at least 30 seconds and sufficiently
section. longer to ensure complete expansion.
(2) The steel temperature on quench- Any internal pressure applied after
ing must be that recommended for the heat-treatment and previous to the of-
steel analysis, but may not exceed 1,750 ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of
°F. the test pressure. If, due to failure of
(3) The steel must be tempered at the the test apparatus, the test pressure
temperature most suitable for the cannot be maintained, the test may be
analysis except that in no case shall repeated at a pressure increased by 10
the tempering temperature be less than percent or 100 psig, whichever is the
1,000 °F. lower.
(4) The steel may be normalized at a (3) Permanent volumetric expansion
temperature of 1,650 °F instead of being may not exceed 10 percent of total vol-
quenched, and containers so normal- umetric expansion at test pressure.
ized need not be tempered. (4) Each container must be tested to
(5) All cylinders, if water quenched or at least 2 times service pressure.
quenched with a liquid producing a
(j) Burst test. One container taken at
cooling rate in excess of 80 percent of
random out of 200 or less must be
the cooling rate of water, must be in-
hydrostatically tested to destruction.
spected by the magnetic particle or dye
The rupture pressure must be included
penetrant method to detect the pres-
as part of the inspector’s report.
ence of quenching cracks. Any cylinder
found to have a quench crack must be (k) Flattening test. Spheres and cyl-
rejected and may not be requalified. inders must be subjected to a flat-
tening test as follows:
(h) Openings in container. Openings in
the container must comply with the (1) Flattening test for spheres. One
following requirements: sphere taken at random out of each lot
(1) Each opening in the container of 200 or less must be subjected to a
must be provided with a fitting, boss, flattening test as follows:
or pad of weldable steel securely at- (i) The test must be performed after
tached to the container by fusion weld- the hydrostatic test.
ing. (ii) The test must be at the weld be-
(2) Attachments to a fitting, boss, or tween the parallel steel plates on a
pad must be adequate to prevent leak- press with a welded seam, at right an-
age. Threads must comply with the fol- gles to the plates. Any projecting ap-
lowing: purtenances may be cut off (by me-
(i) Threads must be clean cut, even, chanical means only) prior to crushing.
without checks, and tapped to gauge. (2) Flattening test for cylinders. One
(ii) Taper threads to be of length not cylinder taken at random out of each
less than as specified for American lot of 200 or less, must be subjected to
Standard taper pipe threads. a flattening test as follows:
(iii) Straight threads, having at least (i) The test must be performed after
4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and the hydrostatic test.
calculated shear strength at least 10 (ii) The test cylinder must be placed
times the test pressure of the con- between wedge-shaped knife edges hav-
tainer; gaskets required, adequate to ing a 60° angle, rounded to a 1⁄2-inch ra-
prevent leakage. dius.
65
§ 178.58 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(l) Radiographic inspection. Radio- the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as

graphic examinations is required on all prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7
welded joints which are subjected to in- of this subchapter).
ternal pressure, except that at the dis- (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under
cretion of the disinterested inspector, load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex-
openings less than 25 percent of the tension under load’’) corresponding to
sphere diameter need not be subjected the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
to radiographic inspection. Evidence of manent strain occurs may be deter-
any defects likely to seriously weaken mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
the container must be cause for rejec- culating the elastic extension of the
tion. gauge length under appropriate load
(m) Physical test and specimens for and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
spheres and cylinders. Spheres and cyl- gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
inders must be subjected to a physical culations must be based on an elastic
test as follows: modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of
(1) A physical test for a sphere is re- controversy, the entire stress-strain
quired on 2 specimens cut from a flat diagram must be plotted and the yield
representative sample plate of the strength determined from the 0.2 per-
same heat taken at random from the cent offset.
steel used to produce the sphere. This (iii) For the purpose of strain meas-
flat steel from which the 2 specimens urement, the initial strain must be set
are to be cut must receive the same while the specimen is under a stress of
heat-treatment as the spheres them- 12,000 psi and the strain indicator read-
selves. Sample plates to be taken for ing being set at the calculated cor-
each lot of 200 or less spheres. responding strain.
(2) Specimens for spheres have a (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing
gauge length of 2 inches with a width machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per
not over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length minute during yield strength deter-
at least 24 times thickness with a mination.
width not over 6 times thickness is au- (n) Acceptable results for physical, flat-
thorized when wall of sphere is not tening, and burst tests. The following are
over 3⁄16 inch thick. acceptable results of the physical, flat-
(3) A physical test for cylinders is re- tening and burst test:
quired on 2 specimens cut from 1 cyl- (1) Elongation must be at least 20
inder taken at random out of each lot percent for a 2-inch gauge length or 10
of 200 or less. percent in other cases.
(4) Specimens for cylinder must con-
(2) Flattening is required to 50 per-
form to the following:
cent of the original outside diameter
(i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a
without cracking.
width not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge
length of 2 inches with a width not (3) Burst pressure must be at least 3
over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge length at least times service pressure.
24 times thickness with a width not (o) Rejected containers. Reheat-treat-
over 6 times thickness is authorized ment of rejected cylinders is author-
when a cylinder wall is not over 3⁄16 ized. Subsequent thereto, containers
inch thick. must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
(ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip ceptable. Repair of welded seams by
ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends welding prior to reheat-treatment is
may be flattened to within 1 inch of authorized.
each end of the reduced section. (p) Marking. Markings on each con-
(iii) Heating of a specimen for any tainer must be stamped plainly and
purpose is not authorized. permanently on a permanent attach-
(5) The yield strength in tension ment or on a metal nameplate perma-
must be the stress corresponding to a nently secured to the container by
permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the means other than soft solder.
gauge length. The following conditions [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
apply: amended at 66 FR 45386, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001;
(i) The yield strength must be deter- 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002; 67 FR 61015, Sept. 27,
mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003]
66
§ 178.59 Specification 8 steel cylinders pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per-

with porous fillings for acetylene. cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
(a) Type and service pressure. A DOT 8 (2) Pressure must be maintained for
cylinder is a seamless cylinder with a at least 30 seconds and sufficiently
service pressure of 250 psig. The fol- longer to ensure complete expansion.
lowing steel is authorized: Any internal pressure applied after
(1) A longitudinal seam if forge lap heat-treatment and previous to the of-
welded; ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of
(2) Attachment of heads by welding the test pressure.
or by brazing by dipping process; or (3) Permanent volumetric expansion
(3) A welded circumferential body may not exceed 10 percent of total vol-
seam if the cylinder has no longitu- umetric expansion at test pressure.
dinal seam. (4) One cylinder out of each lot of 200
(b) Steel. Open-hearth, electric or or less must be hydrostatically tested
basic oxygen process steel of uniform to at least 750 psig. Cylinders not so
quality must be used. Content percent tested must be examined under pres-
may not exceed the following: Carbon, sure of between 500 and 600 psig and
0.25; phosphorus, 0.045; sulphur, 0.050. show no defect. If hydrostatically test-
(c) Identification of steel. Materials ed cylinder fails, each cylinder in the
must be identified by any suitable lot may be hydrostatically tested and
method except that plates and billets those passing are acceptable.
for hot-drawn cylinders must be (i) Leakage test. Cylinders with bot-
marked with the heat number. toms closed in by spinning must be
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be subjected to a leakage test by setting
manufactured using equipment and the interior air or gas pressure to not
processes adequate to ensure that each less than the service pressure. Cyl-
cylinder produced conforms to the re- inders which leak must be rejected.
quirements of this subpart. No defect is (j) Physical test. A physical test must
acceptable that is likely to weaken the be conducted as follows:
finished cylinder appreciably. A rea- (1) The test is required on 2 speci-
sonably smooth and uniform surface mens cut longitudinally from 1 cyl-
finish is required. Welding procedures inder or part thereof taken at random
and operators must be qualified in ac- out of each lot of 200 or less, after heat
cordance with CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, treatment.
see § 171.7 of this subchapter). (2) Specimens must conform to a
(e) Exposed bottom welds. Exposed bot- gauge length of 8 inches with a width
tom welds on cylinders over 18 inches not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge length of 2
long must be protected by footrings. inches with width not over 11⁄2, or a
(f) Heat treatment. Body and heads gauge length at least 24 times thick-
formed by drawing or pressing must be ness with a width not over 6 times
uniformly and properly heat treated thickness is authorized when a cylinder
prior to tests. wall is not over 3⁄16 inch thick.
(g) Openings. Openings in the cyl- (3) The yield strength in tension
inders must comply with the following: must be the stress corresponding to a
(1) Standard taper pipe threads are permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
required; gauge length. The following conditions
(2) Length may not be less than as apply:
specified for American Standard pipe (i) The yield strength must be deter-
threads; tapped to gauge; clean cut, mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or
even, and without checks. the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as
(h) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7
must successfully withstand a hydro- of this subchapter).
static test as follows: (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under
(1) The test must be by water-jacket, load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex-
or other suitable method, operated so tension under load’’) corresponding to
as to obtain accurate data. The pres- the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
sure gauge must permit reading to an manent strain occurs may be deter-
accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
gauge must permit reading of total ex- culating the elastic extension of the
67
§ 178.59 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
gauge length under appropriate load percent may be used when tested with
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the satisfactory results in accordance with
gauge length. Elastic extension cal- CGA Pamphlet C–12.
culations must be based on an elastic (2) When the porosity of each cyl-
modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of inder is not known, a cylinder taken at
controversy, the entire stress-strain random from a lot of 200 or less must
diagram must be plotted and the yield be tested for porosity. If the test cyl-
strength determined from the 0.2 off- inder fails, each cylinder in the lot
set. may be tested individually and those
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- cylinders that pass the test are accept-
urement, the initial strain must be set able.
while the specimen is under a stress of (3) For filling that is molded and
12,000 psi and the strain indicator read- dried before insertion in cylinders, po-
ing being set at the calculated cor- rosity test may be made on a sample
responding strain. block taken at random from material
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing to be used.
machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per (4) The porosity of the filling mate-
minute during yield strength deter- rial must be determined. The amount
mination. of solvent at 70 °F for a cylinder:
(4) Yield strength may not exceed 73 (i) Having shell volumetric capacity
percent of tensile strength. Elongation above 20 pounds water capacity (nomi-
must be at least 40 percent in 2 inch or nal) may not exceed the following:
20 percent in other cases.
Maximum
(k) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- acetone sol-
ment of rejected cylinder is authorized. Percent porosity of filler vent percent
shell capac-
Subsequent thereto, cylinders must ity by vol-
pass all prescribed tests to be accept- ume
able. Repair by welding is authorized. 90 to 92 ............................................................. 43.4
(l) Porous filling. (1) Cylinders must 87 to 90 ............................................................. 42.0
be filled with a porous material in ac- 83 to 87 ............................................................. 40.0
80 to 83 ............................................................. 38.6
cordance with the following: 75 to 80 ............................................................. 36.2
(i) The porous material may not dis- 70 to 75 ............................................................. 33.8
integrate or sag when wet with solvent 65 to 70 ............................................................. 31.4
or when subjected to normal service;
(ii) The porous filling material must (ii) Having volumetric capacity of 20
be uniform in quality and free of voids, pounds or less water capacity (nomi-
except that a well drilled into the fill- nal), may not exceed the following:
ing material beneath the valve is au- Maximum
thorized if the well is filled with a ma- acetone sol-
terial of such type that the functions vent percent
Percent porosity of filler shell capac-
of the filling material are not im- ity by vol-
paired; ume
(iii) Overall shrinkage of the filling 90 to 92 ............................................................. 41.8
material is authorized if the total 83 to 90 ............................................................. 38.5
clearance between the cylinder shell 80 to 83 ............................................................. 37.1
75 to 80 ............................................................. 34.8
and filling material, after solvent has 70 to 75 ............................................................. 32.5
been added, does not exceed 1⁄2 of 1 per- 65 to 70 ............................................................. 30.2
cent of the respective diameter or
length, but not to exceed 1⁄8 inch, meas- (m) Tare weight. The tare weight is
ured diametrically and longitudinally; the combined weight of the cylinder
(iv) The clearance may not impair proper, porous filling, valve, and sol-
the functions of the filling material; vent, without removable cap.
(v) The installed filling material (n) Duties of inspector. In addition to
must meet the requirements of CGA C– the requirements of § 178.35, the inspec-
12 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter); tor is required to—
and (1) Certify chemical analyses of steel

(vi) Porosity of filling material may used, signed by manufacturer thereof;
not exceed 80 percent except that fill- also verify by, check analyses of sam-
ing material with a porosity of up to 92 ples taken from each heat or from 1 out
68
of each lot of 200 or less, plates, shells, (b) Authorized steel. The authorized
or tubes used. steel is as specified in table I of appen-
(2) Verify compliance of cylinder dix A to this part.
shells with all shell requirements; in- (c) Identification of steel. Material
spect inside before closing in both ends; must be identified by any suitable
verify heat treatment as proper; obtain method except that plates and billets
all samples for all tests and for check for hot-drawn cylinders must be
analyses; witness all tests; verify marked with heat number.
threads by gauge; report volumetric ca- (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be
pacity and minimum thickness of wall manufactured using equipment and
noted. processes adequate to ensure that each
cylinder produced conforms to the re-
(3) Prepare report on manufacture of
quirements of this subpart. No defect is
steel shells in form prescribed in
permitted that is likely to weaken the
§ 178.35. Furnish one copy to manufac-
finished cylinder appreciably. A rea-
turer and three copies to the company sonably smooth and uniform surface
that is to complete the cylinders. finish is required. Welding procedures
(4) Determine porosity of filling and and operators must be qualified in ac-
tare weights; verify compliance of cordance with CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR,
marking with prescribed requirements; see § 171.7 of this subchapter).
obtain necessary copies of steel shell (e) Footrings. Exposed bottom welds
reports; and furnish complete reports on cylinders over 18 inches long must
required by this specification to the be protected by footrings.
person who has completed the manu- (f) Welding or brazing. Welding or
facture of the cylinders and, upon re- brazing for any purpose whatsoever is
quest, to the purchaser. The test re- prohibited except as follows:
ports must be retained by the inspector (1) The attachment to the tops or
for fifteen years from the original test bottoms of cylinders of neckrings,
date of the cylinder. footrings, handlers, bosses, pads, and
(o) Marking. (1) Marking on each cyl- valve protecting rings is authorized
inder must be stamped plainly and per- provided that such attachments and
manently on or near the shoulder, top the portion of the container to which
head, neck or valve protection collar they are attached are made of weldable
which is permanently attached to the steel, the carbon content of which may
cylinder and forming integral part not exceed 0.25 percent.
thereof. (2) Heat treatment is not required
(2) Tare weight of cylinder, in pounds after welding or brazing weldable low
and ounces, must be marked on the carbon parts to attachments, specified
cylinder. in paragraph (f)(1) of this section, of
(3) Cylinders, not completed, when similar material which have been pre-
viously welded or brazed to the top or
delivered must each be marked for
bottom of cylinders and properly heat
identification of each lot of 200 or less.
treated, provided such subsequent
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as welding or brazing does not produce a
amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR temperature in excess of 400 °F in any
61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002; part of the top or bottom material.
68 FR 75748, 75749, Dec. 31, 2003] (g) Wall thickness; wall stress. The wall
thickness/wall stress of the cylinder
§ 178.60 Specification 8AL steel cyl- must conform to the following:
inders with porous fillings for acet-
ylene. (1) The calculated wall stress at 750
psi may not exceed 35,000 psi, or one-
(a) Type and service pressure. A DOT half of the minimum ultimate strength
8AL cylinder is a seamless steel cyl- of the steel as determined in paragraph
inder with a service pressure of 250 (l) of this section, whichever value is
psig. However, the attachment of heads the smaller. The measured wall thick-
by welding or by brazing by dipping ness may not include galvanizing or

process and a welded circumferential other protective coating.
body seam is authorized. Longitudinal (i) Calculation of wall stress must be
seams are not authorized. made by the formula:
69
§ 178.60 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) sure of between 500 and 600 psig and
Where:
show no defect. If a hydrostatically
tested cylinder fails, each cylinder in
P = 750 psig (minimum test pressure); the lot may be hydrostatically tested
D = outside diameter in inches; and those passing are acceptable.
d = inside diameter in inches. (k) Leakage test. Cylinders with bot-
(ii) Either D or d must be calculated toms closed in by spinning must be
from the relation D = d + 2t, where t = leakage tested by setting the interior
minimum wall thickness. air or gas pressure at not less than the
(2) Cylinders with a wall thickness service pressure. Any cylinder that
less than 0.100 inch, the ratio of leaks must be rejected.
straight side wall length to outside di- (l) Physical test. A physical test must
ameter may not exceed 3.5. be conducted as follows;
(3) For cylinders having outside di- (1) The test is required on 2 speci-
ameter over 5 inches, the minimum mens cut longitudinally from 1 cyl-
wall thickness must be 0.087 inch. inder or part thereof taken at random
(h) Heat treatment. Each cylinder out of each lot of 200 or less, after heat
must be uniformly and properly heat treatment.
treated, prior to tests, by any suitable (2) Specimens must conform to a
method in excess of 1100 °F. Heat treat- gauge length of 8 inches with a width
ment must be accomplished after all not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge length 2
forming and welding operations, except inches with a width not over 11⁄2 inches,
that when brazed joints are used, heat or a gauge length at least 24 times
treatment must follow any forming thickness with a width not over 6 times
and welding operations but may be thickness is authorized when a cylinder
done before, during, or after the braz- wall is not over 3⁄16 inch thick.
ing operations. Liquid quenching is not (3) The yield strength in tension
authorized. must be the stress corresponding to a
(i) Openings. Standard taper pipe
threads required in all openings. The
gauge length. The following conditions
length of the opening may not be less
apply:
than as specified for American Stand-
ard pipe threads; tapped to gauge; (i) The yield strength must be deter-
clean cut, even, and without checks. mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or
(j) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as
must successfully withstand a hydro- prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7
static test as follows: of this subchapter).
(1) The test must be by water-jacket, (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under
or other suitable method, operated so load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex-
as to obtain accurate data. The pres- tension under load’’) corresponding to
sure gauge must permit reading to an the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion manent strain occurs may be deter-
gauge must permit reading of total ex- mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per- culating the elastic extension of the
cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. gauge length under appropriate load
(2) Pressure must be maintained for and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
longer to ensure complete expansion. culations must be based on an elastic
Any internal pressure applied after modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of
heat-treatment and previous to the of- controversy, the entire stress-strain
ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of diagram must be plotted and the yield
the test pressure. strength determined from the 0.2 off-
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion set.
may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- (iii) For the purpose of strain meas-
umetric expansion at test pressure. urement, the initial strain must be set
(4) One cylinder out of each lot of 200 while the specimen is under a stress of
or less must be hydrostatically tested 12,000 psi, the strain indicator reading
to at least 750 psig. Cylinders not so being set at the calculated cor-
tested must be examined under pres- responding strain.
70
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing ized. Subsequent thereto, cylinders

machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
minute during yield strength deter- ceptable. Repair by welding is author-
mination. ized.
(m) Elongation. Physical test speci- (p) Porous filling. (1) Cylinders must
mens must show at least a 40 percent be filled with a porous material in ac-
elongation for a 2 inch gauge length or cordance with the following:
at least a 20 percent elongation in (i) The porous material may not dis-
other cases. Except that these elon- integrate or sag when wet with solvent
gation percentages may be reduced nu-
or when subjected to normal service;
merically by 2 for 2 inch specimens and
1 in other cases for each 7,500 psi incre- (ii) The filling material must be uni-
ment of tensile strength above 50,000 form in quality and free of voids, ex-
psi to a maximum of four such incre- cept that a well drilled into the filling
ments. material beneath the valve is author-
(n) Weld tests. Specimens taken ized if the well is filled with a material
across the circumferentially welded of such type that the functions of the
seam must be cut from one cylinder filling material are not impaired;
taken at random from each lot of 200 or (iii) Overall shrinkage of the filling
less cylinders after heat treatment and material is authorized if the total
must pass satisfactorily the following clearance between the cylinder shell
tests: and filling material, after solvent has
(1) Tensile test. A specimen must be been added, does not exceed 1⁄2 of 1 per-
cut from one cylinder of each lot of 200 cent of the respective diameter or
or less, or welded test plate. The speci- length but not to exceed 1⁄8 inch, meas-
men must be taken from across the ured diametrically and longitudinally;
major seam and must be prepared and (iv) The clearance may not impair
tested in accordance with and must the functions of the filling material;
meet the requirements of CGA Pam-
(v) The installed filling material
phlet C–3. Should this specimen fail to
must meet the requirements of CGA C–
meet the requirements, specimens may
12 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter);
be taken from two additional cylinders
or welded test plates from the same lot and
and tested. If either of the latter speci- (vi) Porosity of filling material may
mens fail to meet the requirements, not exceed 80 percent except that fill-
the entire lot represented must be re- ing material with a porosity of up to 92
jected. percent may be used when tested with
(2) Guided bend test. A root bend test satisfactory results in accordance with
specimen must be cut from the cyl- CGA Pamphlet C–12.
inder or welded test plate, used for the (2) When the porosity of each cyl-
tensile test specified in paragraph inder is not known, a cylinder taken at
(n)(1) of this section. Specimens must random from a lot of 200 or less must
be prepared and tested in accordance be tested for porosity. If the test cyl-
with and must meet the requirements inder fails, each cylinder in the lot
of CGA Pamphlet C–3. may be tested individually and those
(3) Alternate guided-bend test. This cylinders that pass the test are accept-
test may be used and must be as re- able.
quired by CGA Pamphlet C–3. The spec- (3) For filling that is molded and
imen must be bent until the elongation dried before insertion in cylinders, po-
at the outer surface, adjacent to the
rosity test may be made on sample
root of the weld, between the lightly
block taken at random from material
scribed gage lines-a to b, must be at
least 20 percent, except that this per- to be used.
centage may be reduced for steels hav- (4) The porosity of the filling mate-
ing a tensile strength in excess of 50,000 rial must be determined; the amount of
psi, as provided in paragraph (m) of solvent at 70 °F for a cylinder:

this section. (i) Having shell volumetric capacity
(o) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- above 20 pounds water capacity (nomi-
ment of rejected cylinders is author- nal) may not exceed the following:
71
§ 178.61 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
Maximum acetone upon request, to the purchaser. The

Percent porosity of filler solvent percent shell test reports must be retained by the in-
capacity by volume
spector for fifteen years from the origi-
90 to 92 ......................................... 43.4 nal test date of the cylinder.
87 to 90 ......................................... 42.0
83 to 87 ......................................... 40.0 (s) Marking. (1) Tare weight of cyl-
80 to 83 ......................................... 38.6 inder, in pounds and ounces, must be
75 to 80 ......................................... 36.2 marked on the cylinder.
70 to 75 ......................................... 33.8
65 to 70 ......................................... 31.4
(2) Cylinders, not completed, when
delivered must each be marked for
(ii) Having volumetric capacity of 20 identification of each lot of 200 or less.
pounds or less water capacity (nomi- (3) Markings must be stamped plainly
nal), may not exceed the following: and permanently in locations in ac-
cordance with the following:
Maximum acetone (i) On shoulders and top heads not
Percent porosity of filler solvent percent shell
capacity by volume less than 0.087 inch thick; or
(ii) On neck, valve boss, valve protec-
90 to 92 ......................................... 41.8
83 to 90 ......................................... 38.5 tion sleeve, or similar part perma-
80 to 83 ......................................... 37.1 nently attached to the top end of cyl-
75 to 80 ......................................... 34.8 inder; or
70 to 75 ......................................... 32.5
65 to 70 ......................................... 30.2 (iii) On a plate of ferrous material at-
tached to the top of the cylinder or
(q) Tare weight. The tare weight is permanent part thereof; the plate must
the combined weight of the cylinder be at least 1⁄16 inch thick, and must be
proper, porous filling, valve, and sol- attached by welding, or by brazing at a
vent, but without removable cap. temperature of at least 1,100 °F
(r) Duties of inspector. In addition to throughout all edges of the plate. Suffi-
the requirements of § 178.35, the inspec- cient space must be left on the plate to
tor shall— provide for stamping at least four (4)
(1) Certify chemical analyses of steel retest dates.
used, signed by manufacturer thereof; [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
also verify by check analyses, of sam- amended at 66 FR 45386, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001;
ples taken from each heat or from 1 out 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, 75749,
of each lot of 200 or less plates, shells, Dec. 31, 2003]
or tubes used.
(2) Verify compliance of cylinder § 178.61 Specification 4BW welded
shells with all shell requirements, in- steel cylinders with electric-arc
spect inside before closing in both ends, welded longitudinal seam.
verify heat treatment as proper; obtain (a) Type, size and service pressure. A
all samples for all tests and for check DOT 4BW cylinder is a welded type
analyses, witness all tests; verify steel cylinder with a longitudinal elec-
threads by gauge, report volumetric ca- tric-arc welded seam, a water capacity
pacity and minimum thickness of wall (nominal) not over 1,000 pounds and a
noted. service pressure at least 225 and not
(3) Report percentage of each speci- over 500 psig gauge. Cylinders closed in
fied alloying element in the steel. Pre- by spinning process are not authorized.
pare report on manufacture of steel (b) Authorized steel. Steel used in the
shells in form prescribed in § 178.35. construction of the cylinder must con-
Furnish one copy to manufacturer and form to the following:
three copies to the company that is to (1) The body of the cylinder must be
complete the cylinders. constructed of steel conforming to the
(4) Determine porosity of filling and limits specified in table 1 of appendix A
tare weights; verify compliance of to this part.
marking with prescribed requirements; (2) Material for heads must meet the
obtain necessary copies of steel shell requirements of paragraph (a) of this
reports prescribed in paragraph (b) of section or be open hearth, electric or
this section; and furnish complete test basic oxygen carbon steel of uniform
reports required by this specification quality. Content percent may not ex-
to the person who has completed the ceed the following: Carbon 0.25, Man-
manufacturer of the cylinders and, ganese 0.60, Phosphorus 0.045, Sulfur
72
0.050. Heads must be hemispherical or completely. Maximum joint efficiency

ellipsoidal in shape with a maximum must be 0.90 when one cylinder from
ratio of 2.1. If low carbon steel is used, each lot of 50 consecutively welded cyl-
the thickness of such heads must be de- inders is spot radiographed. In addi-
termined by using a maximum wall tion, one out of the first five cylinders
stress of 24,000 p.s.i. in the formula de- welded following a shut down of weld-
scribed in paragraph (f)(4) of this sec- ing operations exceeding four hours
tion. must be spot radiographed. Spot
(c) Identification of material. Material radiographs, when required, must be
must be identified by any suitable made of a finished welded cylinder and
method. must include the girth weld for 2
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be inches in both directions from the
manufactured using equipment and intersection of the longitudinal and
processes adequate to ensure that each girth welds and include at least 6
cylinder produced conforms to the re- inches of the longitudinal weld. Max-
quirements of this subpart and the fol- imum joint efficacy of 0.75 must be per-
lowing: missible without radiography.
(1) No defect is permitted that is (4) Welding procedures and operators
likely to weaken the finished cylinder must be qualified in accordance with
appreciably. A reasonably smooth and CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of
uniform surface is required. Exposed this subchapter).
bottom welds on cylinders over 18 (e) Welding of attachments. The at-
inches long must be protected by tachment to the tops and bottoms only
footrings. Minimum thickness of heads of cylinders by welding of neckrings,
may not be less than 90 percent of the footrings, handles, bosses, pads and
required thickness of the sidewall. valve protection rings is authorized
Heads must be concave to pressure. provided that such attachments and
(2) Circumferential seams must be by the portion of the container to which
electric-arc welding. Joints must be they are attached are made of weldable
butt with one member offset (joggle steel, the carbon content of which may
butt) or lap with minimum overlap of not exceed 0.25 percent.
at least four times nominal sheet (f) Wall thickness. For outside diame-
thickness. ters over 6 inches the minimum wall
(3) Longitudinal seams in shells must thickness must be 0.078 inch. For a cyl-
conform to the following: inder with a wall thickness less than
(i) Longitudinal electric-arc welded 0.100 inch, the ratio of tangential
seams must be of the butt welded type. length to outside diameter may not ex-
ceed 4 to1 (4:1). In any case the min-
Welds must be made by a machine
imum wall thickness must be such that
process including automatic feed and
the wall stress calculated by the for-
welding guidance mechanisms. Longi-
mula listed in paragraph (f)(4) of this
tudinal seams must have complete
section may not exceed the lesser value
joint penetration, and must be free
of any of the following:
from undercuts, overlaps or abrupt
(1) The value referenced in paragraph
ridges or valleys. Misalignment of mat-
(b) of this section for the particular
ing butt edges may not exceed 1⁄6 of
material under consideration.
nominal sheet thickness or 1⁄32 inch
(2) One-half of the minimum tensile
whichever is less. All joints with nomi-
strength of the material determined as
nal sheet thickness up to and including
1⁄8 inch must be tightly butted. When required in paragraph (j) of this sec-
tion.
nominal sheet thickness is greater
(3) 35,000 psi.
than 1⁄8 inch, the joint must be gapped
(4) Stress must be calculated by the
with maximum distance equal to one-
following formula:
half the nominal sheet thickness or 1⁄32
inch whichever is less. Joint design, S = [2P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / [E(D2 ¥ d2)]
preparation and fit-up must be such where:
that requirements of this paragraph (d) S = wall stress, psi;

are satisfied. P = service pressure, psig;
(ii) Maximum joint efficiency must D = outside diameter, inches;
be 1.0 when each seam is radiographed d = inside diameter, inches;
73
§ 178.61 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
E = joint efficiency of the longitudinal seam ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of
(from paragraph (d) of this section). the test pressure.
(g) Heat treatment. Each cylinder (3) Permanent volumetric expansion
must be uniformly and properly heat may not exceed 10 percent of the total
treated prior to test by the applicable volumetric expansion at test pressure.
method referenced in Table 1 of appen- (4) Cylinders must be tested as fol-
dix A to this part. Heat treatment lows:
must be accomplished after all forming (i) At least 1 cylinder selected at ran-
and welding operations. Heat treat- dom out of each lot of 200 or less must
ment is not required after welding or be tested as outlined in paragraphs
brazing of weldable low carbon parts to (i)(1), (i)(2), and (i)(3) of this section to
attachments of similar material which at least two times service pressure.
have been previously welded to the top (ii) All cylinders not tested as out-
or bottom of cylinders and properly lined in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of this sec-
heat treated, provided such subsequent tion must be examined under pressure
welding or brazing does not produce a of at least two times service pressure
temperature in excess of 400 °F in any and show no defect.
part of the top or bottom material. (5) One finished cylinder selected at
(h) Openings in cylinders. Openings in random out of each lot of 500 or less
the cylinder must conform to the fol- successively produced must be
lowing: hydrostatically tested to 4 times serv-
(1) All openings must be in the heads ice pressure without bursting.
or bases. (j) Physical tests. Cylinders must be
(2) Openings in cylinders must be pro- subjected to a physical test as follows:
vided with adequate fittings, bosses, or (1) Specimens must be taken from
pads, integral with or securely at- one cylinder after heat treatment and
tached to the cylinder by welding. chosen at random from each lot of 200
(3) Threads must comply with the fol- or less, as follows:
lowing: (i) Body specimen. One specimen
(i) Threads must be clean cut and to must be taken longitudinally from the
gauge. body section at least 90 degrees away
(ii) Taper threads must be of length from the weld.
not less than as specified for American (ii) Head specimen. One specimen
Standard Taper Pipe threads. must be taken from either head on a
(iii) Straight threads, having at least cylinder when both heads are made of
4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and the same material. However, if the two
calculated shear strength at least 10 heads are made of differing materials,
times the test pressure of the cylinder; a specimen must be taken from each
gaskets required, adequate to prevent head.
leakage. (iii) If due to welded attachments on
(4) Closure of fittings, boss or pads the top head there is insufficient sur-
must be adequate to prevent leakage. face from which to take a specimen, it
(i) Hydrostatic test. Cylinders must may be taken from a representative
withstand a hydrostatic test, as fol- head of the same heat treatment as the
lows: test cylinder.
(1) The test must be by water-jacket, (2) Specimens must conform to the
or other suitable method, operated so following:
as to obtain accurate data. The pres- (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a
sure gauge must permit readings to an width not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge
accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion length of 2 inches with a width not
gauge must permit readings of total over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length at
volumetric expansion to an accuracy least 24 times thickness with a width
either of 1 percent or 0.1 cubic centi- not over 6 times thickness is author-
meter. ized when a cylinder wall is not over 3⁄16
(2) Pressure must be maintained for inch thick.
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip

longer to ensure complete expansion. ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
Any internal pressure applied after may be flattened to within 1 inch of
heat treatment and previous to the of- each end of the reduced section.
74
(iii) When size of the cylinder does (l) Tests of welds. Welds must be sub-
not permit securing straight speci- jected to the following tests:
mens, the specimens may be taken in (1) Tensile test. A specimen must be
any location or direction and may be cut from one cylinder of each lot of 200
straightened or flattened cold, by pres- or less. The specimen must be taken
sure only, not by blows when speci- from across the longitudinal seam and
mens are so taken and prepared, the in- must be prepared and tested in accord-
spector’s report must show in connec- ance with and must meet the require-
tion with record of physical tests de- ments of CGA Pamphlet C–3.
tailed information in regard to such (2) Guided bend test. A root test speci-
specimens.
men must be cut from the cylinder
(iv) Heating of a specimen for any
used for the tensile test specified in
purpose is not authorized.
paragraph (l)(1) of this section. Speci-
mens must be taken from across the
must be the stress corresponding to a
permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the longitudinal seam and must be pre-
gauge length. The following conditions pared and tested in accordance with
apply: and must meet the requirements of
(i) The yield strength must be deter- CGA Pamphlet C–3.
mined by either the ‘‘off-set’’ method (3) Alternate guided bend test. This
or the ‘‘extension under load’’ method test may be used and must be as re-
as prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see quired by CGA Pamphlet C–3. The spec-
§ 171.7 of this subchapter). imen must be bent until the elongation
(ii) In using the ‘‘extension under at the outer surface, adjacent to the
load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- root of the weld, between the lightly
tension under load’’), corresponding to scribed gauge lines a to b, must be at
the stress at which the 0.2-percent per- least 20 percent, except that this per-
manent strain occurs may be deter- centage may be reduced for steels hav-
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- ing a tensile strength in excess of 50,000
culating the elastic extension of the psi, as provided in paragraph (k) of this
gauge length under appropriate load section.
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the (m) Radiographic examination. Welds
gauge length. Elastic extension cal- of the cylinders must be subjected to a
culations must be based on an elastic radiographic examination as follows:
modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of (1) Radiographic inspection must
controversy, the entire stress-strain conform to the techniques and accept-
diagram must be plotted and the yield ability criteria set forth in CGA Pam-
strength determined from the 0.2-per- phlet C–3. When fluoroscopic inspection
cent offset.
is used, permanent film records need
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas-
not be retained.
urement, the initial strain reference
must be set while the specimen is (2) Should spot radiographic exam-
under a stress of 12,000 psi and the ination fail to meet the requirements
strain indicator reading being set at of paragraph (m)(1) of this section, two
the calculated corresponding strain. additional welds from the same lot of
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing 50 cylinders or less must be examined,
machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per and if either of these fail to meet the
minute during yield strength deter- requirements, each cylinder must be
mination. examined as previously outlined; only
(k) Elongation. Physical test speci- those passing are acceptable.
mens must show at least a 40 percent (n) Rejected cylinders. (1) Unless oth-
elongation for a 2-inch gauge length or erwise stated, if a sample cylinder or
at least a 20 percent elongation in specimen taken from a lot of cylinders
other cases. Except that these elon- fails the prescribed test, then two addi-
gation percentages may be reduced nu- tional specimens must be selected from
merically by 2 for 2-inch specimens and the same lot and subjected to the pre-
by 1 in other cases for each 7,500 psi in- scribed test. If either of these fails the
crement of tensile strength above 50,000 test, then the entire lot must be re-
psi to a maximum of four increments. jected.
75
§ 178.65 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(2) Reheat treatment of rejected cyl- (2) Test pressure. The minimum test
inders is authorized. Subsequent there- pressure is the maximum pressure of
to, cylinders must pass all prescribed contents at 130 °F or 180 p.s.i.g. which-
tests to be acceptable. Repair of welded ever is greater.
seams by welding is authorized pro- (3) Pressure of contents. The term
vided that all defective metal is cut ‘‘pressure of contents’’ as used in this
away and the joint is rewelded as pre- specification means the total pressure
scribed for original welded joints. of all the materials to be shipped in the
(o) Markings. Markings must be cylinder.
stamped plainly and permanently in (b) Material; steel or aluminum. The
any of the following locations on the cylinder must be constructed of either
cylinder: steel or aluminum conforming to the
(1) On shoulders and top heads when following requirements:
they are not less than 0.087-inch thick. (1) Steel. (i) The steel analysis must
(2) On a metal plate attached to the conform to the following:
top of the cylinder or permanent part Ladle Check
thereof; sufficient space must be left on analysis analysis
the plate to provide for stamping at
Carbon, maximum percent .................... 0.12 0.15
least six retest dates; the plate must be Phosphorus, maximum percent ............. .04 .05
at least 1⁄16-inch thick and must be at- Sulfur, maximum percent ...................... .05 .06
tached by welding, or by brazing. The
brazing rod is to melt at a temperature (ii) For a cylinder made of seamless
of 1100 °F Welding or brazing must be steel tubing with integrally formed
along all the edges of the plate. ends, hot drawn, and finished, content
(3) On the neck, valve boss, valve pro- percent for the following may not ex-
tection sleeve, or similar part perma- ceed: Carbon, 0.55; phosphorous, 0.045;
nently attached to the top of the cyl- sulfur, 0.050.
inder. (iii) For non-heat treated welded
(4) On the footring permanently at- steel cylinders, adequately killed deep
tached to the cylinder, provided the drawing quality steel is required.
water capacity of the cylinder does not (iv) Longitudinal or helical welded
exceed 25 pounds. cylinders are not authorized for service
(p) Inspector’s report. In addition to pressures in excess of 500 p.s.i.g.
the information required by § 178.35, the (2) Aluminum. Aluminum is not au-
inspector’s report must indicate the thorized for service pressures in excess
type and amount of radiography. of 500 psig. The analysis of the alu-
minum must conform to the Aluminum
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
amended at 64 FR 51919, Sept. 27, 1999; 66 FR
Association standard for alloys 1060,
45386, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51654, Aug. 6, 1100, 1170, 3003, 5052, 5086, 5154, 6061, and
2002; 67 FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 57633, 6063, as specified in its publication en-
Oct. 6, 2003; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003] titled ‘‘Aluminum Standards and
Data’’ (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
§ 178.65 Specification 39 non-reusable chapter).
(non-refillable) cylinders. (3) Material with seams, cracks, lam-
(a) Type, size, service pressure, and test inations, or other injurious defects not
pressure. A DOT 39 cylinder is a seam- permitted.
less, welded, or brazed cylinder with a (4) Material used must be identified
service pressure not to exceed 80 per- by any suitable method.
cent of the test pressure. Spherical (c) Manufacture. (1) General manufac-
pressure vessels are authorized and turing requirements are as follows:
covered by references to cylinders in (i) The surface finish must be uni-
this specification. form and reasonably smooth.
(1) Size limitation. Maximum water ca- (ii) Inside surfaces must be clean,
pacity may not exceed: (i) 55 pounds dry, and free of loose particles.
(1,526 cubic inches) for a service pres- (iii) No defect of any kind is per-
sure of 500 p.s.i.g. or less, and (ii) 10 mitted if it is likely to weaken a fin-
pounds (277 cubic inches) for a service ished cylinder.
pressure in excess of 500 p.s.i.g. (2) Requirements for seams:
76
(i) Brazing is not authorized on alu- D = Outside diameter, in inches;

minum cylinders. t = Minimum wall thickness, in inches.
(ii) Brazing material must have a (e) Openings and attachments. Open-
melting point of not lower than 1,000 ings and attachments must conform to
°F. the following:
(iii) Brazed seams must be assembled (1) Openings and attachments are
with proper fit to ensure complete pen- permitted on heads only.
etration of the brazing material (2) All openings and their reinforce-
throughout the brazed joint. ments must be within an imaginary
(iv) Minimum width of brazed joints circle, concentric to the axis of the cyl-
must be at least four times the thick- inder. The diameter of the circle may
ness of the shell wall. not exceed 80 percent of the outside di-
(v) Brazed seams must have design ameter of the cylinder. The plane of
strength equal to or greater than 1.5 the circle must be parallel to the plane
times the minimum strength of the of a circumferential weld and normal
shell wall. to the long axis of the cylinder.
(vi) Welded seams must be properly
(3) Unless a head has adequate thick-
aligned and welded by a method that
ness, each opening must be reinforced
provides clean, uniform joints with
by a securely attached fitting, boss,
adequate penetration.
pad, collar, or other suitable means.
(vii) Welded joints must have a
(4) Material used for welded openings
strength equal to or greater than the
and attachments must be of weldable
minimum strength of the shell mate-
quality and compatible with the mate-
rial in the finished cylinder.
rial of the cylinder.
(3) Attachments to the cylinder are
permitted by any means which will not (f) Pressure tests. (1) Each cylinder
be detrimental to the integrity of the must be tested at an internal pressure
cylinder. Welding or brazing of attach- of at least the test pressure and must
ments to the cylinder must be com- be held at that pressure for at least 30
pleted prior to all pressure tests. seconds.
(4) Welding procedures and operators (i) The leakage test must be con-
must be qualified in accordance with ducted by submersion under water or
CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of by some other method that will be
this subchapter). equally sensitive.
(d) Wall thickness. The minimum wall (ii) If the cylinder leaks, evidences
thickness must be such that the wall visible distortion, or any other defect,
stress at test pressure does not exceed while under test, it must be rejected
the yield strength of the material of (see paragraph (h) of this section).
the finished cylinder wall. Calculations (2) One cylinder taken from the be-
must be made by the following for- ginning of each lot, and one from each
mulas: 1,000 or less successively produced
(1) Calculation of the stress for cyl- within the lot thereafter, must be
inders must be made by the following hydrostatically tested to destruction.
formula: The entire lot must be rejected (see
paragraph (h) of this section) if:
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) (i) A failure occurs at a gage pressure
Where: less than 2.0 times the test pressure;
S = Wall stress, in psi; (ii) A failure initiates in a braze or a
P = Test pressure in psig; weld or the heat affected zone thereof;
D = Outside diameter, in inches; (iii) A failure is other than in the
d = Inside diameter, in inches. sidewall of a cylinder longitudinal with
(2) Calculation of the stress for its long axis; or
spheres must be made by the following (iv) In a sphere, a failure occurs in
formula: any opening, reinforcement, or at a
point of attachment.
S = PD / 4t (3) A ‘‘lot’’ is defined as the quantity

Where: of cylinders successively produced per
S = Wall stress, in psi; production shift (not exceeding 10
P = Test pressure i psig; hours) having identical size, design,
77
§ 178.68 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
construction, material, heat treat- (2) Required markings are as follows:

ment, finish, and quality. (i) DOT-39.
(g) Flattening test. One cylinder must (ii) NRC.
be taken from the beginning of produc- (iii) The service pressure.
tion of each lot (as defined in para- (iv) The test pressure.
graph (f)(3) of this section) and sub- (v) The registration number (M****)
jected to a flattening test as follows: of the manufacturer.
(1) The flattening test must be made (vi) The lot number.
on a cylinder that has been tested at (vii) The date of manufacture if the
test pressure. lot number does not establish the date
(2) A ring taken from a cylinder may of manufacture.
be flattened as an alternative to a test (viii) With one of the following state-
on a complete cylinder. The test ring ments:
may not include the heat affected zone (A) For cylinders manufactured prior
or any weld. However, for a sphere, the to October 1, 1996: ‘‘Federal law forbids
test ring may include the circumferen- transportation if refilled-penalty up to
tial weld if it is located at a 45 degree $25,000 fine and 5 years imprisonment
angle to the ring, ±5 degrees. (49 U.S.C. 1809)’’ or ‘‘Federal law for-
(3) The flattening must be between 60 bids transportation if refilled-penalty
degrees included-angle, wedge shaped up to $500,000 fine and 5 years imprison-
knife edges, rounded to a 0.5 inch ra- ment (49 U.S.C. 5124).’’
dius. (B) For cylinders manufactured on or
(4) Cylinders and test rings may not after October 1, 1996: ‘‘Federal law for-
crack when flattened so that their bids transportation if refilled-penalty
outer surfaces are not more than six up to $500,000 fine and 5 years imprison-
times wall thickness apart when made ment (49 U.S.C. 5124).’’
of steel or not more than ten times (3) The markings required by para-
wall thickness apart when made of alu- graphs (i)(2)(i) through (i)(2)(v) of this
minum. section must be in numbers and letters
(5) If any cylinder or ring cracks at least 1⁄8 inch high and displayed se-
when subjected to the specified flat- quentially. For example:
tening test, the lot of cylinders rep- DOT-39 NRC 250/500 M1001.
resented by the test must be rejected
(see paragraph (h) of this section). (4) No person may mark any cylinder
(h) Rejected cylinders. Rejected cyl- with the specification identification
inders must conform to the following ‘‘DOT-39’’ unless it was manufactured
requirements: in compliance with the requirements of
(1) If the cause for rejection of a lot this section and its manufacturer has a
is determinable, and if by test or in- registration number (M****) from the
spection defective cylinders are elimi- Associate Administrator.
nated from the lot, the remaining cyl- [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
inders must be qualified as a new lot amended at 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR
under paragraphs (f) and (g) of this sec- 45389, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002;
tion. 68 FR 75748, 75749, Dec. 31, 2003]
(2) Repairs to welds are permitted.
Following repair, a cylinder must pass § 178.68 Specification 4E welded alu-
the pressure test specified in paragraph minum cylinders.
(f) of this section. (a) Type, size and service pressure. A
(3) If a cylinder made from seamless DOT 4E cylinder is a welded aluminum
steel tubing fails the flattening test de- cylinder with a water capacity (nomi-
scribed in paragraph (g) of this section, nal) of not over 1,000 pounds and a serv-
suitable uniform heat treatment must ice pressure of at least 225 to not over
be used on each cylinder in the lot. All 500 psig. The cylinder must be con-
prescribed tests must be performed structed of not more than two seamless
subsequent to this heat treatment. drawn shells with no more than one
(i) Markings. (1) The markings re- circumferential weld. The circumferen-
quired by this section must be durable tial weld may not be closer to the point
and waterproof. The requirements of of tangency of the cylindrical portion
§ 178.35(h) do not apply to this section. with the shoulder than 20 times the
78
cylinder wall thickness. Cylinders or (ii) One-half of the minimum tensile

shells closed in by spinning process and strength of the material as required in
cylinders with longitudinal seams are paragraph (j) of this section.
not authorized. (2) Calculation must be made by the
(b) Authorized material. The cylinder following formula:
must be constructed of aluminum of S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2)
uniform quality. The following chem-
ical analyses are authorized: Where:
TABLE 1—AUTHORIZED MATERIALS P = minimum test pressure prescribed for
water jacket test;
Chemical analysis—limits in D = outside diameter in inches;
Designation percent 5154 1
d = inside diameter in inches.
Iron plus silicon .................... 0.45 maximum.
Copper .................................. 0.10 maximum. (3) Minimum thickness of heads and
Manganese ........................... 0.10 maximum. bottoms may not be less than the min-
Magnesium ........................... 3.10/3.90. imum required thickness of the side
Chromium ............................. 0.15/0.35. wall.
Zinc ....................................... 0.20 maximum.
Titanium ................................ 0.20 maximum. (g) Opening in cylinder. Openings in
Others, each ......................... 0.05 maximum. cylinders must conform to the fol-
Others, total .......................... 0.15 maximum. lowing:
Aluminum .............................. remainder.
(1) All openings must be in the heads
1 Analysis must regularly be made only for the elements
or bases.
specifically mentioned in this table. If, however, the presence
of other elements is indicated in the course of routine anal- (2) Each opening in cylinders, except
ysis, further analysis should be made to determine conform- those for safety devices, must be pro-
ance with the limits specified for other elements.
vided with a fitting, boss, or pad, se-
(c) Identification. Material must be curely attached to cylinder by welding
identified by any suitable method that by inert gas shielded arc process or by
will identify the alloy and manufactur- threads. If threads are used, they must
er’s lot number. comply with the following:
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be (i) Threads must be clean-cut, even,
manufactured using equipment and without checks and cut to gauge.
processes adequate to ensure that each (ii) Taper threads to be of length not
cylinder produced conforms to the re- less than as specified for American
quirements of this subpart. No defect is Standard taper pipe threads.
permitted that is likely to weaken the (iii) Straight threads, having at least
finished cylinder appreciably. A rea- 4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and
sonably smooth and uniform surface calculated shear strength at least 10
finish is required. All welding must be times the test pressure of the cylinder;
by the gas shielded arc process. gaskets required, adequate to prevent
(e) Welding. The attachment to the leakage.
tops and bottoms only of cylinders by (3) Closure of a fitting, boss, or pad
welding of neckrings or flanges, must be adequate to prevent leakage.
footrings, handles, bosses and pads and (h) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder
valve protection rings is authorized. must successfully withstand a hydro-
However, such attachments and the static test, as follows:
portion of the cylinder to which it is (1) The test must be by water jacket,
attached must be made of weldable alu- or other suitable method, operated so
minum alloys. as to obtain accurate data. The pres-
(f) Wall thickness. The wall thickness sure gauge must permit reading to an
of the cylinder must conform to the accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion
following: gauge must permit a reading of the
(1) The minimum wall thickness of total expansion to an accuracy either
the cylinder must be 0.140 inch. In any of 1 percent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
case, the minimum wall thickness (2) Pressure of 2 times service pres-
must be such that calculated wall sure must be maintained for at least 30
stress at twice service pressure may seconds and sufficiently longer to in-
not exceed the lesser value of either of sure complete expansion. Any internal
the following: pressure applied previous to the official
(i) 20,000 psi. test may not exceed 90 percent of the
79
§ 178.68 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
test pressure. If, due to failure of the (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). The
test apparatus, the test pressure can- root of the weld (inside surface of the
not be maintained, the test may be re- cylinder) must be located away from
peated at a pressure increased by 10 the ram of the jig. The specimen must
percent over the pressure otherwise not show a crack or other open defect
specified. exceeding 1⁄8 inch in any direction upon
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion completion of the test. Should this
may not exceed 12 percent of total vol- specimen fail to meet the require-
umetric expansion at test pressure. ments, specimens may be taken from
(4) Cylinders having a calculated wall each of 2 additional cylinders from the
stress of 18,000 psi or less at test pres- same lot and tested. If either of the lat-
sure may be tested as follows:
ter specimens fails to meet require-
(i) At least one cylinder selected at
ments, the entire lot represented must
random out of each lot of 200 or less
must be tested in accordance with be rejected.
paragraphs (h)(1), (h)(2), and (h)(3) of (ii) Alternatively, the specimen may
this section. be tested in a guided bend test jig as il-
(ii) All cylinders not tested as pro- lustrated in Figure 12.1 of The Alu-
vided in paragraph (h)(4)(i) of this sec- minum Association’s 2002 publication,
tion must be examined under pressure ‘‘Welding Aluminum: Theory and Prac-
of at least 2 times service pressure and tice.’’ The root of the weld (inside sur-
show no defect. face of the cylinder) must be located
(5) One finished cylinder selected at away from the mandrel of the jig. No
random out of each lot of 1,000 or less specimen must show a crack or other
must be hydrostatically tested to 4 open defect exceeding 1⁄8 inch in any di-
times the service pressure without rection upon completion of the test.
bursting. Inability to meet this re- Should this specimen fail to meet the
quirement must result in rejection of requirements, specimens may be taken
the lot. from each of 2 additional cylinders
(i) Flattening test. After hydrostatic from the same lot and tested. If either
testing, a flattening test is required on of the latter specimens fails to meet
one section of a cylinder, taken at ran- requirements, the entire lot rep-
dom out of each lot of 200 or less as fol- resented must be rejected.
lows:
(j) Physical test. A physical test must
(1) If the weld is not at midlength of
be conducted to determine yield
the cylinder, the test section must be
no less in width than 30 times the cyl- strength, tensile strength, elongation,
inder wall thickness. The weld must be and reduction of area of material as
in the center of the section. Weld rein- follows:
forcement must be removed by machin- (1) The test is required on 2 speci-
ing or grinding so that the weld is flush mens cut from one cylinder or part
with the exterior of the parent metal. thereof taken at random out of each
There must be no evidence of cracking lot of 200 or less.
in the sample when it is flattened be- (2) Specimens must conform to the
tween flat plates to no more than 6 following:
times the wall thickness. (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a
(2) Guided bend test. A bend test speci- width not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge
men must be cut from the cylinder length of 2 inches with a width not
used for the physical test specified in over 11⁄2 inches.
paragraph (j) of this section. Specimen (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
must be taken across the seam, must ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
be a minimum of 11⁄2 inches wide, edges may be flattened to within 1 inch of
must be parallel and rounded with a
each end of the reduced section.
file, and back-up strip, if used, must be
removed by machining. The specimen (iii) When size of cylinder does not
shall be tested as follows: permit securing straight specimens,

(i) The specimen must be bent to re- the specimens may be taken in any lo-
fusal in the guided bend test jig as il- cation or direction and may be
lustrated in paragraph 6.10 of CGA C–3
80
straightened or flattened cold, by pres- up strip, if used, must be removed by

sure only, not by blows; when speci- machining. The specimen must be bent
mens are so taken and prepared, the in- to refusal in the guided bend test jig il-
spector’s report must show in connec- lustrated in paragraph 6.10 of CGA
tion with record of physical test de- Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this
tailed information in regard to such subchapter). The root of the weld (in-
specimens. side surface of the cylinder) must be lo-
(iv) Heating of a specimen for any cated away from the ram of the jig. No
purpose is not authorized. specimen must show a crack or other
(3) The yield strength in tension open defect exceeding 1⁄8 inch in any di-
must be the stress corresponding to a rection upon completion of the test.
permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the Should this specimen fail to meet the
gauge length. The following conditions requirements, specimens may be taken
apply: from each of 2 additional cylinders
(i) The yield strength must be deter- from the same lot and tested. If either
mined by the ‘‘offset’’ method as pre- of the latter specimens fail to meet re-
scribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 of quirements, the entire lot represented
this subchapter). must be rejected.
(ii) Cross-head speed of the testing (m) Rejected cylinders. Repair of weld-
machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per ed seams is authorized. Acceptable cyl-
minute during yield strength deter- inders must pass all prescribed tests.
mination. (n) Inspector’s report. In addition to
(k) Acceptable results for physical tests. the information required by § 178.35, the
An acceptable result of the physical record of chemical analyses must also
test requires an elongation to at least include applicable information on iron,
7 percent and yield strength not over 80 titanium, zinc, and magnesium used in
percent of tensile strength. the construction of the cylinder.
(l) Weld tests. Welds of the cylinder
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
are required to successfully pass the amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR
following tests: 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002;
(1) Reduced section tensile test. A speci- 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 54046, Sept.
men must be cut from the cylinder 7, 2004; 74 FR 16143, Apr. 9, 2009]
used for the physical tests specified in
paragraph (j) of this section. The speci- § 178.69 Responsibilities and require-
men must be taken from across the ments for manufacturers of UN
seam, edges must be parallel for a dis- pressure receptacles.
tance of approximately 2 inches on ei- (a) Each manufacturer of a UN pres-
ther side of the weld. The specimen sure receptacle marked with ‘‘USA’’ as
must be fractured in tension. The ap- a country of approval must comply
parent breaking stress calculated on with the requirements in this section.
the minimum wall thickness must be The manufacturer must maintain a
at least equal to 2 times the stress cal- quality system, obtain an approval for
culated under paragraph (f)(2) of this each initial pressure receptacle design
section, and in addition must have an type, and ensure that all production of
actual breaking stress of at least 30,000 UN pressure receptacles meets the ap-
psi. Should this specimen fail to meet plicable requirements.
the requirements, specimens may be (1) Quality system. The manufacturer
taken from 2 additional cylinders from of a UN pressure receptacle must have
the same lot and tested. If either of the its quality system approved by the As-
latter specimens fails to meet require- sociate Administrator. The quality sys-
ments, the entire lot represented must tem will initially be assessed through
be rejected. an audit by the Associate Adminis-
(2) Guided bend test. A bend test speci- trator or his or her representative to
men must be cut from the cylinder determine whether it meets the re-
used for the physical tests specified in quirements of this section. The Asso-
paragraph (j) of this section. Specimen ciate Administrator will notify the
must be taken across the seam, must manufacturer in writing of the results
be 11⁄2 inches wide, edges must be par- of the audit. The notification will con-
allel and rounded with a file, and back- tain the conclusions of the audit and
81
§ 178.70 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
any corrective action required. The As- ministrator will notify the manufac-
sociate Administrator may perform turer of the findings.
periodic audits to ensure that the man- (b) Design type approvals. The manu-
ufacturer operates in accordance with facturer must have each pressure re-
the quality system. Reports of periodic ceptacle design type reviewed by an IIA
audits will be provided to the manufac- and approved by the Associate Admin-
turer. The manufacturer must bear the istrator in accordance with § 178.70. A
cost of audits. cylinder is considered to be of a new
(2) Quality system documentation. The design, compared with an existing ap-
manufacturer must be able to dem- proved design, as stated in the applica-
onstrate a documented quality system. ble ISO design, construction and test-
Management must review the adequacy ing standard.
of the quality system to assure that it
(c) Production inspection and certifi-
is effective and conforms to the re-
quirements in § 178.70. The quality sys- cation. The manufacturer must ensure
tem records must be in English and that each UN pressure receptacle is in-
must include detailed descriptions of spected and certified in accordance
the following: with § 178.71.
(i) The organizational structure and [71 FR 33885, June 12, 2006]
responsibilities of personnel with re-
gard to design and product quality; § 178.70 Approval of UN pressure re-
(ii) The design control and design ceptacles.
verification techniques, processes, and (a) Initial design-type approval. The
procedures used when designing the manufacturer of a UN pressure recep-
pressure receptacles; tacle must obtain an initial design
(iii) The relevant procedures for pres- type approval from the Associate Ad-
sure receptacle manufacturing, quality ministrator. The initial design type ap-
control, quality assurance, and process proval must be of the pressure recep-
operation instructions; tacle design as it is intended to be pro-
(iv) Inspection and testing meth- duced. The manufacturer must arrange
odologies, measuring and testing equip- for an IIA, approved by the Associate
ment, and calibration data;
Administrator in accordance with sub-
(v) The process for meeting customer part I of part 107 of this chapter, to
requirements;
perform a pre-audit of its pressure re-
(vi) The process for document control ceptacle manufacturing operation prior
and document revision;
to having an audit conducted by the
(vii) The system for controlling non- Associate Administrator or his des-
conforming material and records, in-
ignee.
cluding procedures for identification,
segregation, and disposition; (b) IIA pre-audit. The manufacturer
must submit an application for initial
(viii) Production, processing and fab-
rication, including purchased compo- design type approval to the IIA for re-
nents, in-process and final materials; view. The IIA will examine the manu-
and facturer’s application for initial design
(ix) Training programs for relevant type approval for completeness. An in-
personnel. complete application will be returned
(3) Maintenance of quality system. The to the manufacturer with an expla-
manufacturer must maintain the qual- nation. If an application is complete,
ity system as approved by the Asso- the IIA will review all technical docu-
ciate Administrator. The manufacturer mentation, including drawings and cal-
shall notify the Associate Adminis- culations, to verify that the design
trator of any intended changes to the meets all requirements of the applica-
approved quality system prior to mak- ble UN pressure receptacle standard
ing the change. The Associate Adminis- and specification requirements. If the
trator will evaluate the proposed technical documentation shows that

change to determine whether the the pressure receptacle prototype de-
amended quality system will satisfy sign conforms to the applicable stand-
the requirements. The Associate Ad- ards and requirements in § 178.70, the
82
manufacturer will fabricate a proto- in accordance with subpart I of part 107

type lot of pressure receptacles in con- of this chapter.
formance with the technical docu- (6) Documentation on the manufac-
mentation representative of the design. turing facility as specified in § 178.69.
The IIA will verify that the prototype (7) Design specifications and manu-
lot conforms to the applicable require- facturing drawings, showing compo-
ments by selecting pressure receptacles nents and subassemblies if relevant, de-
and witnessing their testing. After pro- sign calculations, and material speci-
totype testing has been satisfactorily fications necessary to verify compli-
completed, showing the pressure recep- ance with the applicable pressure re-
tacles fully conform to all applicable ceptacle design standard.
specification requirements, the certi- (8) Manufacturing procedures and
fying IIA must prepare a letter of rec- any applicable standards that describe
ommendation and a design type ap- in detail the manufacturing processes
proval certificate. The design type ap- and control.
proval certificate must contain the (9) Design type approval test reports
name and address of the manufacturer detailing the results of examinations
and the IIA certifying the design type, and tests conducted in accordance with
the test results, chemical analyses, lot the relevant pressure receptacle stand-
identification, and all other supporting ard, to include any additional data,
data specified in the applicable ISO de- such as suitability for underwater ap-
sign, construction and testing stand- plications or compatibility with hydro-
ard. The IIA must provide the certifi- gen embrittlement gases.
cate and documentation to the manu- (d) Modification of approved pressure
facturer. receptacle design type. Modification of
(c) Application for initial design type an approved UN pressure receptacle de-
approval. If the pre-audit is found satis- sign type is not authorized without the
factory by the IIA, the manufacturer approval of the Associate Adminis-
will submit the letter of recommenda- trator. A manufacturer seeking modi-
tion from the IIA and an application fication of an approved UN pressure re-
for design type approval to the Asso- ceptacle design type may be required
ciate Administrator. An application for to submit design qualification test
initial design type approval must be data to the Associate Administrator
submitted for each manufacturing fa- before production. An audit may be re-
cility. The application must be in quired as part of the process to modify
English and, at a minimum, contain an approval.
the following information: (e) Responsibilities of the production
(1) The name and address of the man- IIA. The production IIA is responsible
ufacturing facility. If the application is for ensuring that each pressure recep-
submitted by an authorized representa- tacle conforms to the design type ap-
tive on behalf of the manufacturer, the proval. The production IIA must per-
application must include the represent- form the following functions:
ative’s name and address. (1) Witness all inspections and tests
(2) The name and title of the indi- specified in the UN pressure receptacle
vidual responsible for the manufactur- standard to ensure compliance with the
er’s quality system, as required by standard and that the procedures
§ 178.69. adopted by the manufacturer meet the
(3) The designation of the pressure requirements of the standard;
receptacle and the relevant pressure re- (2) Verify that the production inspec-
ceptacle standard. tions were performed in accordance
(4) Details of any refusal of approval with this section;
of a similar application by a designated (3) Select UN pressure receptacles
approval agency of another country. from a prototype production lot and
(5) The name and address of the pro- witness testing as required for the de-
duction IIA that will perform the func- sign type approval;
tions prescribed in paragraph (e) of this (4) Ensure that the various design
section. The IIA must be approved in type approval examinations and tests
writing by the Associate Administrator are performed accurately;
83
§ 178.70 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(5) Verify that each pressure recep- the Associate Administrator will no-
tacle is marked in accordance with the tify the applicant in writing and pro-
applicable requirements in § 178.72; and vide the reason for the denial. The
(6) Furnish complete test reports to manufacturer may request that the As-
the manufacturer and upon request to sociate Administrator reconsider the
the purchaser. The test reports and decision. The application request
certificate of compliance must be re- must—
tained by the IIA for at least 20 years (1) Be written in English and filed
from the original test date of the pres- within 60 days of receipt of the deci-
sure receptacles. sion;
(f) Production inspection audit and cer- (2) State in detail any alleged errors
tification. (1) If the application, design of fact and law; and
drawing and quality control documents (3) Enclose any additional informa-
are found satisfactory, PHMSA will tion needed to support the request to
schedule an on-site audit of the pres- reconsider.
sure receptacle manufacturer’s quality (i) Appeal. (1) A manufacturer whose
system, manufacturing processes, in- reconsideration request is denied may
spections, and test procedures. appeal to the PHMSA Administrator.
(2) During the audit, the manufac- The appeal must—
turer will be required to produce pres- (i) Be written in English and filed
sure receptacles to the technical stand- within 60 days of receipt of the Asso-
ards for which approval is sought. ciate Administrator’s decision on re-
(3) The production IIA must witness consideration;
the required inspections and (ii) State in detail any alleged errors
verifications on the pressure recep- of fact and law;
tacles during the production run. The (iii) Enclose any additional informa-
IIA selected by the manufacturer for tion needed to support the appeal; and
production inspection and testing may (iv) State in detail the modification
be different from the IIA who per- of the final decision sought.
formed the design type approval (2) The PHMSA Administrator will
verifications. grant or deny the relief and inform the
(4) If the procedures and controls are appellant in writing of the decision.
deemed acceptable, test sample pres- PHMSA Administrator’s decision is the
sure receptacles will be selected at ran- final administrative action.
dom from the production lot and sent (j) Termination of a design type ap-
to a laboratory designated by the Asso- proval certificate. (1) The Associate Ad-
ciate Administrator for verification ministrator may terminate an approval
testing. certificate issue under this section if it
(5) If the pressure receptacle test is determined that, because of a change
samples are found to conform to all the in circumstances, the approval no
applicable requirements, the Associate longer is needed or no longer would be
Administrator will issue approvals to granted if applied for; information
the manufacturer and the production upon which the approval was based is
IIA to authorize the manufacture of fraudulent or substantially erroneous;
the pressure receptacles. The approved or termination of the approval is nec-
design type approval certificate will be essary to adequately protect against
returned to the manufacturer. risks to life and property.
(6) Upon the receipt of the approved (2) Before an approval is terminated,
design type approval certificate from the Associate Administrator will pro-
the Associate Administrator, the pres- vide the manufacturer and the ap-
sure receptacle manufacturer must proval agency—
sign the certificate. (i) Written notice of the facts or con-
(g) Recordkeeping. The production IIA duct believed to warrant the with-
and the manufacturer must retain a drawal;
copy of the design type approval cer- (ii) Opportunity to submit oral and
tificate and certificate of compliance written evidence, and

records for at least 20 years. (iii) Opportunity to demonstrate or
(h) Denial of design type application. If achieve compliance with the applica-
the design type application is denied, tion requirement.
84
(3) If the Associate Administrator de- that could result in the release of the
termines that a certificate of approval pressure receptacle contents during
must be withdrawn to preclude a sig- normal conditions of handling and
nificant and imminent adverse affect transport. Manifold piping leading to
on public safety, the procedures in shut-off valves must be sufficiently
paragraph (j)(2)(ii) and (iii) of this sec- flexible to protect the valves and the
tion need not be provided prior to with- piping from shearing or releasing the
drawal of the approval, but shall be pressure receptacle contents. The fill-
provided as soon as practicable there- ing and discharge valves and any pro-
after. tective caps must be secured against
[71 FR 33886, June 12, 2006, as amended at 71 unintended opening. The valves must
FR 54397, Sept. 14, 2006] conform to ISO 10297 (IBR, see § 171.7 of
this subchapter) and be protected as
§ 178.71 Specifications for UN pressure specified in § 173.301b(f) of this sub-
receptacles. chapter.
(a) General. Each UN pressure recep- (3) UN pressure receptacles that can-
tacle must meet the requirements of not be handled manually or rolled,
this section. Requirements for ap- must be equipped with devices (e.g.,
proval, qualification, maintenance, and skids, rings, straps) ensuring that they
testing are contained in § 178.70, and can be safely handled by mechanical
subpart C of part 180 of this subchapter. means and so arranged as not to impair
(b) Definitions. The following defini- the strength of, nor cause undue
tions apply for the purposes of design stresses, in the pressure receptacle.
and construction of UN pressure recep- (4) Pressure receptacles filled by vol-
tacles under this subpart: ume must be equipped with a level in-
Alternative arrangement means an ap- dicator.
proval granted by the Associate Ad- (e) Bundles of cylinders. UN pressure
ministrator for a MEGC that has been receptacles assembled in bundles must
designed, constructed or tested to the be structurally supported and held to-
technical requirements or testing gether as a unit and secured in a man-
methods other than those specified for ner that prevents movement in rela-
UN pressure receptacles in part 178 or tion to the structural assembly and
part 180 of this subchapter. movement that would result in the
Bundle of cylinders. See § 171.8 of this concentration of harmful local
subchapter. stresses. The frame design must ensure
Design type means a pressure recep- stability under normal operating con-
tacle design as specified by a particular ditions.
pressure receptacle standard. (1) The frame must securely retain
Design type approval means an overall all the components of the bundle and
approval of the manufacturer’s quality must protect them from damage during
system and design type of each pres- conditions normally incident to trans-
sure receptacle to be produced within portation. The method of cylinder re-
the manufacturer’s facility. straint must prevent any vertical or
UN tube. See § 171.8 of this subchapter. horizontal movement or rotation of the
(c) Following the final heat treat- cylinder that could cause undue strain
ment, all cylinders, except those se- on the manifold. The total assembly
lected for batch testing must be sub- must be able to withstand rough han-
jected to a proof pressure or a hydrau- dling, including being dropped or over-
lic volumetric expansion test. turned.
(d) Service equipment. (1) Except for (2) The frame must include features
pressure relief devices, UN pressure re- designed for the handling and transpor-
ceptacle equipment, including valves, tation of the bundle. The lifting rings
piping, fittings, and other equipment must be designed to withstand a design
subjected to pressure must be designed load of 2 times the maximum gross
and constructed to withstand at least weight. Bundles with more than one
1.5 times the test pressure of the pres- lifting ring must be designed such that
sure receptacle. a minimum sling angle of 45 degrees to
(2) Service equipment must be config- the horizontal can be achieved during
ured or designed to prevent damage lifting using the lifting rings. If four
85
§ 178.71 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
lifting rings are used, their design (3) ISO 20703: Gas cylinders—Refill-
must be strong enough to allow the able welded aluminum-alloy cyl-
bundle to be lifted by two rings. Where inders—Design, construction and test-
two or four lifting rings are used, dia- ing (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter).
metrically opposite lifting rings must (g) Design and construction require-
be aligned with each other to allow for ments for UN refillable seamless steel cyl-
correct lifting using shackle pins. If inders. In addition to the general re-
the bundle is filled with forklift pock- quirements of this section, UN refill-
ets, it must contain two forklift pock- able seamless steel cylinders must con-
ets on each side from which it is to be form to the following ISO standards, as
lifted. The forklift pockets must be po- applicable:
sitioned symmetrically consistent with (1) ISO 9809–1: Gas cylinders—Refill-
the bundle center of gravity. able seamless steel gas cylinders—De-
(3) The frame structural members sign, construction and testing—Part 1:
must be designed for a vertical load of Quenched and tempered steel cylinders
2 times the maximum gross weight of with tensile strength less than 1 100
the bundle. Design stress levels may MPa. (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
not exceed 0.9 times the yield strength chapter).
of the material. (2) ISO 9809–2: Gas cylinders—Refill-
(4) The frame must not contain any able seamless steel gas cylinders—De-
protrusions from the exterior frame
sign, construction and testing—Part 2:
structure that could cause a hazardous
Quenched and tempered steel cylinders
condition.
with tensile strength greater than or
(5) The frame design must prevent
equal to 1 100 MPa. (IBR, see § 171.7 of
collection of water or other debris that
this subchapter).
would increase the tare weight of bun-
dles filled by weight. (3) ISO 9809–3: Gas cylinders—Refill-
(6) The floor of the bundle frame able seamless steel gas cylinders—De-
must not buckle during normal oper- sign, construction and testing—Part 3:
ating conditions and must allow for the Normalized steel cylinders. (IBR, see
drainage of water and debris from § 171.7 of this subchapter).
around the base of the cylinders. (h) Design and construction require-
(7) If the frame design includes mov- ments for UN refillable seamless aluminum
able doors or covers, they must be ca- alloy cylinders. In addition to the gen-
pable of being secured with latches or eral requirements of this section, UN
other means that will not become dis- refillable seamless aluminum cylinders
lodged by operational impact loads. must conform to ISO 7866: Gas cyl-
Valves that need to be operated in nor- inders—Refillable seamless aluminum
mal service or in an emergency must alloy gas cylinders—Design, construc-
be accessible. tion and testing. (IBR, see § 171.7 of this
(8) For bundles of cylinders, pressure subchapter). The use of Aluminum
receptacle marking requirements only alloy 6351–T6 or equivalent is prohib-
apply to the individual cylinders of a ited.
bundle and not to any assembly struc- (i) Design and construction require-
ture. ments for UN non-refillable metal cyl-
(f) Design and construction require- inders. In addition to the general re-
ments for UN refillable welded cylinders. quirements of this section, UN non-re-
In addition to the general requirements fillable metal cylinders must conform
of this section, UN refillable welded to ISO 11118: Gas cylinders—Non-refill-
cylinders must conform to the fol- able metallic gas cylinders—Specifica-
lowing ISO standards, as applicable: tion and test methods. (IBR, see § 171.7
(1) ISO 4706: Gas cylinders—Refillable of this subchapter.)
welded steel cylinders—Test pressure (j) Design and construction require-
60 bar and below (IBR, see § 171.7 of this ments for UN refillable seamless steel
subchapter). tubes. In addition to the general re-
(2) ISO 18172–1: Gas cylinders—Refill- quirements of this section, UN refill-

able welded stainless steel cylinders— able seamless steel tubes must conform
Part 1: Test pressure 6 MPa and below to ISO 11120: Gas cylinders—Refillable
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). seamless steel tubes of water capacity
86
between 150 L and 3000 L—Design, con- ments of this section, metal hydride
struction and testing. (IBR, see § 171.7 storage systems must conform to the
of this subchapter). following ISO standards, as applicable:
(k) Design and construction require- ISO 16111: Transportable gas storage
ments for UN acetylene cylinders. In ad- devices—Hydrogen absorbed in revers-
dition to the general requirements of ible metal hydride (IBR, see § 171.7 of
this section, UN acetylene cylinders this subchapter).
must conform to the following ISO (n) Material compatibility. In addition
standards, as applicable: to the material requirements specified
(1) For the cylinder shell: in the UN pressure receptacle design
(i) ISO 9809–1: Gas cylinders—Refill- and construction ISO standards, and
able seamless steel gas cylinders—De- any restrictions specified in part 173
sign, construction and testing—Part 1:
for the gases to be transported, the re-
Quenched and tempered steel cylinders
quirements of the following standards
with tensile strength less than 1 100
must be applied with respect to mate-
MPa.
rial compatibility:
(ii) ISO 9809–3: Gas cylinders—Refill-
able seamless steel gas cylinders—De- (1) ISO 11114–1: Transportable gas cyl-
sign, construction and testing—Part 3: inders—Compatibility of cylinder and
Normalized steel cylinders. valve materials with gas contents—
(2) The porous mass in an acetylene Part 1: Metallic materials. (IBR, see
cylinder must conform to ISO 3807–2: § 171.7 of this subchapter).
Cylinders for acetylene—Basic require- (2) ISO 11114–2: Transportable gas cyl-
ments—Part 2: Cylinders with fusible inders—Compatibility of cylinder and
plugs. (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- valve materials with gas contents—
chapter). Part 2: Non-metallic materials. (IBR,
(l) Design and construction require- see § 171.7 of this subchapter).
ments for UN composite cylinders. (1) In (o) Protection of closures. Closures and
addition to the general requirements of their protection must conform to the
this section, UN composite cylinders requirements in § 173.301(f) of this sub-
must be designed for unlimited service chapter.
life and conform to the following ISO (p) Marking of UN refillable pressure re-
standards, as applicable: ceptacles. UN refillable pressure recep-
(i) ISO 11119–1: Gas cylinders of com- tacles must be marked clearly and leg-
posite construction—Specification and ibly. The required markings must be
test methods—Part 1: Hoop-wrapped permanently affixed by stamping, en-
composite gas cylinders. (IBR, see
graving, or other equivalent method,
on the shoulder, top end or neck of the
(ii) ISO 11119–2: Gas cylinders of com-
pressure receptacle or on a perma-
posite construction—Specification and
nently affixed component of the pres-
test methods—Part 2: Fully-wrapped
fibre reinforced composite gas cyl- sure receptacle, such as a welded col-
inders with load-sharing metal liners. lar. Except for the ‘‘UN’’ mark, the
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). minimum size of the marks must be 5
(iii) ISO 11119–3: Gas cylinders of mm for pressure receptacles with a di-
composite construction—Specification ameter greater than or equal to 140
and test methods—Part 3: Fully mm, and 2.5 mm for pressure recep-
wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas tacles with a diameter less than 140
cylinders with non-load sharing metal- mm. The minimum size of the ‘‘UN’’
lic or non-metallic liners. (IBR, see mark must be 5 mm for pressure recep-
§ 171.7 of this subchapter). tacles with a diameter less than 140
(2) ISO 11119–2 and ISO 11119–3 gas mm, and 10 mm for pressure recep-
cylinders of composite construction tacles with a diameter of greater than
manufactured in accordance with the or equal to 140 mm. The depth of the
requirements for underwater use must markings must not create harmful
bear the ‘‘UW’’ mark. stress concentrations. A refillable pres-

(m) Design and construction require- sure receptacle conforming to the UN
ments for UN metal hydride storage sys- standard must be marked as follows:
tems. In addition to the general require- (1) The UN packaging symbol.
87
§ 178.71 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(2) The ISO standard, for example two significant figures rounded down
ISO 9809–1, used for design, construc- to the last digit. For acetylene cyl-
tion and testing. Acetylene cylinders inders, the tare weight must be marked
must be marked to indicate the porous on the cylinders in kilograms. The tare
mass and the steel shell, for example: weight is the sum of the empty weight,
‘‘ISO 3807–2/ISO 9809–1.’’ mass of the valve, any coating and all
(3) The mark of the country where permanently attached parts (e.g., fit-
the approval is granted. The letters tings and accessories) that are not re-
‘‘USA’’ must be marked on UN pressure moved during filling. The tare weight
receptacles approved by the United must be expressed to two significant
States. The manufacturer must obtain figures rounded down to the last digit.
an approval number from the Associate The tare weight does not include the
Administrator. The manufacturer ap- cylinder cap or any outlet cap or plug
proval number must follow the country not permanently attached to the cyl-
of approval mark, separated by a slash inder.
(for example, USA/MXXXX). Pressure (9) The minimum wall thickness of
receptacles approved by more than one the pressure receptacle in millimeters
national authority may contain the followed by the letters ‘‘MM’’. This
mark of each country of approval, sep- mark is not required for pressure re-
arated by a comma. ceptacles with a water capacity less
(4) The identity mark or stamp of the than or equal to 1.0 L or for composite
IIA. cylinders.
(5) The date of the initial inspection, (10) For pressure receptacles intended
the year (four digits) followed by the for the transport of compressed gases
month (two digits) separated by a and UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved, the
slash, for example ‘‘2006/04’’. working pressure in bar, proceeded by
(6) The test pressure in bar, preceded the letters ‘‘PW’’.
by the letters ‘‘PH’’ and followed by (11) For liquefied gases, the water ca-
the letters ‘‘BAR’’. pacity in liters expressed to three sig-
(7) The rated charging pressure of the nificant digits rounded down to the
metal hydride storage system in bar, last digit, followed by the letter ‘‘L’’. If
preceded by the letters ‘‘RCP’’ and fol- the value of the minimum or nominal
lowed by the letters ‘‘BAR.’’ water capacity is an integer, the digits
(8) The empty or tare weight. Except after the decimal point may be omit-
for acetylene cylinders, empty weight ted.
is the mass of the pressure receptacle (12) Identification of the cylinder
in kilograms, including all integral thread type (e.g., 25E).
parts (e.g., collar, neck ring, foot ring, (13) The country of manufacture. The
etc.), followed by the letters ‘‘KG’’. The letters ‘‘USA’’ must be marked on cyl-
empty weight does not include the inders manufactured in the United
mass of the valve, valve cap or valve States.
guard or any coating. The empty (14) The serial number assigned by
weight must be expressed to three sig- the manufacturer.

nificant figures rounded up to the last (15) For steel pressure receptacles,
digit. For cylinders of less than 1 kg, the letter ‘‘H’’ showing compatibility
the empty weight must be expressed to of the steel, as specified in 1SO 11114–1.
88
ER19JA11.035</GPH>
(16) Identification of aluminum alloy, (1) The top grouping contains manu-
if applicable. facturing marks and must appear con-
(17) Stamp for nondestructive test- secutively in the sequence given in
ing, if applicable. paragraphs (p)(13) through (19) of this
(18) Stamp for underwater use of section.
composite cylinders, if applicable. (2) The middle grouping contains
(19) For metal hydride storage sys- operational marks described in para-
tems having a limited life, the date of graphs (p)(6) through (11) of this sec-
expiration indicated by the word
tion.
‘‘FINAL,’’ followed by the year (four
digits), the month (two digits) and sep- (3) The bottom grouping contains
arated by a slash. certification marks and must appear
(q) Marking sequence. The marking re- consecutively in the sequence given in
quired by paragraph (p) of this section paragraphs (p)(1) through (5) of this
must be placed in three groups as section.
shown in the example below:
89
§ 178.71 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(r) Other markings. Other markings depth that will create harmful stress
are allowed in areas other than the side concentrations. Such marks must not
wall, provided they are made in low conflict with required marks.
stress areas and are not of a size and
90
ER19JA11.036</GPH>
(s) Marking of UN non-refillable pres- valid for the entire series. The design
sure receptacles. Unless otherwise speci- approval certificate must refer to the
fied in this paragraph, each UN non-re- prototype test report, the materials of
fillable pressure receptacle must be construction of the manifold, the
clearly and legibly marked as pre- standards to which the pressure recep-
scribed in paragraph (p) of this section. tacles are made and an approval num-
In addition, permanent stenciling is ber. The compliance requirements or
authorized. Except when stenciled, the test methods applicable to MEGCs as
marks must be on the shoulder, top end specified in this subpart may be varied
or neck of the pressure receptacle or on when the level of safety is determined
a permanently affixed component of to be equivalent to or exceed the re-
the pressure receptacle (e.g., a welded quirements of this subchapter and is
collar). approved in writing by the Associate
(1) The marking requirements and se- Administrator. A design approval may
quence listed in paragraphs (p)(1) serve for the approval of smaller
through (19) of this section are re- MEGCs made of materials of the same
quired, except the markings in para- type and thickness, by the same fab-
graphs (p)(8), (9), (12) and (18) are not rication techniques and with identical
applicable. The required serial number supports, equivalent closures and other
marking in paragraph (p)(14) may be appurtenances.
replaced by the batch number. (2) Each application for design ap-
(2) Each receptacle must be marked proval must be in English and contain
with the words ‘‘DO NOT REFILL’’ in the following information:
letters of at least 5 mm in height. (i) Two complete copies of all engi-
(3) A non-refillable pressure recep- neering drawings, calculations, and
tacle, because of its size, may sub- test data necessary to ensure that the
stitute the marking required by this design meets the relevant specifica-
paragraph with a label. Reduction in tion.
marking size is authorized only as pre- (ii) The manufacturer’s serial number
scribed in ISO 7225, Gas cylinders—Pre- that will be assigned to each MEGC.
cautionary labels. (IBR, see § 171.7 of (iii) A statement as to whether the
this subchapter). design type has been examined by any
(4) Each non-refillable pressure re- approval agency previously and judged
ceptacle must also be legibly marked unacceptable. Affirmative statements
by stenciling the following statement: must be documented with the name of
‘‘Federal law forbids transportation if the approval agency, reason for non-ac-
refilled-penalty up to $500,000 fine and 5 ceptance, and the nature of modifica-
years in imprisonment (49 U.S.C. tions made to the design type.
5124).’’ (b) Actions by the approval agency. The
(5) No person may mark a non-refill- approval agency must review the appli-
able pressure receptacle as meeting the cation for design type approval, includ-
requirements of this section unless it ing all drawings and calculations, to
was manufactured in conformance with ensure that the design of the MEGC
this section. meets all requirements of the relevant
[76 FR 3385, Jan. 19, 2011, as amended at 76 specification and to determine whether
FR 43532, July 20, 2011] it is complete and conforms to the re-
quirements of this section. An incom-
§ 178.74 Approval of MEGCs. plete application will be returned to
(a) Application for design type ap- the applicant with the reasons why the
proval. (1) Each new MEGC design type application was returned. If the appli-
must have a design approval certification is complete and all applicable
cate. An owner or manufacturer must requirements of this section are met,
apply to an approval agency that is ap- the approval agency must prepare a
proved by the Associate Administrator MEGC design approval certificate con-
in accordance with subpart E of part taining the manufacturer’s name and
107 of this chapter +to obtain approval address, results and conclusions of the
of a new design. When a series of examination and necessary data for
MEGCs is manufactured without identification of the design type. If the
change in the design, the certificate is Associate Administrator approves the
91
§ 178.74 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
Design Type Approval Certificate ap- ance with the procedures in this sec-
plication, the approval agency and the tion and that the MEGC is suitable for
manufacturer must each maintain a its intended purpose and meets the re-
copy of the approved drawings, calcula- quirements of this subchapter. When a
tions, and test data for at least 20 series of MEGCs is manufactured with-
years. out change in the design type, the cer-
(c) Approval agency’s responsibilities. tificate may be valid for the entire se-
The approval agency is responsible for ries of MEGCs representing a single de-
ensuring that the MEGC conforms to sign type. The approval number must
the design type approval. The approval consist of the distinguishing sign or
agency must: mark of the country (‘‘USA’’ for the
(1) Witness all tests required for the United States of America) where the
approval of the MEGC specified in this approval was granted and a registra-
section and § 178.75. tion number.
(2) Ensure, through appropriate in- (6) Retain on file a copy of each ap-
spection, that each MEGC is fabricated proval certificate for at least 20 years.
in all respects in conformance with the (d) Manufacturers’ responsibilities. The
approved drawings, calculations, and manufacturer is responsible for compli-
test data. ance with the applicable specifications
(3) Determine and ensure that the for the design and construction of
MEGC is suitable for its intended use MEGCs. The manufacturer of a MEGC
and that it conforms to the require- must:
ments of this subchapter. (1) Comply with all the requirements
(4) Apply its name, identifying mark of the applicable ISO standard specified
or identifying number, and the date the in § 178.71;
approval was issued, to the metal iden- (2) Obtain and use an approval agen-
tification marking plate attached to cy to review the design, construction
the MEGC upon successful completion and certification of the MEGC;
of all requirements of this subpart. (3) Provide a statement in the manu-
Any approvals by the Associate Admin- facturers’ data report certifying that
istrator authorizing design or con- each MEGC manufactured complies
struction alternatives (Alternate Ar- with the relevant specification and all
rangements) of the MEGC (see para- the applicable requirements of this
graph (a) of this section) must be indi- subchapter; and
cated on the metal identification plate (4) Retain records for the MEGCs for
as specified in § 178.75(j). at least 20 years. When required by the
(5) Prepare an approval certificate specification, the manufacturer must
for each MEGC or, in the case of a se- provide copies of the records to the ap-
ries of identical MEGCs manufactured proval agency, the owner or lessee of
to a single design type, for each series the MEGC, and to a representative of
of MEGCs. The approval certificate DOT, upon request.
must include all of the following infor- (e) Denial of application for approval.
mation: If the Associate Administrator finds
(i) The information displayed on the that the MEGC will not be approved for
metal identification plate required by any reason, the Associate Adminis-
§ 178.75(j); trator will notify the applicant in writ-
(ii) The results of the applicable ing and provide the reason for the de-
framework test specified in ISO 1496–3 nial. The manufacturer may request
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter); that the Associate Administrator re-
(iii) The results of the initial inspec- consider the decision. The application
tion and test specified in paragraph (h) request must—
of this section; (1) Be written in English and filed
(iv) The results of the impact test within 90 days of receipt of the deci-
specified in § 178.75(i)(4); sion;
(v) Certification documents verifying (2) State in detail any alleged errors
that the cylinders and tubes conform of fact and law; and
to the applicable standards; and (3) Enclose any additional informa-
(vi) A statement that the approval tion needed to support the request to
agency certifies the MEGC in accord- reconsider.
92
(f) Appeal. (1) A manufacturer whose pare a new approval certificate for the
reconsideration request is denied may modified MEGC and submit the certifi-
appeal to the PHMSA Administrator. cate to the Associate Administrator for
The appeal must— approval. After receiving approval
(i) Be in writing and filed within 90 from the Associate Administrator, the
days of receipt of the Associate Admin- approval agency must ensure that any
istrator s decision on reconsideration; necessary changes are made to the
(ii) State in detail any alleged errors metal identification plate. A copy of
of fact and law; each newly issued approval certificate
(iii) Enclose any additional informa- must be retained by the approval agen-
tion needed to support the appeal; and cy and the MEGC’s owner for at least
(iv) State in detail the modification 20 years. The approval agency must
of the final decision sought. perform the following activities:
(2) The Administrator will grant or (i) Retain a set of the approved re-
deny the relief and inform the appel- vised drawings, calculations, and data
lant in writing of the decision. The Ad- as specified in § 178.69(b)(4) for at least
ministrator’s decision is the final ad- 20 years;
ministrative action. (ii) Ensure through appropriate in-
(g) Modifications to approved MEGCs. spection that all modifications con-
(1) Prior to modification of any ap- form to the revised drawings, calcula-
proved MEGC that may affect conform- tions, and test data; and
ance and safe use, and that may in- (iii) Determine the extent to which
volve a change to the design type or af- retesting of the modified MEGC is nec-
fect its ability to retain the hazardous essary based on the nature of the pro-
material in transportation, the posed modification, and ensure that all
MEGC’s owner must inform the ap- required retests are satisfactorily per-
proval agency that prepared the initial formed.
approval certificate for the MEGC or, if (h) Termination of Approval Certificate.
the initial approval agency is unavail- (1) The Associate Administrator may
able, another approval agency, of the terminate an approval issued under
nature of the modification and request this section if he or she determines
certification of the modification. The that—
owner must supply the approval agency (i) Because of a change in cir-
with all revised drawings, calculations, cumstances, the approval no longer is
and test data relative to the intended needed or no longer would be granted if
modification. The MEGC’s owner must applied for;
also provide a statement as to whether (ii) Information upon which the ap-
the intended modification has been ex- proval was based is fraudulent or sub-
amined and determined to be unaccept- stantially erroneous;
able by any approval agency. The writ- (iii) Termination of the approval is
ten statement must include the name necessary to adequately protect
of the approval agency, the reason for against risks to life and property; or
non-acceptance, and the nature of (iv) The MEGC does not meet the
changes made to the modification since specification.
its original rejection. (2) Before an approval is terminated,
(2) The approval agency must review the Associate Administrator will pro-
the request for modification. If the ap- vide the person—
proval agency determines that the pro- (i) Written notice of the facts or con-
posed modification does not conform to duct believed to warrant the termi-
the relevant specification, the approval nation;
agency must reject the request in ac- (ii) An opportunity to submit oral
cordance with paragraph (d) of this sec- and written evidence; and
tion. If the approval agency determines (3) An opportunity to demonstrate or
that the proposed modification con- achieve compliance with the applicable
forms fully with the relevant specifica- requirements.
tion, the request is accepted. If modi- (i) Imminent Danger. If the Associate
fication to an approved MEGC alters Administrator determines that a cer-
any information on the approval certificate of approval must be terminated
tificate, the approval agency must pre- to preclude a significant and imminent
93
§ 178.75 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
adverse effect on public safety, the As- ble of being loaded and discharged
sociate Administrator may terminate without the removal of its structural
the certificate immediately. In such equipment. It must possess stabilizing
circumstances, the opportunities of members external to the pressure re-
paragraphs (h)(2) and (3) of this section ceptacles to provide structural integ-
need not be provided prior to termi- rity for handling and transport. MEGCs
nation of the approval, but must be must be designed and constructed with
provided as soon as practicable there- supports to provide a secure base dur-
after. ing transport and with lifting and tie-
[71 FR 33890, June 12, 2006] down attachments that are adequate
for lifting the MEGC including when
§ 178.75 Specifications for MEGCs. loaded to its maximum permissible
(a) General. Each MEGC must meet gross mass. The MEGC must be de-
the requirements of this section. In a signed to be loaded onto a transport ve-
MEGC that meets the definition of a hicle or vessel and equipped with skids,
‘‘container’’ within the terms of the mountings or accessories to facilitate
International Convention for Safe Con- mechanical handling.
tainers (CSC) must meet the require- (2) MEGCs must be designed, manu-
ments of the CSC as amended and 49 factured and equipped to withstand,
CFR parts 450 through 453, and must without loss of contents, all normal
have a CSC approval plate. handling and transportation condi-
(b) Alternate Arrangements. The tech- tions. The design must take into ac-
nical requirements applicable to count the effects of dynamic loading
MEGCs may be varied when the level of and fatigue.
safety is determined to be equivalent (3) Each pressure receptacle of a
to or exceed the requirements of this MEGC must be of the same design type,
subchapter. Such an alternate arrange- seamless steel, and constructed and
ment must be approved in writing by tested according to one of the following
the Associate Administrator. MEGCs ISO standards:
approved to an Alternate Arrangement (i) ISO 9809–1: Gas cylinders—Refill-
must be marked as required by para- able seamless steel gas cylinders—De-
graph (j) of this section. sign, construction and testing—Part 1:
(c) Definitions. The following defini- Quenched and tempered steel cylinders
tions apply: with tensile strength less than 1 100
Leakproofness test means a test using MPa. (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
gas subjecting the pressure receptacles chapter);
and the service equipment of the MEGC (ii) ISO 9809–2: Gas cylinders—Refill-
to an effective internal pressure of not able seamless steel gas cylinders—De-
less than 20% of the test pressure. sign, construction and testing—Part 2:
Manifold means an assembly of piping Quenched and tempered steel cylinders
and valves connecting the filling and/or with tensile strength greater than or
discharge openings of the pressure re- equal to 1 100 MPa. (IBR, see § 171.7 of
ceptacles. this subchapter);
Maximum permissible gross mass or (iii) ISO 9809–3: Gas cylinders—Refill-
MPGM means the heaviest load author- able seamless steel gas cylinders—De-
ized for transport (sum of the tare sign, construction and testing—Part 3:
mass of the MEGC, service equipment Normalized steel cylinders. (IBR, see
and pressure receptacle). § 171.7 of this subchapter); or
Service equipment means manifold sys- (iv) ISO 11120: Gas cylinders—Refill-
tem (measuring instruments, piping able seamless steel tubes of water ca-
and safety devices). pacity between 150 L and 3000 L—De-
Shut-off valve means a valve that sign, construction and testing. (IBR,
stops the flow of gas. see § 171.7 of this subchapter).
Structural equipment means the rein- (4) Pressure receptacles of MEGCs,
forcing, fastening, protective and stabi- fittings, and pipework must be con-
lizing members external to the pres- structed of a material that is compat-

sure receptacles. ible with the hazardous materials in-
(d) General design and construction re- tended to be transported, as specified
quirements. (1) The MEGC must be capa- in this subchapter.
94
(5) Contact between dissimilar met- proof strength and, for austenitic
als that could result in damage by gal- steels, the 1 percent proof strength.
vanic action must be prevented by ap- (11) MEGCs must be capable of being
propriate means. electrically grounded to prevent elec-
(6) The materials of the MEGC, in- trostatic discharge when intended for
cluding any devices, gaskets, and ac- flammable gases.
cessories, must have no adverse effect (12) The pressure receptacles of a
on the gases intended for transport in MEGC must be secured in a manner to
the MEGC. prevent movement that could result in
(7) MEGCs must be designed to with- damage to the structure and con-
stand, without loss of contents, at centration of harmful localized
least the internal pressure due to the stresses.
contents, and the static, dynamic and (e) Service equipment. (1) Service
thermal loads during normal condi- equipment must be arranged so that it
tions of handling and transport. The is protected from mechanical damage
design must take into account the ef- by external forces during handling and
fects of fatigue, caused by repeated ap- transportation. When the connections
plication of these loads through the ex- between the frame and the pressure re-
pected life of the MEGC. ceptacles allow relative movement be-
(8) MEGCs and their fastenings must, tween the subassemblies, the equip-
under the maximum permissible load, ment must be fastened to allow move-
be capable of withstanding the fol- ment to prevent damage to any work-
lowing separately applied static forces ing part. The manifolds, discharge fit-
(for calculation purposes, acceleration tings (pipe sockets, shut-off devices),
due to gravity (g) = 9.81 m/s2): and shut-off valves must be protected
(i) In the direction of travel: 2g from damage by external forces. Mani-
(twice the MPGM multiplied by the ac- fold piping leading to shut-off valves
celeration due to gravity); must be sufficiently flexible to protect
(ii) Horizontally at right angles to the valves and the piping from shear-
the direction of travel: 1g (the MPGM ing, or releasing the pressure recep-
multiplied by the acceleration due to tacle contents. The filling and dis-
gravity. When the direction of travel is charge devices, including flanges or
not clearly determined, the forces must threaded plugs, and any protective caps
be equal to twice the MPGM); must be capable of being secured
(iii) Vertically upwards: 1g (the against unintended opening.
MPGM multiplied by the acceleration (2) Each pressure receptacle intended
due to gravity); and for the transport of Division 2.3 gases
(iv) Vertically downwards: 2g (twice must be equipped with an individual
the MPGM (total loading including the shut-off valve. The manifold for Divi-
effect of gravity) multiplied by the ac- sion 2.3 liquefied gases must be de-
celeration due to gravity. signed so that each pressure receptacle
(9) Under each of the forces specified can be filled separately and be kept
in paragraph (d)(8) of this section, the isolated by a valve capable of being
stress at the most severely stressed closed during transit. For Division 2.1
point of the pressure receptacles must gases, the pressure receptacles must be
not exceed the values given in the ap- isolated by an individual shut-off valve
plicable design specifications (e.g., ISO into assemblies of not more than 3,000
11120). L.
(10) Under each of the forces specified (3) For MEGC filling and discharge
in paragraph (d)(8) of this section, the openings:
safety factor for the framework and (i) Two valves in series must be
fastenings must be as follows: placed in an accessible position on each
(i) For steels having a clearly defined discharge and filling pipe. One of the
yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in re- valves may be a backflow prevention
lation to the guaranteed yield valve. (ii) The filling and discharge de-
strength; or vices may be equipped to a manifold.

(ii) For steels with no clearly defined (iii) For sections of piping which can
yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in re- be closed at both ends and where a liq-
lation to the guaranteed 0.2 percent uid product can be trapped, a pressure-
95
§ 178.75 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
relief valve must be provided to pre- devices must be of sufficient size to en-
vent excessive pressure build-up. able the required discharge to pass un-
(iv) The main isolation valves on a restricted to the pressure relief device.
MEGC must be clearly marked to indi- A shut-off valve installed between the
cate their directions of closure. All pressure receptacle and the pressure re-
shutoff valves must close by a clock- lief device is prohibited, except where
wise motion of the handwheel. duplicate devices are provided for
(v) Each shut-off valve or other maintenance or other reasons, and the
means of closure must be designed and shut-off valves serving the devices ac-
constructed to withstand a pressure tually in use are locked open, or the
equal to or greater than 1.5 times the shut-off valves are interlocked so that
test pressure of the MEGC. at least one of the duplicate devices is
(vi) All shut-off valves with screwed always operable and capable of meeting
spindles must close by a clockwise mo- the requirements of paragraph (f)(1) of
tion of the handwheel. For other shut- this section. No obstruction is per-
off valves, the open and closed posi- mitted in an opening leading to or
tions and the direction of closure must leaving from a vent or pressure-relief
be clearly shown. device that might restrict or cut-off
(vii) All shut-off valves must be de- the flow from the pressure receptacle
signed and positioned to prevent unin- to that device. The opening through all
tentional opening. piping and fittings must have at least
(viii) Ductile metals must be used in the same flow area as the inlet of the
the construction of valves or acces- pressure relief device to which it is
sories. connected. The nominal size of the dis-
(4) The piping must be designed, con- charge piping must be at least as large
structed and installed to avoid damage as that of the pressure relief device.
due to expansion and contraction, me- (3) Location of pressure-relief de-
chanical shock and vibration. Joints in vices: For liquefied gases, each pres-
tubing must be brazed or have an sure relief device must, under max-
equally strong metal union. The melt- imum filling conditions, be in commu-
ing point of brazing materials must be nication with the vapor space of the
no lower than 525 °C (977 °F). The rated pressure receptacles. The devices, when
pressure of the service equipment and installed, must be arranged to ensure
of the manifold must be not less than the escaping vapor is discharged up-
two-thirds of the test pressure of the wards and unrestrictedly to prevent
pressure receptacles. impingement of escaping gas or liquid
(f) Pressure relief devices. Each pres- upon the MEGC, its pressure recep-
sure receptacle must be equipped with tacles or personnel. For flammable,
one or more pressure relief devices as pyrophoric and oxidizing gases, the es-
specified in § 173.301(f) of this sub- caping gas must be directed away from
chapter. When pressure relief devices the pressure receptacle in such a man-
are installed, each pressure receptacle ner that it cannot impinge upon the
or group of pressure receptacles of a other pressure receptacles. Heat resist-
MEGC that can be isolated must be ant protective devices that deflect the
equipped with one or more pressure re- flow of gas are permissible provided the
lief devices. Pressure relief devices required pressure relief device capacity
must be of a type that will resist dy- is not reduced. Arrangements must be
namic forces including liquid surge and made to prevent access to the pressure
must be designed to prevent the entry relief devices by unauthorized persons
of foreign matter, the leakage of gas and to protect the devices from damage
and the development of any dangerous caused by rollover.
excess pressure. (g) Gauging devices. When a MEGC is
(1) The size of the pressure relief de- intended to be filled by mass, it must
vices: CGA S–1.1 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this be equipped with one or more gauging
subchapter) must be used to determine devices. Glass level-gauges and gauges
the relief capacity of individual pres- made of other fragile material are pro-
sure receptacles. hibited.
(2) Connections to pressure-relief de- (h) MEGC supports, frameworks, lifting
vices: Connections to pressure relief and tie-down attachments. (1) MEGCs
96
must be designed and constructed with (i) Initial inspection and test. The pres-
a support structure to provide a secure sure receptacles and items of equip-
base during transport. MEGCs must be ment of each MEGC must be inspected
protected against damage to the pres- and tested before being put into service
sure receptacles and service equipment for the first time (initial inspection
resulting from lateral and longitudinal and test). This initial inspection and
impact and overturning. The forces test of an MEGC must include the fol-
specified in paragraph (d)(8) of this sec- lowing:
tion, and the safety factor specified in (1) A check of the design characteris-
paragraph (d)(10) of this section must tics.
be considered in this aspect of the de- (2) An external examination of the
sign. Skids, frameworks, cradles or MEGC and its fittings, taking into ac-
other similar structures are accept- count the hazardous materials to be
able. If the pressure receptacles and transported.
service equipment are so constructed
(3) A pressure test performed at the
as to withstand impact and over-
test pressures specified in
turning, additional protective support
§ 173.304b(b)(1) and (2) of this sub-
structure is not required (see para-
graph (h)(4) of this section). chapter. The pressure test of the mani-
(2) The combined stresses caused by fold may be performed as a hydraulic
pressure receptacle mountings (e.g. test or by using another liquid or gas.
cradles, frameworks, etc.) and MEGC A leakproofness test and a test of the
lifting and tie-down attachments must satisfactory operation of all service
not cause excessive stress in any pres- equipment must also be performed be-
sure receptacle. Permanent lifting and fore the MEGC is placed into service.
tie-down attachments must be When the pressure receptacles and
equipped to all MEGCs. Any welding of their fittings have been pressure-tested
mountings or attachments onto the separately, they must be subjected to a
pressure receptacles is prohibited. leakproof test after assembly.
(3) The effects of environmental cor- (4) An MEGC that meets the defini-
rosion must be taken into account in tion of ‘‘container’’ in the CSC (see 49
the design of supports and frameworks. CFR 450.3(a)(2)) must be subjected to an
(4) When MEGCs are not protected impact test using a prototype rep-
during transport as specified in para- resenting each design type. The proto-
graph (h)(1) of this section, the pres- type MEGC must be shown to be capa-
sure receptacles and service equipment ble of absorbing the forces resulting
must be protected against damage re- from an impact not less than 4 times (4
sulting from lateral or longitudinal im- g) the MPGM of the fully loaded
pact or overturning. External fittings MEGC, at a duration typical of the me-
must be protected against release of chanical shocks experienced in rail
the pressure receptacles’ contents upon transport. A listing of acceptable
impact or overturning of the MEGC on methods for performing the impact test
its fittings. Particular attention must is provided in the UN Recommenda-
be paid to the protection of the mani- tions (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
fold. Examples of protection include: chapter).
(i) Protection against lateral impact, (j) Marking. (1) Each MEGC must be
which may consist of longitudinal bars; equipped with a corrosion resistant
(ii) Protection against overturning, metal plate permanently attached to
which may consist of reinforcement the MEGC in a conspicuous place read-
rings or bars fixed across the frame; ily accessible for inspection. The pres-
(iii) Protection against rear impact, sure receptacles must be marked ac-
which may consist of a bumper or cording to this section. Affixing the
frame; metal plate to a pressure receptacle is
(iv) Protection of the pressure recep- prohibited. At a minimum, the fol-
tacles and service equipment against lowing information must be marked on
damage from impact or overturning by

the plate by stamping or by any other
use of an ISO frame according to the
equivalent method:
relevant provisions of ISO 1496–3. (IBR,
see § 171.7 of this subchapter). Country of manufacture
97
Pt. 178, Subpt. C, App. A 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
UN Total water capacity lll liters

Initial pressure test date and identi-
fication of the Approval Agency
Date and type of most recent periodic
tests
Year lll Monthlll Type lll
(e.g. 2004–05, AE/UE, where ‘‘AE’’ rep-
resents acoustic emission and ‘‘UE’’
represents ultrasonic examination)
Stamp of the approval agency who
performed or witnessed the most recent
test
(2) The following information must
Approval Country be marked on a metal plate firmly se-
Approval Number cured to the MEGC:
Alternate Arrangements (see § 178.75(b)) Name of the operator
MEGC Manufacturer’s name or mark Maximum permissible load mass lll
MEGC’s serial number kg
Approval agency (Authorized body for Working pressure at 15 °C: lll bar
the design approval) gauge
Year of manufacture Maximum permissible gross mass
Test pressure: lll bar gauge (MPGM) lll kg
Design temperature range lll °C to Unladen (tare) mass lll kg
lll °C [71 FR 33892, June 12, 2006, as amended at 73
Number of pressure receptacles lll FR 4719, Jan. 28, 2008]
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART C OF PART 178—ILLUSTRATIONS: CYLINDER TENSILE

SAMPLE
The following figures illustrate the recommended locations for test specimens taken from
welded cylinders:
98
ER12JN06.002</GPH>
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 178, Subpt. C, App. A
99
ER08AU02.013</GPH>
100
ER08AU02.014</GPH>
101
ER08AU02.015</GPH>
102
ER08AU02.016</GPH>
[67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002]

103
ER08AU02.017</GPH>
§§ 178.251—178.253–5 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
Subparts D–G [Reserved] § 178.255–3 Expansion domes.

(a) Expansion domes, if applied, must
Subpart H—Specifications for have a minimum capacity of one per-
Portable Tanks cent of the combined capacity of the
tank and dome.
SOURCE: 29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964, unless (b) [Reserved]
otherwise noted. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606,
Apr. 5, 1967. § 178.255–4 Closures for manholes and
domes.
§§ 178.251—178.253–5 [Reserved] (a) The manhole cover shall be de-
§ 178.255 Specification 60; steel port- signed to provide a secure closure of
able tanks. the manhole. All covers, not hinged to
the tanks, shall be attached to the out-
§ 178.255–1 General requirements. side of the dome by at least 1⁄8 inch
chain or its equivalent. Closures shall
(a) Tanks must be of fusion welded
be made tight against leakage of vapor
construction, cylindrical in shape with
and liquid by use of gaskets of suitable
seamless heads concave to the pres-
material.
sure. Tank shells may be of seamless
construction. (b) [Reserved]
(b) Tanks must be designed, con-
§ 178.255–5 Bottom discharge outlets.
structed, certified, and stamped in ac-
cordance with Section VIII of the (a) Bottom discharge outlets prohib-
ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- ited, except on tanks used for ship-
chapter). ments of sludge acid and alkaline cor-
(c) Tanks including all permanent at- rosive liquids.
tachments must be postweld heat (b) If installed, bottom outlets or
treated as a unit. bottom washout chambers shall be of
(d) Requirements concerning types of metal not subject to rapid deteriora-
valves, retesting, and qualification of tion by the lading, and each shall be
portable tanks contained in §§ 173.32 provided with a valve or plug at its
and 173.315 of this chapter must be ob- upper end and liquid-tight closure at it
served. lower end. Each valve or plug shall be
designed to insure against unseating
[29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
due to stresses or shocks incident to
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
178–7, 34 FR 18250, Nov. 14, 1969; 68 FR 75750, transportation. Bottom outlets shall be
Dec. 31, 2003] adequately protected against handling
damage and outlet equipment must not
§ 178.255–2 Material. extend to within less than one inch of
the bottom bearing surface of the skids
(a) Material used in the tank must be
or tank mounting.
steel of good weldable quality and con-
form with the requirements in Sections [29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
V, VIII, and IX of the ASME Code (IBR, FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, as amended by Amdt.
see § 171.7 of this subchapter). 178–104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994]
(b) The minimum thickness of metal,
exclusive of lining material, for shell § 178.255–6 Loading and unloading ac-
and heads of tanks shall be as follows: cessories.
(a) When installed, gauging, loading
Minimum
Tank capacity thickness and air inlet devices, including their
(inch) valves, shall be provided with adequate
means for their secure closure; and
Not more than 1,200 gallons ............................... 14 ⁄
Over 1,200 to 1,800 gallons ................................ ⁄
5 16 means shall also be provided for the
Over 1,800 gallons .............................................. 38 ⁄ closing of pipe connections of valves.
(b) Interior heater coils, if installed,
[29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 must be of extra heavy pipe and so con-
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. structed that breaking off of exterior
178–7, 34 FR 18250, Nov. 14, 1969; 68 FR 75750, connections will not cause leakage of
Dec. 31, 2003] tanks.
104
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.255–13
§ 178.255–7 Protection of valves and devices shall be deemed to comply with

accessories. this requirement.
(a) All valves, fittings, accessories, (b) All tank mountings such as skids,
safety devices, gauging devices, and the fastenings, brackets, cradles, lifting
like shall be adequately protected lugs, etc., intended to carry loadings
against mechanical damage by a hous- shall be permanently secured to tanks
ing closed with a cover plate. in accordance with the requirements
(b) Protective housing shall comply under which the tanks are fabricated,
with the requirements under which the and shall be designed with a factor of
tanks are fabricated with respect to de- safety of four, and built to withstand
sign and construction, and shall be de- loadings in any direction equal to two
signed with a minimum factor of safety times the weight of the tanks and at-
of four to withstand loadings in any di- tachments when filled to the maximum
rection equal to two times the weight permissible loaded weight.
of the tank and attachments when (c) Lifting lugs or side hold-down
filled with water. lugs shall be provided on the tank
mountings in a manner suitable for at-
§ 178.255–8 Safety devices. taching lifting gear and hold-down de-
(a) See § 173.315(i) of this subchapter. vices. Lifting lugs and hold-down lugs
(b) [Reserved] welded directly to the tank shall be of
the pad-eye type. Doubling plates weld-
[Amdt. 178–83, 50 FR 11066, Mar. 19, 1985] ed to the tank and located at the
§ 178.255–9 Compartments. points of support shall be deemed to
comply with this requirement.
(a) When the interior of the tank is (d) All tank mountings shall be so de-
divided into compartments, each com- signed as to prevent the concentration
partment shall be designed, con- of excessive loads on the tank shell.
structed and tested as a separate tank.
Thickness of shell and compartment § 178.255–12 Pressure test.
heads shall be determined on the basis
(a) Each completed portable tank
of total tank capacity.
prior to application of lining shall be
(b) [Reserved]
tested before being put into transpor-
§ 178.255–10 Lining. tation service by completely filling the
tank with water or other liquid having
(a) If a lining is required, the mate-
a similar viscosity, the temperature of
rial used for lining the tank shall be
which shall not exceed 100 °F during
homogeneous, nonporous, imperforate
the test, and applying a pressure of 60
when applied, not less elastic than the
psig. The tank shall be capable of hold-
metal of the tank proper. It shall be of
ing the prescribed pressure for at least
substantially uniform thickness, not
10 minutes without leakage, evidence
less than 1⁄32 inch thick if metallic, and
of impending failure, or failure. All clo-
not less than 1⁄16 inch thick if non-
sures shall be in place while the test is
metallic, and shall be directly bonded
made and the pressure shall be gauged
or attached by other equally satisfac-
at the top of the tank. Safety devices
tory means. Rubber lining shall be not
and/or vents shall be plugged during
less than 3⁄16 inch thick. Joints and
this test.
seams in the lining shall be made by
(b) [Reserved]
fusing the material together or by
other equally satisfactory means. The [29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
interior of the tank shall be free from FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, as amended by Amdt.
scale, oxidation, moisture and all for- 178–104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994]
eign matter during the lining oper-
ation. § 178.255–13 Repair of tanks.
(b) [Reserved] (a) Tanks failing to meet the test
may be repaired and retested, provided
§ 178.255–11 Tank mountings. that repairs are made in complete com-

(a) Tanks shall be designed and fab- pliance with the requirements of this
ricated with mountings to provide a se- specification.
cure base in transit. ‘‘Skids’’ or similar (b) [Reserved]
105
§ 178.255–14 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
§ 178.255–14 Marking. § 178.273 Approval of Specification UN

portable tanks.
(a) In addition to markings required
by Section VIII of the ASME Code (a) Application for approval. (1) An
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), owner or manufacturer of a portable
every tank shall bear permanent marks tank shall apply for approval to a des-
at least 1/8-inch high stamped into the ignated approval agency authorized to
metal near the center of one of the approve the portable tank in accord-
tank heads or stamped into a plate per- ance with the procedures in subpart E,
manently attached to the tank by part 107 of this subchapter.
means of brazing or welding or other (2) Each application for approval
suitable means as follows: must contain the following informa-
tion:
Manufacturer’s name lllllll Serial (i) Two complete copies of all engi-
No. llllllllllllllllllll
neering drawings, calculations, and
DOT specification llllllllllllll
Nominal capacity lllllll (gallons) test data necessary to ensure that the
Tare weight lllllll (pounds) design meets the relevant specifica-
Date of manufacture llllllllllll tion.
(ii) The manufacturer’s serial number
(b) [Reserved] that will be assigned to each portable
[29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 tank.
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. (iii) A statement as to whether the
178–67, 46 FR 49906, Oct. 8, 1981; 68 FR 75750, design type has been examined by any
Dec. 31, 2003] approval agency previously and judged
unacceptable. Affirmative statements
§ 178.255–15 Report.
must be documented with the name of
(a) A copy of the manufacturer’s data the approval agency, reason for non-
report required by Section VIII of the acceptance, and the nature of modifica-
ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- tions made to the design type.
chapter) under which the tank is fab- (b) Action by approval agency. The ap-
ricated must be furnished to the owner proval agency must perform the fol-
for each new tank. lowing activities:
Place ——————————————— (1) Review the application for ap-
Date ———————————————— proval to determine whether it is com-
Portable tank plete and conforms with the require-
Manufactured for lllllll Company ments of paragraph (a) of this section.
Location llllllllllllllllll If an application is incomplete, it will
Manufactured by lllllll Company be returned to the applicant with an
Location llllllllllllllllll
Consigned to lllllllll Company
explanation as to why the application
Location llllllllllllllllll is incomplete.
Size lll feet outside diameter by lll (2) Review all drawings and calcula-
long. tions to ensure that the design is in
Marks on tank as prescribed by § 178.255–14 of compliance with all requirements of
this specification are as follows: the relevant specification. If the appli-
Manufacturer’s name llllllllllll cation is approved, one set of the ap-
Serial number llllllllllllllll proved drawings, calculations, and test
Owner’s serial number lllllllllll
DOT specification llllllllllllll data shall be returned to the applicant.
ASME Code Symbol (par U–201) lllllll The second (inspector’s copy) set of ap-
Date of manufacture llllllllllll proved drawings, calculations, and test
Nominal capacity lllllll gallons. data shall be retained by the approval
It is hereby certified that this tank is in agency. Maintain drawings and ap-
complete compliance with the requirements proval records for as long as the port-
of DOT specification No. 60. able tank remains in service. The draw-
(Signed) ———————————————
Manufacturer or owner
ings and records must be provided to
the Department of Transportation
(b) [Reserved] (DOT) upon request.
[29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 (3) Witness all tests required for the
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. approval of the portable tank specified
178–83, 50 FR 11066, Mar. 19, 1985; 68 FR 75750, in this section and part 180, subpart G
Dec. 31, 2003] of this subchapter.
106
(4) Ensure, through appropriate in- series of identical portable tanks man-
spection that each portable tank is fab- ufactured to a single design type, for
ricated in all respects in conformance each series of portable tanks. The ap-
with the approved drawings, calcula- proval certificate must include all the
tions, and test data. information required to be displayed on
(5) Determine and ensure that the the metal identification plate required
portable tank is suitable for its in- by § 178.274(i). The approval certificate
tended use and that it conforms to the must certify that the approval agency
requirements of this subchapter. designated to approve the portable
(6) For UN portable tanks intended tank has approved the portable tank in
for non-refrigerated and refrigerated accordance with the procedures in sub-
liquefied gases and Division 6.1 liquids part E of part 107 of this subchapter
which meet the inhalation toxicity cri- and that the portable tank is suitable
teria (Zone A or B) as defined in for its intended purpose and meets the
§ 173.132 of this subchapter, or that are requirements of this subchapter. When
designated as toxic by inhalation mate- a series of portable tanks is manufac-
rials in the § 172.101 Table of this sub- tured without change in the design
chapter, the approval agency must en- type, the certificate may be valid for
sure that: the entire series of portable tanks rep-
(i) The portable tank has been de- resenting a single design type. For UN
signed, constructed, certified, and portable tanks, the certificate must
stamped in accordance with the re- refer to the prototype test report, the
quirements in Division 1 of Section hazardous material or group of haz-
VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 ardous materials allowed to be trans-
of this subchapter). Other design codes ported, the materials of construction of
may be used if approved by the Asso- the shell and lining (when applicable)
ciate Administrator (see § 178.274(b)(1)); and an approval number. The approval
(ii) All applicable provisions of the number must consist of the distin-
design and construction have been met guishing sign or mark of the country
to the satisfaction of the designated (‘‘USA’’ for the United States of Amer-
approval agency in accordance with the ica) where the approval was granted
rules established in the ASME Code and a registration number.
and that the portable tank meets the (iii) Retain a copy of each approval
requirements of the ASME Code and all certificate.
the applicable requirements specified (8) For UN portable tanks, the ap-
in this subchapter; proval certificate must also include the
(iii) The inspector has carried out all following:
the inspections specified by the rules (i) The results of the applicable
established in the ASME Code; and framework and rail impact test speci-
(iv) The portable tank is marked fied in part 180, subpart G, of this sub-
with a U stamp code symbol under the chapter; and
authority of the authorized inde- (ii) The results of the initial inspec-
pendent inspector. tion and test in § 178.274(j).
(7) Upon successful completion of all (9) The approval agency shall be inde-
requirements of this subpart, the ap- pendent from the manufacturer. The
proval agency must: approval agency and the authorized in-
(i) Apply its name, identifying mark spector may be the same entity.
or identifying number, and the date (c) Manufacturers’ responsibilities. The
upon which the approval was issued, to manufacturer is responsible for compli-
the metal identification marking plate ance with the applicable specifications
attached to the portable tank. Any ap- for the design and construction of port-
provals for UN portable tanks author- able tanks. In addition to responsi-
izing design or construction alter- bility for compliance, manufacturers
natives (Alternate Arrangements) ap- are responsible for ensuring that the
proved by the Associate Administrator contracted approval agency and au-
(see § 178.274(a)(2)) must be indicated on thorized inspector, if applicable, are

the plate as specified in § 178.274(i). qualified, reputable and competent.
(ii) Issue an approval certificate for The manufacturer of a portable tank
each portable tank or, in the case of a shall—
107
§ 178.273 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(1) Comply with all the applicable re- (2) A statement as to whether the in-
quirements of the ASME Code and of tended modification has been examined
this subpart including, but not limited and determined to be unacceptable by
to, ensuring that the quality control, any approval agency. The written
design calculations and required tests statement must include the name of
are performed and that all aspects of the approving agency, the reason for
the portable tank meet the applicable nonacceptance, and the nature of
requirements. changes made to the modification since
(2) Obtain and use a designated ap- its original rejection.
proval agency, if applicable, and obtain (3) The approval agency shall review
and use a DOT-designated approval the request for modification, and if it
agency to approve the design, construc- is determined that the proposed modi-
tion and certification of the portable fication is in full compliance with the
tank. relevant DOT specification, including a
(3) Provide a statement in the manu- UN portable tank, the request shall be
facturers’ data report certifying that approved and the approval agency shall
each portable tank that is manufac- perform the following activities:
tured complies with the relevant speci- (i) Return one set of the approved re-
fication and all the applicable require- vised drawings, calculations, and test
ments of this subchapter. data to the applicant. The second and
(4) Maintain records of the qualifica- third sets of the approved revised draw-
tion of portable tanks for at least 5 ings, calculations, and data shall be re-
years and provide copies to the ap- tained by the approval agency as re-
proval agency, the owner or lessee of quired in § 107.404(a)(3) of this sub-
the tank. Upon request, provide these chapter.
records to a representative of DOT.
(ii) Ensure through appropriate in-
(d) Denial of application for approval.
spection that all modifications con-
If an approval agency finds that a port-
form to the revised drawings, calcula-
able tank cannot be approved for any
tions, and test data.
reason, it shall notify the applicant in
writing and shall provide the applicant (iii) Determine the extent to which
with the reasons for which the ap- retesting of the modified tank is nec-
proval is denied. A copy of the notifica- essary based on the nature of the pro-
tion letter shall be provided to the As- posed modification, and ensure that all
sociate Administrator. An applicant required retests are satisfactorily per-
aggrieved by a decision of an approval formed.
agency may appeal the decision in (iv) If modification to an approved
writing, within 90 days of receipt, to tank alters any information on the ap-
the Associate Administrator. proval certificate, issue a new approval
(e) Modifications to approved portable certificate for the modified tank and
tanks. (1) Prior to modification of any ensure that any necessary changes are
UN portable tank which may affect made to the metal identification plate.
conformance and the safe use of the A copy of each newly issued approval
portable tank, which may involve a certificate shall be retained by the ap-
change to the design type or which proval agency and by the owner of each
may affect its ability to retain haz- portable tank.
ardous material in transportation, the (4) If the approval agency determines
person desiring to make such modifica- that the proposed modification is not
tion shall inform the approval agency in compliance with the relevant DOT
that issued the initial approval of the specification, the approval agency
portable tank (or if unavailable, an- shall deny the request in accordance
other approval agency) of the nature of with paragraph (d) of this section.
the modification and request approval (f) Termination of Approval Certificate.
of the modification. The person desir- (1) The Associate Administrator may
ing to modify the tank must supply the terminate an approval issued under
approval agency with three sets of all this section if he determines that—
revised drawings, calculations, and test (i) Information upon which the ap-
data relative to the intended modifica- proval was based is fraudulent or sub-
tion. stantially erroneous; or
108
(ii) Termination of the approval is tanks may be varied if approved by the

necessary to adequately protect Associate Administrator and the port-
against risks to life and property; or able tank is shown to provide a level of
(iii) The approval was not issued by safety equal to or exceeding the re-
the approval agency in good faith; or quirements of this subchapter. Port-
(iv) The portable tank does not meet able tanks approved to alternative
the specification. technical requirements must be
(2) Before an approval is terminated, marked ‘‘Alternative Arrangement’’ as
the Associate Administrator gives the specified in paragraph (i) of this sec-
interested party(ies): tion.
(i) Written notice of the facts or con- (3) Definitions. The following defini-
duct believed to warrant the termi- tions apply for the purposes of design
nation; and construction of UN portable tanks
(ii) Opportunity to submit oral and under this subpart:
written evidence; and Alternate Arrangement portable tank
(iii) Opportunity to demonstrate or
means a UN portable tank that has
achieve compliance with the applicable
been approved to alternative technical
requirements.
requirements or testing methods other
(3) If the Associate Administrator de-
than those specified for UN portable
termines that a certificate of approval
tanks in part 178 or part 180 of this sub-
must be terminated to preclude a sig-
chapter.
nificant and imminent adverse affect
on public safety, he may terminate the Approval agency means the des-
certificate immediately. In such cir- ignated approval agency authorized to
cumstances, the opportunities of para- approve the portable tank in accord-
graphs (f)(2) (ii) and (iii) of this section ance with the procedures in subpart E
need not be provided prior to termi- of part 107 of this subchapter.
nation of the approval, but shall be Design pressure is defined according
provided as soon as practicable there- to the hazardous materials intended to
after. be transported in the portable tank.
See §§ 178.275, 178.276 and 178.277, as ap-
[66 FR 33439, June 21, 2001, as amended at 67 plicable.
FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 75748, 75751,
Dec. 31, 2003; 72 FR 55695, Oct. 1, 2007]
Design type means a portable tank or
series of portable tanks made of mate-
§ 178.274 Specifications for UN port- rials of the same material specifica-
able tanks. tions and thicknesses, manufactured
(a) General. (1) Each UN portable by a single manufacturer, using the
tank must meet the requirements of same fabrication techniques (for exam-
this section. In addition to the require- ple, welding procedures) and made with
ments of this section, requirements equivalent structural equipment, clo-
specific to UN portable tanks used for sures, and service equipment.
liquid and solid hazardous materials, Fine grain steel means steel that has a
non-refrigerated liquefied gases and re- ferritic grain size of 6 or finer when de-
frigerated liquefied gases are provided termined in accordance with ASTM E
in §§ 178.275, 178.276 and 178.277, respec- 112–96 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
tively. Requirements for approval, chapter).
maintenance, inspection, testing and Fusible element means a non-reclosing
use are provided in § 178.273 and part pressure relief device that is thermally
180, subpart G, of this subchapter. Any activated and that provides protection
portable tank which meets the defini- against excessive pressure buildup in
tion of a ‘‘container’’ within the terms the portable tank developed by expo-
of the International Convention for sure to heat, such as from a fire (see
Safe Containers (CSC) must meet the § 178.275(g)).
requirements of the CSC as amended Jacket means the outer insulation
and 49 CFR parts 450 through 453 and cover or cladding which may be part of
must have a CSC safety approval plate. the insulation system.

(2) In recognition of scientific and Leakage test means a test using gas to
technological advances, the technical subject the shell and its service equip-
requirements applicable to UN portable ment to an internal pressure.
109
§ 178.274 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
Maximum allowable working pressure (b) General design and construction re-
(MAWP) is defined according to the quirements. (1) The design temperature
hazardous materials intended to be range for the shell must be ¥40 °C to 50
transported in the portable tank. See °C (¥40 °F to 122 °F) for hazardous ma-
§§ 178.275, 178.276 and 178.277, as applica- terials transported under normal con-
ble. ditions of transportation, except for
Maximum permissible gross mass portable tanks used for refrigerated
(MPGM) means the sum of the tare liquefied gases where the minimum de-
mass of the portable tank and the sign temperature must not be higher
heaviest hazardous material authorized than the lowest (coldest) temperature
for transportation. (for example, service temperature) of
Mild steel means a steel with a guar- the contents during filling, discharge
anteed minimum tensile strength of 360 or transportation. For hazardous mate-
N/mm2 to 440 N/mm2 and a guaranteed rials handled under elevated tempera-
minimum elongation at fracture as ture conditions, the design tempera-
specified in paragraph (c)(10) of this ture must not be less than the max-
section. imum temperature of the hazardous
Offshore portable tank means a port- material during filling, discharge or
able tank specially designed for re- transportation. More severe design
peated use in the transportation of haz- temperatures must be considered for
ardous materials to, from and between portable tanks subjected to severe cli-
offshore facilities. An offshore portable matic conditions (for example, portable
tank is designed and constructed in ac- tanks transported in arctic regions).
cordance with the Guidelines for the Shells must be designed and con-
Approval of Containers Handled in structed in accordance with the re-
Open Seas specified in the IMDG Code quirements in Section VIII of the
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
Reference steel means a steel with a chapter), except as limited or modified
tensile strength of 370 N/mm2 and an in this subchapter. For portable tanks
elongation at fracture of 27%. used for liquid or solid hazardous mate-
Service equipment means measuring rials, a design code other than the
instruments and filling, discharge, ASME Code may be used if approved by
venting, safety, heating, cooling and the Associate Administrator. Portable
insulating devices. tanks must have an ASME certifi-
Shell means the part of the portable cation and U stamp when used for Haz-
tank which retains the hazardous ma- ard Zone A or B toxic by inhalation liq-
terials intended for transportation, in- uids, or when used for non-refrigerated
cluding openings and closures, but does or refrigerated liquefied compressed
not include service equipment or exter- gases. Shells must be made of metallic
nal structural equipment. materials suitable for forming. Non-
Structural equipment means the rein- metallic materials may be used for the
forcing, fastening, protective and stabi- attachments and supports between the
lizing members external to the shell. shell and jacket, provided their mate-
Test pressure means the maximum rial properties at the minimum and
gauge pressure at the top of the shell maximum design temperatures are
during the hydraulic pressure test proven to be sufficient. For welded
equal to not less than 1.5 times the de- shells, only a material whose
sign pressure for liquids and 1.3 for liq- weldability has been fully dem-
uefied compressed gases and refrig- onstrated may be used. Welds must be
erated liquefied gases. In some in- of high quality and conform to a level
stances a pneumatic test is authorized of integrity at least equivalent to the
as an alternative to the hydraulic test. welding requirements specified in Sec-
The minimum test pressures for port- tion VIII of the ASME Code for the
able tanks intended for specific liquid welding of pressure vessels. When the
and solid hazardous materials are spec- manufacturing process or the materials
ified in the applicable portable tank T make it necessary, the shells must be
codes (such as T1–T23) assigned to suitably heat-treated to guarantee ade-
these hazardous materials in the quate toughness in the weld and in the
§ 172.101 Table of this subchapter. heat-affected zones. In choosing the
110
material, the design temperature range perforations, sufficiently elastic and

must be taken into account with re- compatible with the thermal expansion
spect to risk of brittle fracture, stress characteristics of the shell. The lining
corrosion cracking, resistance to im- of every shell, shell fittings and piping
pact, and suitability for the hazardous must be continuous and must extend
materials intended for transportation around the face of any flange. Where
in the portable tank. When fine grain external fittings are welded to the
steel is used, the guaranteed value of tank, the lining must be continuous
the yield strength must be not more through the fitting and around the face
than 460 N/mm2 and the guaranteed of external flanges. Joints and seams in
value of the upper limit of the tensile the lining must be made by fusing the
strength must be not more than 725 N/ material together or by other equally
mm2 according to the material speci- effective means.
fication. Aluminum may not be used as (5) Contact between dissimilar met-
a construction material for the shells als which could result in damage by
of portable tanks intended for the galvanic action must be prevented by
transport of non-refrigerated liquefied appropriate measures.
gases. For portable tanks intended for (6) The construction materials of the
the transport of liquid or solid haz- portable tank, including any devices,
ardous materials, aluminum may only gaskets, linings and accessories, must
be used as a construction material for not adversely affect or react with the
portable tank shells if approved by the hazardous materials intended to be
Associate Administrator. Portable transported in the portable tank.
tank materials must be suitable for the (7) Portable tanks must be designed
external environment where they will and constructed with supports that
be transported, taking into account the provide a secure base during transpor-
determined design temperature range. tation and with suitable lifting and tie-
Portable tanks shall be designed to down attachments.
withstand, without loss of contents, at (c) Design criteria. (1) Portable tanks
least the internal pressure due to the and their fastenings must, under the
contents and the static, dynamic and maximum permissible loads and max-
thermal loads during normal condi- imum permissible working pressures,
tions of handling and transportation. be capable of absorbing the following
The design must take into account the separately applied static forces (for
effects of fatigue, caused by repeated calculation purposes, acceleration due
application of these loads through the to gravity (g) =9.81m/s2):
expected life of the portable tank. (i) In the direction of travel: 2g
(2) Portable tank shells, fittings, and (twice the MPGM multiplied by the ac-
pipework shall be constructed from celeration due to gravity);
materials that are: (ii) Horizontally at right angles to
(i) Compatible with the hazardous the direction of travel: 1g (the MPGM
materials intended to be transported; multiplied by the acceleration due to
or gravity);
(ii) Properly passivated or neutral- (iii) Vertically upwards: 1g (the
ized by chemical reaction, if applica- MPGM multiplied by the acceleration
ble; or due to gravity); and
(iii) For portable tanks used for liq- (iv) Vertically downwards: 2g (twice
uid and solid materials, lined with cor- the MPGM multiplied by the accelera-
rosion-resistant material directly tion due to gravity).
bonded to the shell or attached by (2) Under each of the forces specified
equivalent means. in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, the
(3) Gaskets and seals shall be made of safety factor must be as follows:
materials that are compatible with the (i) For metals having a clearly de-
hazardous materials intended to be fined yield point, a design margin of 1.5
transported. in relation to the guaranteed yield
(4) When shells are lined, the lining strength; or

must be compatible with the hazardous (ii) For metals with no clearly de-
materials intended to be transported, fined yield point, a design margin of 1.5
homogeneous, non-porous, free from in relation to the guaranteed 0.2%
111
§ 178.274 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
proof strength and, for austenitic Re = yield strength in N/mm2, or 0.2%

steels, the 1% proof strength. proof strength or, for austenitic
(3) The values of yield strength or steels, 1% proof strength;
proof strength must be the values ac- Rm = minimum tensile strength in N/
cording to recognized material stand- mm2.
ards. When austenitic steels are used, (8) The values of Re and Rm to be
the specified minimum values of yield used must be the specified minimum
strength or proof strength according to values according to recognized mate-
the material standards may be in- rial standards. When austenitic steels
creased by up to 15% for portable tanks are used, the specified minimum values
used for liquid and solid hazardous ma- for Re and Rm according to the mate-
terials, other than toxic by inhalation rial standards may be increased by up
liquids meeting the criteria of Hazard to 15% when greater values are at-
Zone A or Hazard Zone B (see § 173.133 tested in the material inspection cer-
of this subchapter), when these greater tificate.
values are attested in the material in- (9) Steels which have a Re/Rm ratio
spection certificate. of more than 0.85 are not allowed for
(4) Portable tanks must be capable of the construction of welded shells. The
being electrically grounded to prevent values of Re and Rm to be used in de-
dangerous electrostatic discharge when termining this ratio must be the values
they are used for Class 2 flammable specified in the material inspection
gases or Class 3 flammable liquids, in- certificate.
cluding elevated temperature mate- (10) Steels used in the construction of
rials transported at or above their shells must have an elongation at frac-
flash point. ture, in percentage, of not less than
(5) For shells of portable tanks used 10,000/Rm with an absolute minimum of
for liquefied compressed gases, the 16% for fine grain steels and 20% for
shell must consist of a circular cross other steels.
section. Shells must be of a design ca- (11) For the purpose of determining
pable of being stress-analyzed mathe- actual values for materials for sheet
metal, the axis of the tensile test speci-
matically or experimentally by resist-
men must be at right angles (trans-
ance strain gauges as specified in UG–
versely) to the direction of rolling. The
101 of Section VIII of the ASME Code,
permanent elongation at fracture must
or other methods approved by the As-
be measured on test specimens of rec-
sociate Administrator.
tangular cross sections in accordance
(6) Shells must be designed and con- with ISO 6892 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this
structed to withstand a hydraulic test subchapter), using a 50 mm gauge
pressure of not less than 1.5 times the length.
design pressure for portable tanks used (d) Minimum shell thickness. (1) The
for liquids and 1.3 times the design minimum shell thickness must be the
pressure for portable tanks used for liq- greatest thickness of the following:
uefied compressed gases. Specific re- (i) the minimum thickness deter-
quirements are provided for each haz- mined in accordance with the require-
ardous material in the applicable T ments of paragraphs (d)(2) through
Code or portable tank special provision (d)(7) of this section;
specified in the § 172.101 Table of this (ii) the minimum thickness deter-
subchapter. The minimum shell thick- mined in accordance with Section VIII
ness requirements must also be taken of the ASME Code or other approved
into account. pressure vessel code; or
(7) For metals exhibiting a clearly (iii) the minimum thickness specified
defined yield point or characterized by in the applicable T code or portable
a guaranteed proof strength (0.2% proof tank special provision indicated for
strength, generally, or 1% proof each hazardous material in the § 172.101
strength for austenitic steels), the pri- Table of this subchapter.
mary membrane stress s (sigma) in the (2) Shells (cylindrical portions, heads
shell must not exceed 0.75 Re or 0.50 and manhole covers) not more than 1.80
Rm, whichever is lower, at the test m in diameter may not be less than 5
pressure, where: mm thick in the reference steel or of
112
equivalent thickness in the metal to be d1 = 1.8m, unless the formula is used to de-
used. Shells more than 1.80 m in diame- termine the equivalent minimum thick-
ter may not be less than 6 mm (0.2 ness for a portable tank shell that is re-
quired to have a minimum thickness of
inches) thick in the reference steel or
8mm or 10mm according to the applicable
of equivalent thickness in the metal to T code indicated in the § 172.101 Table of
be used. For portable tanks used only this subchapter. When reference steel
for the transportation of powdered or thicknesses of 8mm or 10mm are specified,
granular solid hazardous materials of d1 is equal to the actual diameter of the
Packing Group II or III, the minimum shell but not less than 1.8m;
thickness requirement may be reduced Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength
to 5 mm in the reference steel or of (in N/mm 2) of the metal to be used;
equivalent thickness in the metal to be A1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at
used regardless of the shell diameter. fracture (in %) of the metal to be used ac-
cording to recognized material standards.
For vacuum-insulated tanks, the ag-
gregate thickness of the jacket and the (6) The wall and all parts of the shell
shell must correspond to the minimum may not have a thickness less than
thickness prescribed in this paragraph, that prescribed in paragraphs (d)(2),
with the thickness of the shell itself (d)(3) and (d)(4) of this section. This
not less than the minimum thickness thickness must be exclusive of any cor-
prescribed in paragraph (d)(3) of this rosion allowance.
section. (7) There must be no sudden change
(3) When additional protection of plate thickness at the attachment of
against shell damage is provided in the the heads to the cylindrical portion of
case of portable tanks used for liquid the shell.
and solid hazardous materials requir- (e) Service equipment. (1) Service
ing test pressures less than 2.65 bar equipment must be arranged so that it
(265.0 kPa), subject to certain limita- is protected against the risk of me-
tions specified in the UN Recommenda- chanical damage by external forces
tions (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- during handling and transportation.
chapter), the Associate Administrator When the connections between the
may approve a reduced minimum shell frame and the shell allow relative
thickness. movement between the sub-assemblies,
(4) The cylindrical portions, heads the equipment must be fastened to
and manhole covers of all shells must allow such movement without risk of
not be less than 3 mm (0.1 inch) thick damage to any working part. The ex-
regardless of the material of construc- ternal discharge fittings (pipe sockets,
tion, except for portable tanks used for shut-off devices) and the internal stop-
liquefied compressed gases where the valve and its seating must be protected
cylindrical portions, ends (heads) and against mechanical damage by exter-
manhole covers of all shells must not nal forces (for example, by using shear
be less than 4 mm (0.2 inch) thick re- sections). Each internal self-closing
gardless of the material of construc- stop-valve must be protected by a
tion. shear section or sacrificial device lo-
(5) When steel is used, that has char- cated outboard of the valve. The shear
acteristics other than that of reference section or sacrificial device must break
steel, the equivalent thickness of the at no more than 70% of the load that
shell and heads must be determined ac- would cause failure of the internal self-
cording to the following formula: closing stop valve. The filling and dis-
charge devices (including flanges or
21.4e 0 d1
e1 = threaded plugs) and any protective
1.8m 3 Rm1 × A1 caps must be capable of being secured
against unintended opening.
Where: (2) Each filling or discharge opening
e1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of of a portable tank must be clearly
the metal to be used;
marked to indicate its function.
e0 = minimum thickness (in mm) of the ref-

erence steel specified in the applicable T (3) Each stop-valve or other means of
code or portable tank special provision in- closure must be designed and con-
dicated for each material in the § 172.101 structed to a rated pressure not less
Table of this subchapter; than the MAWP of the shell taking
113
EN21JN01.005</MATH>
§ 178.274 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
into account the temperatures ex- (vi) when practicable, the device
pected during transport. All stop- must show the manufacturer’s name
valves with screwed spindles must and product number.
close by a clockwise motion of the (2) Connections to pressure relief de-
handwheel. For other stop-valves, the vices. Connections to pressure relief de-
position (open and closed) and direc- vices must be of sufficient size to en-
tion of closure must be clearly indi- able the required discharge to pass un-
cated. All stop-valves must be designed restricted to the safety device. No stop-
to prevent unintentional opening. valve may be installed between the
(4) Piping must be designed, con- shell and the pressure relief devices ex-
structed and installed to avoid the risk cept where duplicate devices are pro-
of damage due to thermal expansion vided for maintenance or other reasons
and contraction, mechanical shock and and the stop-valves serving the devices
vibration. All piping must be of a suit- actually in use are locked open or the
able metallic material. Welded pipe stop-valves are interlocked so that at
joints must be used wherever possible. least one of the devices is always in
(5) Joints in copper tubing must be use. There must be no obstruction in
brazed or have an equally strong metal an opening leading to a vent or pres-
union. The melting point of brazing sure relief device which might restrict
materials must be no lower than 525 °C or cut-off the flow from the shell to
(977 °F). The joints must not decrease that device. Vents or pipes from the
the strength of the tubing, such as may pressure relief device outlets, when
happen when cutting threads. Brazed used, must deliver the relieved vapor or
joints are not authorized for portable liquid to the atmosphere in conditions
tanks intended for refrigerated lique- of minimum back-pressure on the re-
fied gases. lieving devices.
(6) The burst pressure of all piping (3) Location of pressure relief devices.
and pipe fittings must be greater than (i) Each pressure relief device inlet
the highest of four times the MAWP of must be situated on top of the shell in
the shell or four times the pressure to a position as near the longitudinal and
which it may be subjected in service by transverse center of the shell as rea-
the action of a pump or other device sonably practicable. All pressure relief
(except pressure relief devices). device inlets must, under maximum
(7) Ductile metals must be used in filling conditions, be situated in the
the construction of valves and acces- vapor space of the shell and the devices
sories. must be so arranged as to ensure that
(f) Pressure relief devices—(1) Marking any escaping vapor is not restricted in
of pressure relief devices. Every pressure any manner. For flammable hazardous
relief device must be clearly and per- materials, the escaping vapor must be
manently marked with the following: directed away from the shell in such a
(i) the pressure (in bar or kPa) or manner that it cannot impinge upon
temperature for fusible elements (in the shell. For refrigerated liquefied
°C) at which it is set to discharge; gases, the escaping vapor must be di-
(ii) the allowable tolerance at the rected away from the tank and in such
discharge pressure for reclosing de- a manner that it cannot impinge upon
vices; the tank. Protective devices which de-
(iii) the reference temperature cor- flect the flow of vapor are permissible
responding to the rated pressure for provided the required relief-device ca-
frangible discs; pacity is not reduced.
(iv) the allowable temperature toler- (ii) Provisions must be implemented
ance for fusible elements; to prevent unauthorized persons from
(v) The rated flow capacity of the access to the pressure relief devices
spring loaded pressure relief devices, and to protect the devices from damage
frangible disc or fusible elements in caused by the portable tank over-
standard cubic meters of air per second turning.
(m3/s). For spring loaded pressure relief (g) Gauging devices. Unless a portable
device the rated flow capacity shall be tank is intended to be filled by weight,
determined according to ISO 4126–1 it must be equipped with one or more
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter); and gauging devices. Glass level-gauges and
114
gauges made of other fragile material, ment resulting from lateral and longi-
which are in direct communication tudinal impact and overturning, or the
with the contents of the tank are pro- shell and service equipment must be
hibited. A connection for a vacuum constructed to withstand the forces re-
gauge must be provided in the jacket of sulting from impact or overturning.
a vacuum-insulated portable tank. External fittings must be protected so
(h) Portable tank supports, frameworks, as to preclude the release of the shell
lifting and tie-down attachments. (1) contents upon impact or overturning of
Portable tanks must be designed and the portable tank on its fittings. Ex-
constructed with a support structure to amples of protection include:
provide a secure base during transport. (i) Protection against lateral impact
The forces and safety factors specified which may consist of longitudinal bars
in paragraphs (c)(1) and (c)(2) of this protecting the shell on both sides at
section, respectively, must be taken the level of the median line;
into account in this aspect of the de- (ii) Protection of the portable tank
sign. Skids, frameworks, cradles or against overturning which may consist
other similar structures are accept- of reinforcement rings or bars fixed
able. across the frame;
(2) The combined stresses caused by (iii) Protection against rear impact
portable tank mountings (for example, which may consist of a bumper or
cradles, framework, etc.) and portable frame;
tank lifting and tie-down attachments (iv) Protection of the shell against
must not cause stress that would dam- damage from impact or overturning by
age the shell in a manner that would use of an ISO frame in accordance with
compromise its lading retention capa- ISO 1496–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
bility. Permanent lifting and tie-down chapter); and
attachments must be fitted to all port- (v) Protection of the portable tank
able tanks. Preferably they should be from impact or damage that may re-
fitted to the portable tank supports sult from overturning by an insulation
but may be secured to reinforcing jacket.
plates located on the shell at the (i) Marking. (1) Every portable tank
points of support. Each portable tank must be fitted with a corrosion resist-
must be designed so that the center of ant metal plate permanently attached
gravity of the filled tank is approxi- to the portable tank in a conspicuous
mately centered within the points of place and readily accessible for inspec-
attachment for lifting devices. tion. When the plate cannot be perma-
(3) In the design of supports and nently attached to the shell, the shell
frameworks, the effects of environ- must be marked with at least the infor-
mental corrosion must be taken into mation required by Section VIII of the
account. ASME Code. At a minimum, the fol-
(4) Forklift pockets must be capable lowing information must be marked on
of being closed off. The means of clos- the plate by stamping or by any other
ing forklift pockets must be a perma- equivalent method:
nent part of the framework or perma-
nently attached to the framework. Sin- Country of manufacture
gle compartment portable tanks with a UN
length less than 3.65 m (12 ft.) need not Approval Country
have forklift pockets that are capable Approval Number
of being closed off provided that: Alternative Arrangements (see § 178.274(a)(2))
(i) The shell, including all the fit- ‘‘AA’’
Manufacturer’s name or mark
tings, are well protected from being hit
Manufacturer’s serial number
by the forklift blades; and
Approval Agency (Authorized body for the
(ii) The distance between forklift design approval)
pockets (measured from the center of Owner’s registration number
each pocket) is at least half of the Year of manufacture
maximum length of the portable tank. Pressure vessel code to which the shell is de-
(5) During transport, portable tanks signed
must be adequately protected against Test pressurellllbar gauge.
damage to the shell, and service equip- MAWPllllbar gauge.
115
§ 178.274 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
External design pressure (not required for (1) A check of the design characteris-
portable tanks used for refrigerated lique- tics.
fied gases)llllbar gauge. (2) An internal and external examina-
Design temperature rangellll °C
tion of the portable tank and its fit-
tollll °C. (For portable tanks used for
refrigerated liquefied gases, the minimum tings, taking into account the haz-
design temperature must be marked.) ardous materials to be transported. For
Water capacity at 20 °C/llllliters. UN portable tanks used for refrigerated
Water capacity of each compartment at 20 liquefied gases, a pressure test using an
°Cllllliters. inert gas may be conducted instead of
Initial pressure test date and witness identi- a hydrostatic test. An internal inspec-
fication. tion is not required for a portable tank
MAWP for heating/cooling systemllllbar used for the dedicated transportation
gauge.
Shell material(s) and material standard ref-
of refrigerated liquefied gases that are
erence(s). not filled with an inspection opening.
Equivalent thickness in reference (3) A pressure test as specified in
steelllllmm. paragraph (i) of this section.
Lining material (when applicable). (4) A leakage test.
Date and type of most recent periodic test(s). (5) A test of the satisfactory oper-
MonthllllYearllll Test ation of all service equipment includ-
pressurellllbar gauge. ing pressure relief devices must also be
Stamp of approval agency that performed or
performed. When the shell and its fit-
witnessed the most recent test.
tings have been pressure-tested sepa-
For portable tanks used for refrigerated
rately, they must be subjected to a
liquefied gases:
leakage test after reassembly. All
Either ‘‘thermally insulated’’ or ‘‘vacuum in-
welds, subject to full stress level in the
sulated’’llll.
Effectiveness of the insulation system (heat shell, must be inspected during the ini-
influx)llllWatts (W). tial test by radiographic, ultrasonic, or
Reference holding timelllldays or hours another suitable non-destructive test
and initial pressurellllbar/kPa gauge method. This does not apply to the
and degree of fillingllllin kg for each jacket.
refrigerated liquefied gas permitted for (6) Effective January 1, 2008, each
transportation. new UN portable tank design type
(2) The following information must meeting the definition of ‘‘container’’
be marked either on the portable tank in the Convention for Safe Containers
itself or on a metal plate firmly se- (CSC) (see 49 CFR 450.3(a)(2)) must be
cured to the portable tank: subjected to the dynamic longitudinal
impact test prescribed in Part IV, Sec-
Name of the operator.
tion 40 of the UN Manual of Tests and
Name of hazardous materials being trans-
ported and maximum mean bulk tempera- Criteria (see IBR, § 171.7 of this sub-
ture (except for refrigerated liquefied chapter). A UN portable tank design
gases, the name and temperature are only type impact-tested prior to January 1,
required when the maximum mean bulk 2008, in accordance with the require-
temperature is higher than 50 °C). ments of this section in effect on Octo-
Maximum permissible gross mass ber 1, 2005, need not be retested. UN
(MPGM)llllkg. portable tanks used for the dedicated
Unladen (tare) massllllkg.
transportation of ‘‘Helium, refrigerated
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (i)(2): For the identi- liquid,’’ UN1963, and ‘‘Hydrogen, refrig-
fication of the hazardous materials being erated liquid,’’ UN1966, that are
transported refer to part 172 of this sub- marked ‘‘NOT FOR RAIL TRANS-
chapter.
PORT’’ in letters of a minimum height
(3) If a portable tank is designed and of 10 cm (4 inches) on at least two sides
approved for open seas operations, such of the portable tank are excepted from
as offshore oil exploration, in accord- the dynamic longitudinal impact test.
ance with the IMDG Code, the words (7) The following tests must be com-
‘‘OFFSHORE PORTABLE TANK’’ must pleted on a portable tank or a series of
be marked on the identification plate. portable tanks designed and con-

(j) Initial inspection and test. The ini- structed to a single design type that is
tial inspection and test of a portable also a CSC container without leakage
tank must include the following: or deformation that would render the
116
portable tank unsafe for transportation resulting from their compression dur-
and use: ing filling without pressure relief by a
(i) Longitudinal inertia. The portable maximum ullage temperature of 65 °C
tank loaded to its maximum gross (149 °F) and a liquid expansion due to
weight must be positioned with its lon- an increase in mean bulk temperature
gitudinal axis vertical. It shall be held of 35 °C (95 °F); and
in this position for five minutes by sup- (C) A head pressure determined on
port at the lower end of the base struc- the basis of the forces specified in
ture providing vertical and lateral re- § 178.274(c) of this subchapter, but not
straint and by support at the upper end
less than 0.35 bar (35 kPa).
of the base structure providing lateral
restraint only. (2) Maximum allowable working pres-
(ii) Lateral inertia. The portable tank sure (MAWP) means a pressure that
loaded to its maximum gross weight must not be less than the highest of
must be positioned for five minutes the following pressures measured at
with its transverse axis vertical. It the top of the shell while in operating
shall be held in this position for five position:
minutes by support at the lower side of (i) The maximum effective gauge
the base structure providing vertical pressure allowed in the shell during
and lateral restraint and by support at filling or discharge; or
the upper side of the base structure (ii) The maximum effective gauge
providing lateral restraint only. pressure to which the shell is designed
[66 FR 33440, June 21, 2001, as amended at 67 which must be not less than the design
FR 15744, Apr. 3, 2002; 68 FR 45041, July 31, pressure.
2003; 68 FR 57633, Oct. 6, 2003; 68 FR 75751, (c) Service equipment. (1) In addition
Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 76185, Dec. 20, 2004; 70 FR to the requirements specified in
34399, June 14, 2005; 71 FR 78634, Dec. 29, 2006; § 178.274, for service equipment, all
72 FR 55696, Oct. 1, 2007; 73 FR 4719, Jan. 28,
2008] openings in the shell, intended for fill-
ing or discharging the portable tank
EDITORIAL NOTE: At 68 FR 57633, Oct. 6, must be fitted with a manually oper-
2003, § 178.274 was amended in paragraph
(b)(1); however, the amendment could not be
ated stop-valve located as close to the
incorporated due to inaccurate amendatory shell as reasonably practicable. Other
instruction. openings, except for openings leading
to venting or pressure relief devices,
§ 178.275 Specification for UN Portable must be equipped with either a stop-
Tanks intended for the transpor- valve or another suitable means of clo-
tation of liquid and solid hazardous sure located as close to the shell as
materials.
reasonably practicable.
(a) In addition to the requirements of (2) All portable tanks must be fitted
§ 178.274, this section sets forth defini- with a manhole or other inspection
tions and requirements that apply to openings of a suitable size to allow for
UN portable tanks intended for the internal inspection and adequate ac-
transportation of liquid and solid haz- cess for maintenance and repair of the
ardous materials.
interior. Compartmented portable
(b) Definitions and requirements—(1)
tanks must have a manhole or other
Design pressure means the pressure to
inspection openings for each compart-
be used in calculations required by the
ment.
recognized pressure vessel code. The
design pressure must not be less than (3) For insulated portable tanks, top
the highest of the following pressures: fittings must be surrounded by a spill
(i) The maximum effective gauge collection reservoir with suitable
pressure allowed in the shell during drains.
filling or discharge; or (4) Piping must be designed, con-
(ii) The sum of— structed and installed to avoid the risk
(A) The absolute vapor pressure (in of damage due to thermal expansion
bar) of the hazardous material at 65 °C, and contraction, mechanical shock and
minus 1 bar (149 °F, minus 100 kPa); vibration. All piping must be of a suit-
(B) The partial pressure (in bar) of able metallic material. Welded pipe
air or other gases in the ullage space, joints must be used wherever possible.
117
§ 178.275 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(d) Bottom openings. (1) Certain haz- from the valve itself within 30 seconds
ardous materials may not be trans- of actuation; and
ported in portable tanks with bottom (E) The valve must continue to be ef-
openings. When the applicable T code fective in the event of damage to the
or portable tank special provision, as external device for controlling the op-
referenced for materials in the § 172.101 eration of the valve;
Table of this subchapter, specifies that (ii) An external stop-valve fitted as
bottom openings are prohibited, there close to the shell as reasonably prac-
must be no openings below the liquid ticable;
level of the shell when it is filled to its (iii) A liquid tight closure at the end
maximum permissible filling limit. of the discharge pipe, which may be a
When an existing opening is closed, it bolted blank flange or a screw cap; and
must be accomplished by internally (iv) For UN portable tanks, with bot-
and externally welding one plate to the
tom outlets, used for the transpor-
shell.
tation of liquid hazardous materials
(2) Bottom discharge outlets for port-
that are Class 3, PG I or II, or PG III
able tanks carrying certain solid, crys-
with a flash point of less than 100 °F (38
tallizable or highly viscous hazardous
°C); Division 5.1, PG I or II; or Division
materials must be equipped with at
6.1, PG I or II, the remote means of clo-
least two serially fitted and mutually
sure must be capable of thermal acti-
independent shut-off devices. Use of
vation. The thermal means of activa-
only two shut-off devices is only au-
tion must activate at a temperature of
thorized when this paragraph is ref-
not more than 250 °F (121 °C).
erenced in the applicable T Code indi-
cated for each hazardous material in (e) Pressure relief devices. All portable
the § 172.101 Table of this subchapter. tanks must be fitted with at least one
The design of the equipment must be to pressure relief device. All relief devices
the satisfaction of the approval agency must be designed, constructed and
and must include: marked in accordance with the require-
(i) An external stop-valve fitted as ments of this subchapter.
close to the shell as reasonably prac- (f) Vacuum-relief devices. (1) A shell
ticable; and which is to be equipped with a vacuum-
(ii) A liquid tight closure at the end relief device must be designed to with-
of the discharge pipe, which may be a stand, without permanent deformation,
bolted blank flange or a screw cap. an external pressure of not less than
(3) Except as provided in paragraph 0.21 bar (21.0 kPa). The vacuum-relief
(d)(2) of this section, every bottom dis- device must be set to relieve at a vacu-
charge outlet must be equipped with um setting not greater than –0.21 bar (–
three serially fitted and mutually inde- 21.0 kPa) unless the shell is designed
pendent shut-off devices. The design of for a higher external over pressure, in
the equipment must include: which case the vacuum-relief pressure
(i) A self-closing internal stop-valve, of the device to be fitted must not be
which is a stop-valve within the shell greater than the tank design vacuum
or within a welded flange or its com- pressure. A shell that is not fitted with
panion flange, such that: a vacuum-relief device must be de-
(A) The control devices for the oper- signed to withstand, without perma-
ation of the valve are designed to pre- nent deformation, an external pressure
vent any unintended opening through of not less than 0.4 bar (40.0 kPa).
impact or other inadvertent act; (2) Vacuum-relief devices used on
(B) The valve is operable from above portable tanks intended for the trans-
or below; portation of hazardous materials meet-
(C) If possible, the setting of the ing the criteria of Class 3, including
valve (open or closed) must be capable elevated temperature hazardous mate-
of being verified from the ground; rials transported at or above their
(D) Except for portable tanks having flash point, must prevent the imme-
a capacity less than 1,000 liters (264.2 diate passage of flame into the shell or
gallons), it must be possible to close the portable tank must have a shell ca-
the valve from an accessible position pable of withstanding, without leak-
on the portable tank that is remote age, an internal explosion resulting
118
from the passage of flame into the must be fitted with a pressure relief de-
shell. vice which, except as provided in para-
(g) Pressure relief devices. (1) Each graph (g)(3) of this section, may be a
portable tank with a capacity not less frangible disc when this disc is set to
than 1,900 liters (501.9 gallons) and rupture at a nominal pressure equal to
every independent compartment of a the test pressure at any temperature
portable tank with a similar capacity, within the design temperature range.
must be provided with one or more (5) When the shell is fitted for pres-
pressure relief devices of the reclosing sure discharge, a suitable pressure re-
type. Such portable tanks may, in ad- lief device must provide the inlet line
dition, have a frangible disc or fusible to the portable tank and set to operate
element in parallel with the reclosing at a pressure not higher than the
devices, except when the applicable T MAWP of the shell, and a stop-valve
code assigned to a hazardous material must be fitted as close to the shell as
requires that the frangible disc precede practicable to minimize the potential
the pressure relief device, according to for damage.
paragraph (g)(3) of this section, or (6) Setting of pressure relief devices. (i)
when no bottom openings are allowed. Pressure relief devices must operate
The pressure relief devices must have only in conditions of excessive rise in
sufficient capacity to prevent rupture temperature. The shell must not be
of the shell due to over pressurization subject to undue fluctuations of pres-
or vacuum resulting from filling, dis- sure during normal conditions of trans-
charging, heating of the contents or portation.
fire. (ii) The required pressure relief de-
(2) Pressure relief devices must be device must be set to start to discharge
signed to prevent the entry of foreign at a nominal pressure of five-sixths of
matter, the leakage of liquid and the the test pressure for shells having a
development of any dangerous excess test pressure of not more than 4.5 bar
pressure. (450 kPa) and 110% of two-thirds of the
(3) When required for certain haz- test pressure for shells having a test
ardous materials by the applicable T pressure of more than 4.5 bar (450 kPa).
code or portable tank special provision A self-closing relief device must close
specified for a hazardous material in at a pressure not more than 10% below
the § 172.101 Table of this subchapter, the pressure at which the discharge
portable tanks must have a pressure starts. The device must remain closed
relief device consistent with the re- at all lower pressures. This require-
quirements of this subchapter. Except ment does not prevent the use of vacu-
for a portable tank in dedicated service um-relief or combination pressure re-
that is fitted with an approved relief lief and vacuum-relief devices.
device constructed of materials com- (h) Fusible elements. Fusible elements
patible with the hazardous material, must operate at a temperature between
the relief device system must include a 110 °C (230 °F) and 149 °C (300.2 °F), pro-
frangible disc preceding (such as, be- vided that the pressure in the shell at
tween the lading and the reclosing the fusing temperature will not exceed
pressure relief device) a reclosing pres- the test pressure. They must be placed
sure relief device. A pressure gauge or at the top of the shell with their inlets
suitable tell-tale indicator for the de- in the vapor space and in no case may
tection of disc rupture, pin-holing or they be shielded from external heat.
leakage must be provided in the space Fusible elements must not be utilized
between the frangible disc and the on portable tanks with a test pressure
pressure relief device to allow the port- which exceeds 2.65 bar (265.0 kPa); how-
able tank operator to check to deter- ever, fusible elements are authorized
mine if the disc is leak free. The fran- on portable tanks for the transpor-
gible disc must rupture at a nominal tation of certain organometallic mate-
pressure 10% above the start-to-dis- rials in accordance with § 172.102, spe-
charge pressure of the reclosable pres- cial provision TP36 of this subchapter.
sure relief device. Fusible elements used on portable
(4) Every portable tank with a capac- tanks intended for the transport of ele-
ity less than 1,900 liters (501.9 gallons) vated temperature hazardous materials
119
§ 178.275 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
must be designed to operate at a tem- used if the insulation is in conformance

perature higher than the maximum with paragraph (i)(2)(iv) of this section;
temperature that will be experienced A = total external surface area of shell in
square meters;
during transport and must be designed Z = the gas compressibility factor in the ac-
to the satisfaction of the approval cumulating condition (when this factor is
agency. unknown, let Z equal 1.0);
(i) Capacity of pressure relief devices. T = absolute temperature in Kelvin ( °C +
(1) The reclosing pressure relief device 273) above the pressure relief devices in the
required by paragraph (g)(1) of this sec- accumulating condition;
L = the latent heat of vaporization of the liq-
tion must have a minimum cross sec- uid, in kJ/kg, in the accumulating condi-
tional flow area equivalent to an ori- tion;
fice of 31.75 mm (1.3 inches) diameter. M = molecular weight of the hazardous mate-
Vacuum-relief devices, when used, rial.
must have a cross sectional flow area (B) The constant C, as shown in the
not less than 284 mm 2 (11.2 inches 2). formula in paragraph (i)(2)(i)(A) of this
(2) The combined delivery capacity of section, is derived from one of the fol-
the pressure relief system (taking into lowing formulas as a function of the
account the reduction of the flow when ratio k of specific heats:
the portable tank is fitted with fran-
gible-discs preceding spring-loaded cp
pressure-relief devices or when the k=
spring-loaded pressure-relief devices cv
are provided with a device to prevent
Where:
the passage of the flame), in condition
of complete fire engulfment of the cp is the specific heat at constant pressure;
and
portable tank must be sufficient to
cv is the specific heat at constant volume.
limit the pressure in the shell to 20%
above the start to discharge pressure (C) When k >1:
limiting device (pressure relief device).
The total required capacity of the re- k +1
lief devices may be determined using ⎛ 2 ⎞ k −1
the formula in paragraph (i)(2)(i)(A) of C = k⎜ ⎟
this section or the table in paragraph ⎝ k +1⎠
(i)(2)(iii) of this section. (D) When k = 1 or k is unknown, a
(i)(A) To determine the total re- value of 0.607 may be used for the con-
quired capacity of the relief devices, stant C. C may also be taken from the
which must be regarded as being the following table:
sum of the individual capacities of all
the contributing devices, the following C CONSTANT VALUE TABLE
formula must be used: k C
1.00 0.607
FA0.82 ZT 1.02 0.611
Q = 12.4 1.04 0.615
LC M 1.06 0.620
1.08 0.624
Where: 1.10 0.628
Q = minimum required rate of discharge in 1.12 0.633
1.14 0.637
cubic meters of air per second (m3/s) at con- 1.16 0.641
ditions: 1 bar and 0 °C (273 °K); 1.18 0.645
F = for uninsulated shells: 1; for insulated 1.20 0.649
shells: U(649¥t)/13.6 but in no case is less 1.22 0.652
ER01OC08.002</MATH>
than 0.25 1.24 0.656

1.26 0.660
Where: 1.28 0.664
U = thermal conductance of the insulation, 1.30 0.667
in kW m¥2K¥1, at 38 °C (100 °F); and t = ac- 1.32 0.671
1.34 0.674
tual temperature of the hazardous mate-

1.36 0.678
rial during filling (in °C) or when this tem-
ER01OC08.001</MATH>
1.38 0.681
perature is unknown, let t = 15 °C (59 °F). 1.40 0.685
The value of F given in this paragraph 1.42 0.688
(i)(2)(i)(A) for insulated shells may only be 1.44 0.691
120
ER01OC08.000</MATH>
C CONSTANT VALUE TABLE—Continued (iv) Insulation systems, used for the

purpose of reducing venting capacity,
k C
must be specifically approved by the
1.46 0.695 approval agency. In all cases, insula-
1.48 0.698 tion systems approved for this purpose
1.50 0.701 must—
1.52 0.704
1.54 0.707
(A) Remain effective at all tempera-
1.56 0.710 tures up to 649 °C (1200 °F); and
1.58 0.713 (B) Be jacketed with a material hav-
1.60 0.716 ing a melting point of 700 °C (1292 °F) or
1.62 0.719 greater.
1.64 0.722
1.66 0.725
(j) Approval, inspection and testing.
1.68 0.728 Approval procedures for UN portable
1.70 0.731 tanks are specified in § 178.273. Inspec-
2.00 0.770 tion and testing requirements are spec-
2.20 0.793
ified in § 180.605 of this subchapter.
[66 FR 33445, June 21, 2001, as amended at 68
(ii) As an alternative to the formula FR 32414, May 30, 2003; 69 FR 76185, Dec. 20,
in paragraph (i)(2)(i)(A) of this section, 2004; 73 FR 57006, Oct. 1, 2008; 76 FR 3388, Jan.
relief devices for shells used for trans- 19, 2011]
porting liquids may be sized in accord- § 178.276 Requirements for the design,
ance with the table in paragraph construction, inspection and testing
(i)(2)(iii) of this section. The table in of portable tanks intended for the
paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of this section as- transportation of non-refrigerated
sumes an insulation value of F = 1 and liquefied compressed gases.
must be adjusted accordingly when the (a) In addition to the requirements of
shell is insulated. Other values used in § 178.274 applicable to UN portable
determining the table in paragraph tanks, the following requirements
(i)(2)(iii) of this section are: L = 334.94 apply to UN portable tanks used for
kJ/kg; M = 86.7; T = 394 °K; Z = 1; and non-refrigerated liquefied compressed
C = 0.607. gases. In addition to the definitions in
(iii) Minimum emergency vent capac- § 178.274, the following definitions
ity, Q, in cubic meters of air per second apply:
at 1 bar and 0 °C (273 °K) shown in the (1) Design pressure means the pressure
following table: to be used in calculations required by
the ASME Code, Section VIII (IBR, see
MINIMUM EMERGENCY VENT CAPACITY § 171.7 of this subchapter). The design
[Q Values] pressure must be not less than the
A Q A Q
highest of the following pressures:
Exposed area (Cubic me- Exposed area (Cubic me- (i) The maximum effective gauge
(square meters of air (square meters of air pressure allowed in the shell during
ters) per second) ters) per second)
filling or discharge; or
2 0.230 37.5 2.539 (ii) The sum of:
3 0.320 40 2.677 (A) The maximum effective gauge
4 0.405 42.5 2.814
5 0.487 45 2.949
pressure to which the shell is designed
6 0.565 47.5 3.082 as defined in this paragraph under
7 0.641 50 3.215 ‘‘MAWP’’; and
8 0.715 52.5 3.346 (B) A head pressure determined on
9 0.788 55 3.476 the basis of the dynamic forces speci-
10 0.859 57.5 3.605
12 0.998 60 3.733
fied in paragraph (h) of this section,
14 1.132 62.5 3.860 but not less than 0.35 bar (35 kPa).
16 1.263 65 3.987 (2) Design reference temperature means
18 1.391 67.5 4.112 the temperature at which the vapor
20 1.517 70 4.236
22.5 1.670 75 4.483
pressure of the contents is determined
25 1.821 80 4.726 for the purpose of calculating the
27.5 1.969 85 4.967 MAWP. The value for each portable

30 2.115 90 5.206 tank type is as follows:
32.5 2.258 95 5.442
(i) Shell with a diameter of 1.5 meters
35 2.400 100 5.676
(4.9 ft.) or less: 65 °C (149 °F); or
121
§ 178.276 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(ii) Shell with a diameter of more after completion of all the welds in
than 1.5 meters (4.9 ft.): and/or to the shell and heads. The
(A) Without insulation or sun shield: method must be as prescribed in the
60 °C (140 °F); ASME Code. Welded attachments to
(B) With sun shield: 55 °C (131 °F); and pads may be made after postweld heat
(C) With insulation: 50 °C (122 °F). treatment is made. A portable tank
(3) Filling density means the average used for anhydrous ammonia must be
mass of liquefied compressed gas per postweld heat-treated. The postweld
liter of shell capacity (kg/l). heat treatment must be as prescribed
(4) Maximum allowable working pres- in the ASME Code, but in no event at
sure (MAWP) means a pressure that less than 1050 °F tank metal tempera-
must be not less than the highest of ture. Additionally, portable tanks con-
the following pressures measured at structed in accordance with part UHT
the top of the shell while in operating of the ASME Code must conform to the
position, but in no case less than 7 bar following requirements:
(700 kPa): (i) Welding procedure and welder per-
(i) The maximum effective gauge formance tests must be made annually
pressure allowed in the shell during in accordance with Section IX of the
filling or discharge; or ASME Code. In addition to the essen-
(ii) The maximum effective gauge tial variables named therein, the fol-
pressure to which the shell is designed, lowing must be considered to be essen-
which must be: tial variables: number of passes, thick-
(A) Not less than the pressure speci- ness of plate, heat input per pass, and
fied for each liquefied compressed gas manufacturer’s identification of rod
listed in the UN Portable Tank Table and flux. The number of passes, thick-
for Liquefied Compressed Gases in ness of plate and heat input per pass
§ 173.313; and may not vary more than 25 percent
(B) Not less than the sum of: from the qualified procedure. Records
(1) The absolute vapor pressure (in of the qualification must be retained
bar) of the liquefied compressed gas at for at least 5 years by the portable
the design reference temperature tank manufacturer or his designated
minus 1 bar; and agent and, upon request, made avail-
(2) The partial pressure (in bar) of air able to a representative of the Depart-
or other gases in the ullage space ment of Transportation or the owner of
which is determined by the design ref- the tank.
erence temperature and the liquid (ii) Impact tests must be made on a
phase expansion due to the increase of lot basis. A lot is defined as 100 tons or
the mean bulk temperature of tr¥tf (tf less of the same heat and having a
= filling temperature, usually 15 °C, tr = thickness variation no greater than
50 °C maximum mean bulk tempera- plus or minus 25 percent. The minimum
ture). impact required for full-sized speci-
(b) General design and construction re- mens shall be 20 foot-pounds (or 10
quirements. (1) Shells must be of seam- foot-pounds for half-sized specimens) at
less or welded steel construction, or 0 °F (¥17.8 °F) Charpy V-Notch in both
combination of both, and have a water the longitudinal and transverse direc-
capacity greater than 450 liters (118.9 tion. If the lot test does not pass this
gallons). Shells must be designed, con- requirement, individual plates may be
structed, certified and stamped in ac- accepted if they individually meet this
cordance with the ASME Code, Section impact requirement.
VIII. (3) When the shells intended for the
(2) Portable tanks must be postweld transportation of non-refrigerated liq-
heat-treated and radiographed as pre- uefied compressed gases are equipped
scribed in Section VIII of the ASME with thermal insulation, a device must
Code, except that each portable tank be provided to prevent any dangerous
constructed in accordance with part pressure from developing in the insu-
UHT of the ASME Code must be lating layer in the event of a leak,
postweld heat-treated. Where postweld when the protective covering is closed
heat treatment is required, the port- it must be gas tight. The thermal insu-
able tank must be treated as a unit lation must not inhibit access to the
122
fittings and discharge devices. In addi- tation of flammable and/or toxic lique-
tion, the thermal insulation systems fied compressed gases, the internal
must satisfy the following require- stop-valve must be a self-closing safety
ments: device that fully closes automatically
(i) consist of a shield covering not during filling or discharge in the event
less than the upper third, but not more of fire engulfment. The device shall
than the upper half of the surface of fully close within 30 seconds of actu-
the shell, and separated from the shell ation and the thermal means of closure
by an air space of approximately 40 mm must actuate at a temperature of not
(1.7 inches) across; or more than 121 °C (250 °F). Except for
(ii) consist of a complete cladding of portable tanks having a capacity less
insulating materials. The insulation than 1,000 liters (264.2 gallons), this de-
must be of adequate thickness and con- vice must be operable by remote con-
structed to prevent the ingress of mois- trol.
ture and damage to the insulation. The (5) In addition to filling, discharge
insulation and cladding must have a and gas pressure equalizing orifices,
thermal conductance of not more than shells may have openings in which
0.67 (W·m¥2·K¥1) under normal condi- gauges, thermometers and manometers
tions of transportation. can be fitted. Connections for such in-
(c) Service equipment. (1) Each opening struments must be made by suitable
with a diameter of more than 1.5 mm welded nozzles or pockets and may not
(0.1 inch) in the shell of a portable be connected by screwed connections
tank, except openings for pressure-re- through the shell.
lief devices, inspection openings and (6) All portable tanks must be fitted
closed bleed holes, must be fitted with with manholes or other inspection
at least three mutually independent openings of suitable size to allow for
shut-off devices in series: the first internal inspection and adequate ac-
being an internal stop-valve, excess
cess for maintenance and repair of the
flow valve, integral excess flow valve,
interior.
or excess flow feature (see § 178.337–
(7) Inlets and discharge outlets on chlo-
1(g)), the second being an external
stop-valve and the third being a blank rine portable tanks. The inlet and dis-
flange, thread cap, plug or equivalent charge outlets on portable tanks used
tight liquid closure device. to transport chlorine must meet the re-
(2) When a portable tank is fitted quirements of § 178.337–1(c)(2) and must
with an excess flow valve, the excess be fitted with an internal excess flow
flow valve must be so fitted that its valve. In addition to the internal ex-
seating is inside the shell or inside a cess flow valve, the inlet and discharge
welded flange or, when fitted exter- outlets must be equipped with an ex-
nally, its mountings must be designed ternal stop valve (angle valve). Excess
so that in the event of impact it main- flow valves must conform to the stand-
tains its effectiveness. The excess flow ards of The Chlorine Institute, Inc.
valves must be selected and fitted so as (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter) as
to close automatically when the rated follows:
flow, specified by the manufacturer, is (i) A valve conforming to Drawing
reached. Connections and accessories 101–7, dated July 1993, must be installed
leading to or from such a valve must under each liquid angle valve.
have a capacity for a flow more than (ii) A valve conforming to Drawing
the excess flow valve’s rated flow. 106–6, dated July 1993, must be installed
(3) For filling and discharge openings under each gas angle valve. For port-
that are located below the liquid level, able tanks used to transport non-re-
the first shut-off device must be an in- frigerated liquefied gases.
ternal stop-valve and the second must (8) External fittings must be grouped
be a stop-valve placed in an accessible together as close as reasonably prac-
position on each discharge and filling ticable. The following openings may be
pipe. installed at locations other than on the

(4) For filling and discharge openings top or end of the tank:
located below the liquid level of port- (i) The openings for liquid level gaug-
able tanks intended for the transpor- ing devices, pressure gauges, or for
123
§ 178.276 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
safety devices, may be installed sepa- velopment of any dangerous excess

rately at the other location or in the pressure.
side of the shell; (3) A portable tank intended for the
(ii) One plugged opening of 2-inch Na- transportation of certain liquefied
tional Pipe Thread or less provided for compressed gases identified in the UN
maintenance purposes may be located Portable Tank Table for Liquefied
elsewhere; Compressed Gases in § 173.313 of this
(iii) An opening of 3-inch National subchapter must have a pressure relief
Pipe Size or less may be provided at device which conforms to the require-
another location, when necessary, to ments of this subchapter. Unless a
facilitate installation of condensing portable tank, in dedicated service, is
coils. fitted with a relief device constructed
(9) Filling and discharge connections of materials compatible with the haz-
are not required to be grouped and may ardous material, the relief device must
be installed below the normal liquid be comprised of a frangible disc pre-
level of the tank if: ceded by a reclosing device. The space
(i) The portable tank is permanently between the frangible disc and the de-
mounted in a full framework for con- vice must be provided with a pressure
tainerized transport; gauge or a suitable tell-tale indicator.
(ii) For each portable tank design, a This arrangement must facilitate the
prototype portable tank, meets the re- detection of disc rupture, pinholing or
quirements of parts 450 through 453 of leakage which could cause a malfunc-
this title for compliance with the re- tion of the pressure relief device. The
quirements of Annex II of the Inter- frangible disc must rupture at a nomi-
national Convention for Safe Con- nal pressure 10% above the start-to-dis-
tainers; and charge pressure of the relief device.
(iii) Each filling and discharge outlet (4) In the case of portable tanks used
meets the requirements of paragraph for more than one gas, the pressure re-
(c)(4) of this section. lief devices must open at a pressure in-
(d) Bottom openings. Bottom openings dicated in paragraph (e)(1) of this sec-
are prohibited on portable tanks when tion for the gas having the highest
the UN Portable Tank Table for Lique- maximum allowable pressure of the
fied Compressed Gases in § 173.313 of gases allowed to be transported in the
this subchapter indicates that bottom portable tank.
openings are not allowed. In this case, (f) Capacity of relief devices. The com-
there may be no openings located bined delivery capacity of the relief de-
below the liquid level of the shell when vices must be sufficient so that, in the
it is filled to its maximum permissible event of total fire engulfment, the
filling limit. pressure inside the shell cannot exceed
(e) Pressure relief devices. (1) Portable 120% of the MAWP. Reclosing relief de-
tanks must be provided with one or vices must be used to achieve the full
more reclosing pressure relief devices. relief capacity prescribed. In the case
The pressure relief devices must open of portable tanks used for more than
automatically at a pressure not less gas, the combined delivery capacity of
than the MAWP and be fully open at a the pressure relief devices must be
pressure equal to 110% of the MAWP. taken for the liquefied compressed gas
These devices must, after discharge, which requires the highest delivery ca-
close at a pressure not less than 10% pacity of the liquefied compressed
below the pressure at which discharge gases allowed to be transported in the
starts and must remain closed at all portable tank. The total required ca-
lower pressures. The pressure relief de- pacity of the relief devices must be de-
vices must be of a type that will resist termined according to the require-
dynamic forces including liquid surge. ments in § 178.275(i). These require-
A frangible disc may only be used in se- ments apply only to liquefied com-
ries with a reclosing pressure relief de- pressed gases which have critical tem-
vice. peratures well above the temperature

(2) Pressure relief devices must be de- at the accumulating condition. For
signed to prevent the entry of foreign gases that have critical temperatures
matter, the leakage of gas and the de- near or below the temperature at the
124
accumulating condition, the calcula- shell(s) and the jacket is exhausted of

tion of the pressure relief device deliv- air (vacuum insulation) and may incor-
ery capacity must consider the addi- porate a thermal insulation system; or
tional thermodynamic properties of the (2) A jacket and an inner shell with
gas, for example see CGA S–1.2 (IBR, an intermediate layer of solid ther-
see § 171.7 of this subchapter). mally insulating material (for exam-
[66 FR 33448, June 21, 2001, as amended at 68 ple, solid foam).
FR 75748, 75752, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 54046, (b) General design and construction re-
Sept. 7, 2004; 69 FR 76185, Dec. 20, 2004] quirements. (1) Portable tanks must be
of seamless or welded steel construc-
§ 178.277 Requirements for the design, tion and have a water capacity of more
construction, inspection and testing than 450 liters (118.9 gallons). Portable
of portable tanks intended for the
transportation of refrigerated lique- tanks must be designed, constructed,
fied gases. certified and stamped in accordance
with Section VIII of the ASME Code.
(a) In addition to the requirements of
(2) Portable tanks must be postweld
§ 178.274 applicable to UN portable
heat treated and radiographed as pre-
tanks, the following requirements and
scribed in Sections V and VIII of the
definitions apply to UN portable tanks
ASME Code except that each tank con-
used for refrigerated liquefied gases:
structed in accordance with part UHT
Design pressure For the purpose of
in Section VIII of the ASME Code must
this section the term ‘‘design pressure’’
be postweld heat treated. Where
is consistent with the definition for de-
postweld heat treatment is required,
sign pressure in the ASME Code, Sec-
tion VIII (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- the tank must be treated as a unit
chapter). after completion of all the welds to the
Holding time is the time, as deter- shell and heads. The method must be as
mined by testing, that will elapse from prescribed in the ASME Code. Welded
loading until the pressure of the con- attachments to pads may be made after
tents, under equilibrium conditions, postweld heat treatment is made. The
reaches the lowest set pressure of the postweld heat treatment must be as
pressure limiting device(s) (for exam- prescribed in Section VIII of the ASME
ple, pressure control valve or pressure Code, but in no event at less than 1,050
relief device). Holding time must be de- °F tank metal temperature.
termined as specified in § 178.338–9. (3) Welding procedure and welder per-
Maximum allowable working pressure formance tests must be made annually
(MAWP) means the maximum effective in accordance with Section IX of the
gauge pressure permissible at the top ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
of the shell of a loaded portable tank in chapter). In addition to the essential
its operating position including the variables named in the ASME Code, the
highest effective pressure during filling following must be considered as essen-
and discharge; tial variables: number of passes, thick-
Minimum design temperature means ness of plate, heat input per pass, and
the temperature which is used for the the specified rod and flux. The number
design and construction of the shell of passes, thickness of plate and heat
not higher than the lowest (coldest) input per pass may not vary more than
service temperature of the contents 25% from the procedure qualification.
during normal conditions of filling, dis- Records of the qualification must be
charge and transportation. retained for at least 5 years by the
Shell means the part of the portable portable tank manufacturer and made
tank which retains the refrigerated liq- available to the approval agency and
uefied gas intended for transport, in- the owner of the portable tank as spec-
cluding openings and their closures, ified in § 178.273.
but does not include service equipment (4) Shells and jackets must be made
or external structural equipment. of metallic materials suitable for form-
Tank means a construction which ing. Jackets must be made of steel.

normally consists of either: Non-metallic materials may be used
(1) A jacket and one or more inner for the attachments and supports be-
shells where the space between the tween the shell and jacket, provided
125
§ 178.277 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
their material properties at the min- (iv) An assumed ambient tempera-

imum design temperature are proven ture of 30 °C (86 °F);
to be sufficient. In choosing the mate- (v) The physical properties of the in-
rial, the minimum design temperature dividual refrigerated liquefied gas in-
must be taken into account with re- tended to be transported.
spect to risk of brittle fracture, to hy- (11) The effectiveness of the insula-
drogen embrittlement, to stress corro- tion system (heat influx in watts) may
sion cracking and to resistance to im- be determined by type testing the port-
pact. able tank in accordance with a proce-
(5) Any part of a portable tank, in- dure specified in § 178.338–9(c) or by
cluding fittings, gaskets and pipe- using the holding time test in § 178.338–
work, which can be expected normally 9(b). This test must consist of either:
to come into contact with the refrig- (i) A constant pressure test (for ex-
erated liquefied gas transported must ample, at atmospheric pressure) when
be compatible with that refrigerated the loss of refrigerated liquefied gas is
liquefied gas. measured over a period of time; or
(ii) A closed system test when the
(6) The thermal insulation system rise in pressure in the shell is measured
must include a complete covering of over a period of time.
the shell with effective insulating ma- (12) When performing the constant
terials. External insulation must be pressure test, variations in atmos-
protected by a jacket so as to prevent pheric pressure must be taken into ac-
the ingress of moisture and other dam- count. When performing either test,
age under normal transport conditions. corrections must be made for any vari-
(7) When a jacket is so closed as to be ation of the ambient temperature from
gas-tight, a device must be provided to the assumed ambient temperature ref-
prevent any dangerous pressure from erence value of 30 °C (86 °F).
developing in the insulation space. (13) The jacket of a vacuum-insulated
(8) Materials which may react with double-wall tank must have either an
oxygen or oxygen enriched external design pressure not less than
atmospheres in a dangerous manner 100 kPa (1 bar) gauge pressure cal-
may not be used in portable tanks in- culated in accordance with Section
tended for the transport of refrigerated VIII of the ASME Code or a calculated
liquefied gases having a boiling point critical collapsing pressure of not less
below minus 182 °C at atmospheric than 200 kPa (2 bar) gauge pressure. In-
pressure in locations with the thermal ternal and external reinforcements
insulation where there is a risk of con- may be included in calculating the
tact with oxygen or with oxygen en- ability of the jacket to resist the exter-
riched fluid. nal pressure.
(9) Insulating materials must not de- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b): For the deter-
teriorate to an extent that the effec- mination of the actual holding time, as indi-
tiveness of the insulation system, as cated by paragraphs (b)(10), (11), (12), and
determined in accordance with para- (13), before each journey, refer to § 178.338–
graph (b)(11) of this section, would be 9(b).
reduced in service. (c) Design criteria. For shells with
(10) A reference holding time must be vacuum insulation, the test pressure
determined for each refrigerated lique- must not be less than 1.3 times the sum
fied gas intended for transport in a of the MAWP and 100 kPa (1 bar). In no
portable tank. The reference holding case may the test pressure be less than
time must be determined by testing in 300 kPa (3 bar) gauge pressure.
accordance with the requirements of (d) Service equipment. (1) Each filling
§ 178.338–9, considering the following and discharge opening in portable
factors: tanks used for the transport of flam-
(i) The effectiveness of the insulation mable refrigerated liquefied gases must
system, determined in accordance with be fitted with at least three mutually
paragraph (b)(11) of this section; independent shut-off devices in series:

(ii) The lowest set pressure of the the first being a stop-valve situated as
pressure limiting device; close as reasonably practicable to the
(iii) The initial filling conditions; jacket, the second being a stop-valve
126
and the third being a blank flange or sures. The pressure relief devices must
equivalent device. The shut-off device be of the type that will resist dynamic
closest to the jacket must be a self- forces including surge.
closing device, which is capable of (2) Except for portable tanks used for
being closed from an accessible posi- oxygen, portable tanks for non-flam-
tion on the portable tank that is re- mable refrigerated liquefied gases (ex-
mote from the valve within 30 seconds cept oxygen) and hydrogen may in ad-
of actuation. This device must actuate dition have frangible discs in parallel
at a temperature of not more than 121 with the reclosing devices as specified
°C (250 °F). in paragraphs (e)(4)(ii) and (e)(4)(iii) of
(2) Each filling and discharge opening this section.
in portable tanks used for the trans- (3) Pressure relief devices must be de-
port of non-flammable refrigerated liq- signed to prevent the entry of foreign
uefied gases must be fitted with at matter, the leakage of gas and the de-
least two mutually independent shut- velopment of any dangerous excess
off devices in series: the first being a pressure.
stop-valve situated as close as reason- (4) Capacity and setting of pressure re-
ably practicable to the jacket and the lief devices. (i) In the case of the loss of
second a blank flange or equivalent de- vacuum in a vacuum-insulated tank or
vice. of loss of 20% of the insulation of a
(3) For sections of piping which can portable tank insulated with solid ma-
be closed at both ends and where liquid terials, the combined capacity of all
product can be trapped, a method of pressure relief devices installed must
automatic pressure relief must be pro- be sufficient so that the pressure (in-
vided to prevent excess pressure build- cluding accumulation) inside the shell
up within the piping. does not exceed 120% of the MAWP.
(4) Each filling and discharge opening (ii) For non-flammable refrigerated
on a portable tank must be clearly liquefied gases (except oxygen) and hy-
marked to indicate its function. drogen, this capacity may be achieved
(5) When pressure-building units are by the use of frangible discs in parallel
used, the liquid and vapor connections with the required safety-relief devices.
to that unit must be provided with a Frangible discs must rupture at nomi-
valve as close to the jacket as reason- nal pressure equal to the test pressure
ably practicable to prevent the loss of of the shell.
contents in case of damage to the pres- (iii) Under the circumstances de-
sure-building unit. A check valve may scribed in paragraphs (e)(4)(i) and
be used for this purpose if it is located (e)(4)(ii) of this section, together with
on the vapor side of the pressure build- complete fire engulfment, the com-
up coil. bined capacity of all pressure relief de-
(6) The materials of construction of vices installed must be sufficient to
valves and accessories must have satis- limit the pressure in the shell to the
factory properties at the lowest oper- test pressure.
ating temperature of the portable (iv) The required capacity of the re-
tank. lief devices must be calculated in ac-
(7) Vacuum insulated portable tanks cordance with CGA Pamphlet S–1.2
are not required to have an inspection (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter).
opening. [66 FR 33450, June 21, 2001, as amended at 68
(e) Pressure relief devices. (1) Every FR 75748, 75752, Dec. 31, 2003]
shell must be provided with not less
than two independent reclosing pres-
sure relief devices. The pressure relief Subpart I [Reserved]
devices must open automatically at a
pressure not less than the MAWP and Subpart J—Specifications for Con-
be fully open at a pressure equal to tainers for Motor Vehicle
110% of the MAWP. These devices Transportation
must, after discharge, close at a pres-

sure not lower than 10% below the pres- SOURCE: 29 FR 18975, Dec. 29, 1964, unless
sure at which discharge starts and otherwise noted. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606,
must remain closed at all lower pres- Apr. 5, 1967.
127
§ 178.318 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
§ 178.318 Specification MC 201; con- cussion caps may be carried, provided

tainer for detonators and percus- that such space may be closed with a
sion caps. screw cap, and further provided that
each or any such space is entirely sepa-
§ 178.318–1 Scope.
rate from any space provided for any
(a) This specification pertains to a detonator. Each cellular space into
container to be used for the transpor- which a detonator is to be inserted and
tation of detonators and percussion carried shall be capable of being cov-
caps in connection with the transpor- ered by a rotary cover so arranged as
tation of liquid nitroglycerin, desen- to expose not more than one cell at any
sitized liquid nitroglycerin or time, and capable of rotation to such a
diethylene glycol dinitrate, where any place that all cells will be covered at
or all of such types of caps may be used the same time, at which place means
for the detonation of liquid nitroglyc- shall be provided to lock the cover in
erin, desentitized liquid nitroglycerin
place. Means shall be provided to lock
or diethylene glycol dinitrate in blast-
in place the cover for the cells provided
ing operations. This specification is
for the carrying of detonators. The re-
not intended to take the place of any
quirement that not more than one cell
shipping or packing requirements of
this Department where the caps in be exposed at one time need not apply
question are themselves articles of in the case of detonators, although
commerce. spaces for such caps and detonators
(b) [Reserved] shall be separate. Sufficient annular
space shall be provided inside the cover
[29 FR 18975, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 for such detonators that, when the
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
cover is closed, there will be sufficient
178–60, 44 FR 70733, Dec. 10, 1979]
space to accommodate the wires cus-
§ 178.318–2 Container. tomarily attached to such caps. If the
material is of such a nature as to re-
(a) Every container for detonators
quire treatment to prevent the absorp-
and percussion caps coming within the
scope of this specification shall be con- tion of moisture, such treatment shall
structed entirely of hard rubber, be applied as shall be necessary in
phenolresinous or other resinous mate- order to provide against the penetra-
rial, or other nonmetallic, nonsparking tion of water by permeation. A suitable
material, except that metal parts may carrying handle shall be provided, ex-
be used in such locations as not in any cept for which handle no part of the
event to come in contact with any of container may project beyond the exte-
the caps. Space shall be provided so rior of the body.
that each detonator of whatever nature (b) Exhibited in plates I and II are
may be inserted in an individual cell in line drawings of a container for deto-
the body of the container, into which nators and percussion caps, illustrative
each such cap shall snugly fit. There of the requirements set forth in
shall be provided no more than twenty § 178.318–2(a). These plates shall not be
(20) such cellular spaces. Space may be construed as a part of this specifica-
provided into which a plurality of per- tion.
128
§ 178.318–3 Marking. tention or containment function and

provides no structural support to the
Each container must be marked as
cargo tank.
prescribed in § 178.2(b).
Baffle means a non-liquid-tight trans-
[Amdt. 178–40, 41 FR 38181, Sept. 9, 1976, as verse partition device that deflects,
amended at 66 FR 45185, Aug. 28, 2001] checks or regulates fluid motion in a
tank.
§ 178.320 General requirements appli- Bulkhead means a liquid-tight trans-
cable to all DOT specification cargo verse closure at the ends of or between
tank motor vehicles.
cargo tanks.
(a) Definitions. For the purpose of this Cargo tank means a bulk packaging
subchapter: that:
Appurtenance means any attachment (1) Is a tank intended primarily for
to a cargo tank that has no lading re- the carriage of liquids, gases, solids, or
129
EC02MR91.076</GPH>
§ 178.320 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
semi-solids and includes appur- (3) To the same engineering drawings

tenances, reinforcements, fittings, and and calculations, except for minor
closures (for tank, see §§ 178.337–1, variations in piping that do not affect
178.338–1, or 178.345–1, as applicable); the lading retention capability of the
(2) Is permanently attached to or cargo tank;
forms a part of a motor vehicle, or is (4) Of the same materials of construc-
not permanently attached to a motor tion;
vehicle but that, by reason of its size, (5) To the same cross-sectional di-
construction, or attachment to a mensions;
motor vehicle, is loaded or unloaded (6) To a length varying by no more
without being removed from the motor than 5 percent;
vehicle; and (7) With the volume varying by no
(3) Is not fabricated under a speci- more than 5 percent (due to a change in
fication for cylinders, intermediate length only); and
bulk containers, multi-unit tank car (8) For the purposes of § 178.338 only,
tanks, portable tanks, or tank cars. with the same insulation system.
Cargo tank motor vehicle means a External self-closing stop valve means a
motor vehicle with one or more cargo self-closing stop valve designed so that
tanks permanently attached to or the self-stored energy source is located
forming an integral part of the motor outside the cargo tank and the welded
vehicle. flange.
Cargo tank wall means those parts of Extreme dynamic loading means the
the cargo tank that make up the pri- maximum loading a cargo tank motor
mary lading retention structure, in- vehicle may experience during its ex-
cluding shell, bulkheads, and fittings pected life, excluding accident loadings
and, when closed, yield the minimum resulting from an accident, such as
volume of a completed cargo tank overturn or collision.
motor vehicle. Flange means the structural ring for
Charging line means a hose, tube, guiding or attachment of a pipe or fit-
pipe, or a similar device used to pres- ting with another flange (companion
surize a tank with material other than flange), pipe, fitting or other attach-
the lading. ment.
Companion flange means one of two Inspection pressure means the pres-
mating flanges where the flange faces sure used to determine leak tightness
are in contact or separated only by a of the cargo tank when testing with
thin leak-sealing gasket and are se- pneumatic pressure.
cured to one another by bolts or Internal self-closing stop valve means a
clamps. self-closing stop valve designed so that
Connecting structure means the struc- the self-stored energy source is located
ture joining two cargo tanks. inside the cargo tank or cargo tank
Constructed and certified in accordance sump, or within the welded flange, and
with the ASME Code means a cargo the valve seat is located within the
tank is constructed and stamped in ac- cargo tank or within one inch of the
cordance with Section VIII of the external face of the welded flange or
ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- sump of the cargo tank.
chapter), and is inspected and certified Lading means the hazardous material
by an Authorized Inspector. contained in a cargo tank.
Constructed in accordance with the Loading/unloading connection means
ASME Code means a cargo tank is con- the fitting in the loading/unloading
structed in accordance with Section line farthest from the loading/unload-
VIII of the ASME Code with authorized ing outlet to which the loading/unload-
exceptions (see §§ 178.346 through ing hose, pipe, or device is attached.
178.348) and is inspected and certified Loading/unloading outlet means a
by a Registered Inspector. cargo tank outlet used for normal load-
Design type means one or more cargo ing/unloading operations.

tanks that are made— Loading/unloading stop valve means
(1) To the same specification; the stop valve farthest from the cargo
(2) By the same manufacturer; tank loading/unloading outlet to which
130
the loading/unloading connection is at- Multi-specification cargo tank motor ve-

tached. hicle means a cargo tank motor vehicle
Manufacturer means any person en- equipped with two or more cargo tanks
gaged in the manufacture of a DOT fabricated to more than one cargo tank
specification cargo tank, cargo tank specification.
motor vehicle, or cargo tank equip- Normal operating loading means the
ment that forms part of the cargo tank loading a cargo tank motor vehicle
wall. This term includes attaching a may be expected to experience rou-
cargo tank to a motor vehicle or to a tinely in operation.
motor vehicle suspension component Nozzle means a subassembly con-
that involves welding on the cargo sisting of a pipe or tubular section with
tank wall. A manufacturer must reg- or without a welded or forged flange on
ister with the Department in accord- one end.
ance with subpart F of part 107 in sub- Outlet means any opening in the shell
part A of this chapter. or head of a cargo tank, (including the
Maximum allowable working pressure means for attaching a closure), except
or MAWP means the maximum pres- that the following are not outlets: a
sure allowed at the top of the tank in threaded opening securely closed dur-
its normal operating position. The ing transportation with a threaded
MAWP must be calculated as pre- plug or a threaded cap, a flanged open-
scribed in Section VIII of the ASME ing securely closed during transpor-
Code. In use, the MAWP must be great- tation with a bolted or welded blank
er than or equal to the maximum lad- flange, a manhole, a gauging device, a
ing pressure conditions prescribed in thermometer well, or a pressure relief
§ 173.33 of this subchapter for each ma- device.
terial transported. Outlet stop valve means the stop valve
at a cargo tank loading or unloading
Maximum lading pressure. See
outlet.
§ 173.33(c).
Pipe coupling means a fitting with in-
Minimum thickness means the min- ternal threads on both ends.
imum required shell and head (and baf- Rear bumper means the structure de-
fle and bulkhead when used as tank re- signed to prevent a vehicle or object
inforcement) thickness needed to meet from under-riding the rear of another
the specification. The minimum thick- motor vehicle. See § 393.86 of this title.
ness is the greatest of the following val- Rear-end tank protection device means
ues: (1)(i) For MC 330, MC 331, and MC the structure designed to protect a
338 cargo tanks, the specified minimum cargo tank and any lading retention
thickness found the applicable speci- piping or devices in case of a rear end
fication(s); or collision.
(ii) For DOT 406, DOT 407 and DOT Self-closing stop valve means a stop
412 cargo tanks, the specified minimum valve held in the closed position by
thickness found in Tables I and II of means of self-stored energy, that opens
the applicable specification(s); or only by application of an external force
(iii) For MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC and that closes when the external force
303, MC 304, MC 305, MC 306, MC 307, MC is removed.
310, MC 311, and MC 312 cargo tanks, Shell means the circumferential por-
the in-service minimum thickness pre- tion of a cargo tank defined by the
scribed in Tables I and II of basic design radius or radii excluding
§ 180.407(i)(5) of this subchapter, for the the bulkheads.
minimum thickness specified by Tables Stop valve means a valve that stops
I and II of the applicable specifica- the flow of lading.
tion(s); or Sump means a protrusion from the
(2) The thickness necessary to meet bottom of a cargo tank shell designed
with the structural integrity and acci- to facilitate complete loading and un-
dent damage requirements of the appli- loading of lading.
cable specification(s); or Tank means a container, consisting

(3) The thickness as computed per of a shell and heads, that forms a pres-
the ASME Code requirements (if appli- sure tight vessel having openings de-
cable). signed to accept pressure tight fittings
131
§ 178.337 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
or closures, but excludes any appur- (c) Exceptions to the ASME Code. Un-
tenances, reinforcements, fittings, or less otherwise specified, when excep-
closures. tions are provided in this subpart from
Test pressure means the pressure to compliance with certain paragraphs of
which a tank is subjected to determine the ASME Code, compliance with those
structural integrity. paragraphs is not prohibited.
Toughness of material means the capa- [Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37055, Sept. 7, 1990, as
bility of a material to absorb energy amended by Amdt. 178–98, 58 FR 33306, June
represented by the area under a stress 16, 1993; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51339, Oct. 1,
strain curve (indicating the energy ab- 1996; 68 FR 19277, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 52370,
sorbed per unit volume of the material) Sept. 3, 2003; 68 FR 75752, Dec. 31, 2003; 76 FR
up to the point of rupture. 43532, July 20, 2011]
Vacuum cargo tank means a cargo
tank that is loaded by reducing the § 178.337 Specification MC 331; cargo
tank motor vehicle primarily for
pressure in the cargo tank to below at- transportation of compressed gases
mospheric pressure. as defined in subpart G of part 173
Variable specification cargo tank of this subchapter.
means a cargo tank that is constructed
in accordance with one specification, § 178.337–1 General requirements.
but that may be altered to meet an- (a) ASME Code construction. Tanks
other specification by changing relief must be—
device, closures, lading discharge de- (1) Seamless or welded construction,
vices, and other lading retention de- or a combination of both;
vices. (2) Designed, constructed, certified,
Void means the space between tank and stamped in accordance with Sec-
heads or bulkheads and a connecting tion VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see
structure. § 171.7 of this subchapter);
Welded flange means a flange at- (3) Made of steel or aluminum; how-
tached to the tank by a weld joining ever, if aluminum is used, the cargo
the tank shell to the cylindrical outer tank must be insulated and the haz-
surface of the flange, or by a fillet weld ardous material to be transported must
joining the tank shell to a flange be compatible with the aluminum (see
shaped to fit the shell contour. §§ 178.337–1(e)(2), 173.315(a) table, and
(b) Design certification. (1) Each cargo 178.337–2(a)(1) of this subchapter); and
tank or cargo tank motor vehicle de- (4) Covered with a steel jacket if the
sign type, including its required acci- cargo tank is insulated and used to
dent damage protection device, must transport a flammable gas (see
be certified to conform to the specifica- § 173.315(a) table Note 11 of this sub-
tion requirements by a Design Certi- chapter).
fying Engineer who is registered in ac- (b) Design pressure. The design pres-
cordance with subpart F of part 107 of sure of a cargo tank authorized under
this title. An accident damage protec- this specification shall be not less than
tion device is a rear-end protection, the vapor pressure of the commodity
overturn protection, or piping protec- contained therein at 115 °F. or as pre-
tion device. scribed for a particular commodity in
(2) The Design Certifying Engineer § 173.315(a) of this subchapter, except
shall furnish to the manufacturer a that in no case shall the design pres-
certificate to indicate compliance with sure of any cargo tank be less than 100
the specification requirements. The p.s.i.g. nor more than 500 p.s.i.g.
certificate must include the sketches,
drawings, and calculations used for cer- NOTE 1: The term design pressure as used in
tification. Each certificate, including this specification, is identical to the term
MAWP as used in the ASME Code.
sketches, drawings, and calculations,
shall be signed by the Design Certi- (c) Openings. (1) Excess pressure relief
fying Engineer. valves shall be located in the top of the
(3) The manufacturer shall retain the cargo tank or heads.

design certificate at his principal place (2) A chlorine cargo tank shall have
of business for as long as he manufac- only one opening. That opening shall
tures DOT specification cargo tanks. be in the top of the cargo tank and
132
shall be fitted with a nozzle that meets provisions in Section VIII of the ASME
the following requirements: Code under which it is constructed.
(i) On a cargo tank manufactured on Where postweld heat treatment is re-
or before December 31, 1974, the nozzle quired, the cargo tank must be treated
shall be protected by a dome cover as a unit after completion of all the
plate which conforms to either the welds in and/or to the shells and heads.
standard of The Chlorine Institute, The method must be as prescribed in
Inc., Dwg. 103–3, dated January 23, 1958, Section VIII of the ASME Code. Welded
or to the standard specified in para- attachments to pads may be made after
graph (c) (2) (ii) of this section. postweld heat treatment. A cargo tank
(ii) On a cargo tank manufactured on used for anhydrous ammonia must be
or after January 1, 1975, the nozzle postweld heat treated. The postweld
shall be protected by a manway cover heat treatment must be as prescribed
which conforms to the standard of The in Section VIII of the ASME Code, but
Chlorine Institute, Inc., Dwg. 103–4, in no event at less than 1,050 § F cargo
dated September 1, 1971. tank metal temperature.
(d) Reflective design. Every (g) Definitions. The following defini-
uninsulated cargo tank permanently tions apply to §§ 178.337–1 through
attached to a cargo tank motor vehicle 178.337–18:
shall, unless covered with a jacket Emergency discharge control means the
made of aluminum, stainless steel, or ability to stop a cargo tank unloading
other bright nontarnishing metal, be operation in the event of an uninten-
painted a white, aluminum or similar tional release. Emergency discharge
reflecting color on the upper two-thirds control can utilize passive or off-truck
of area of the cargo tank. remote means to stop the unloading
(e) Insulation. (1) Each cargo tank re- operation. A passive means of emer-
quired to be insulated must conform gency discharge control automatically
with the use and performance require- shuts off the flow of product without
ments contained in §§ 173.315(a) table the need for human intervention with-
and 178.337–1 (a)(3) and (e)(2) of this in 20 seconds of an unintentional re-
subchapter. lease caused by a complete separation
(2) Each cargo tank intended for of the liquid delivery hose. An off-
chlorine; carbon dioxide, refrigerated truck remote means of emergency dis-
liquid; or nitrous oxide, refrigerated charge control permits a qualified per-
liquid service must have suitable insu- son attending the unloading operation
lation of such thickness that the over- to close the cargo tank’s internal self-
all thermal conductance is not more closing stop valve and shut off all mo-
than 0.08 Btu per square foot per °F dif- tive and auxiliary power equipment at
ferential per hour. The conductance a distance from the cargo tank motor
must be determined at 60 °F. Insulation vehicle.
material used on cargo tanks for ni- Excess flow valve, integral excess flow
trous oxide, refrigerated liquid must be valve, or excess flow feature means a
noncombustible. Insulating material component that will close automati-
used on cargo tanks for chlorine must cally if the flow rate of a gas or liquid
be corkboard or polyurethane foam, through the component reaches or ex-
with a minimum thickness of 4 inches, ceeds the rated flow of gas or liquid
or 2 inches minimum thickness of ce- specified by the original valve manu-
ramic fiber/fiberglass of 4 pounds per facturer when piping mounted directly
cubic foot minimum density covered by on the valve is sheared off before the
2 inches minimum thickness of fiber. first valve, pump, or fitting down-
(f) Postweld heat treatment. Postweld stream from the valve.
heat treatment must be as prescribed Internal self-closing stop valve means a
in the ASME Code except that each primary shut off valve installed in a
cargo tank constructed in accordance product discharge outlet of a cargo
with Part UHT of Section VIII of the tank and designed to be kept closed by
ASME Code must be postweld heat self-stored energy.

treated. Each chlorine cargo tank must Primary discharge control system
be fully radiographed and postweld means a primary shut-off installed at a
heat treated in accordance with the product discharge outlet of a cargo
133
§ 178.337–2 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
tank consisting of an internal self-clos- identified representatives of the De-

ing stop valve that may include an in- partment of Transportation.
tegral excess flow valve or an excess (4) The direction of final rolling of
flow feature, together with linkages the shell material shall be the circum-
that must be installed between the ferential orientation of the cargo tank
valve and remote actuator to provide shell.
manual and thermal on-truck remote (b) For a chlorine cargo tank. Plates,
means of closure. the manway nozzle, and anchorage
[Order 59–B, 30 FR 579, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig- shall be made of carbon steel which
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] meets the following requirements:
(1) For a cargo tank manufactured on
EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci-
or before December 31, 1974—
tations affecting § 178.337–1, see the List of
CFR Sections Affected which appears in the (i) Material shall conform to ASTM A
Finding Aids section of the printed volume 300, ‘‘Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels
and at www.fdsys.gov. for Service at Low Temperatures’’
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter);
§ 178.337–2 Material. (ii) Material shall be Class 1, Grade
(a) General. (1) All material used for A, flange or firebox quality;
construction of the cargo tank and ap- (iii) Plate impact test specimens, as
purtenances must be suitable for use required under paragraph (a) of this
with the commodities to be trans- section, shall be of the Charpy keyhole
ported therein and must conform to notch type; and
the requirements in Section II of the (iv) Plate impact test specimens
ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- shall meet the impact test require-
chapter) and/or requirements of the ments in paragraph (a) of this section
American Society for Testing and Ma- in both the longitudinal and transverse
terials in all respects. directions of rolling at a temperature
(2) Impact tests are required on steel of minus 45.5 C. (¥50 °F.).
used in the fabrication of each cargo (2) For a cargo tank manufactured on
tank constructed in accordance with or after January 1, 1975—
part UHT in Section VIII of the ASME (i) Material shall conform to ASTM A
Code. The tests must be made on a lot 612 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter),
basis. A lot is defined as 100 tons or less Grade B or A 516/A 516M (IBR, see § 171.7
of the same heat treatment processing of this subchapter), Grade 65 or 70;
lot having a thickness variation no (ii) Material shall meet the Charpy
greater than plus or minus 25 percent. V-notch test requirements of ASTM A
The minimum impact required for full 20/A 20M (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
size specimens must be 20 foot-pounds chapter); and
in the longitudinal direction at ¥30 (iii) Plate impact test specimens
°F., Charpy V-Notch and 15 foot-pounds shall meet the impact test require-
in the transverse direction at ¥30 °F., ments in paragraph (a) of this section
Charpy V-Notch. The required values in both the longitudinal and transverse
for subsize specimens must be reduced directions of rolling at a temperature
in direct proportion to the cross-sec- of minus 40 °C. (¥40 °F.).
tional area of the specimen beneath the (c) A cargo tank in anhydrous ammo-
notch. If a lot does not meet this re- nia service must be constructed of
quirement, individual plates may be steel. The use of copper, silver, zinc or
accepted if they individually meet this their alloys is prohibited. Baffles made
requirement. from aluminum may be used only if
(3) The fabricator shall record the joined to the cargo tank by a process
heat, and slab numbers, and the cer- not requiring postweld heat treatment
tified Charpy impact values, where re- of the cargo tank.
quired, of each plate used in each cargo [Order 59–B, 30 FR 579, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig-
tank on a sketch showing the location nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
of each plate in the shell and heads of

the cargo tank. Copies of each sketch tations affecting § 178.337–2, see the List of
shall be provided to the owner and re- CFR Sections Affected which appears in the
tained for at least five years by the Finding Aids section of the printed volume
fabricator and made available to duly and at www.fdsys.gov.
134
§ 178.337–3 Structural integrity. (c) Shell design. Shell stresses result-

(a) General requirements and accept- ing from static or dynamic loadings, or
ance criteria. (1) Except as provided in combinations thereof, are not uniform
paragraph (d) of this section, the max- throughout the cargo tank motor vehi-
imum calculated design stress at any cle. The vertical, longitudinal, and lat-
point in the cargo tank may not exceed eral normal operating loadings can
the maximum allowable stress value occur simultaneously and must be
prescribed in Section VIII of the ASME combined. The vertical, longitudinal
Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- and lateral extreme dynamic loadings
chapter), or 25 percent of the tensile occur separately and need not be com-
strength of the material used. bined.
(2) The relevant physical properties (1) Normal operating loadings. The fol-
of the materials used in each cargo lowing procedure addresses stress in
tank may be established either by a the tank shell resulting from normal
certified test report from the material operating loadings. The effective stress
manufacturer or by testing in conform- (the maximum principal stress at any
ance with a recognized national stand- point) must be determined by the fol-
ard. In either case, the ultimate tensile lowing formula:
strength of the material used in the de- S = 0.5(Sy + Sx) ±[0.25(Sy ¥ Sx)2 + Ss2]0.5
sign may not exceed 120 percent of the
ultimate tensile strength specified in Where:
either the ASME Code or the ASTM (i) S = effective stress at any given
standard to which the material is man- point under the combination of static
ufactured. and normal operating loadings that can
(3) The maximum design stress at occur at the same time, in psi.
any point in the cargo tank must be (ii) Sy = circumferential stress gen-
calculated separately for the loading erated by the MAWP and external pres-
conditions described in paragraphs (b), sure, when applicable, plus static head,
(c), and (d) of this section. Alternate in psi.
test or analytical methods, or a com- (iii) Sx = The following net longitu-
bination thereof, may be used in place dinal stress generated by the following
of the procedures described in para- static and normal operating loading
graphs (b), (c), and (d) of this section, if conditions, in psi:
the methods are accurate and (A) The longitudinal stresses result-
verifiable. ing from the MAWP and external pres-
(4) Corrosion allowance material may sure, when applicable, plus static head,
not be included to satisfy any of the in combination with the bending stress
design calculation requirements of this generated by the static weight of the
section. fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle,
(b) Static design and construction. (1) all structural elements, equipment and
The static design and construction of appurtenances supported by the cargo
each cargo tank must be in accordance tank wall;
with Section VIII of the ASME Code. (B) The tensile or compressive stress
The cargo tank design must include resulting from normal operating longi-
calculation of stresses generated by de- tudinal acceleration or deceleration. In
sign pressure, the weight of lading, the each case, the forces applied must be
weight of structure supported by the 0.35 times the vertical reaction at the
cargo tank wall, and the effect of tem- suspension assembly, applied at the
perature gradients resulting from lad- road surface, and as transmitted to the
ing and ambient temperature extremes. cargo tank wall through the suspension
When dissimilar materials are used, assembly of a trailer during decelera-
their thermal coefficients must be used tion; or the horizontal pivot of the
in calculation of thermal stresses. truck tractor or converter dolly fifth
(2) Stress concentrations in tension, wheel, or the drawbar hinge on the
bending and torsion which occur at fixed dolly during acceleration; or an-
pads, cradles, or other supports must choring and support members of a

be considered in accordance with ap- truck during acceleration and decelera-
pendix G in Section VIII of the ASME tion, as applicable. The vertical reac-
Code. tion must be calculated based on the
135
§ 178.337–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
static weight of the fully loaded cargo (C) The lateral shear stress generated
tank motor vehicle, all structural ele- by a normal operating lateral accelera-
ments, equipment and appurtenances tive force equal to 0.2 times the
supported by the cargo tank wall. The vertical reaction at each suspension as-
following loadings must be included: sembly of a trailer, applied at the road
(1) The axial load generated by a surface, and as transmitted to the
decelerative force; cargo tank wall through the suspension
(2) The bending moment generated by assembly of a trailer, and the hori-
a decelerative force; zontal pivot of the upper coupler (fifth
(3) The axial load generated by an ac- wheel) or turntable; or anchoring and
support members of a truck, as applica-
celerative force; and
ble. The vertical reaction must be cal-
(4) The bending moment generated by culated based on the static weight of
an accelerative force; and the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehi-
(C) The tensile or compressive stress cle, all structural elements, equipment
generated by the bending moment re- and appurtenances supported by the
sulting from normal operating vertical cargo tank wall; and
accelerative force equal to 0.35 times (D) The torsional shear stress gen-
the vertical reaction at the suspension erated by the same lateral forces as de-
assembly of a trailer; or the horizontal scribed in paragraph (c)(1)(iv)(C) of this
pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) section.
or turntable; or anchoring and support (2) Extreme dynamic loadings. The fol-
members of a truck, as applicable. The lowing procedure addresses stress in
vertical reaction must be calculated the tank shell resulting from extreme
based on the static weight of the fully dynamic loadings. The effective stress
loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all (the maximum principal stress at any
structural elements, equipment and ap- point) must be determined by the fol-
purtenances supported by the cargo lowing formula:
tank wall.
S = 0.5(Sy + Sx) ±[0.25(Sy ¥ Sx)2 + Ss2]0.5
(iv) Ss = The following shear stresses
generated by the following static and Where:
normal operating loading conditions, (i) S = effective stress at any given
in psi: point under a combination of static
(A) The static shear stress resulting and extreme dynamic loadings that can
from the vertical reaction at the sus- occur at the same time, in psi.
pension assembly of a trailer, and the (ii) Sy = circumferential stress gen-
horizontal pivot of the upper coupler erated by MAWP and external pressure,
(fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring when applicable, plus static head, in
and support members of a truck, as ap- psi.
plicable. The vertical reaction must be (iii) Sx = the following net longitu-
calculated based on the static weight dinal stress generated by the following
of the fully loaded cargo tank motor static and extreme dynamic loading
vehicle, all structural elements, equip- conditions, in psi:
ment and appurtenances supported by (A) The longitudinal stresses result-
the cargo tank wall; ing from the MAWP and external pres-
(B) The vertical shear stress gen- sure, when applicable, plus static head,
erated by a normal operating accelera- in combination with the bending stress
tive force equal to 0.35 times the generated by the static weight of the
vertical reaction at the suspension as- fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle,
sembly of a trailer; or the horizontal all structural elements, equipment and
pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) appurtenances supported by the tank
or turntable; or anchoring and support wall;
members of a truck, as applicable. The (B) The tensile or compressive stress
vertical reaction must be calculated resulting from extreme longitudinal
based on the static weight of the fully acceleration or deceleration. In each
loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all case the forces applied must be 0.7
structural elements, equipment and ap- times the vertical reaction at the sus-
purtenances supported by the cargo pension assembly, applied at the road
tank wall; surface, and as transmitted to the
136
cargo tank wall through the suspension or turntable; or anchoring and support
assembly of a trailer during decelera- members of a truck, as applicable. The
tion; or the horizontal pivot of the vertical reaction must be calculated
truck tractor or converter dolly fifth based on the static weight of the fully
wheel, or the drawbar hinge on the loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all
fixed dolly during acceleration; or the structural elements, equipment and ap-
anchoring and support members of a purtenances supported by the cargo
truck during acceleration and decelera- tank wall;
tion, as applicable. The vertical reac- (C) The lateral shear stress generated
tion must be calculated based on the by an extreme lateral accelerative
static weight of the fully loaded cargo force equal to 0.4 times the vertical re-
tank motor vehicle, all structural ele- action at the suspension assembly of a
ments, equipment and appurtenances trailer, applied at the road surface, and
supported by the cargo tank wall. The as transmitted to the cargo tank wall
following loadings must be included: through the suspension assembly of a
(1) The axial load generated by a trailer, and the horizontal pivot of the
decelerative force; upper coupler (fifth wheel) or turn-
(2) The bending moment generated by table; or anchoring and support mem-
a decelerative force; bers of a truck, as applicable. The
(3) The axial load generated by an ac- vertical reaction must be calculated
celerative force; and based on the static weight of the fully
(4) The bending moment generated by loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all
an accelerative force; and structural elements, equipment and ap-
(C) The tensile or compressive stress purtenances supported by the cargo
generated by the bending moment re- tank wall; and
sulting from an extreme vertical accel-
(D) The torsional shear stress gen-
erative force equal to 0.7 times the
erated by the same lateral forces as de-
vertical reaction at the suspension as-
scribed in paragraph (c)(2)(iv)(C) of this
sembly of a trailer, and the horizontal
section.
pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel)
or turntable; or the anchoring and sup- (d) In order to account for stresses
port members of a truck, as applicable. due to impact in an accident, the de-
The vertical reaction must be cal- sign calculations for the cargo tank
culated based on the static weight of shell and heads must include the load
the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehi- resulting from the design pressure in
cle, all structural elements, equipment combination with the dynamic pres-
and appurtenances supported by the sure resulting from a longitudinal de-
cargo tank wall. celeration of ‘‘2g’’. For this loading
(iv) Ss = The following shear stresses condition the stress value used may
generated by static and extreme dy- not exceed the lesser of the yield
namic loading conditions, in psi: strength or 75 percent of the ultimate
(A) The static shear stress resulting tensile strength of the material of con-
from the vertical reaction at the sus- struction. For cargo tanks constructed
pension assembly of a trailer, and the of stainless steel the maximum design
horizontal pivot of the upper coupler stress may not exceed 75 percent of the
(fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring ultimate tensile strength of the type
and support members of a truck, as ap- steel used.
plicable. The vertical reaction must be (e) The minimum metal thickness for
calculated based on the static weight the shell and heads on tanks with a de-
of the fully loaded cargo tank motor sign pressure of 100 psig or more must
vehicle, all structural elements, equip- be 4.75 mm (0.187 inch) for steel and 6.86
ment and appurtenances supported by mm (0.270 inch) for aluminum, except
the cargo tank wall; for chlorine and sulfur dioxide tanks.
(B) The vertical shear stress gen- In all cases, the minimum thickness of
erated by an extreme vertical accelera- the tank shell and head shall be deter-
tive force equal to 0.7 times the mined using structural design require-
vertical reaction at the suspension as- ments in Section VIII of the ASME
sembly of a trailer, and the horizontal Code or 25% of the tensile strength of
pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) the material used. For a cargo tank
137
§ 178.337–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
used in chlorine or sulfur dioxide serv- there will be no adverse effect upon the
ice, the cargo tank must be made of lading retention integrity of the cargo
steel. A corrosion allowance of 20 per- tank if any force less than that pre-
cent or 2.54 mm (0.10 inch), whichever scribed in paragraph (b)(1) of this sec-
is less, must be added to the thickness tion is applied from any direction. The
otherwise required for sulfur dioxide thickness of the mounting pad may not
and chlorine tank material. In chlorine be less than that of the shell wall or
cargo tanks, the wall thickness must head wall to which it is attached, and
be at least 1.59 cm (0.625 inch), includ- not more than 1.5 times the shell or
ing corrosion allowance. head thickness. However, a pad with a
(f) Where a cargo tank support is at- minimum thickness of 0.25 inch may be
tached to any part of the cargo tank
used when the shell or head thickness
wall, the stresses imposed on the cargo
is over 0.25 inch. If weep holes or tell-
tank wall must meet the requirements
in paragraph (a) of this section. tale holes are used, the pad must be
(g) The design, construction, and in- drilled or punched at the lowest point
stallation of an attachment, appur- before it is welded to the tank. Each
tenance to the cargo tank, structural pad must—
support member between the cargo (i) Be fabricated from material deter-
tank and the vehicle or suspension mined to be suitable for welding to
component, or accident protection de- both the cargo tank material and the
vice must conform to the following re- material of the appurtenance or struc-
quirements: tural support member; a Design Certi-
(1) Structural members, the suspen- fying Engineer must make this deter-
sion sub-frame, accident protection mination considering chemical and
structures, and external circumferen- physical properties of the materials
tial reinforcement devices must be and must specify filler material con-
used as sites for attachment of appur- forming to the requirements in Section
tenances and other accessories to the VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7
cargo tank, when practicable. of this subchapter).
(2) A lightweight attachment to the (ii) Be preformed to an inside radius
cargo tank wall such as a conduit clip, no greater than the outside radius of
brake line clip, skirting structure,
the cargo tank at the attachment loca-
lamp mounting bracket, or placard
tion.
holder must be of a construction hav-
ing lesser strength than the cargo tank (iii) Extend at least 2 inches in each
wall materials and may not be more direction from any point of attachment
than 72 percent of the thickness of the of an appurtenance or structural sup-
material to which it is attached. The port member. This dimension may be
lightweight attachment may be se- measured from the center of the at-
cured directly to the cargo tank wall if tached structural member.
the device is designed and installed in (iv) Have rounded corners, or other-
such a manner that, if damaged, it will wise be shaped in a manner to mini-
not affect the lading retention integ- mize stress concentrations on the shell
rity of the tank. A lightweight attach- or head.
ment must be secured to the cargo (v) Be attached by continuous fillet
tank shell or head by a continuous welding. Any fillet weld discontinuity
weld or in such a manner as to preclude may only be for the purpose of pre-
formation of pockets which may be- venting an intersection between the fil-
come sites for corrosion. Attachments let weld and a tank or jacket seam
meeting the requirements of this para- weld.
graph are not authorized for cargo
tanks constructed under part UHT in [Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37056, Sept. 7, 1990, as
Section VIII of the ASME Code. amended by Amdt. 178–104, 59 FR 49135, Sept.
(3) Except as prescribed in para- 26, 1994; Amdt. 178–105, 60 FR 17401, Apr. 5,
graphs (g)(1) and (g)(2) of this section, 1995; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 1996;
the welding of any appurtenance to the 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 68 FR 19279, Apr.
18, 2003; 68 FR 52370, Sept. 3, 2003; 68 FR 75753,
cargo tank wall must be made by at-
Dec. 31, 2003]
tachment of a mounting pad so that
138
§ 178.337–4 Joints. § 178.337–5 Bulkheads, baffles and ring

stiffeners.
(a) Joints shall be as required in Sec-
tion VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see (a) Not a specification requirement.
§ 171.7 of this subchapter), with all un- (b) [Reserved]
dercutting in shell and head material [Order 59–B, 30 FR 580, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig-
repaired as specified therein. nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
(b) Welding procedure and welder per-
formance must be in accordance with § 178.337–6 Closure for manhole.
Section IX of the ASME Code. In addi- (a) Each cargo tank marked or cer-
tion to the essential variables named tified after April 21, 1994, must be pro-
therein, the following must be consid- vided with a manhole conforming to
ered as essential variables: Number of paragraph UG–46(g)(1) and other appli-
passes; thickness of plate; heat input cable requirements in Section VIII of
per pass; and manufacturer’s identi- the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this
fication of rod and flux. When fabrica- subchapter), except that a cargo tank
tion is done in accordance with part constructed of NQT steel having a ca-
UHT in Section VIII of the ASME Code, pacity of 3,500 water gallons or less
filler material containing more than may be provided with an inspection
0.08 percent vanadium must not be opening conforming to paragraph UG–
used. The number of passes, thickness 46 and other applicable requirements of
of plate, and heat input per pass may the ASME Code instead of a manhole.
not vary more than 25 percent from the (b) The manhole assembly of cargo
procedure or welder qualifications. tanks constructed after June 30, 1979,
Records of the qualifications must be may not be located on the front head of
retained for at least 5 years by the the cargo tank.
cargo tank manufacturer and must be
made available to duly identified rep- [Amdt. 178–7, 34 FR 18250, Nov. 14, 1969, as
resentatives of the Department and the
18, 1978; Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25017, June 12,
owner of the cargo tank. 1989; 55 FR 21038, May 22, 1990; 56 FR 27876,
(c) All longitudinal shell welds shall June 17, 1991; 58 FR 12905, March 8, 1993;
be located in the upper half of the Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 1996; 68 FR
cargo tank. 75753, Dec. 31, 2003]
(d) Edge preparation of shell and
head components may be by machine § 178.337–7 Overturn protection.
heat processes, provided such surfaces (a) See § 178.337–10.
are remelted in the subsequent welding (b) [Reserved]
process. Where there will be no subse-
[Order 59–B, 30 FR 580, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig-
quent remelting of the prepared surface
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
as in a tapered section, the final 0.050
inch of material shall be removed by § 178.337–8 Openings, inlets, and out-
mechanical means. lets.
(e) The maximum tolerance for mis-
(a) General. The requirements in this
alignment and butting up shall be in
paragraph (a) apply to MC 331 cargo
accordance with the requirement in
tanks except for those used to trans-
Section VIII of the ASME Code.
port chlorine. The requirements for in-
(f) Substructures shall be properly lets and outlets on chlorine cargo
fitted before attachment, and the weld- tanks are in paragraph (b) of this sec-
ing sequence shall be such as to mini- tion.
mize stresses due to shrinkage of (1) An opening must be provided on
welds. each cargo tank used for the transpor-
[Order 59–B, 30 FR 580, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig- tation of liquefied materials to permit
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] complete drainage.
(2) Except for gauging devices, ther-
tations affecting § 178.337–4, see the List of mometer wells, pressure relief valves,
CFR Sections Affected which appears in the manhole openings, product inlet open-
Finding Aids section of the printed volume ings, and product discharge openings,
and at www.fdsys.gov. each opening in a cargo tank must be
139
§ 178.337–8 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
closed with a plug, cap, or bolted ing connection area. The loading/un-
flange. loading connection area is where hoses
(3) Except as provided in paragraph or hose reels are connected to the per-
(b) of this section, each product inlet manent metal piping. Linkages be-
opening, including vapor return lines, tween closures and remote operators
must be fitted with a back flow check must be corrosion resistant and effec-
valve or an internal self-closing stop tive in all types of environmental con-
valve located inside the cargo tank or ditions incident to discharge of prod-
inside a welded nozzle that is an inte- uct.
gral part of the cargo tank. The valve (iii) All parts of a valve inside a
seat must be located inside the cargo cargo tank or within a welded flange
tank or within 2.54 cm (one inch) of the must be made of material that will not
external face of the welded flange.
corrode or deteriorate in the presence
Damage to parts exterior to the cargo
of the lading.
tank or mating flange must not pre-
vent effective seating of the valve. All (iv) An excess flow valve, integral ex-
parts of a valve inside a cargo tank or cess flow valve, or excess flow feature
welded flange must be made of mate- must close if the flow reaches the rated
rial that will not corrode or deteriorate flow of a gas or liquid specified by the
in the presence of the lading. original valve manufacturer when pip-
(4) Except as provided in paragraphs ing mounted directly on the valve is
(a)(5), (b), and (c) of this section, each sheared off before the first valve,
liquid or vapor discharge outlet must pump, or fitting downstream from the
be fitted with a primary discharge con- excess flow valve, integral excess flow
trol system as defined in § 178.337–1(g). valve, or excess flow feature.
Thermal remote operators must acti- (v) An integral excess flow valve or
vate at a temperature of 121.11°C (250 the excess flow feature of an internal
°F) or less. Linkages between closures self-closing stop valve may be designed
and remote operators must be corro- with a bypass, not to exceed 0.1016 cm
sion resistant and effective in all types (0.040 inch) diameter opening, to allow
of environmental conditions incident equalization of pressure.
to discharging of product. (vi) The internal self-closing stop
(i) On a cargo tank over 13,247.5 L valve must be designed so that the self-
(3,500 gallons) water capacity, thermal stored energy source and the valve seat
and mechanical means of remote clo- are located inside the cargo tank or
sure must be installed at the ends of within 2.54 cm (one inch) of the exter-
the cargo tank in at least two diagonal face of the welded flange. Damage
nally opposite locations. If the loading/ to parts exterior to the cargo tank or
unloading connection at the cargo tank mating flange must not prevent effec-
is not in the general vicinity of one of tive seating of the valve.
the two locations specified in the first (5) A primary discharge control sys-
sentence of this paragraph (a)(4)(i), ad- tem is not required on the following:
ditional means of thermal remote clo-
(i) A vapor or liquid discharge open-
sure must be installed so that heat
ing of less than 11⁄4 NPT equipped with
from a fire in the loading/unloading
connection area or the discharge pump an excess flow valve together with a
will activate the primary discharge manually operated external stop valve
control system. The loading/unloading in place of an internal self-closing stop
connection area is where hoses or hose valve.
reels are connected to the permanent (ii) An engine fuel line on a truck-
metal piping. mounted cargo tank of not more than
3⁄4 NPT equipped with a valve having an
(ii) On a cargo tank of 13,247.5 L (3,500
gallons) water capacity or less, a ther- integral excess flow valve or excess
mal means of remote closure must be flow feature.
installed at or near the internal self- (iii) A cargo tank motor vehicle used
closing stop valve. A mechanical to transport refrigerated liquids such

means of remote closure must be in- as argon, carbon dioxide, helium, kryp-
stalled on the end of the cargo tank ton, neon, nitrogen, and xenon, or mix-
furthest away from the loading/unload- tures thereof.
140
(6) In addition to the internal self- lief devices, must be at least 4 times
closing stop valve, each filling and dis- the design pressure of the cargo tank.
charge line must be fitted with a stop Additionally, the burst pressure may
valve located in the line between the not be less than 4 times any higher
internal self-closing stop valve and the pressure to which each pipe, pipe fit-
hose connection. A back flow check ting, hose or other pressure part may
valve or excess flow valve may not be be subjected to in service. For chlorine
used to satisfy this requirement. service, see paragraph (b)(7) of this sec-
(7) An excess flow valve may be de- tion.
signed with a bypass, not to exceed a (2) Pipe joints must be threaded,
0.1016 centimeter (0.040 inch) diameter welded, or flanged. If threaded pipe is
opening, to allow equalization of pres-
used, the pipe and fittings must be
sure.
Schedule 80 weight or heavier, except
(b) Inlets and discharge outlets on chlo-
for sacrificial devices. Malleable metal,
rine tanks. The inlet and discharge out-
lets on a cargo tank used to transport stainless steel, or ductile iron must be
chlorine must meet the requirements used in the construction of primary
of § 178.337–1(c)(2) and must be fitted valve body parts and fittings used in
with an internal excess flow valve. In liquid filling or vapor equalization.
addition to the internal excess flow Stainless steel may be used for internal
valve, the inlet and discharge outlets components such as shutoff discs and
must be equipped with an external stop springs except where incompatible with
valve (angle valve). Excess flow valves the lading to be transported. Where
must conform to the standards of The copper tubing is permitted, joints must
Chlorine Institute, Inc., as follows: be brazed or be of equally strong metal
(1) A valve conforming to The Chlo- union type. The melting point of the
rine Institute, Inc., Dwg. 101–7 (IBR, brazing material may not be lower
see § 171.7 of this subchapter), must be than 538 °C (1,000 °F). The method of
installed under each liquid angle valve. joining tubing may not reduce the
(2) A valve conforming to The Chlo- strength of the tubing.
rine Institute, Inc., Dwg. 106–6 (IBR, (3) Each hose coupling must be de-
see § 171.7 of this subchapter), must be signed for a pressure of at least 120 per-
installed under each gas angle valve. cent of the hose design pressure and so
(c) Discharge outlets on carbon dioxide, that there will be no leakage when con-
refrigerated liquid, cargo tanks. A dis- nected.
charge outlet on a cargo tank used to (4) Piping must be protected from
transport carbon dioxide, refrigerated damage due to thermal expansion and
liquid is not required to be fitted with contraction, jarring, and vibration.
an internal self-closing stop valve. Slip joints are not authorized for this
[64 FR 28049, May 24, 1999, as amended at 66 purpose.
FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 19279, Apr. 18, (5) [Reserved]
2003; 68 FR 75753, Dec. 31, 2003] (6) Cargo tank manufacturers and
§ 178.337–9 Pressure relief devices, fabricators must demonstrate that all
piping, valves, hoses, and fittings. piping, valves, and fittings on a cargo
tank are free from leaks. To meet this
(a) Pressure relief devices. (1) See
requirement, the piping, valves, and
§ 173.315(i) of this subchapter.
fittings must be tested after installa-
(2) On cargo tanks for carbon dioxide
or nitrous oxide see § 173.315 (i) (9) and tion at not less than 80 percent of the
(10) of this subchapter. design pressure marked on the cargo
(3) Each valve must be designed, con- tank.
structed, and marked for a rated pres- (7) A hose assembler must:
sure not less than the cargo tank de- (i) Permanently mark each hose as-
sign pressure at the temperature ex- sembly with a unique identification
pected to be encountered. number.
(b) Piping, valves, hose, and fittings. (1) (ii) Demonstrate that each hose as-
The burst pressure of all piping, pipe sembly is free from leaks by per-
fittings, hose and other pressure parts, forming the tests and inspections in
except for pump seals and pressure re- § 180.416(f) of this subchapter.
141
§ 178.337–10 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(iii) Mark each hose assembly with § 178.337–10 Accident damage protec-
the month and year of its original pres- tion.
sure test. (a) All valves, fittings, pressure relief
(8) Chlorine cargo tanks. Angle valves devices, and other accessories to the
on cargo tanks intended for chlorine tank proper shall be protected in ac-
service must conform to the standards cordance with paragraph (b) of this sec-
of the Chlorine Institute, Inc., Dwg. tion against such damage as could be
104–8 or ‘‘Section 3, Pamphlet 166, caused by collision with other vehicles
Angle Valve Guidelines for Chlorine or objects, jack-knifing and over-
Bulk Transportation.’’ (IBR, see § 171.7 turning. In addition, pressure relief
of this subchapter). Before installation, valves shall be so protected that in the
each angle valve must be tested for event of overturn of the vehicle onto a
leakage at not less than 225 psig using hard surface, their opening will not be
dry air or inert gas. prevented and their discharge will not
(c) Marking inlets and outlets. Except be restricted.
for gauging devices, thermometer (b) The protective devices or housing
wells, and pressure relief valves, each must be designed to withstand static
cargo tank inlet and outlet must be loading in any direction equal to twice
marked ‘‘liquid’’ or ‘‘vapor’’ to des- the weight of the tank and attach-
ignate whether it communicates with ments when filled with the lading,
liquid or vapor when the cargo tank is using a safety factor of not less than
filled to the maximum permitted fill- four, based on the ultimate strength of
ing density. A filling line that commu- the material to be used, without dam-
nicates with vapor may be marked age to the fittings protected, and must
‘‘spray-fill’’ instead of ‘‘vapor.’’ be made of metal at least 3⁄16-inch
(d) Refrigeration and heating coils. (1) thick.
Refrigeration and heating coils must (c) Rear-end tank protection. Rear-end
be securely anchored with provisions tank protection devices must:
for thermal expansion. The coils must (1) Consist of at least one rear bump-
be pressure tested externally to at er designed to protect the cargo tank
least the cargo tank test pressure, and and all valves, piping and fittings lo-
internally to either the tank test pres- cated at the rear of the cargo tank
sure or twice the working pressure of from damage that could result in loss
the heating/refrigeration system, of lading in the event of a rear end col-
whichever is higher. A cargo tank may lision. The bumper design must trans-
not be placed in service if any leakage mit the force of the collision directly
occurs or other evidence of damage is to the chassis of the vehicle. The rear
found. The refrigerant or heating me- bumper and its attachments to the
dium to be circulated through the coils chassis must be designed to withstand
must not be capable of causing any ad- a load equal to twice the weight of the
verse chemical reaction with the cargo loaded cargo tank motor vehicle and
tank lading in the event of leakage. attachments, using a safety factor of
The unit furnishing refrigeration may four based on the tensile strength of
the materials used, with such load
be mounted on the motor vehicle.
being applied horizontally and parallel
(2) Where any liquid susceptible to
to the major axis of the cargo tank.
freezing, or the vapor of any such liq- The rear bumper dimensions must also
uid, is used for heating or refrigera- meet the requirements of § 393.86 of this
tion, the heating or refrigeration sys- title; or
tem shall be arranged to permit com-
(2) Conform to the requirements of
plete drainage. § 178.345–8(d).
[Order 59–B, 30 FR 580, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig- (d) Chlorine tanks. A chlorine tank
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] must be equipped with a protective
EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci- housing and a manway cover to permit
tations affecting § 178.337–9, see the List of the use of standard emergency kits for
CFR Sections Affected which appears in the controlling leaks in fittings on the
Finding Aids section of the printed volume dome cover plate. For tanks manufac-
and at www.fdsys.gov. tured on or after October 1, 2009, the
142
housing and manway cover must con- § 178.337–12 [Reserved]

form to the Chlorine Institute, Inc.,
Dwg. 137–5 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- § 178.337–13 Supporting and anchor-
chapter). ing.
(e) Piping and fittings. Piping and fit- (a) A cargo tank that is not perma-
tings must be grouped in the smallest nently attached to or integral with a
practicable space and protected from
vehicle chassis must be secured by the
damage as required in this section.
(f) Shear section. A shear section or use of restraining devices designed to
sacrificial device is required for the prevent relative motion between the
valves specified in the following loca- cargo tank and the vehicle chassis
tions: when the vehicle is in operation. Such
(1) A section that will break under restraining devices must be readily ac-
strain must be provided adjacent to or cessible for inspection and mainte-
outboard of each valve specified in nance.
§ 178.337–8(a)(3) and (4). (b) On a cargo tank motor vehicle de-
(2) Each internal self-closing stop signed and constructed so that the
valve, excess flow valve, and check cargo tank constitutes in whole or in
valve must be protected by a shear sec- part the structural member used in
tion or other sacrificial device. The place of a motor vehicle frame, the
sacrificial device must be located in cargo tank must be supported by exter-
the piping system outboard of the stop nal cradles. A cargo tank mounted on a
valve and within the accident damage motor vehicle frame must be supported
protection to prevent any accidental
by external cradles or longitudinal
loss of lading. The failure of the sac-
members. Where used, the cradles must
rificial device must leave the protected
lading protection device and its attach- subtend at least 120 degrees of the shell
ment to the cargo tank wall intact and circumference.
capable of retaining product. (c) The design calculations of the
support elements must satisfy the re-
[Order 59–B, 30 FR 581, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig-
quirements of § 178.337–3, (a), (b), (c),
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
and (d).
EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci- (d) Where any cargo tank support is
CFR Sections Affected which appears in the attached to any part of a cargo tank
Finding Aids section of the printed volume head, the stresses imposed upon the
and at www.fdsys.gov. head must be provided for as required
in paragraph (c) of this section.
§ 178.337–11 Emergency discharge con-
trol. [68 FR 19280, Apr. 18, 2003]
(a) Emergency discharge control equip-
§ 178.337–14 Gauging devices.
ment. Emergency discharge control
equipment must be installed in a liquid (a) Liquid level gauging devices. See
discharge line as specified by product § 173.315(h) of this subchapter.
and service in § 173.315(n) of this sub- (b) Pressure gauges. (1) See § 173.315(h)
chapter. The performance and certifi- of this subchapter.
cation requirements for emergency dis- (2) Each cargo tank used in carbon
charge control equipment are specified dioxide, refrigerated liquid or nitrous
in § 173.315(n) of this subchapter and are oxide, refrigerated liquid service must
not a part of the cargo tank motor ve- be provided with a suitable pressure
hicle certification made under this
gauge. A shut-off valve must be in-
specification.
stalled between the pressure gauge and
(b) Engine fuel lines. On a truck-
mounted cargo tank, emergency dis- the cargo tank.
charge control equipment is not re- (c) Orifices. See § 173.315(h) (3) and (4)
quired on an engine fuel line of not of this subchapter.
more than 3⁄4 NPT equipped with a [Amdt. 178–29, 38 FR 27599, Oct. 5, 1973, as
valve having an integral excess flow amended by Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25018, June
valve or excess flow feature. 12, 1989; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1,
[64 FR 28050, May 24, 1999] 1996]
143
§ 178.337–15 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
§ 178.337–15 Pumps and compressors. method, or ultrasonic testing in ac-

cordance with appendix 12 in Section
(a) Liquid pumps or gas compressors,
VIII of the ASME Code. Permanent
if used, must be of suitable design, ade-
magnets must not be used to perform
quately protected against breakage by
collision, and kept in good condition. the magnetic particle inspection.
They may be driven by motor vehicle (c) All defects found shall be re-
power take-off or other mechanical, paired, the cargo tanks shall then
electrical, or hydraulic means. Unless again be postweld heat treated, if such
they are of the centrifugal type, they heat treatment was previously per-
shall be equipped with suitable pres- formed, and the repaired areas shall
sure actuated by-pass valves permit- again be tested.
ting flow from discharge to suction or [Order 59–B, 30 FR 582, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig-
to the cargo tank. nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended
(b) A liquid chlorine pump may not by Amdt. 178–7, 34 FR 18250, Nov. 14, 1969;
be installed on a cargo tank intended Amdt. 178–99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt.
for the transportation of chlorine. 178–118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 1996; 68 FR 75753,
Dec. 31, 2003]
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25018, June 12, 1989, as
amended by Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. § 178.337–17 Marking.
1, 1996]
(a) General. Each cargo tank certified
§ 178.337–16 Testing. after October 1, 2004 must have a corro-
(a) Inspection and tests. Inspection of sion-resistant metal name plate
materials of construction of the cargo (ASME Plate) and specification plate
tank and its appurtenances and origi- permanently attached to the cargo
nal test and inspection of the finished tank by brazing, welding, or other suit-
cargo tank and its appurtenances must able means on the left side near the
be as required by Section VIII of the front, in a place accessible for inspec-
ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- tion. If the specification plate is at-
chapter) and as further required by this tached directly to the cargo tank wall
specification, except that for cargo by welding, it must be welded to the
tanks constructed in accordance with tank before the cargo tank is postweld
part UHT in Section VIII of the ASME heat treated.
Code the original test pressure must be (1) The plates must be legibly marked
at least twice the cargo tank design by stamping, embossing, or other
pressure. means of forming letters into the
(b) Weld testing and inspection. (1) metal of the plate, with the informa-
Each cargo tank constructed in accord- tion required in paragraphs (b) and (c)
ance with part UHT in Section VIII of of this section, in addition to that re-
the ASME Code must be subjected, quired by the ASME Code, in char-
after postweld heat treatment and hy- acters at least 3/16 inch high (par-
drostatic tests, to a wet fluorescent enthetical abbreviations may be used).
magnetic particle inspection to be All plates must be maintained in a leg-
made on all welds in or on the cargo ible condition.
tank shell and heads both inside and (2) Each insulated cargo tank must
out. The method of inspection must have additional plates, as described, at-
conform to appendix 6 in Section VIII tached to the jacket in the location
of the ASME Code except that perma- specified unless the specification plate
nent magnets shall not be used. is attached to the chassis and has the
(2) On cargo tanks of over 3,500 gal- information required in paragraphs (b)
lons water capacity other than those and (c) of this section.
described in paragraph (b)(1) of this (3) The information required for both
section unless fully radiographed, a the name and specification plate may
test must be made of all welds in or on be displayed on a single plate. If the in-
the shell and heads both inside and formation required by this section is
outside by either the wet fluorescent displayed on a plate required by the

magnetic particle method conforming ASME, the information need not be re-
to appendix U in Section VIII of the peated on the name and specification
ASME Code, liquid dye penetrant plates.
144
(4) The specification plate may be at- specification plate in accordance with
tached to the cargo tank motor vehicle this section:
chassis rail by brazing, welding, or (1) Cargo tank motor vehicle manu-
other suitable means on the left side facturer (CTMV mfr.).
near the front head, in a place acces- (2) Cargo tank motor vehicle certifi-
sible for inspection. If the specification cation date (CTMV cert. date).
plate is attached to the chassis rail, (3) Cargo tank manufacturer (CT
then the cargo tank serial number as- mfr.).
signed by the cargo tank manufacturer (4) Cargo tank date of manufacture
must be included on the plate. (CT date of mfr.), month and year.
(b) Name plate. The following infor- (5) Maximum weight of lading (Max.
mation must be marked on the name Payload), in pounds
plate in accordance with this section:
(6) Lining materials (Lining), if ap-
(1) DOT-specification number MC 331
plicable.
(DOT MC 331).
(7) Heating system design pressure
(2) Original test date (Orig. Test
(Heating sys. press.), in psig, if applica-
Date).
ble.
(3) MAWP in psig.
(8) Heating system design tempera-
(4) Cargo tank design temperature
ture (Heating sys. temp.), in °F, if ap-
(Design Temp. Range) lll °F to
plicable.
lll °F.
(5) Nominal capacity (Water Cap.), in (9) Cargo tank serial number, as-
pounds. signed by cargo tank manufacturer (CT
(6) Maximum design density of lading serial), if applicable.
(Max. Lading density), in pounds per NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (c): See § 173.315(a) of
gallon. this chapter regarding water capacity.
(7) Material specification number— NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (c): When the shell
shell (Shell matl, yyy***), where ‘‘yyy’’ and head materials are the same thickness,
is replaced by the alloy designation they may be combined (Shell & head matl,
yyy***).
and ‘‘***’’ is replaced by the alloy type.
(8) Material specification number— (d) The design weight of lading used
heads (Head matl. yyy***), where in determining the loading in §§ 178.337–
‘‘yyy’’ is replaced by the alloy designa- 3(b), 178.337–10(b) and (c), and 178.337–
tion and ‘‘***’’ by the alloy type. 13(a) and (b), must be shown as the
(9) Minimum Thickness—shell (Min. maximum weight of lading marking re-
Shell-thick), in inches. When minimum quired by paragraph (c) of this section.
shell thicknesses are not the same for
different areas, show (topll, sidell, [68 FR 19280, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 52370, Sept.
3, 2003, as amended at 68 FR 57633, Oct. 6,
bottomll, in inches). 2003]
(10) Minimum thickness—heads (Min.
heads thick.), in inches. § 178.337–18 Certification.
(11) Manufactured thickness—shell
(Mfd. Shell thick.), topll, sidell, (a) At or before the time of delivery,
bottomll, in inches. (Required when the cargo tank motor vehicle manufac-
additional thickness is provided for turer must supply and the owner must
corrosion allowance.) obtain, a cargo tank motor vehicle
(12) Manufactured thickness—heads manufacturer’s data report as required
(Mfd. Heads thick.), in inches. (Re- by Section VIII of the ASME Code
quired when additional thickness is (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), and
provided for corrosion allowance.) a certificate stating that the com-
(13) Exposed surface area, in square pleted cargo tank motor vehicle con-
feet. forms in all respects to Specification
MC 331 and the ASME Code. The reg-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b): When the shell and istration numbers of the manufacturer,
head materials are the same thickness, they the Design Certifying Engineer, and
may be combined, (Shell&head matl, the Registered Inspector, as appro-

yyy***).
priate, must appear on the certificates
(c) Specification plate. The following (see subpart F, part 107 in subchapter A
information must be marked on the of this chapter).
145
§ 178.338 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(1) For each design type, the certifi- certificate, or certificates, will include
cate must be signed by a responsible of- sufficient sketches, drawings, and
ficial of the manufacturer and a Design other information to indicate the loca-
Certifying Engineer; and tion, make, model, and size of each
(2) For each cargo tank motor vehi- valve and the arrangement of all piping
cle, the certificate must be signed by a associated with the cargo tank.
responsible official of the manufac- (6) The certificate must contain a
turer and a Registered Inspector. statement indicating whether or not
(3) When a cargo tank motor vehicle the cargo tank was postweld heat
is manufactured in two or more stages, treated for anhydrous ammonia as
each manufacturer who performs a specified in § 178.337–1(f).
manufacturing function or portion (b) The owner shall retain the copy of
thereof on the incomplete cargo tank the data report and certificates and re-
motor vehicle must provide to the suc- lated papers in his files throughout his
ceeding manufacturer, at or before the ownership of the cargo tank motor ve-
time of delivery, a certificate that hicle and for at least one year there-
states the function performed by the after; and in the event of change in
manufacturer, including any certifi- ownership, retention by the prior
cates received from previous manufac- owner of nonfading photographically
turers, Registered Inspectors, and De- reproduced copies will be deemed to
sign Certifying Engineers. satisfy this requirement. Each motor
(4) Specification shortages. When a carrier using the cargo tank motor ve-
cargo tank motor vehicle is manufac- hicle, if not the owner thereof, shall
tured in two or more stages, the manu- obtain a copy of the data report and
facturer of the cargo tank must attach certificate and retain them in his files
the name plate and specification plate during the time he uses the cargo tank
as required by § 178.337–17(a) and (b) motor vehicle and for at least one year
without the original date of certifi- thereafter.
cation stamped on the specification [Order 59–B, 30 FR 583, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig-
plate. Prior manufacturers must list nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
the specification requirements that are
not completed on the Certificate of EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci-
Compliance. When the cargo tank
CFR Sections Affected which appears in the
motor vehicle is brought into full com- Finding Aids section of the printed volume
pliance with the applicable specifica- and at www.fdsys.gov.
tion, the cargo tank motor vehicle
manufacturer must have a Registered § 178.338 Specification MC–338; insu-
Inspector stamp the date of certifi- lated cargo tank motor vehicle.
cation on the specification plate and
issue a Certificate of Compliance to the § 178.338–1 General requirements.
owner of the cargo tank motor vehicle. (a) For the purposes of this section—
The Certificate of Compliance must (1) Design pressure means the
list the actions taken to bring the ‘‘MAWP’’ as used in Section VIII of the
cargo tank motor vehicle into full ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
compliance. In addition, the certificate chapter), and is the gauge pressure at
must include the date of certification the top of the tank.
and the person (manufacturer, carrier (2) Design service temperature means
or repair organization) accomplishing the coldest temperature for which the
compliance. tank is suitable (see §§ 173.318 (a)(1) and
(5) The certificate must state wheth- (f) of this subchapter).
er or not it includes certification that (b) Each cargo tank must consist of a
all valves, piping, and protective de- suitably supported welded inner vessel
vices conform to the requirements of enclosed within an outer shell or jack-
the specification. If it does not so cer- et, with insulation between the inner
tify, the installer of any such valve, vessel and outer shell or jacket, and
piping, or device shall supply and the having piping, valves, supports and
owner shall obtain a certificate assert- other appurtenances as specified in this
ing complete compliance with these subchapter. For the purpose of this
specifications for such devices. The specification, tank means inner vessel
146
and jacket means either the outer shell § 178.338–3(b), may not exceed 25 percent
or insulation cover. of the minimum specified tensile
(c) Each tank must be designed, con- strength.
structed, certified, and stamped in ac- [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27703, June 16, 1983, as
cordance with Section VIII of the amended at 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984; Amdt.
ASME Code. 178–104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; 66 FR
(d) The exterior surface of the tank 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75754, Dec. 31, 2003]
must be insulated with a material com-
patible with the lading. § 178.338–2 Material.
(1) Each cargo tank must have an in- (a) All material used in the construc-
sulation system that will prevent the tion of a tank and its appurtenances
tank pressure from exceeding the pres- that may come in contact with the lad-
sure relief valve set pressure within the ing must be compatible with the lading
specified holding time when the tank is to be transported. All material used for
loaded with the specific cryogenic liq- tank pressure parts must conform to
uid at the design conditions of— the requirements in Section II of the
(i) The specified temperature and ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
pressure of the cryogenic liquid, and chapter). All material used for evacu-
(ii) The exposure of the filled cargo ated jacket pressure parts must con-
tank to an average ambient tempera- form to the chemistry and steelmaking
ture of 85 °F. practices of one of the material speci-
(2) For a cargo tank used to transport fications of Section II of the ASME
oxygen, the insulation may not sustain Code or the following ASTM Specifica-
combustion in a 99.5 percent oxygen at- tions (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
mosphere at atmospheric pressure chapter): A 242, A 441, A 514, A 572, A
when contacted with a continuously
588, A 606, A 633, A 715, A 1008/A 1008M,
heated glowing platinum wire. The
A 1011/A 1011M.
cargo tank must be marked in accord- (b) All tie-rods, mountings, and other
ance with § 178.338–18(b)(7). appurtenances within the jacket and
(3) Each vacuum-insulated cargo
all piping, fittings and valves must be
tank must be provided with a connec-
of material suitable for use at the low-
tion for a vacuum gauge to indicate the
est temperature to be encountered.
absolute pressure within the insulation (c) Impact tests are required on all
space. tank materials, except materials that
(e) The insulation must be com-
are excepted from impact testing by
pletely covered by a metal jacket. The
the ASME Code, and must be per-
jacket or the insulation must be so
formed using the procedure prescribed
constructed and sealed as to prevent
in Section VIII of the ASME Code.
moisture from coming into contact (d) The direction of final rolling of
with the insulation (see § 173.318(a)(3) of the shell material must be the circum-
this subchapter). Minimum metal ferential orientation of the tank shell.
thicknesses are as follows: (e) Each tank constructed in accord-
Jacket evacu- Jacket not ance with part UHT in Section VIII of
ated evacuated the ASME Code must be postweld heat
Type metal
Gauge Inches Gauge Inches treated as a unit after completion of
all welds to the shell and heads. Other
Stainless steel .............. 18 0.0428 22 0.0269
Low carbon mild steel .. 12 0.0946 14 0.0677 tanks must be postweld heat treated as
Aluminum ..................... ........... 0.125 ........... 0.1000 required in Section VIII of the ASME
Code. For all tanks the method must
(f) An evacuated jacket must be in be as prescribed in the ASME Code.
compliance with the following require- Welded attachments to pads may be
ments: made after postweld heat treatment.
(1) The jacket must be designed to (f) The fabricator shall record the
sustain a minimum critical collapsing heat and slab numbers and the certified
pressure of 30 psig. Charpy impact values of each plate
(2) If the jacket also supports addi- used in the tank on a sketch showing
tional loads, such as the weight of the the location of each plate in the shell
tank and lading, the combined stress, and heads of the tank. A copy of the
computed according to the formula in sketch must be provided to the owner
147
§ 178.338–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
of the cargo tank and a copy must be ture gradients resulting from lading
retained by the fabricator for at least and ambient temperature extremes.
five years and made available, upon re- When dissimilar materials are used,
quest, to any duly identified represent- their thermal coefficients must be used
ative of the Department. in calculation of the thermal stresses.
(Approved by the Office of Management and (2) Stress concentrations in tension,
Budget under control number 2137–0017) bending, and torsion which occur at
pads, cradles, or other supports must
[Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27703 and 27713, June 16,
1983, as amended at 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984; be considered in accordance with ap-
68 FR 19281, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 75754, Dec. 31, pendix G in Section VIII of the ASME
2003; 70 FR 34076, June 13, 2005] Code.
(c) Stresses resulting from static and
§ 178.338–3 Structural integrity. dynamic loadings, or a combination
(a) General requirements and accept- thereof, are not uniform throughout
ance criteria. (1) Except as permitted in the cargo tank motor vehicle. The fol-
paragraph (d) of this section, the max- lowing is a simplified procedure for cal-
imum calculated design stress at any culating the effective stress in the
point in the tank may not exceed the tank resulting from static and dynamic
lesser of the maximum allowable stress loadings. The effective stress (the max-
value prescribed in section VIII of the imum principal stress at any point)
ASME Code, or 25 percent of the tensile must be determined by the following
strength of the material used. formula:
(2) The relevant physical properties
S = 0.5 (Sy + Sx) ±(0.25(Sy ¥ Sx)2 + Ss2) 0.5
of the materials used in each tank may
be established either by a certified test Where:
report from the material manufacturer
or by testing in conformance with a (1) S = effective stress at any given
recognized national standard. In either point under the most severe combina-
case, the ultimate tensile strength of tion of static and dynamic loadings
the material used in the design may that can occur at the same time, in psi.
not exceed 120 percent of the minimum (2) Sy = circumferential stress gen-
ultimate tensile strength specified in erated by internal and external pres-
either the ASME Code or the ASTM sure when applicable, in psi.
standard to which the material is man- (3) Sx = the net longitudinal stress, in
ufactured. psi, generated by the following loading
(3) The maximum design stress at conditions:
any point in the tank must be cal- (i) The longitudinal tensile stress
culated separately for the loading con- generated by internal pressure;
ditions described in paragraphs (b), (c), (ii) The tensile or compressive stress
and (d) of this section. Alternate test generated by the axial load resulting
or analytical methods, or a combina- from a decelerative force applied inde-
tion thereof, may be used in lieu of the pendently to each suspension assembly
procedures described in paragraphs (b), at the road surface using applicable
(c), and (d) of this section, if the meth- static loadings specified in § 178.338–13
ods are accurate and verifiable. (b);
(4) Corrosion allowance material may (iii) The tensile or compressive stress
not be included to satisfy any of the generated by the bending moment re-
design calculation requirements of this sulting from a decelerative force ap-
section. plied independently to each suspension
(b) Static design and construction. (1) assembly at the road surface using ap-
The static design and construction of plicable static loadings specified in
each tank must be in accordance with § 178.338–13 (b);
appendix G in Section VIII of the (iv) The tensile or compressive stress
ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- generated by the axial load resulting
chapter). The tank design must include from an accelerative force applied to
calculation of stress due to the design the horizontal pivot of the fifth wheel
pressure, the weight of lading, the supporting the vehicle using applicable
weight of structures supported by the static loadings specified in § 178.338–13
tank wall, and the effect of tempera- (b);
148
(v) The tensile or compressive stress component or accident protection de-

generated by the bending moment re- vice must conform to the following re-
sulting from an accelerative force ap- quirements:
plied to the horizontal pivot of the (1) Structural members, the suspen-
fifth wheel supporting the vehicle sion subframe, accident protection
using applicable static loadings speci- structures and external circumferen-
fied in § 178.338–13 (b); and tial reinforcement devices must be
(vi) The tensile or compressive stress used as sites for attachment of appur-
generated by a bending moment pro- tenances and other accessories to the
duced by a vertical force using applica- cargo tank, when practicable.
ble static loadings specified in § 178.338– (2) A lightweight attachment to the
13 (b). cargo tank wall such as a conduit clip,
(4) Ss = The following shear stresses brakeline clip, skirting structure, lamp
that apply, in psi,: The vectorial sum mounting bracket, or placard holder
of the applicable shear stresses in the must be of a construction having lesser
plane under consideration, including strength than the cargo tank wall ma-
direct shear generated by the static terials and may not be more than 72
vertical loading; direct lateral and tor- percent of the thickness of the mate-
sional shear generated by a lateral ac- rial to which it is attached. The light-
celerative force applied at the road sur- weight attachment may be secured di-
face, using applicable static loads spec- rectly to the cargo tank wall if the de-
ified in § 178.338–13 (b) vice is designed and installed in such a
(d) In order to account for stresses manner that, if damaged, it will not af-
due to impact in an accident, the defect the lading retention integrity of
sign calculations for the tank shell and the tank. A lightweight attachment
heads must include the load resulting must be secured to the cargo tank shell
from the design pressure in combina- or head by a continuous weld or in such
tion with the dynamic pressure result- a manner as to preclude formation of
ing from a longitudinal deceleration of pockets that may become sites for cor-
‘‘2g’’. For this loading condition the rosion. Attachments meeting the re-
stress value used may not exceed the quirements of this paragraph are not
lesser of the yield strength or 75 per- authorized for cargo tanks constructed
cent of the ultimate tensile strength of under part UHT in Section VIII of the
the material of construction. For a ASME Code.
cargo tank constructed of stainless (3) Except as prescribed in para-
steel, the maximum design stress may graphs (g)(1) and (g)(2) of this section,
not exceed 75 percent of the ultimate the welding of any appurtenance the
tensile strength of the type steel used. cargo tank wall must be made by at-
(e) The minimum thickness of the tachment of a mounting pad so that
shell or heads of the tank must be 0.187 there will be no adverse effect upon the
inch for steel and 0.270 inch for alu- lading retention integrity of the cargo
minum. However, the minimum thick- tank if any force less than that pre-
ness for steel may be 0.110 inches pro- scribed in paragraph (b)(1) of this sec-
vided the cargo tank is: tion is applied from any direction. The
(1) Vacuum insulated, or thickness of the mounting pad may not
(2) Double walled with a load bearing be less than that of the shell or head to
jacket designed to carry a propor- which it is attached, and not more
tionate amount of structural loads pre- than 1.5 times the shell or head thick-
scribed in this section. ness. However, a pad with a minimum
(f) Where a tank support is attached thickness of 0.187 inch may be used
to any part of the tank wall, the when the shell or head thickness is
stresses imposed on the tank wall must over 0.187 inch. If weep holes or tell-
meet the requirements in paragraph (a) tale holes are used, the pad must be
of this section. drilled or punched at the lowest point
(g) The design, construction and in- before it is welded to the tank. Each
stallation of an attachment, appur- pad must:

tenance to the cargo tank or structural (i) Be fabricated from material deter-
support member between the cargo mined to be suitable for welding to
tank and the vehicle or suspension both the cargo tank material and the
149
§ 178.338–4 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
material of the appurtenance or struc- ing sequence must minimize stresses

tural support member; a Design Certi- due to shrinkage of welds.
fying Engineer must make this deter- (e) Filler material containing more
mination considering chemical and than 0.05 percent vanadium may not be
physical properties of the materials used with quenched and tempered steel.
and must specify filler material con- (f) All tank nozzle-to-shell and noz-
forming to the requirements in Section zle-to-head welds must be full penetra-
IX of the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of tion welds.
this subchapter).
(ii) Be preformed to an inside radius (Approved by the Office of Management and
no greater than the outside radius of Budget under control number 2137–0017)
the cargo tank at the attachment loca- [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27704 and 27713, June 16,
tion. 1983, as amended at 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984;
(iii) Extend at least 2 inches in each 68 FR 75754, Dec. 31, 2003]
direction from any point of attachment
of an appurtenance or structural sup- § 178.338–5 Stiffening rings.
port member. This dimension may be (a) A tank is not required to be pro-
measured from the center of the at- vided with stiffening rings, except as
tached structural member. prescribed in Section VIII of the ASME
(iv) Have rounded corners, or other- Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
wise be shaped in a manner to mini- chapter).
mize stress concentrations on the shell (b) If a jacket is evacuated, it must
or head. be constructed in compliance with
(v) Be attached by continuous fillet § 178.338–1(f). Stiffening rings may be
welding. Any fillet weld discontinuity used to meet these requirements.
may only be for the purpose of pre-
venting an intersection between the fil- [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983, as
let weld and a tank or jacket seam amended at 68 FR 75754, Dec. 31, 2003]
weld.
§ 178.338–6 Manholes.
[Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37057, Sept. 7, 1990, as
amended by Amdt. 178–89, 56 FR 27876, June (a) Each tank in oxygen service must
17, 1991; 56 FR 46354, Sept. 11, 1991; 68 FR be provided with a manhole as pre-
19281, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 57633, Oct. 6, 2003; 68 scribed in Section VIII of the ASME
FR 75754, Dec. 31, 2003] Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
chapter).
§ 178.338–4 Joints.
(b) Each tank having a manhole must
(a) All joints in the tank, and in the be provided with a means of entrance
jacket if evacuated, must be as pre- and exit through the jacket, or the
scribed in Section VIII of the ASME jacket must be marked to indicate the
Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- manway location on the tank.
chapter), except that a butt weld with (c) A manhole with a bolted closure
one plate edge offset is not authorized. may not be located on the front head of
(b) Welding procedure and welder per- the tank.
formance tests must be made in ac-
cordance with Section IX of the ASME [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983, as
Code. Records of the qualification must amended at 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984; 68 FR
75754, Dec. 31, 2003]
be retained by the tank manufacturer
for at least five years and must be
§ 178.338–7 Openings.
made available, upon request, to any
duly identified representative of the (a) The inlet to the liquid product
Department, or the owner of the cargo discharge opening of each tank in-
tank. tended for flammable ladings must be
(c) All longitudinal welds in tanks at the bottom centerline of the tank.
and load bearing jackets must be lo- (b) If the leakage of a single valve,
cated so as not to intersect nozzles or except a pressure relief valve, pressure
supports other than load rings and control valve, full trycock or gas phase
stiffening rings. manual vent valve, would permit loss
(d) Substructures must be properly of flammable material, an additional
fitted before attachment and the weld- closure that is leak tight at the tank
150
design pressure must be provided out- (7) All fittings must be rated for the
board of such valve. maximum tank pressure and suitable
[Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983]
for the coldest temperature to which
they will be subjected in actual serv-
§ 178.338–8 Pressure relief devices, ice.
piping, valves, and fittings. (8) All piping, valves, and fittings
(a) Pressure relief devices. Each tank must be grouped in the smallest prac-
pressure relief device must be designed, ticable space and protected from dam-
constructed, and marked in accordance age as required by § 178.338–10.
with § 173.318(b) of this subchapter. (9) When a pressure-building coil is
(b) Piping, valves, and fittings. (1) The used on a tank designed to handle oxy-
burst pressure of all piping, pipe fit- gen or flammable ladings, the vapor
tings, hoses and other pressure parts, connection to that coil must be pro-
except for pump seals and pressure re- vided with a valve or check valve as
lief devices, must be at least 4 times close to the tank shell as practicable to
the design pressure of the tank. Addi- prevent the loss of vapor from the tank
tionally, the burst pressure may not be in case of damage to the coil. The liq-
less than 4 times any higher pressure uid connection to that coil must also
to which each pipe, pipe fitting, hose or be provided with a valve.
other pressure part may be subjected [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983, as
to in service. amended by Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25019, June
(2) Pipe joints must be threaded, 12, 1989]
welded or flanged. If threaded pipe is
used, the pipe and fittings must be § 178.338–9 Holding time.
Schedule 80 weight or heavier. Malle- (a) ‘‘Holding time’’ is the time, as de-
able metals must be used in the con- termined by testing, that will elapse
struction of valves and fittings. Where from loading until the pressure of the
copper tubing is permitted, joints shall contents, under equilibrium conditions,
be brazed or be of equally strong metal reaches the level of the lowest pressure
union type. The melting point of the control valve or pressure relief valve
brazing materials may not be lower setting.
than 1000 °F. The method of joining (b) Holding time test. (1) The test to
tubing may not reduce the strength of determine holding time must be per-
the tubing, such as by the cutting of formed by charging the tank with a
threads. cryogenic liquid having a boiling point,
(3) Each hose coupling must be de- at a pressure of one atmosphere, abso-
signed for a pressure of at least 120 per- lute, no lower than the design service
cent of the hose design pressure and so temperature of the tank. The tank
that there will be no leakage when con- must be charged to its maximum per-
nected. mitted filling density with that liquid
(4) Piping must be protected from and stabilized to the lowest practical
damage due to thermal expansion and pressure, which must be equal to or
contraction, jarring, and vibration. less than the pressure to be used for
Slip joints are not authorized for this loading. The cargo tank together with
purpose. its contents must then be exposed to
(5) All piping, valves and fittings on a ambient temperature.
cargo tank must be proved free from (2) The tank pressure and ambient
leaks. This requirement is met when temperature must be recorded at 3-
such piping, valves, and fittings have hour intervals until the pressure level
been tested after installation with gas of the contents reaches the set-to-dis-
or air and proved leak tight at not less charge pressure of the pressure control
than the design pressure marked on the valve or pressure relief valve with the
cargo tank. This requirement is appli- lowest setting. This total time lapse in
cable to all hoses used in a cargo tank, hours represents the measured holding
except that hose may be tested before time at the actual average ambient
or after installation on the tank. temperature. This measured holding

(6) Each valve must be suitable for time for the test cryogenic liquid must
the tank design pressure at the tank be adjusted to an equivalent holding
design service temperature. time for each cryogenic liquid that is
151
§ 178.338–10 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
to be identified on or adjacent to the (ii) The rated holding time (RHT)

specification plate, at an average ambi- must be calculated as follows:
ent temperature of 85 °F. This is the RHT = [(U2 ¥ U1) W] / q
rated holding time (RHT). The marked
rated holding time (MRHT) displayed Where:
on or adjacent to the specification RHT = rated holding time, in hours
plate (see § 178.338–18(c)(10)) may not ex- U1 and U2 = internal energy for the combined
ceed this RHT. liquid and vapor lading at the pressure of-
(c) Optional test regimen. (1) If more fered for transportation, and the set pres-
sure of the applicable pressure control
than one cargo tank is made to the
valve or pressure relief valve, respectively,
same design, only one cargo tank must Btu/lb.
be subjected to the full holding time W = total weight of the combined liquid and
test at the time of manufacture. How- vapor lading in the cargo tank, pounds.
ever, each subsequent cargo tank made q = calculated heat transfer rate to cargo
to the same design must be perform- tank with lading, Btu/hr.
ance tested during its first trip. The (iii) The MRHT (see § 178.338–18(b)(9)
holding time determined in this test of this subchapter) may not exceed the
may not be less than 90 percent of the RHT.
marked rated holding time. This test
must be performed in accordance with [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983; 48
§§ 173.318(g)(3) and 177.840(h) of this sub- FR 50442, Nov. 1, 1983, as amended at 49 FR
24316, June 12, 1984; 49 FR 43965, Nov. 1, 1984;
chapter, regardless of the classification
59 FR 55173, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR
of the cryogenic liquid. 51340, Oct. 1, 1996; 68 FR 57634, Oct. 6, 2003; 71
(2) Same design. The term ‘‘same de- FR 54397, Sept. 14, 2006]
sign’’ as used in this section means
cargo tanks made to the same design § 178.338–10 Accident damage protec-
type. See § 178.320(a) for definition of tion.
‘‘design type’’. (a) All valves, fittings, pressure relief
(3) For a cargo tank used in nonflam- devices and other accessories to the
mable cryogenic liquid service, in place tank proper, which are not isolated
of the holding time tests prescribed in from the tank by closed intervening
paragraph (b) of this section, the shut-off valves or check valves, must
marked rated holding time (MRHT) be installed within the motor vehicle
may be determined as follows: framework or within a suitable colli-
(i) While the cargo tank is sta- sion resistant guard or housing, and
tionary, the heat transfer rate must be appropriate ventilation must be pro-
determined by measuring the normal vided. Each pressure relief device must
evaporation rate (NER) of the test be protected so that in the event of the
cryogenic liquid (preferably the lading, upset of the vehicle onto a hard sur-
where feasible) maintained at approxi- face, the device’s opening will not be
mately one atmosphere. The calculated prevented and its discharge will not be
heat transfer rate must be determined restricted.
from: (b) Each protective device or housing,
q = [n(D h)(85¥t1)] / [ts ¥ tf] and its attachment to the vehicle
structure, must be designed to with-
Where:
stand static loading in any direction
q = calculated heat transfer rate to cargo that it may be loaded as a result of
tank with lading, Btu/hr.
n = normal evaporation rate (NER), which is
front, rear, side, or sideswipe collision,
the rate of evaporation, determined by the or the overturn of the vehicle. The
test of a test cryogenic liquid in a cargo static loading shall equal twice the
tank maintained at a pressure of approxi- loaded weight of the tank and attach-
mately one atmosphere, absolute, lb/hr. ments. A safety factor of four, based on
D h = latent heat of vaporization of test fluid the tensile strength of the material,
at test pressure, Btu/lb. shall be used. The protective device or
ts = average temperature of outer shell dur-
the housing must be made of steel at
ing test, °F.
t1 = equilibrium temperature of lading at least 3⁄16-inch thick, or other material

maximum loading pressure, °F. of equivalent strength.
tf = equilibrium temperature of test fluid at (c) Rear-end tank protection. Rear-end
one atmosphere, °F. tank protections devices must:
152
(1) Consist of at least one rear bump- such pressure into the cargo tank. If
er designed to protect the cargo tank the jacket is not evacuated, the seat of
and piping in the event of a rear-end the valve must be inside the tank, in
collision. The rear-end tank protection the opening nozzle or flange, or in a
device design must transmit the force companion flange bolted to the nozzle.
of the collision directly to the chassis If the jacket is evacuated, the re-
of the vehicle. The rear-end tank pro- motely controlled valve must be lo-
tection device and its attachments to cated as close to the tank as prac-
the chassis must be designed to with- ticable.
stand a load equal to twice the weight (2) Each remotely controlled shut off
of the loaded cargo tank and attach- valve must be provided with on-vehicle
ments, using a safety factor of four remote means of automatic closure,
based on the tensile strength of the both mechanical and thermal. One
materials used, with such load being means may be used to close more than
applied horizontally and parallel to the one remotely controlled valve. Cable
major axis of the cargo tank. The rear- linkage between closures and remote
end tank protection device dimensions operators must be corrosion resistant
must meet the requirements of § 393.86 and effective in all types of environ-
of this title and extend vertically to a ment and weather. The thermal means
height adequate to protect all valves must consist of fusible elements actu-
and fittings located at the rear of the ated at a temperature not exceeding
cargo tank from damage that could re- 121 °C (250 °F), or equivalent devices.
sult in loss of lading; or The loading/unloading connection area
(2) Conform to the requirements of is where hoses are connected to the
§ 178.345–8(b). permanent metal piping. The number
(d) Every part of the loaded cargo and location of remote operators and
tank, and any associated valve, pipe, thermal devices shall be as follows:
enclosure, or protective device or (i) On a cargo tank motor vehicle
structure (exclusive of wheel assem- over 3,500 gallons water capacity, re-
blies), must be at least 14 inches above mote means of automatic closure must
level ground. be installed at the ends of the cargo
tank in at least two diagonally oppo-
[Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27705, June 16, 1983, as
amended at 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984; Amdt. site locations. If the loading/unloading
178–99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993; 68 FR 19282, connection at the cargo tank is not in
Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 52371, Sept. 3, 2003] the general vicinity of one of these lo-
cations, at least one additional ther-
§ 178.338–11 Discharge control devices. mal device must be installed so that
(a) Excess-flow valves are not reheat from a fire in the loading/unload-
quired. ing connection area will activate the
(b) Each liquid filling and liquid dis- emergency control system.
charge line must be provided with a (ii) On a cargo tank motor vehicle of
shut-off valve located as close to the 3,500 gallons water capacity or less, at
tank as practicable. Unless this valve least one remote means of automatic
is manually operable at the valve, the closure must be installed on the end of
line must also have a manual shut-off the cargo tank farthest away from the
valve. loading/unloading connection area. At
(c) Except for a cargo tank that is least one thermal device must be in-
used to transport argon, carbon diox- stalled so that heat from a fire in the
ide, helium, krypton, neon, nitrogen, loading/unloading connection area will
xenon, or mixtures thereof, each liquid activate the emergency control sys-
filling and liquid discharge line must tem.
be provided with an on-vehicle re- [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27705, June 16, 1983, as
motely controlled self-closing shutoff amended by Amdt. 178–105, 59 FR 55173, Nov.
valve. 3, 1994; 60 FR 17402, Apr. 5, 1995; 68 FR 19282,
(1) If pressure from a reservoir or Apr. 18, 2003]
from an engine-driven pump or com-

pressor is used to open this valve, the § 178.338–12 Shear section.
control must be of fail-safe design and Unless the valve is located in a rear
spring-biased to stop the admission of cabinet forward of and protected by the
153
§ 178.338–13 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
bumper (see § 178.338–10(c)), the design (iv) Laterally of 2.

and installation of each valve, damage (b) When a loaded tank is supported
to which could result in loss of liquid within the vacuum jacket by struc-
or vapor, must incorporate a shear sec- tural members, the design calculations
tion or breakage groove adjacent to, for the tank and its structural mem-
and outboard of, the valve. The shear bers must be based on a safety factor of
section or breakage groove must yield four and the tensile strength of the ma-
or break under strain without damage terial at ambient temperature. The en-
to the valve that would allow the loss hanced tensile strength of the material
of liquid or vapor. The protection spec- at actual operating temperature may
ified in § 178.338–10 is not a substitute be substituted for the tensile strength
for a shear section or breakage groove. at ambient temperature to the extent
[Amdt. 178–77, 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984]
recognized in the ASME Code for static
loadings. Static loadings must take
§ 178.338–13 Supporting and anchor- into consideration the weight of the
ing. tank and the structural members when
(a) On a cargo tank motor vehicle de- the tank is filled to the design weight
signed and constructed so that the of lading (see Appendix G of Section
cargo tank constitutes in whole or in VIII, Division 1 of the ASME Code),
part the structural member used in multiplied by the following factors.
place of a motor vehicle frame, the Static loadings must take into consid-
cargo tank or the jacket must be sup- eration the weight of the tank and the
structural members when the tank is
ported by external cradles or by load
filled to the design weight of lading
rings. For a cargo tank mounted on a
(see appendix G in Section VIII of the
motor vehicle frame, the tank or jack-
ASME Code), multiplied by the fol-
et must be supported by external cra-
lowing factors. When load rings in the
dles, load rings, or longitudinal mem-
jacket are used for supporting the
bers. If cradles are used, they must
tank, they must be designed to carry
subtend at least 120 degrees of the
the fully loaded tank at the specified
cargo tank circumference. The design
static loadings, plus external pressure.
calculations for the supports and load-
Minimum static loadings must be as
bearing tank or jacket, and the support
follows:
attachments must include beam stress,
(1) Vertically downward of 2;
shear stress, torsion stress, bending
(2) Vertically upward of 11⁄2;
moment, and acceleration stress for (3) Longitudinally of 11⁄2; and, (4) Lat-
the loaded vehicle as a unit, using a erally of 11⁄2.
safety factor of four, based on the ten-
sile strength of the material, and static [68 FR 19282, Apr. 18, 2003, as amended at 68
loading that uses the weight of the FR 75754, Dec. 31, 2003]
cargo tank and its attachments when
filled to the design weight of the lading
(see appendix G in Section VIII of the (a) Liquid level gauging devices. (1) Un-
ASME Code) (IBR, see § 171.7 of this less a cargo tank is intended to be
subchapter), multiplied by the fol- filled by weight, it must be equipped
lowing factors. The effects of fatigue with one or more gauging devices,
must also be considered in the calcula- which accurately indicate the max-
tions. Minimum static loadings must imum permitted liquid level at the
be as follows: loading pressure, in order to provide a
(1) For a vacuum-insulated cargo minimum of two percent outage below
tank— the inlet of the pressure control valve
(i) Vertically downward of 2; or pressure relief valve at the condition
(ii) Vertically upward of 2; of incipient opening of that valve. A
(iii) Longitudinally of 2; and fixed-length dip tube, a fixed trycock
(iv) Laterally of 2. line, or a differential pressure liquid
(2) For any other insulated cargo level gauge must be used as the pri-
tank— mary control for filling. Other gauging

(i) Vertically downward of 3; devices, except gauge glasses, may be
(ii) Vertically upward of 2; used, but not as the primary control
(iii) Longitudinally of 2; and for filling.
154
(2) The design pressure of each liquid § 178.338–16 Inspection and testing.
level gauging device must be at least (a) General. The material of construc-
that of the tank. tion of a tank and its appurtenances
(3) If a fixed length dip tube or must be inspected for conformance to
trycock line gauging device is used, it Section VIII of the ASME Code (IBR,
must consist of a pipe or tube of small see § 171.7 of this subchapter). The tank
diameter equipped with a valve at or must be subjected to either a hydro-
near the jacket and extending into the static or pneumatic test. The test pres-
cargo tank to a specified filling height. sure must be one and one-half times
The fixed height at which the tube ends the sum of the design pressure, plus
in the cargo tank must be such that static head of lading, plus 101.3 kPa
the device will function when the liq- (14.7 psi) if subjected to external vacu-
uid reaches the maximum level per- um, except that for tanks constructed
mitted in loading. in accordance with Part UHT in Sec-
(4) The liquid level gauging device tion VIII of the ASME Code the test
used as a primary control for filling pressure must be twice the design pres-
must be designed and installed to accu- sure.
rately indicate the maximum filling (b) Additional requirements for pneu-
level at the point midway of the tank matic test. A pneumatic test may be
both longitudinally and laterally. used in place of the hydrostatic test.
(b) Pressure gauges. Each cargo tank Due regard for protection of all per-
must be provided with a suitable pres- sonnel should be taken because of the
sure gauge indicating the lading pres- potential hazard involved in a pneu-
sure and located on the front of the matic test. The pneumatic test pres-
jacket so it can be read by the driver in sure in the tank must be reached by
the rear view mirror. Each gauge must gradually increasing the pressure to
have a reference mark at the cargo one-half of the test pressure. There-
tank design pressure or the set pres- after, the test pressure must be in-
sure of the pressure relief valve or pres- creased in steps of approximately one-
tenth of the test pressure until the re-
sure control valve, whichever is lowest.
quired test pressure has been reached.
(c) Orifices. All openings for dip tube Then the pressure must be reduced to a
gauging devices and pressure gauges in value equal to four-fifths of the test
flammable cryogenic liquid service pressure and held for a sufficient time
must be restricted at or inside the to permit inspection of the cargo tank
jacket by orifices no larger than 0.060- for leaks.
inch diameter. Trycock lines, if pro- (c) Weld inspection. All tank shell or
vided, may not be greater than 1⁄2-inch head welds subject to pressure shall be
nominal pipe size. radiographed in accordance with Sec-
[Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27706, June 16, 1983, as tion VIII of the ASME Code. A tank
amended at 49 FR 24317, June 12, 1984] which has been subjected to inspection
by the magnetic particle method, the
§ 178.338–15 Cleanliness. liquid penetrant method, or any meth-
A cargo tank constructed for oxygen od involving a material deposit on the
service must be thoroughly cleaned to interior tank surface, must be cleaned
remove all foreign material in accord- to remove any such residue by scrub-
ance with CGA G–4.1 (IBR, see § 171.7 of bing or equally effective means, and all
this subchapter). All loose particles such residue and cleaning solution
from fabrication, such as weld beads, must be removed from the tank prior
dirt, grinding wheel debris, and other to final closure of the tank.
(d) Defect repair. All cracks and other
loose materials, must be removed prior
defects must be repaired as prescribed
to the final closure of the manhole of
in Section VIII of the ASME Code. The
the tank. Chemical or solvent cleaning
welder and the welding procedure must
with a material compatible with the
be qualified in accordance with Section
intending lading must be performed to
IX of the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of

remove any contaminants likely to
this subchapter). After repair, the tank
react with the lading.
must again be postweld heat-treated, if
[68 FR 75755, Dec. 31, 2003] such heat treatment was previously
155
§ 178.338–17 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
performed, and the repaired areas must quired by Section VIII of the ASME
be retested. Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
(e) Verification must be made of the chapter), in characters at least 3/16
interior cleanliness of a tank con- inch high (parenthetical abbreviations
structed for oxygen service by means may be used). All plates must be main-
that assure that all contaminants that tained in a legible condition.
are likely to react with the lading have (2) Each insulated cargo tank must
been removed as required by § 178.338– have additional plates, as described, at-
15. tached to the jacket in the location
[Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27706, June 16, 1983, as specified unless the specification plate
amended at 49 FR 24317, June 12, 1984; 49 FR is attached to the chassis and has the
42736, Oct. 24, 1984; 68 FR 75755, Dec. 31, 2003] information required in paragraphs (b)
and (c) of this section.
§ 178.338–17 Pumps and compressors. (3) The information required for both
(a) Liquid pumps and gas compressors, the name and specification plate may
if used, must be of suitable design, ade- be displayed on a single plate. If the in-
quately protected against breakage by formation required by this section is
collision, and kept in good condition. displayed on a plate required by Sec-
They may be driven by motor vehicle tion VIII of the ASME Code, the infor-
power take-off or other mechanical, mation need not be repeated on the
electrical, or hydraulic means. Unless name and specification plates.
they are of the centrifugal type, they (4) The specification plate may be at-
shall be equipped with suitable pres- tached to the cargo tank motor vehicle
sure actuated by-pass valves permit- chassis rail by brazing, welding, or
ting flow from discharge to suction to other suitable means on the left side
the tank. near the front head, in a place acces-
(b) A valve or fitting made of alu- sible for inspection. If the specification
minum with internal rubbing or abrad- plate is attached to the chassis rail,
ing aluminum parts that may come in then the cargo tank serial number as-
contact with oxygen (cryogenic liquid) signed by the cargo tank manufacturer
may not be installed on any cargo tank must be included on the plate.
used to transport oxygen (cryogenic (b) Name plate. The following infor-
liquid) unless the parts are anodized in mation must be marked on the name
accordance with ASTM B 580 (IBR, see plate in accordance with this section:
(1) DOT-specification number MC 338
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25020, June 12, 1989, as (DOT MC 338).
amended at 55 FR 37058, Sept. 7, 1990; 67 FR (2) Original test date (Orig, Test
61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 75755, Dec. 31, 2003] Date).
§ 178.338–18 Marking. (3) MAWP in psig.
(4) Cargo tank test pressure (Test P),
(a) General. Each cargo tank certified
in psig.
after October 1, 2004 must have a corro-
sion-resistant metal name plate (5) Cargo tank design temperature
(ASME Plate) and specification plate (Design Temp. Range) ll °F to ll
permanently attached to the cargo °F.
tank by brazing, welding, or other suit- (6) Nominal capacity (Water Cap.), in
able means on the left side near the pounds.
front, in a place accessible for inspec- (7) Maximum design density of lading
tion. If the specification plate is at- (Max. Lading density), in pounds per
tached directly to the cargo tank wall gallon.
by welding, it must be welded to the (8) Material specification number—
tank before the cargo tank is postweld shell (Shell matl, yyy * * *), where
heat treated. ‘‘yyy’’ is replaced by the alloy designa-
(1) The plates must be legibly marked tion and ‘‘* * *’’ is replaced by the
by stamping, embossing, or other alloy type.
means of forming letters into the (9) Material specification number—

metal of the plate, with the informa- heads (Head matl. yyy * * *), where
tion required in paragraphs (b) and (c) ‘‘yyy’’ is replaced by the alloy designa-
of this section, in addition to that re- tion and ‘‘* * *’’ by the alloy type.
156
NOTE: When the shell and heads materials NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (c): When the shell
are the same thickness, they may be com- and head materials are the same thickness,
bined, (Shell & head matl, yyy * * *). they may be combined (Shell & head matl,
yyy***).
(10) Weld material (Weld matl.).
(11) Minimum Thickness-shell (Min. (d) The design weight of lading used
Shell-thick), in inches. When minimum in determining the loading in §§ 178.338–
shell thicknesses are not the same for 3 (b), 178.338–10 (b) and (c), and 178.338–
different areas, show (top ll, side 13 (b), must be shown as the maximum
ll, bottom ll, in inches). weight of lading marking required by
(12) Minimum thickness-heads (Min paragraph (c) of this section.
heads thick.), in inches. [68 FR 19283, Apr. 18, 2003, as amended at 68
(13) Manufactured thickness-shell FR 57634, Oct. 6, 2003; 68 FR 75755, Dec. 31,
(Mfd. Shell thick.), top ll, side ll, 2003]
bottom ll, in inches. (Required when
additional thickness is provided for § 178.338–19 Certification.
corrosion allowance.) (a) At or before the time of delivery,
(14) Manufactured thickness-heads the manufacturer of a cargo tank
(Mfd. Heads thick.), in inches. (Re- motor vehicle shall furnish to the
quired when additional thickness is owner of the completed vehicle the fol-
provided for corrosion allowance.) lowing:
(15) Exposed surface area, in square (1) The tank manufacturer’s data re-
feet. port as required by the ASME Code
(c) Specification plate. The following (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), and
information must be marked on the a certificate bearing the manufactur-
specification plate in accordance with er’s vehicle serial number stating that
this section: the completed cargo tank motor vehi-
(1) Cargo tank motor vehicle manu- cle conforms to all applicable require-
facturer (CTMV mfr.). ments of Specification MC 338, includ-
(2) Cargo tank motor vehicle certifi- ing Section VIII of the ASME Code
cation date (CTMV cert. date). (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter) in
(3) Cargo tank manufacturer (CT effect on the date (month, year) of cer-
mfr.). tification. The registration numbers of
(4) Cargo tank date of manufacture the manufacturer, the Design Certi-
(CT date of mfr.), month and year. fying Engineer, and the Registered In-
spector, as appropriate, must appear on
(5) Maximum weight of lading (Max.
the certificates (see subpart F, part 107
Payload), in pounds.
in subchapter B of this chapter).
(6) Maximum loading rate in gallons
(2) A photograph, pencil rub, or other
per minute (Max. Load rate, GPM).
facsimile of the plates required by
(7) Maximum unloading rate in gal-
paragraphs (a) and (b) of § 178.338-18.
lons per minute (Max Unload rate). (b) In the case of a cargo tank vehicle
(8) Lining materials (Lining), if ap- manufactured in two or more stages,
plicable. each manufacturer who performs a
(9) ‘‘Insulated for oxygen service’’ or manufacturing operation on the incom-
‘‘Not insulated for oxygen service’’ as plete vehicle or portion thereof shall
appropriate. furnish to the succeeding manufac-
(10) Marked rated holding time for at turer, at or before the time of delivery,
least one cryogenic liquid, in hours, a certificate covering the particular
and the name of that cryogenic liquid operation performed by that manufac-
(MRHT ll hrs, name of cryogenic liq- turer, and any certificates received
uid). Marked rated holding marking for from previous manufacturers, Reg-
additional cryogenic liquids may be istered Inspectors, and Design Certi-
displayed on or adjacent to the specifying Engineers. The certificates must
fication plate. include sufficient sketches, drawings,
(11) Cargo tank serial number (CT se- and other information to indicate the
rial), as assigned by cargo tank manu- location, make, model and size of each
facturer, if applicable. valve and the arrangement of all piping
NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (c): See § 173.315(a) of associated with the tank. Each certifi-
this chapter regarding water capacity. cate must be signed by an official of
157
§§ 178.340–178.343 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
the manufacturing firm responsible for Baffle means a non-liquid-tight trans-

the portion of the complete cargo tank verse partition device that deflects,
vehicle represented thereby, such as checks or regulates fluid motion in a
basic tank fabrication, insulation, tank.
jacket, or piping. The final manufac- Bulkhead means a liquid-tight trans-
turer shall furnish the owner with all verse closure at the ends of or between
certificates, as well as the documents cargo tanks.
required by paragraph (a) of this sec- Charging line means a hose, tube,
tion. pipe, or similar device used to pres-
(c) The owner shall retain the data surize a tank with material other than
report, certificates, and related papers the lading.
throughout his ownership of the cargo Companion flange means one of two
tank. In the event of change of owner- mating flanges where the flange faces
ship, the prior owner shall retain non- are in contact or separated only by a
fading photographically reproduced thin leak sealing gasket and are se-
copies of these documents for at least cured to one another by bolts or
one year. Each operator using the clamps.
cargo tank vehicle, if not the owner
Connecting structure means the struc-
thereof, shall obtain a copy of the data
ture joining two cargo tanks.
report and the certificate or certifi-
cates and retain them during the time Constructed and certified in conform-
he uses the cargo tank and for at least ance with the ASME Code means the
one year thereafter. cargo tank is constructed and stamped
in accordance with the ASME Code,
(Approved by the Office of Management and and is inspected and certified by an Au-
Budget under control number 2137–0017) thorized Inspector.
[Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27707 and 27713, June 16, Constructed in accordance with the
1983, as amended by Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR ASME Code means the cargo tank is
37058, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178–99, 58 FR 51534, constructed in accordance with the
Oct. 1, 1993; 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 68 FR
ASME Code with the authorized excep-
75755, Dec. 31, 2003]
tions (see §§ 178.346, 178.347, and 178.348)
§§ 178.340–178.343 [Reserved] and is inspected and certified by a Reg-
istered Inspector.
§ 178.345 General design and construc- External self-closing stop-valve means
tion requirements applicable to a self-closing stop-valve designed so
Specification DOT 406 (§ 178.346), that the self-stored energy source is lo-
DOT 407 (§ 178.347), and DOT 412 cated outside the cargo tank and the
(§ 178.348) cargo tank motor vehi-
cles. welded flange.
Extreme dynamic loading means the
§ 178.345–1 General requirements. maximum single-acting loading a cargo
(a) Specification DOT 406, DOT 407 tank motor vehicle may experience
and DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles during its expected life, excluding acci-
must conform to the requirements of dent loadings.
this section in addition to the require- Flange means the structural ring for
ments of the applicable specification guiding or attachment of a pipe or fit-
contained in §§ 178.346, 178.347 or 178.348. ting with another flange (companion
(b) All specification requirements are flange), pipe, fitting or other attach-
minimum requirements. ment.
(c) Definitions. See § 178.320(a) for the Inspection pressure means the pres-
definition of certain terms used in sure used to determine leak tightness
§§ 178.345, 178.346, 178.347, and 178.348. In of the cargo tank when testing with
addition, the following definitions pneumatic pressure.
apply to §§ 178.345, 178.346, 178.347, and Internal self-closing stop-valve means a
178.348: self-closing stop-valve designed so that
Appurtenance means any cargo tank the self-stored energy source is located
accessory attachment that has no lad- inside the cargo tank or cargo tank
ing retention or containment function sump, or within the welded flange, and
and provides no structural support to the valve seat is located within the
the cargo tank. cargo tank or within one inch of the
158
external face of the welded flange or under a load in order to prevent dam-
sump of the cargo tank. age to any lading retention part or de-
Lading means the hazardous material vice. The device must break under
contained in a cargo tank. strain at no more than 70 percent of
Loading/unloading connection means the strength of the weakest piping ele-
the fitting in the loading/unloading ment between the cargo tank and the
line farthest from the loading/unload- sacrificial device. Operation of the sac-
ing outlet to which the loading/unload- rificial device must leave the remaining
ing hose or device is attached. piping and its attachment to the cargo
Loading/unloading outlet means the tank intact and capable of retaining
cargo tank outlet used for normal load- lading.
ing/unloading operations. Self-closing stop-valve means a stop-
Loading/unloading stop-valve means valve held in the closed position by
the stop valve farthest from the cargo means of self-stored energy, which
tank loading/unloading outlet to which
opens only by application of an exter-
the loading/unloading connection is at-
nal force and which closes when the ex-
tached.
ternal force is removed.
MAWP. See § 178.320(a).
Multi-specification cargo tank motor ve- Shear section means a sacrificial de-
hicle means a cargo tank motor vehicle vice fabricated in such a manner as to
equipped with two or more cargo tanks abruptly reduce the wall thickness of
fabricated to more than one cargo tank the adjacent piping or valve material
specification. by at least 30 percent.
Normal operating loading means the Shell means the circumferential por-
loading a cargo tank motor vehicle tion of a cargo tank defined by the
may be expected to experience rou- basic design radius or radii excluding
tinely in operation. the closing heads.
Nozzle means the subassembly con- Stop-valve means a valve that stops
sisting of a pipe or tubular section with the flow of lading.
or without a welded or forged flange on Sump means a protrusion from the
one end. bottom of a cargo tank shell designed
Outlet means any opening in the shell to facilitate complete loading and un-
or head of a cargo tank, (including the loading of lading.
means for attaching a closure), except Tank means a container, consisting
that the following are not outlets: A of a shell and heads, that forms a pres-
threaded opening securely closed dur- sure tight vessel having openings de-
ing transportation with a threaded signed to accept pressure tight fittings
plug or a threaded cap, a flanged open- or closures, but excludes any appur-
ing securely closed during transpor- tenances, reinforcements, fittings, or
tation with a bolted or welded blank closures.
flange, a manhole, or gauging devices, Test pressure means the pressure to
thermometer wells, and safety relief which a tank is subjected to determine
devices.
pressure integrity.
Outlet stop-valve means the stop-valve
Toughness of material means the capa-
at the cargo tank loading/unloading
outlet. bility of a material to absorb the en-
Pipe coupling means a fitting with in- ergy represented by the area under the
ternal threads on both ends. stress strain curve (indicating the en-
Rear bumper means the structure de- ergy absorbed per unit volume of the
signed to prevent a vehicle or object material) up to the point of rupture.
from under-riding the rear of a motor Vacuum cargo tank means a cargo
vehicle. See § 393.86 of this title. tank that is loaded by reducing the
Rear-end tank protection device means pressure in the cargo tank to below at-
the structure designed to protect a mospheric pressure.
cargo tank and any lading retention Variable specification cargo tank
piping or devices in case of a rear end means a cargo tank that is constructed
collision. in accordance with one specification,
Sacrificial device means an element, but which may be altered to meet an-
such as a shear section, designed to fail other specification by changing relief
159
§ 178.345–2 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
device, closures, lading discharge de- (2) The strength of the connecting
vices, and other lading retention de- structure joining multiple cargo tanks
vices. in a cargo tank motor vehicle must
Void means the space between tank meet the structural design require-
heads or bulkheads and a connecting ments in § 178.345–3. Any void within
structure. the connecting structure must be
Welded flange means a flange at- equipped with a drain located on the
tached to the tank by a weld joining bottom centerline that is accessible
the tank shell to the cylindrical outer and kept open at all times. For carbon
surface of the flange, or by a fillet weld steel, self-supporting cargo tanks, the
joining the tank shell to a flange drain configuration may consist of a
shaped to fit the shell contour. single drain of at least 1.0 inch diame-
(d) A manufacturer of a cargo tank ter, or two or more drains of at least
must hold a current ASME certificate 0.5 inch diameter, 6.0 inches apart, one
of authorization and must be registered of which is located as close to the bot-
with the Department in accordance tom centerline as practicable. Vapors
with part 107, subpart F of this chapter. trapped in a void within the connecting
(e) All construction must be certified structure must be allowed to escape to
by an Authorized Inspector or by a the atmosphere either through the
Registered Inspector as applicable to drain or a separate vent.
the cargo tank. (j) Variable specification cargo tank. A
(f) Each cargo tank must be designed cargo tank that may be physically al-
and constructed in conformance with tered to conform to another cargo tank
the requirements of the applicable specification must have the required
cargo tank specification. Each DOT 412 physical alterations to convert from
cargo tank with a ‘‘MAWP’’ greater one specification to another clearly in-
than 15 psig, and each DOT 407 cargo dicated on the variable specification
tank with a maximum allowable work- plate.
ing pressure greater than 35 psig must
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25020, June 12, 1989, as
be ‘‘constructed and certified in con- amended at 55 FR 37058, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt.
formance with Section VIII of the 178–105, 59 FR 55173, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178–
ASME Code’’ (IBR, see § 171.7 of this 118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 1996; 66 FR 45387,
subchapter) except as limited or modi- 45389, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 19283, Apr. 18, 2003;
fied by the applicable cargo tank speci- 68 FR 52371, Sept. 3, 2003; 68 FR 75755, Dec. 31,
fication. Other cargo tanks must be 2003; 70 FR 56099, Sept. 23, 2005; 76 FR 43532,
‘‘constructed in accordance with Sec- July 20, 2011]
tion VIII of the ASME Code,’’ except as
§ 178.345–2 Material and material
limited or modified by the applicable thickness.
cargo tank specification.
(g) Requirements relating to parts (a) All material for shell, heads,
and accessories on motor vehicles, bulkheads, and baffles must conform to
which are contained in part 393 of the Section II of the ASME Code (IBR, see
Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regula- § 171.7 of this subchapter) except as fol-
tions of this title, are incorporated lows:
into these specifications. (1) The following steels are also au-
(h) Any additional requirements pre- thorized for cargo tanks ‘‘constructed
scribed in part 173 of this subchapter in accordance with the ASME Code’’,
that pertain to the transportation of a Section VIII.
specific lading are incorporated into ASTM A 569
these specifications. ASTM A 570
(i) Cargo tank motor vehicle composed ASTM A 572
of multiple cargo tanks. (1) A cargo tank ASTM A 622
motor vehicle composed of more than ASTM A 656
one cargo tank may be constructed ASTM A 715
ASTM A 1008/ A 1008M, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M
with the cargo tanks made to the same
specification or to different specifica- (2) Aluminum alloys suitable for fu-

tions. Each cargo tank must conform sion welding and conforming with the
in all respects with the specification 0, H32 or H34 tempers of one of the fol-
for which it is certified. lowing ASTM specifications may be
160
used for cargo tanks ‘‘constructed in § 178.345–3 Structural integrity.

accordance with the ASME Code’’: (a) General requirements and accept-
ASTM B–209 Alloy 5052 ance criteria. (1) The maximum cal-
ASTM B–209 Alloy 5086 culated design stress at any point in
ASTM B–209 Alloy 5154 the cargo tank wall may not exceed the
ASTM B–209 Alloy 5254 maximum allowable stress value pre-
ASTM B–209 Alloy 5454 scribed in Section VIII of the ASME
ASTM B–209 Alloy 5652 Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
chapter), or 25 percent of the tensile
All heads, bulkheads and baffles must strength of the material used at design
be of 0 temper (annealed) or stronger conditions.
tempers. All shell materials shall be of (2) The relevant physical properties
H 32 or H 34 tempers except that the of the materials used in each cargo
lower ultimate strength tempers may tank may be established either by a
be used if the minimum shell certified test report from the material
thicknesses in the tables are increased manufacturer or by testing in conform-
in inverse proportion to the lesser ulti- ance with a recognized national stand-
mate strength. ard. In either case, the ultimate tensile
(b) Minimum thickness. The minimum strength of the material used in the de-
thickness for the shell and heads (or sign may not exceed 120 percent of the
baffles and bulkheads when used as minimum ultimate tensile strength
tank reinforcement) must be no less specified in either the ASME Code or
than that determined under criteria for the ASTM standard to which the mate-
minimum thickness specified in rial is manufactured.
§ 178.320(a). (3) The maximum design stress at
(c) Corrosion or abrasion protection. any point in the cargo tank must be
When required by 49 CFR part 173 for a calculated separately for the loading
particular lading, a cargo tank or a conditions described in paragraphs (b)
part thereof, subject to thinning by and (c) of this section. Alternate test
corrosion or mechanical abrasion due or analytical methods, or a combina-
to the lading, must be protected by tion thereof, may be used in place of
providing the tank or part of the tank the procedures described in paragraphs
with a suitable increase in thickness of (b) and (c) of this section, if the meth-
material, a lining or some other suit- ods are accurate and verifiable. TTMA
able method of protection. RP 96–01, Structural Integrity of DOT
(1) Corrosion allowance. Material 406, DOT 407, and DOT 412 Cylindrical
added for corrosion allowance need not Cargo Tanks, may be used as guidance
be of uniform thickness if different in performing the calculations.
rates of attack can reasonably be ex- (4) Corrosion allowance material may
pected for various areas of the cargo not be included to satisfy any of the
tank. design calculation requirements of this
(2) Lining. Lining material must con- section.
sist of a nonporous, homogeneous ma- (b) ASME Code design and construc-
terial not less elastic than the parent tion. The static design and construc-
metal and substantially immune to at- tion of each cargo tank must be in ac-
tack by the lading. The lining material cordance with Section VIII of the
must be bonded or attached by other ASME Code. The cargo tank design
appropriate means to the cargo tank must include calculation of stresses
wall and must be imperforate when ap- generated by the MAWP, the weight of
plied. Any joint or seam in the lining the lading, the weight of structures
must be made by fusing the materials supported by the cargo tank wall and
together, or by other satisfactory the effect of temperature gradients re-
means. sulting from lading and ambient tem-
perature extremes. When dissimilar
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25021, June 12, 1989, as
materials are used, their thermal coef-
amended at 55 FR 37059, Sept. 7, 1990; 56 FR

27876, June 17, 1991; Amdt. 178–97, 57 FR 45465, ficients must be used in the calculation
Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. of thermal stresses.
1, 1996; 68 FR 19283, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 75755, (1) Stress concentrations in tension,
Dec. 31, 2003; 70 FR 34076, June 13, 2005] bending and torsion which occur at
161
§ 178.345–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
pads, cradles, or other supports must (A) The longitudinal stresses result-
be considered in accordance with ap- ing from the MAWP and external pres-
pendix G in Section VIII of the ASME sure, when applicable, plus static head,
Code. in combination with the bending stress
(2) Longitudinal compressive buck- generated by the static weight of the
ling stress for ASME certified vessels fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle,
must be calculated using paragraph all structural elements, equipment and
UG–23(b) in Section VIII of the ASME appurtenances supported by the cargo
Code. For cargo tanks not required to tank wall;
be certified in accordance with the (B) The tensile or compressive stress
ASME Code, compressive buckling resulting from normal operating longi-
stress may be calculated using alter- tudinal acceleration or deceleration. In
native analysis methods which are ac- each case, the forces applied must be
curate and verifiable. When alternative 0.35 times the vertical reaction at the
methods are used, calculations must suspension assembly, applied at the
include both the static loads described road surface, and as transmitted to the
in this paragraph and the dynamic cargo tank wall through the suspension
loads described in paragraph (c) of this assembly of a trailer during decelera-
section. tion; or the horizontal pivot of the
(3) Cargo tank designers and manu- truck tractor or converter dolly fifth
facturers must consider all of the con- wheel, or the drawbar hinge on the
ditions specified in § 173.33(c) of this fixed dolly during acceleration; or an-
subchapter when matching a cargo choring and support members of a
tank’s performance characteristic to truck during acceleration and decelera-
the characteristic of each lading trans- tion, as applicable. The vertical reac-
ported. tion must be calculated based on the
(c) Shell design. Shell stresses result- static weight of the fully loaded cargo
ing from static or dynamic loadings, or tank motor vehicle, all structural ele-
combinations thereof, are not uniform ments, equipment and appurtenances
throughout the cargo tank motor vehi-
supported by the cargo tank wall. The
cle. The vertical, longitudinal, and lat-
following loadings must be included:
eral normal operating loadings can
(1) The axial load generated by a
occur simultaneously and must be
combined. The vertical, longitudinal decelerative force;
and lateral extreme dynamic loadings (2) The bending moment generated by
occur separately and need not be com- a decelerative force;
bined. (3) The axial load generated by an ac-
(1) Normal operating loadings. The fol- celerative force; and
lowing procedure addresses stress in (4) The bending moment generated by
the cargo tank shell resulting from an accelerative force; and
normal operating loadings. The effec- (C) The tensile or compressive stress
tive stress (the maximum principal generated by the bending moment re-
stress at any point) must be deter- sulting from normal operating vertical
mined by the following formula: accelerative force equal to 0.35 times
the vertical reaction at the suspension
S = 0.5(Sy + Sx) ±[0.25(Sy¥Sx)2 + SS2]0.5
assembly of a trailer; or the horizontal
Where: pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel)
(i) S = effective stress at any given or turntable; or anchoring and support
point under the combination of static members of a truck, as applicable. The
and normal operating loadings that can vertical reaction must be calculated
occur at the same time, in psi. based on the static weight of the fully
(ii) Sy = circumferential stress gen- loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all
erated by the MAWP and external pres- structural elements, equipment and ap-
sure, when applicable, plus static head, purtenances supported by the cargo
in psi. tank wall.
(iii) Sx = The following net longitu- (iv) SS = The following shear stresses
dinal stress generated by the following generated by the following static and
static and normal operating loading normal operating loading conditions,
conditions, in psi: in psi:
162
(A) The static shear stress resulting and extreme dynamic loadings that can
from the vertical reaction at the sus- occur at the same time, in psi.
pension assembly of a trailer, and the (ii) Sy = circumferential stress gen-
horizontal pivot of the upper coupler erated by MAWP and external pressure,
(fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring when applicable, plus static head, in
and support members of a truck, as ap- psi.
plicable. The vertical reaction must be (iii) Sx = the following net longitu-
calculated based on the static weight dinal stress generated by the following
of the fully loaded cargo tank motor static and extreme dynamic loading
vehicle, all structural elements, equip- conditions, in psi:
ment and appurtenances supported by
(A) The longitudinal stresses result-
the cargo tank wall;
ing from the MAWP and external pres-
(B) The vertical shear stress gen-
sure, when applicable, plus static head,
erated by a normal operating accelera-
in combination with the bending stress
tive force equal to 0.35 times the
vertical reaction at the suspension as- generated by the static weight of the
sembly of a trailer; or the horizontal fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle,
pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) all structural elements, equipment and
or turntable; or anchoring and support appurtenances supported by the tank
members of a truck, as applicable. The wall;
vertical reaction must be calculated (B) The tensile or compressive stress
based on the static weight of the fully resulting from extreme longitudinal
loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all acceleration or deceleration. In each
structural elements, equipment and ap- case the forces applied must be 0.7
purtenances supported by the cargo times the vertical reaction at the sus-
tank wall; pension assembly, applied at the road
(C) The lateral shear stress generated surface, and as transmitted to the
by a normal operating lateral accelera- cargo tank wall through the suspension
tive force equal to 0.2 times the assembly of a trailer during decelera-
vertical reaction at each suspension as- tion; or the horizontal pivot of the
sembly of a trailer, applied at the road truck tractor or converter dolly fifth
surface, and as transmitted to the wheel, or the drawbar hinge on the
cargo tank wall through the suspension fixed dolly during acceleration; or the
assembly of a trailer, and the hori- anchoring and support members of a
zontal pivot of the upper coupler (fifth truck during acceleration and decelera-
wheel) or turntable; or anchoring and tion, as applicable. The vertical reac-
support members of a truck, as application must be calculated based on the
ble. The vertical reaction must be cal- static weight of the fully loaded cargo
culated based on the static weight of tank motor vehicle, all structural ele-
the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehi- ments, equipment and appurtenances
cle, all structural elements, equipment supported by the cargo tank wall. The
and appurtenances supported by the following loadings must be included:
cargo tank wall; and (1) The axial load generated by a
(D) The torsional shear stress gen- decelerative force;
erated by the same lateral forces as de- (2) The bending moment generated by
scribed in paragraph (c)(1)(iv)(C) of this a decelerative force;
section. (3) The axial load generated by an ac-
(2) Extreme dynamic loadings. The fol- celerative force; and
lowing procedure addresses stress in (4) The bending moment generated by
the cargo tank shell resulting from ex- an accelerative force; and
treme dynamic loadings. The effective (C) The tensile or compressive stress
stress (the maximum principal stress generated by the bending moment re-
at any point) must be determined by sulting from an extreme vertical accel-
the following formula: erative force equal to 0.7 times the
S = 0.5(Sy + Sx) ±[0.25(Sy ¥ Sx)2 + SS2]0.5 vertical reaction at the suspension as-
sembly of a trailer, and the horizontal

Where: pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel)
(i) S = effective stress at any given or turntable; or the anchoring and sup-
point under a combination of static port members of a truck, as applicable.
163
§ 178.345–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
The vertical reaction must be cal- § 178.346–2, § 178.347–2, or § 178.348–2, as

culated based on the static weight of applicable.
the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehi- (e) For a cargo tank mounted on a
cle, all structural elements, equipment frame or built with integral structural
and appurtenances supported by the supports, the calculation of effective
cargo tank wall. stresses for the loading conditions in
(iv) SS = The following shear stresses paragraph (c) of this section may in-
generated by static and extreme dy- clude the structural contribution of
namic loading conditions, in psi: the frame or the integral structural
(A) The static shear stress resulting supports.
from the vertical reaction at the sus- (f) The design, construction, and in-
pension assembly of a trailer, and the stallation of an attachment, appur-
horizontal pivot of the upper coupler tenance to a cargo tank, structural
(fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring support member between the cargo
and support members of a truck, as ap- tank and the vehicle or suspension
plicable. The vertical reaction must be component must conform to the fol-
calculated based on the static weight lowing requirements:
of the fully loaded cargo tank motor (1) Structural members, the suspen-
vehicle, all structural elements, equip- sion sub-frame, accident protection
ment and appurtenances supported by structures and external circumferen-
the cargo tank wall; tial reinforcement devices must be
(B) The vertical shear stress gen- used as sites for attachment of appur-
erated by an extreme vertical accelera- tenances and other accessories to the
tive force equal to 0.7 times the cargo tank, when practicable.
vertical reaction at the suspension as- (2) A lightweight attachment to a
sembly of a trailer, and the horizontal cargo tank wall such as a conduit clip,
pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) brake line clip, skirting structure,
or turntable; or anchoring and support lamp mounting bracket, or placard
members of a truck, as applicable. The holder must be of a construction hav-
vertical reaction must be calculated ing lesser strength than the cargo tank
based on the static weight of the fully wall materials and may not be more
loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all than 72 percent of the thickness of the
structural elements, equipment and ap- material to which it is attached. The
purtenances supported by the cargo lightweight attachment may be se-
tank wall; cured directly to the cargo tank wall if
(C) The lateral shear stress generated the device is designed and installed in
by an extreme lateral accelerative such a manner that, if damaged, it will
force equal to 0.4 times the vertical re- not affect the lading retention integ-
action at the suspension assembly of a rity of the tank. A lightweight attach-
trailer, applied at the road surface, and ment must be secured to the cargo
as transmitted to the cargo tank wall tank shell or head by continuous weld
through the suspension assembly of a or in such a manner as to preclude for-
trailer, and the horizontal pivot of the mation of pockets which may become
upper coupler (fifth wheel) or turn- sites for corrosion.
table; or anchoring and support mem- (3) Except as prescribed in para-
bers of a truck, as applicable. The graphs (f)(1) and (f)(2) of this section,
vertical reaction must be calculated the welding of any appurtenance to the
based on the static weight of the fully cargo tank wall must be made by at-
loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all tachment of a mounting pad so that
structural elements, equipment and ap- there will be no adverse effect upon the
purtenances supported by the cargo lading retention integrity of the cargo
tank wall; and tank if any force less than that pre-
(D) The torsional shear stress gen- scribed in paragraph (b)(1) of this sec-
erated by the same lateral forces as de- tion is applied from any direction. The
scribed in paragraph (c)(2)(iv)(C) of this thickness of the mounting pad may not
section. be less than that of the shell or head to

(d) In no case may the minimum which it is attached, and not more
thickness of the cargo tank shells and than 1.5 times the shell or head thick-
heads be less than that prescribed in ness. However, a pad with a minimum
164
thickness of 0.187 inch may be used (b) Where practical all welds must be
when the shell or head thickness is easily accessible for inspection.
over 0.187 inch. If weep holes or tell- [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25022, June 12, 1989, as
tale holes are used, the pad must be amended by Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51341, Oct.
drilled or punched at the lowest point 1, 1996; 68 FR 75756, Dec. 31, 2003]
before it is welded to the tank. Each
pad must: § 178.345–5 Manhole assemblies.
(i) Be fabricated from material deter- (a) Each cargo tank with capacity
mined to be suitable for welding to greater than 400 gallons must be acces-
both the cargo tank material and the sible through a manhole at least 15
material of the appurtenance or struc- inches in diameter.
tural support member; a Design Certi- (b) Each manhole, fill opening and
fying Engineer must make this deter- washout assembly must be structurally
mination considering chemical and capable of withstanding, without leak-
physical properties of the materials age or permanent deformation that
and must specify filler material con- would affect its structural integrity, a
forming to the requirements of the static internal fluid pressure of at least
ASME Code (incorporated by reference; 36 psig, or cargo tank test pressure,
see § 171.7 of this subchapter). whichever is greater. The manhole as-
(ii) Be preformed to an inside radius sembly manufacturer shall verify com-
no greater than the outside radius of pliance with this requirement by
the cargo tank at the attachment loca- hydrostatically testing at least one
tion. percent (or one manhole closure,
whichever is greater) of all manhole
(iii) Extend at least 2 inches in each
closures of each type produced each 3
direction from any point of attachment months, as follows:
of an appurtenance or structural sup-
(1) The manhole, fill opening, or
port member. This dimension may be washout assembly must be tested with
measured from the center of the struc- the venting devices blocked. Any leak-
tural member attached. age or deformation that would affect
(iv) Have rounded corners, or other- the product retention capability of the
wise be shaped in a manner to mini- assembly shall constitute a failure.
mize stress concentrations on the shell (2) If the manhole, fill opening, or
or head. washout assembly tested fails, then
(v) Be attached by continuous fillet five more covers from the same lot
welding. Any fillet weld discontinuity must be tested. If one of these five cov-
may only be for the purpose of pre- ers fails, then all covers in the lot from
venting an intersection between the fil- which the tested covers were selected
let weld and the tank or jacket seam are to be 100% tested or rejected for
weld. service.
(c) Each manhole, filler and washout
[Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37059, Sept. 7, 1990, as
cover must be fitted with a safety de-
amended by Amdt. 178–89, 56 FR 27876, June
17, 1991; Amdt. 178–104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26,
vice that prevents the cover from open-
1994; Amdt. 178–105, 59 FR 55173, 55174 and ing fully when internal pressure is
55175, Nov. 3, 1994; 60 FR 17402, Apr. 5, 1995; present.
Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996; 65 FR (d) Each manhole and fill cover must
58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 68 FR 19283, Apr. 18, 2003; be secured with fastenings that will
68 FR 75755, Dec. 31, 2003; 74 FR 16143, Apr. 9, prevent opening of the covers as a re-
2009] sult of vibration under normal trans-
portation conditions or shock impact
§ 178.345–4 Joints. due to a rollover accident on the road-
(a) All joints between the cargo tank way or shoulder where the fill cover is
shell, heads, baffles, baffle attaching not struck by a substantial obstacle.
rings, and bulkheads must be welded in (e) On cargo tank motor vehicles
conformance with Section VIII of the manufactured after October 1, 2004,

ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- each manhole assembly must be per-
chapter). manently marked on the outside by
stamping or other means in a location
165
§ 178.345–6 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
visible without opening the manhole § 178.345–7 Circumferential reinforce-

assembly or fill opening, with: ments.
(1) Manufacturer’s name; (a) A cargo tank with a shell thick-
(2) Test pressure ll psig; ness of less than 3⁄8 inch must be cir-
(3) A statement certifying that the cumferentially reinforced with bulk-
manhole cover meets the requirements heads, baffles, ring stiffeners, or any
in § 178.345–5. combination thereof, in addition to the
(f) All components mounted on a cargo tank heads.
manhole cover that form part of the (1) Circumferential reinforcement
lading retention structure of the cargo must be located so that the thickness
tank wall must withstand the same and tensile strength of the shell mate-
static internal fluid pressure as that rial in combination with the frame and
required for the manhole cover. The reinforcement produces structural in-
component manufacturer shall verify tegrity at least equal to that pre-
compliance using the same test proce- scribed in § 178.345–3 and in such a man-
dure and frequency of testing as speci- ner that the maximum unreinforced
fied in § 178.345–5(b). portion of the shell does not exceed 60
inches. For cargo tanks designed to be
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25022, June 12, 1989, as loaded by vacuum, spacing of circum-
amended by Amdt. 178–105, 59 FR 55175, Nov. ferential reinforcement may exceed 60
3, 1994; 68 FR 19284, Apr. 18, 2003; 74 FR 16144,
inches provided the maximum
Apr. 9, 2009]
unreinforced portion of the shell con-
§ 178.345–6 Supports and anchoring. forms with the requirements in Section
VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7
(a) A cargo tank with a frame not in- of this subchapter).
tegral to the cargo tank must have the (2) Where circumferential joints are
tank secured by restraining devices to made between conical shell sections, or
eliminate any motion between the between conical and cylindrical shell
tank and frame that may abrade the sections, and the angle between adja-
tank shell due to the stopping, start- cent sections is less than 160 degrees,
ing, or turning of the cargo tank motor circumferential reinforcement must be
vehicle. The design calculations of the located within one inch of the shell
support elements must include the joint, unless otherwise reinforced with
stresses indicated in § 178.345–3(b) and structural members capable of main-
as generated by the loads described in taining shell stress levels authorized in
§ 178.345–3(c). Such restraining devices § 178.345–3. When the joint is formed by
must be readily accessible for inspec- the large ends of adjacent conical shell
tion and maintenance, except that in- sections, or by the large end of a con-
sulation and jacketing are permitted to ical shell and a cylindrical shell sec-
cover the restraining devices. tion, this angle is measured inside the
shell; when the joint is formed by the
(b) A cargo tank designed and con-
small end of a conical shell section and
structed so that it constitutes, in
a cylindrical shell section, it is meas-
whole or in part, the structural mem-
ured outside the shell.
ber used in lieu of a frame must be sup-
(b) Except for doubler plates and
ported in such a manner that the re-
knuckle pads, no reinforcement may
sulting stress levels in the cargo tank cover any circumferential joint.
do not exceed those specified in
(c) When a baffle or baffle attach-
§ 178.345–3(a). The design calculations of ment ring is used as a circumferential
the support elements must include the reinforcement member, it must
stresses indicated in § 178.345–3(b) and produce structural integrity at least
as generated by the loads described in equal to that prescribed in § 178.345–3
§ 178.345–3(c). and must be circumferentially welded
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25023, June 12, 1989, as to the cargo tank shell. The welded
amended by Amdt. 178–105, 59 FR 55175, Nov. portion may not be less than 50 percent
3, 1994; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, of the total circumference of the cargo
1996] tank and the length of any unwelded
space on the joint may not exceed 40
166
times the shell thickness unless rein- (5) Hat shaped or open channel ring
forced external to the cargo tank. stiffeners which prevent visual inspec-
(d) When a ring stiffener is used as a tion of the cargo tank shell are prohib-
circumferential reinforcement mem- ited on cargo tank motor vehicles con-
ber, whether internal or external, rein- structed of carbon steel.
forcement must be continuous around
[Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37060, Sept. 7, 1990, as
the circumference of the cargo tank
amended by Amdt. 178–89, 56 FR 27876, June
shell and must be in accordance with 17, 1991; 56 FR 46354, Sept. 11, 1991; Amdt. 178–
the following: 104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 178–118,
(1) The section modulus about the 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996; 68 FR 75756, Dec. 31,
neutral axis of the ring section parallel 2003]
to the shell must be at least equal to
that derived from the applicable for- § 178.345–8 Accident damage protec-
mula: tion.
I/C = 0.00027WL, for MS, HSLA and SS; (a) General. Each cargo tank motor
or vehicle must be designed and con-
I/C = 0.000467WL, for aluminum alloys; structed in accordance with the re-
quirements of this section and the ap-
Where:
plicable individual specification to
I/C = Section modulus in inches 3
W = Tank width, or diameter, inches
minimize the potential for the loss of
L = Spacing of ring stiffener, inches; i.e., the lading due to an accident.
maximum longitudinal distance from the (1) Any dome, sump, or washout
midpoint of the unsupported shell on one cover plate projecting from the cargo
side of the ring stiffener to the midpoint of tank wall that retains lading in any
the unsupported shell on the opposite side tank orientation, must be as strong
of the ring stiffener.
and tough as the cargo tank wall and
(2) If a ring stiffener is welded to the have a thickness at least equal to that
cargo tank shell, a portion of the shell specified by the appropriate cargo tank
may be considered as part of the ring specification. Any such projection lo-
section for purposes of computing the cated in the lower 1⁄3 of the tank cir-
ring section modulus. This portion of cumference (or cross section perimeter
the shell may be used provided at least for non-circular cargo tanks) that ex-
50 percent of the total circumference of tends more than half its diameter at
the cargo tank is welded and the length the point of attachment to the tank or
of any unwelded space on the joint does more than 4 inches from the cargo tank
not exceed 40 times the shell thickness. wall, or located in the upper 2⁄3 of the
The maximum portion of the shell to tank circumference (or cross section
be used in these calculations is as fol- perimeter for non-circular cargo tanks)
lows: that extends more than 1⁄4 its diameter
or more than 2 inches from the point of
Number of circum- Shell sec- attachment to the tank must have ac-
ferential ring stiffener- J1 tion
to-shell welds cident damage protection devices that
1 .................................. ..................................... 20t are:
2 .................................. Less than 20t ............. 20t+J (i) As specified in this section;
2 .................................. 20t or more ................. 40t
(ii) 125 percent as strong as the other-
1 where:
wise required accident damage protec-
t=Shell thickness, inches;
J=Longitudinal distance between parallel circumferential tion device; or
ring stiffener-to-shell welds. (iii) Attached to the cargo tank in
(3) When used to meet the vacuum re- accordance with the requirements of
quirements of this section, ring stiff- paragraph (a)(3) of this section.
eners must be as prescribed in Section (2) Outlets, valves, closures, piping,
VIII of the ASME Code. or any devices that if damaged in an
(4) If configuration of internal or ex- accident could result in a loss of lading
ternal ring stiffener encloses an air from the cargo tank must be protected
space, this air space must be arranged by accident damage protection devices
for venting and be equipped with drain- as specified in this section.
age facilities which must be kept oper- (3) Accident damage protection de-
ative at all times. vices attached to the wall of a cargo
167
§ 178.345–8 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
tank must be able to withstand or de- tank circumference (or cross section
flect away from the cargo tank the perimeter for non-circular cargo tanks)
loads specified in this section. They that could be damaged in an accident
must be designed, constructed and in- that may result in the loss of lading
stalled so as to maximize the distribu- must be protected by a bottom damage
tion of loads to the cargo tank wall and protection device, except as provided
to minimize the possibility of ad- by paragraph (a)(1) of this section and
versely affecting the lading retention § 173.33(e) of this subchapter. Outlets,
integrity of the cargo tank. Accident projections and piping may be grouped
induced stresses resulting from the ap- or clustered together and protected by
propriate accident damage protection a single protection device.
device requirements in combination (1) Any bottom damage protection
with the stresses from the cargo tank device must be able to withstand a
operating at the MAWP may not result force of 155,000 pounds (based on the ul-
in a cargo tank wall stress greater timate strength of the material) from
than the ultimate strength of the ma- the front, side, or rear, uniformly dis-
terial of construction using a safety tributed over each surface of the de-
factor of 1.3. Deformation of the pro- vice, over an area not to exceed 6
tection device is acceptable provided square feet, and a width not to exceed
the devices being protected are not 6 feet. Suspension components and
damaged when loads specified in this structural mounting members may be
section are applied. used to provide all, or part, of this pro-
(4) Any piping that extends beyond tection. The device must extend no less
an accident damage protection device than 6 inches beyond any component
must be equipped with a stop-valve and that may contain lading in transit.
a sacrificial device such as a shear sec- (2) A lading discharge opening
tion. The sacrificial device must be lo- equipped with an internal self-closing
cated in the piping system outboard of stop-valve need not conform to para-
the stop-valve and within the accident graph (b)(1) of this section provided it
damage protection device to prevent is protected so as to reasonably assure
any accidental loss of lading. The de- against the accidental loss of lading.
vice must break at no more than 70 This protection must be provided by a
percent of the load that would be re- sacrificial device located outboard of
quired to cause the failure of the pro- each internal self-closing stop-valve
tected lading retention device, part or and within 4 inches of the major radius
cargo tank wall. The failure of the sac- of the cargo tank shell or within 4
rificial device must leave the protected inches of a sump, but in no case more
lading retention device and its attach- than 8 inches from the major radius of
ment to the cargo tank wall intact and the tank shell. The device must break
capable of retaining product. at no more than 70 percent of the load
(5) Minimum road clearance. The min- that would be required to cause the
imum road clearance of any cargo tank failure of the protected lading reten-
motor vehicle component or protection tion device, part or cargo tank wall.
device located between any two adja- The failure of the sacrificial device
cent axles on a vehicle or vehicle com- must leave the protected lading reten-
bination must be at least one-half inch tion device or part and its attachment
for each foot separating the component to the cargo tank wall intact and capa-
or device from the nearest axle of the ble of retaining product.
adjacent pair, but in no case less than (c) Each closure for openings, includ-
twelve (12) inches, except that the mining but not limited to the manhole,
imum road clearance for landing gear filling or inspection openings, and each
or other attachments within ten (10) valve, fitting, pressure relief device,
feet of an axle must be no less than ten vapor recovery stop valve or lading re-
(10) inches. These measurements must taining fitting located in the upper 2⁄3
be calculated at the gross vehicle of a cargo tank circumference (or cross
weight rating of the cargo tank motor section perimeter for non-circular
vehicle. tanks) must be protected by being lo-
(b) Each outlet, projection or piping cated within or between adjacent roll-
located in the lower 1⁄3 of the cargo over damage protection devices, or by
168
being 125 percent of the strength that (2) The dimensions of the rear-end
would be provided by the otherwise re- cargo tank protection device shall con-
quired damage protection device. form to the following:
(1) A rollover damage protection de- (i) The bottom surface of the rear-end
vice on a cargo tank motor vehicle protection device must be at least 4
must be designed and installed to with- inches below the lower surface of any
stand loads equal to twice the weight part at the rear of the cargo tank
of the loaded cargo tank motor vehicle motor vehicle which contains lading
applied as follows: normal to the cargo during transit and not more than 60
tank shell (perpendicular to the cargo inches from the ground when the vehi-
tank surface); and tangential (perpen- cle is empty.
dicular to the normal load) from any (ii) The maximum width of a notch,
direction. The stresses shall not exceed indentation, or separation between sec-
the ultimate strength of the material tions of a rear-end cargo tank protec-
of construction. These design loads tion device may not exceed 24 inches. A
may be considered to be uniformly dis- notched, indented, or separated rear-
tributed and independently applied. If end protection device may be used only
more than one rollover protection de- when the piping at the rear of the
vice is used, each device must be capa- cargo tank is equipped with a sacrifi-
ble of carrying its proportionate share cial device outboard of a shut-off valve.
of the required loads and in each case
(iii) The widest part of the motor ve-
at least one-fourth the total tangential
hicle at the rear may not extend more
load. The design must be proven capa-
than 18 inches beyond the outermost
ble of carrying the required loads by
ends of the device or (if separated) de-
calculations, tests or a combination of
tests and calculations. vices on either side of the vehicle.
(2) A rollover damage protection de- (3) The structure of the rear-end pro-
vice that would otherwise allow the ac- tection device and its attachment to
cumulation of liquid on the top of the the vehicle must be designed to satisfy
cargo tank, must be provided with a the conditions specified in paragraph
drain that directs the liquid to a safe (d)(1) of this section when subjected to
point of discharge away from any an impact of the cargo tank motor ve-
structural component of the cargo hicle at rated payload, at a decelera-
tank motor vehicle. tion of 2 ‘‘g’’. Such impact must be
(d) Rear-end tank protection. Each considered as being uniformly applied
cargo tank motor vehicle must be pro- in the horizontal plane at an angle of
vided with a rear-end tank protection 10 degrees or less to the longitudinal
device to protect the cargo tank and axis of the vehicle.
piping in the event of a rear-end colli- (e) Longitudinal deceleration protec-
sion and reduce the likelihood of dam- tion. In order to account for stresses
age that could result in the loss of lad- due to longitudinal impact in an acci-
ing. Nothing in this paragraph relieves dent, the cargo tank shell and heads
the manufacturer of responsibility for must be able to withstand the load re-
complying with the requirements of sulting from the design pressure in
§ 393.86 of this title and, if applicable, combination with the dynamic pres-
paragraph (b) of this section. The rear- sure resulting from a longitudinal de-
end tank protection device must con- celeration of 2 ‘‘g’’. For this loading
form to the following requirements: condition, the allowable stress value
(1) The rear-end cargo tank protec- used may not exceed the ultimate
tion device must be designed so that it strength of the material of construc-
can deflect at least 6 inches hori- tion using a safety factor of 1.3. Per-
zontally forward with no contact be- formance testing, analytical methods,
tween any part of the cargo tank or a combination thereof, may be used
motor vehicle which contains lading to prove this capability provided the
during transit and with any part of the methods are accurate and verifiable.
rear-end protection device, or with a For cargo tanks with internal baffles,
vertical plane passing through the out- the decelerative force may be reduced
board surface of the protection device. by 0.25 ‘‘g’’ for each baffle assembly,
169
§ 178.345–9 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
but in no case may the total reduction ment is located outboard of the lading
in decelerative force exceed 1.0 ‘‘g’’. retention system.
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25023, June 12, 1989, as [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25025, June 12, 1989, as
amended at 55 FR 37061, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. amended at 55 FR 37061, Sept. 7, 1990, Amdt.
178–105, 59 FR 55175, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178– 178–89, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991; Amdt. 178–
118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996; 68 FR 19284, Apr. 118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996]
18, 2003]
§ 178.345–10 Pressure relief.
§ 178.345–9 Pumps, piping, hoses and (a) Each cargo tank must be equipped
connections.
to relieve pressure and vacuum condi-
(a) Suitable means must be provided tions in conformance with this section
during loading or unloading operations and the applicable individual specifica-
to ensure that pressure within a cargo tion. The pressure and vacuum relief
tank does not exceed test pressure. system must be designed to operate
(b) Each hose, piping, stop-valve, lad- and have sufficient capacity to prevent
ing retention fitting and closure must cargo tank rupture or collapse due to
be designed for a bursting pressure of over-pressurization or vacuum result-
the greater of 100 psig or four times the ing from loading, unloading, or from
MAWP. heating and cooling of lading. Pressure
(c) Each hose coupling must be de- relief systems are not required to con-
signed for a bursting pressure of the form to the ASME Code.
greater of 120 psig or 4.8 times the (b) Type and construction of relief sys-
MAWP of the cargo tank, and must be tems and devices. (1) Each cargo tank
designed so that there will be no leak- must be provided with a primary pres-
age when connected. sure relief system consisting of one or
(d) Suitable provision must be made more reclosing pressure relief valves. A
to allow for and prevent damage due to secondary pressure relief system con-
expansion, contraction, jarring, and vi- sisting of another pressure relief valve
bration. Slip joints may not be used for in parallel with the primary pressure
this purpose in the lading retention relief system may be used to augment
system. the total venting capacity of the cargo
(e) Any heating device, when in- tank. Non-reclosing pressure relief de-
stalled, must be so constructed that vices are not authorized in any cargo
tank except when in series with a re-
the breaking of its external connec-
closing pressure relief device. Gravity
tions will not cause leakage of the
actuated reclosing valves are not au-
cargo tank lading.
thorized on any cargo tank.
(f) Any gauging, loading or charging
(2) When provided by § 173.33(c)(1)(iii)
device, including associated valves,
of this subchapter, cargo tanks may be
must be provided with an adequate
equipped with a normal vent. Such
means of secure closure to prevent
vents must be set to open at not less
leakage. than 1 psig and must be designed to
(g) The attachment and construction prevent loss of lading through the de-
of each loading/unloading or charging vice in case of vehicle overturn.
line must be of sufficient strength, or (3) Each pressure relief system must
be protected by a sacrificial device, be designed to withstand dynamic pres-
such that any load applied by loading/ sure surges in excess of the design set
unloading or charging lines connected pressure as specified in paragraphs
to the cargo tank cannot cause damage (b)(3) (i) and (ii) of this section. Set
resulting in loss of lading from the pressure is a function of MAWP as set
cargo tank. forth in paragraph (d) of this section.
(h) Use of a nonmetallic pipe, valve (i) Each pressure relief device must
or connection that is not as strong and be able to withstand dynamic pressure
heat resistant as the cargo tank mate- surge reaching 30 psig above the design
rial is authorized only if such attach- set pressure and sustained above the
set pressure for at least 60 milliseconds
with a total volume of liquid released
170
not exceeding one gallon before the re- the required vent capacity is main-
lief device recloses to a leak-tight contained.
dition. This requirement must be met (d) Settings of pressure relief system.
regardless of vehicle orientation. This The set pressure of the pressure relief
capability must be demonstrated by system is the pressure at which it
testing. An acceptable method is out- starts to open, allowing discharge.
lined in TTMA RP No. 81–97 ‘‘Perform- (1) Primary pressure relief system. The
ance of Spring Loaded Pressure Relief set pressure of each primary relief
Valves on MC 306, MC 307, MC 312, DOT valve must be no less than 120 percent
406, DOT 407, and DOT 412 Tanks’’ (in- of the MAWP, and no more than 132
corporated by reference; see § 171.7 of percent of the MAWP. The valve must
this subchapter). reclose at not less than 108 percent of
(ii) After August 31, 1995, each pres- the MAWP and remain closed at lower
sure relief device must be able to with- pressures.
stand a dynamic pressure surge reach- (2) Secondary pressure relief system.
ing 30 psig above the design set pres- The set pressure of each pressure relief
sure and sustained above the design set valve used as a secondary relief device
pressure for at least 60 milliseconds must be not less than 120 percent of the
with a total volume of liquid released MAWP.
not exceeding 1 L before the relief (e) Venting capacity of pressure relief
valve recloses to a leak-tight condi- systems. The pressure relief system (pri-
tion. This requirement must be met re- mary and secondary, including piping)
gardless of vehicle orientation. This must have sufficient venting capacity
capability must be demonstrated by to limit the cargo tank internal pres-
testing. TTMA RP No. 81, cited in para- sure to not more than the cargo tank
graph (b)(3)(i) of this section, is an ac- test pressure. The total venting capac-
ity, rated at not more than the cargo
ceptable test procedure.
tank test pressure, must be at least
(4) Each reclosing pressure relief
that specified in table I, except as pro-
valve must be constructed and in-
vided in § 178.348–4.
stalled in such a manner as to prevent
unauthorized adjustment of the relief TABLE I—MINIMUM EMERGENCY VENT CAPACITY
valve setting. [In cubic feet free air/hour at 60 °F and 1 atm.]
(5) No shut-off valve or other device
Cubic feet
that could prevent venting through the Exposed area in square feet free air per
pressure relief system may be installed hour
in a pressure relief system. 20 ....................................................................... 15,800
(6) The pressure relief system must 30 ....................................................................... 23,700
be mounted, shielded and drainable so 40 ....................................................................... 31,600
50 ....................................................................... 39,500
as to minimize the accumulation of 60 ....................................................................... 47,400
material that could impair the oper- 70 ....................................................................... 55,300
ation or discharge capability of the 80 ....................................................................... 63,300
90 ....................................................................... 71,200
system by freezing, corrosion or block- 100 ..................................................................... 79,100
age. 120 ..................................................................... 94,900
(c) Location of relief devices. Each 140 ..................................................................... 110,700
160 ..................................................................... 126,500
pressure relief device must commu- 180 ..................................................................... 142,300
nicate with the vapor space above the 200 ..................................................................... 158,100
lading as near as practicable to the 225 ..................................................................... 191,300
250 ..................................................................... 203,100
center of the vapor space. For example, 275 ..................................................................... 214,300
on a cargo tank designed to operate in 300 ..................................................................... 225,100
350 ..................................................................... 245,700
a level attitude, the device should be 400 ..................................................................... 265,000
positioned at the horizontal and trans- 450 ..................................................................... 283,200
verse center of the cargo tank; on 500 ..................................................................... 300,600
550 ..................................................................... 317,300
cargo tanks sloped to the rear, the de- 600 ..................................................................... 333,300
vice should be located in the forward 650 ..................................................................... 348,800
half of the cargo tank. The discharge 700 ..................................................................... 363,700

from any device must be unrestricted. 750 ..................................................................... 378,200
800 ..................................................................... 392,200
Protective devices which deflect the 850 ..................................................................... 405,900
flow of vapor are permissible provided 900 ..................................................................... 419,300
171
§ 178.345–11 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
TABLE I—MINIMUM EMERGENCY VENT percent of the average value for the de-
CAPACITY—Continued vices tested.
[In cubic feet free air/hour at 60 °F and 1 atm.] (3) The rated flow capacity derived
for each device model must be certified
Cubic feet
Exposed area in square feet free air per by a responsible official of the device
hour manufacturer.
950 ..................................................................... 432,300 (h) Marking of pressure relief devices.
1,000 .................................................................. 445,000 Each pressure relief device must be
NOTE 1: Interpolate for intermediate sizes. permanently marked with the fol-
lowing:
(1) Primary pressure relief system. Un- (1) Manufacturer’s name;
less otherwise specified in the applica-
(2) Model number;
ble individual specification, the pri-
(3) Set pressure, in psig; and
mary relief system must have a min-
imum venting capacity of 12,000 SCFH (4) Rated flow capacity, in SCFH at
per 350 square feet of exposed cargo the rating pressure, in psig.
tank area, but in any case at least one [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25025, June 12, 1989, as
fourth the required total venting ca- amended at 55 FR 21038, May 22, 1990; 55 FR
pacity for the cargo tank. 37062, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178–89, 56 FR 27877,
(2) Secondary pressure relief system. If June 17, 1991; Amdt. 178–105, 59 FR 55175, Nov.
the primary pressure relief system does 3, 1994; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1,
not provide the required total venting 1996; 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45389,
capacity, additional capacity must be Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 19284, Apr. 18, 2003]
provided by a secondary pressure relief
§ 178.345–11 Tank outlets.
system.
(f) Certification of pressure relief de- (a) General. As used in this section,
vices. The manufacturer of any pressure ‘‘loading/unloading outlet’’ means any
relief device, including valves, fran- opening in the cargo tank wall used for
gible (rupture) disks, vacuum vents and loading or unloading of lading, as dis-
combination devices must certify that tinguished from outlets such as man-
the device model was designed and hole covers, vents, vapor recovery de-
tested in accordance with this section vices, and similar closures. Cargo tank
and the appropriate cargo tank speci- outlets, closures and associated piping
fication. The certificate must contain must be protected in accordance with
sufficient information to describe the § 178.345–8.
device and its performance. The certifi- (b) Each cargo tank loading/unload-
cate must be signed by a responsible of- ing outlet must be equipped with an in-
ficial of the manufacturer who ap- ternal self-closing stop-valve, or alter-
proved the flow capacity certification. natively, with an external stop-valve
(g) Rated flow capacity certification located as close as practicable to the
test. Each pressure relief device model cargo tank wall. Each cargo tank load-
must be successfully flow capacity cer- ing/unloading outlet must be in accord-
tification tested prior to first use. De- ance with the following provisions:
vices having one design, size and set (1) Each loading/unloading outlet
pressure are considered to be one
must be fitted with a self-closing sys-
model. The testing requirements are as
tem capable of closing all such outlets
follows:
in an emergency within 30 seconds of
(1) At least 3 devices of each specific
actuation. During normal operations
model must be tested for flow capacity
the outlets may be closed manually.
at a pressure not greater than the test
pressure of the cargo tank. For a de- The self-closing system must be de-
vice model to be certified, the capac- signed according to the following:
ities of the devices tested must fall (i) Each self-closing system must in-
within a range of plus or minus 5 per- clude a remotely actuated means of
cent of the average for the devices test- closure located more than 10 feet from
ed. the loading/unloading outlet where ve-
(2) The rated flow capacity of a de- hicle length allows, or on the end of
vice model may not be greater than 90 the cargo tank farthest away from the
172
loading/unloading outlet. The actu- liquid level. Gauge glasses are not per-
ating mechanism must be corrosion-re- mitted.
sistant and effective in all types of en- [Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37062, Sept. 7, 1990, as
vironment and weather. amended by Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51342, Oct.
(ii) If the actuating system is acci- 1, 1996]
dentally damaged or sheared off during
transportation, each loading/unloading § 178.345–13 Pressure and leakage
outlet must remain securely closed and tests.
capable of retaining lading. (a) Each cargo tank must be pressure
(iii) When required by part 173 of this and leakage tested in accordance with
subchapter for materials which are this section and §§ 178.346–5, 178.347–5, or
flammable, pyrophoric, oxidizing, or 178.348–5.
Division 6.1 (poisonous liquid) mate- (b) Pressure test. Each cargo tank or
rials, the remote means of closure cargo tank compartment must be test-
must be capable of thermal activation. ed hydrostatically or pneumatically.
The means by which the self-closing Each cargo tank of a multi-cargo tank
motor vehicle must be tested with the
system is thermally activated must be
adjacent cargo tanks empty and at at-
located as close as practicable to the
mospheric pressure. Each closure, ex-
primary loading/unloading connection
cept pressure relief devices and load-
and must actuate the system at a tem-
ing/unloading venting devices rated at
perature not over 250 °F. In addition,
less than the prescribed test pressure,
outlets on these cargo tanks must be
must be in place during the test. If the
capable of being remotely closed manu- venting device is not removed during
ally or mechanically. the test, such device must be rendered
(2) Bottom loading outlets which dis- inoperative by a clamp, plug or other
charge lading into the cargo tank equally effective restraining device,
through fixed internal piping above the which may not prevent the detection of
maximum liquid level of the cargo leaks, or damage the device. Restrain-
tank need not be equipped with a self- ing devices must be removed imme-
closing system. diately after the test is completed.
(c) Any loading/unloading outlet ex- (1) Hydrostatic method. Each cargo
tending beyond an internal self-closing tank, including its domes, must be
stop-valve, or beyond the innermost ex- filled with water or other liquid having
ternal stop-valve which is part of a similar viscosity, the temperature of
self-closing system, must be fitted with which may not exceed 100 °F. The cargo
another stop-valve or other leak-tight tank must then be pressurized as pre-
closure at the end of such connection. scribed in the applicable specification.
(d) Each cargo tank outlet that is not The pressure must be gauged at the top
a loading/unloading outlet must be of the cargo tank. The prescribed test
equipped with a stop-valve or other pressure must be maintained for at
leak-tight closure located as close as least 10 minutes during which time the
practicable to the cargo tank outlet. cargo tank must be inspected for leak-
Any connection extending beyond this age, bulging, or other defect.
closure must be fitted with another (2) Pneumatic method. A pneumatic
stop-valve or other leak-tight closure test may be used in place of the hydro-
at the end of such connection. static test. However, pneumatic pres-
sure testing may involve higher risk
[Amdt. 178–89, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991, as than hydrostatic testing. Therefore,
amended by Amdt. 178–97, 57 FR 45465, Oct. 1, suitable safeguards must be provided to
1992; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996] protect personnel and facilities should
failure occur during the test. The cargo
tank must be pressurized with air or an
Each cargo tank, except a cargo tank inert gas. Test pressure must be
intended to be filled by weight, must be reached gradually by increasing the
equipped with a gauging device that in- pressure to one half of test pressure.
dicates the maximum permitted liquid Thereafter, the pressure must be in-
level to within 0.5 percent of the nomi- creased in steps of approximately one
nal capacity as measured by volume or tenth of the test pressure until test
173
§ 178.345–14 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
pressure is reached. Test pressure must ing, embossing or other means in char-
be held for at least 5 minutes. The pres- acters at least 3⁄16 inch high. The infor-
sure must then be reduced to the in- mation required by paragraphs (b) and
spection pressure which must be main- (c) of this section may be combined on
tained while the entire cargo tank sur- one specification plate.
face is inspected for leakage and other (b) Nameplate. Each cargo tank must
sign of defects. The inspection method have a corrosion resistant nameplate
must consist of coating all joints and permanently attached to it. The fol-
fittings with a solution of soap and lowing information, in addition to any
water or other equally sensitive meth- applicable information required by the
od. ASME Code, must be marked on the
(c) Leakage test. The cargo tank with tank nameplate (parenthetical abbre-
all its accessories in place and operable viations may be used):
must be leak tested at not less than 80 (1) DOT-specification number DOT
percent of tank’s MAWP with the pres- XXX (DOT XXX) where ‘‘XXX’’ is re-
sure maintained for at least 5 minutes. placed with the applicable specification
(d) Any cargo tank that leaks, bulges number. For cargo tanks having a vari-
or shows any other sign of defect must able specification plate, the DOT-speci-
be rejected. Rejected cargo tanks must fication number is replaced with the
be suitably repaired and retested suc- words ‘‘See variable specification
cessfully prior to being returned to plate.’’
service. The retest after any repair (2) Original test date, month and
must use the same method of test year (Orig. Test Date).
under which the cargo tank was origi- (3) Tank MAWP in psig.
nally rejected. (4) Cargo tank test pressure (Test P),
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25026, June 12, 1989, as in psig.
amended at 55 FR 37063, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. (5) Cargo tank design temperature
178–105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178– range (Design temp. range),l °F to l
118, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996; 65 FR 58631, °F.
Sept. 29, 2000; 68 FR 19284, Apr. 18, 2003] (6) Nominal capacity (Water cap.), in
gallons.
§ 178.345–14 Marking.
(7) Maximum design density of lading
(a) General. The manufacturer shall (Max. lading density), in pounds per
certify that each cargo tank motor ve- gallon.
hicle has been designed, constructed (8) Material specification number—
and tested in accordance with the ap- shell (Shell matl, yyy***), where ‘‘yyy’’
plicable Specification DOT 406, DOT 407 is replaced by the alloy designation
or DOT 412 (§§ 178.345, 178.346, 178.347, and ‘‘***’’ by the alloy type.
178.348) cargo tank requirements and, (9) Material specification number—
when applicable, with Section VIII of heads (Head matl, yyy***), where
the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this ‘‘yyy’’ is replaced by the alloy designa-
subchapter). The certification shall be tion and ‘‘***’’ by the alloy type.
accomplished by marking the cargo
tank as prescribed in paragraphs (b) NOTE: When the shell and heads materials
are the same thickness, they may be com-
and (c) of this section, and by pre-
bined, (Shell&head matl, yyy***).
paring the certificate prescribed in
§ 178.345–15. Metal plates prescribed by (10) Weld material (Weld matl.).
paragraphs (b), (c), (d) and (e) of this (11) Minimum thickness—shell (Min.
section, must be permanently attached shell-thick), in inches. When minimum
to the cargo tank or its integral sup- shell thicknesses are not the same for
porting structure, by brazing, welding different areas, show (top l, side l,
or other suitable means. These plates bottom l, in inches).
must be affixed on the left side of the (12) Minimum thickness—heads (Min.
vehicle near the front of the cargo tank heads thick.), in inches.
(or the frontmost cargo tank of a (13) Manufactured thickness—shell
multi-cargo tank motor vehicle), in a (Mfd. shell thick.), top l, side l, bot-
place readily accessible for inspection. tom l, in inches. (Required when addi-
The plates must be permanently and tional thickness is provided for corro-
plainly marked in English by stamp- sion allowance.)
174
(14) Manufactured thickness—heads (e) Variable specification cargo tank.

(Mfd. heads thick.), in inches. (Re- Each variable specification cargo tank
quired when additional thickness is must have a corrosion resistant metal
provided for corrosion allowance.) variable specification plate attached to
(15) Exposed surface area, in square it. The mounting of this variable speci-
feet. fication plate must be such that only
(c) Specification plate. Each cargo the plate identifying the applicable
tank motor vehicle must have an addi- specification under which the tank is
tional corrosion resistant metal speci- being operated is legible.
fication plate attached to it. The speci- (1) The following information must
fication plate must contain the fol- be included (parenthetical abbrevia-
lowing information (parenthetical ab- tions are authorized):
breviations may be used):
Specification DOT XXX (DOT XXX), where
(1) Cargo tank motor vehicle manu-
‘‘XXX’’ is replaced with the applicable speci-
facturer (CTMV mfr.). fication number.
(2) Cargo tank motor vehicle certifi-
cation date (CTMV cert. date), if dif- Required
Equipment required
ferent from the cargo tank certifi- rating 1
cation date.
(3) Cargo tank manufacturer (CT Pressure relief devices:
mfr.). Pressure actuated llllll
type.
(4) Cargo tank date of manufacture
Frangible type ........... llllll
(CT date of mfr.), month and year.
Lading discharge de- llllll
(5) Maximum weight of lading (Max. vices.
Payload), in pounds. Top ............................. llllll
(6) Maximum loading rate in gallons Bottom ....................... llllll
per minute (Max. Load rate, GPM). Pressure unloading llllll
(7) Maximum unloading rate in gal- fitting.
lons per minute (Max. Unload rate). Closures:
(8) Lining material (Lining), if appli- Manhole ..................... llllll
cable. Fill openings .............. llllll
(9) Heating system design pressure Discharge openings .... llllll
(Heating sys. press.), in psig, if applica- 1 Required rating—to meet the applicable
ble. specification.
(10) Heating system design tempera- (2) If no change of information in the
ture (Heating sys. temp.), in °F, if ap- specification plate is required, the let-
plicable. ters ‘‘NC’’ must follow the rating re-
(d) Multi-cargo tank motor vehicle. For quired. If the cargo tank is not so
a multi-cargo tank motor vehicle hav- equipped, the word ‘‘None’’ must be in-
ing all its cargo tanks not separated by serted.
any void, the information required by (3) Those parts to be changed or
paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section added must be stamped with the appro-
may be combined on one specification priate MC or DOT Specification mark-
plate. When separated by a void, each ings.
cargo tank must have an individual (4) The alterations that must be
nameplate as required in paragraph (b) made in order for the tank to be modi-
of this section, unless all cargo tanks fied from one specification to another
are made by the same manufacturer must be clearly indicated on the manu-
with the same materials, manufactured facturer’s certificate and on the vari-
thickness, minimum thickness and to able specification plate.
the same specification. The cargo tank
motor vehicle may have a combined [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25027, June 12, 1989, as
nameplate and specification plate. amended at 55 FR 37063, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt.
When only one plate is used, the plate 178–99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 178–104,
59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 178–105, 59
must be visible and not covered by in-
FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994; 60 FR 17402, Apr. 5,

sulation. The required information 1995; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996;
must be listed on the plate from front 66 FR 45389, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 19284, Apr. 18,
to rear in the order of the cor- 2003; 68 FR 52371, Sept. 3, 2003; 68 FR 75756,
responding cargo tank location. Dec. 31, 2003]
175
§ 178.345–15 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
§ 178.345–15 Certification. manufacturer, at or before the time of

(a) At or before the time of delivery, delivery, a certificate covering the par-
the manufacturer of a cargo tank ticular operation performed by that
motor vehicle must provide certifi- manufacturer, including any certifi-
cation documents to the owner of the cates received from previous manufac-
cargo tank motor vehicle. The registra- turers, Registered Inspectors, and De-
tion numbers of the manufacturer, the sign Certifying Engineers. Each certifi-
Design Certifying Engineer, and the cate must indicate the portion of the
Registered Inspector, as appropriate, complete cargo tank motor vehicle rep-
must appear on the certificates (see resented thereby, such as basic cargo
subpart F, part 107 in subchapter A of tank fabrication, insulation, jacket,
this chapter). lining, or piping. The final manufac-
(b) The manufacturer of a cargo tank turer shall provide all applicable cer-
motor vehicle made to any of these tificates to the owner.
specifications must provide: (e) Specification shortages. If a cargo
(1) For each design type, a certificate
tank is manufactured which does not
signed by a responsible official of the
meet all applicable specification re-
manufacturer and a Design Certifying
Engineer certifying that the cargo quirements, thereby requiring subse-
tank motor vehicle design meets the quent manufacturing involving the in-
applicable specification; and stallation of additional components,
(2) For each ASME cargo tank, a parts, appurtenances or accessories,
cargo tank manufacturer’s data report the cargo tank manufacturer may affix
as required by Section VIII of the the name plate and specification plate,
ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- as required by § 178.345–14 (b) and (c),
chapter). For each cargo tank motor without the original date of certifi-
vehicle, a certificate signed by a re- cation stamped on the specification
sponsible official of the manufacturer plate. The manufacturer shall state the
and a Registered Inspector certifying specification requirements not com-
that the cargo tank motor vehicle is plied with on the manufacturer’s Cer-
constructed, tested and completed in tificate of Compliance. When the cargo
conformance with the applicable speci- tank is brought into full compliance
fication. with the applicable specification, the
(c) The manufacturer of a variable Registered Inspector shall stamp the
specification cargo tank motor vehicle date of compliance on the specification
must provide: plate. The Registered Inspector shall
(1) For each design type, a certificate issue a Certificate of Compliance stat-
signed by a responsible official of the ing details of the particular operations
manufacturer and a Design Certifying performed on the cargo tank, and the
Engineer certifying that the cargo date and person (manufacturer, carrier,
tank motor vehicle design meets the
or repair organization) accomplishing
applicable specifications; and
the compliance.
(2) For each variable specification
cargo tank motor vehicle, a certificate [Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37063, Sept. 7, 1990, as
signed by a responsible official of the amended by Amdt. 178–98, 58 FR 33306, June
manufacturer and a Registered Inspec- 16, 1993; Amdt. 178–105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3,
tor certifying that the cargo tank 1994; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996;
motor vehicle is constructed, tested 68 FR 75756, Dec. 31, 2003]
and completed in conformance with the
applicable specifications. The certifi- § 178.346 Specification DOT 406; cargo
tank motor vehicle.
cate must include all the information
required and marked on the variable § 178.346–1 General requirements.
specification plate.
(d) In the case of a cargo tank motor (a) Each Specification DOT 406 cargo
vehicle manufactured in two or more tank motor vehicle must meet the gen-
stages, each manufacturer who per- eral design and construction require-
forms a manufacturing operation on ments in § 178.345, in addition to the
the incomplete vehicle or portion specific requirements contained in this
thereof shall provide to the succeeding section.
176
(b) MAWP: The MAWP of each cargo cated farther from the top and bottom
tank must be no lower than 2.65 psig centerline than 16 percent of the shell’s
and no higher than 4 psig. circumference.
(c) Vacuum loaded cargo tanks must (ii) For a self-supporting cargo tank,
not be constructed to this specifica- no more than two such joints may be
tion. used on the top of the tank. They may
(d) Each cargo tank must be ‘‘con- not be located farther from the top
structed in accordance with Section centerline than 12.5 percent of the
VIII of the ASME Code’’ (IBR, see shell’s circumference.
§ 171.7 of this subchapter) except as (iii) Compliance test. Two test speci-
modified herein: mens of the material to be used in the
(1) The record-keeping requirements manufacture of a cargo tank must be
contained in the ASME Code Section tested to failure in tension. The test
VIII do not apply. Parts UG–90 through specimens must be of the same
94 in Section VIII do not apply. Inspec- thicknesses and joint configuration as
tion and certification must be made by the cargo tank, and joined by the same
an inspector registered in accordance welding procedures. The test specimens
with subpart F of part 107. may represent all the tanks that are
(2) Loadings must be as prescribed in made of the same materials and weld-
§ 178.345–3. ing procedures, have the same joint
(3) The knuckle radius of flanged configuration, and are made in the
heads must be at least three times the same facility within 6 months after the
material thickness, and in no case less tests are completed. Before welding,
than 0.5 inch. Stuffed (inserted) heads the fit-up of the joints on the test
may be attached to the shell by a fillet specimens must represent production
weld. The knuckle radius and dish ra- conditions that would result in the
dius versus diameter limitations of least joint strength. Evidence of joint
UG–32 do not apply. Shell sections of
fit-up and test results must be retained
cargo tanks designed with a non-cir-
at the manufacturers’ facility.
cular cross section need not be given a
(iv) Weld joint efficiency. The lower
preliminary curvature, as prescribed in
UG–79(b). value of stress at failure attained in
(4) Marking, certification, data re- the two tensile test specimens shall be
ports, and nameplates must be as pre- used to compute the efficiency of the
scribed in §§ 178.345–14 and 178.345–15. joint as follows: Determine the failure
(5) Manhole closure assemblies must ratio by dividing the stress at failure
conform to §§ 178.345–5 and 178.346–5. by the mechanical properties of the ad-
(6) Pressure relief devices must be as jacent metal; this value, when multi-
prescribed in § 178.346–3. plied by 0.75, is the design weld joint ef-
(7) The hydrostatic or pneumatic test ficiency.
must be as prescribed in § 178.346–5. (10) The requirements of paragraph
(8) The following paragraphs in parts UW–9(d) in Section VIII of the ASME
UG and UW in Section VIII of the Code do not apply.
ASME Code do not apply: UG–11, UG– [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25028, June 12, 1989, as
12, UG–22(g), UG–32(e), UG–34, UG–35, amended at 55 FR 37063, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt.
UG–44, UG–76, UG–77, UG–80, UG–81, 178–89, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991; Amdt. 178–
UG–96, UG–97, UW–13(b)(2), UW–13.1(f) 105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994; 65 FR 58631,
and the dimensional requirements Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR
found in Figure UW–13.1. 19285, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 75756, Dec. 31, 2003]
(9) Single full fillet lap joints with-
out plug welds may be used for arc or § 178.346–2 Material and thickness of
gas welded longitudinal seams without material.
radiographic examination under the The type and thickness of material
following conditions: for DOT 406 specification cargo tanks
(i) For a truck-mounted cargo tank, must conform to § 178.345–2, but in no
no more than two such joints may be case may the thickness be less than
used on the top half of the tank and no that determined by the minimum
more than two joints may be used on thickness requirements in § 178.320(a).
the bottom half. They may not be lo- The following Tables I and II identify
177
§ 178.346–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
the specified minimum thickness val-

ues to be employed in that determina-
tion.
TABLE I—SPECIFIED MINIMUM THICKNESS OF HEADS (OR BULKHEADS AND BAFFLES WHEN USED AS
TANK REINFORCEMENT) USING MILD STEEL (MS), HIGH STRENGTH LOW ALLOY STEEL (HSLA),
AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL (SS), OR ALUMINUM (AL)—EXPRESSED IN DECIMALS OF AN INCH
AFTER FORMING
Volume capacity in gallons per inch of length
14 or less Over 14 to 23 Over 23

Material
HSLA HSLA HSLA
MS AL MS AL MS AL
SS SS SS
Thickness .............................................. .100 .100 .160 .115 .115 .173 .129 .129 .187
TABLE II—SPECIFIED MINIMUM THICKNESS OF SHELL USING MILD STEEL (MS), HIGH STRENGTH LOW
ALLOY STEEL (HSLA), AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL (SS), OR ALUMINUM (AL)—EXPRESSED IN
DECIMALS OF AN INCH AFTER FORMING 1
Cargo tank motor vehicle rated capacity (gallons) MS SS/HSLA AL
More than 0 to at least 4,500 ........................................................................................................ 0.100 0.100 0.151

More than 4,500 to at least 8,000 ................................................................................................. 0.115 0.100 0.160
More than 8,000 to at least 14,000 ............................................................................................... 0.129 0.129 0.173
More than 14,000 .......................................................................................................................... 0.143 0.143 0.187
1 Maximum distance between bulkheads, baffles, or ring stiffeners shall not exceed 60 inches.
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25028, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178–
105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994; 68 FR 19285, Apr. 18, 2003]
§ 178.346–3 Pressure relief. tion. This requirement must be met re-

(a) Each cargo tank must be equipped gardless of vehicle orientation. This
with a pressure relief system in accord- capability must be demonstrated by
ance with § 178.345–10 and this section. testing. TTMA RP No. 81 (IBR, see
(b) Type and construction. In addition § 171.7 of this subchapter), cited at
to the pressure relief devices required § 178.345–10(b)(3)(i), is an acceptable test
in § 178.345–10: procedure.
(1) Each cargo tank must be equipped (c) Pressure settings of relief valves. (1)
with one or more vacuum relief de- Notwithstanding the requirements in
vices; § 178.345–10(d), the set pressure of each
(2) When intended for use only for primary relief valve must be not less
lading meeting the requirements of than 110 percent of the MAWP or 3.3
§ 173.33(c)(1)(iii) of this subchapter, the psig, whichever is greater, and not
cargo tank may be equipped with a more than 138 percent of the MAWP.
normal vent. Such vents must be set to The valve must close at not less than
open at not less than 1 psig and must the MAWP and remain closed at lower
be designed to prevent loss of lading pressures.
through the device in case of vehicle (2) Each vacuum relief device must
upset; and be set to open at no more than 6 ounces
(3) Notwithstanding the requirements vacuum.
in § 178.345–10(b), after August 31, 1996,
(d) Venting capacities. (1) Notwith-
each pressure relief valve must be able
standing the requirements in § 178.345–
to withstand a dynamic pressure surge
10 (e) and (g), the primary pressure re-
reaching 30 psig above the design set
pressure and sustained above the set lief valve must have a venting capacity
pressure for at least 60 milliseconds of at least 6,000 SCFH, rated at not

with a total volume of liquid released greater than 125 percent of the tank
not exceeding 1 L before the relief test pressure and not greater than 3
valve recloses to a leak-tight condi-
178
psig above the MAWP. The venting ca- mination of Vapor Tightness of Gaso-
pacity required in § 178.345–10(e) may be line Delivery Tank Using Pressure-
rated at these same pressures. Vacuum Test’’) may not be used to sat-
(2) Each vacuum relief system must isfy the leakage test requirements of
have sufficient capacity to limit the this paragraph. A cargo tank tested in
vacuum to 1 psig. accordance with 40 CFR 63.425(e) may
(3) If pressure loading or unloading be marked as specified in § 180.415 of
devices are provided, the relief system this subchapter.
must have adequate vapor and liquid
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25029, June 12, 1989, as
capacity to limit the tank pressure to
amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt.
the cargo tank test pressure at max- 178–105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994. Redesig-
imum loading or unloading rate. The nated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, Apr. 29,
maximum loading and unloading rates 1996; 68 FR 19285, Apr. 18, 2003]
must be included on the metal speci-
fication plate. § 178.347 Specification DOT 407; cargo
tank motor vehicle.
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25029, June 12, 1989, as
amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. § 178.347–1 General requirements.
178–105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994. Redesig-
nated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, Apr. 29, (a) Each specification DOT 407 cargo
1996; 66 FR 45389, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75756, tank motor vehicle must conform to
Dec. 31, 2003] the general design and construction re-
quirements in § 178.345 in addition to
§ 178.346–4 Outlets. the specific requirements contained in
(a) All outlets on each tank must this section.
conform to § 178.345–11 and this section. (b) Each tank must be of a circular
(b) External self-closing stop-valves cross-section and have an MAWP of at
are not authorized as an alternative to least 25 psig.
internal self-closing stop-valves on (c) Any cargo tank motor vehicle
loading/unloading outlets. built to this specification with a
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25029, June 12, 1989. Re- MAWP greater than 35 psig or any
designated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, cargo tank motor vehicle built to this
Apr. 29, 1996] specification designed to be loaded by
vacuum must be constructed and cer-
§ 178.346–5 Pressure and leakage tests. tified in accordance with Section VIII
(a) Each cargo tank must be tested in of the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of
accordance with § 178.345–13 and this this subchapter). The external design
section. pressure for a cargo tank loaded by
(b) Pressure test. Test pressure must vacuum must be at least 15 psi.
be as follows: (d) Any cargo tank motor vehicle
(1) Using the hydrostatic test meth- built to this specification with a
od, the test pressure must be the great- MAWP of 35 psig or less or any cargo
er of 5.0 psig or 1.5 times the cargo tank motor vehicle built to this speci-
tank MAWP. fication designed to withstand full vac-
(2) Using the pneumatic test method, uum but not equipped to be loaded by
the test pressure must be the greater of vacuum must be constructed in accord-
5.0 psig or 1.5 times the cargo tank ance with Section VIII of the ASME
MAWP, and the inspection pressure Code.
must be the cargo tank MAWP. (1) The record-keeping requirements
(c) Leakage test. A cargo tank used to contained in Section VIII of the ASME
transport a petroleum distillate fuel Code do not apply. The inspection re-
that is equipped with vapor recovery quirements of parts UG–90 through 94
equipment may be leakage tested in do not apply. Inspection and certifi-
accordance with 40 CFR 63.425(e). To cation must be made by an inspector
satisfy the leakage test requirements registered in accordance with subpart
of this paragraph, the test specified in F of part 107.
40 CFR 63.425(e)(1) must be conducted (2) Loadings must be as prescribed in

using air. The hydrostatic test alter- § 178.345–3.
native permitted under Appendix A to (3) The knuckle radius of flanged
40 CFR Part 60 (‘‘Method 27—Deter- heads must be at least three times the
179
§ 178.347–2 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
material thickness, and in no case less those to be used in the manufacture of

than 0.5 inch. Stuffed (inserted) heads a cargo tank bulkhead must be tested
may be attached to the shell by a fillet to failure in tension. The test specimen
weld. The knuckle radius and dish ra- must be of the same thickness and
dius versus diameter limitations of joined by the same welding procedure.
UG–32 do not apply for cargo tank The test specimens may represent all
motor vehicles with a MAWP of 35 psig the tanks that are made in the same
or less. facility within 6 months after the tests
(4) Marking, certification, data re- are completed. Before welding, the fit-
ports and nameplates must be as pre-
up of the joints on the test specimens
scribed in §§ 178.345–14 and 178.345–15.
must represent production conditions
(5) Manhole closure assemblies must
conform to § 178.347–3. that would result in the least joint
(6) Pressure relief devices must be as strength. Evidence of joint fit-up and
prescribed in § 178.347–4. test results must be retained at the
(7) The hydrostatic or pneumatic test manufacturer’s facility for at least 5
must be as prescribed in § 178.347–5. years.
(8) The following paragraphs in parts (vi) Acceptance criteria: The ratio of
UG and UW in Section VIII the ASME the actual tensile stress at failure to
Code do not apply: UG–11, UG–12, UG– the actual tensile strength of the adja-
22(g), UG–32(e), UG–34, UG–35, UG–44, cent material of all samples of a test
UG–76, UG–77, UG–80, UG–81, UG–96, lot must be greater than 0.85.
UG–97, UW–12, UW–13(b)(2), UW–13.1(f),
and the dimensional requirements [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25029, June 12, 1989, as
found in Figure UW–13.1. amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt.
178–89, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991; 65 FR 58632,
(9) UW–12 in Section VIII of the
Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR
ASME Code does not apply to a weld
19285, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 75756, Dec. 31, 2003;
seam in a bulkhead that has not been 76 FR 3388, Jan. 19, 2011; 76 FR 43532, July 20,
radiographically examined, under the 2011]
following conditions:
(i) The strength of the weld seam is § 178.347–2 Material and thickness of
assumed to be 0.85 of the strength of material.
the bulkhead.
(ii) The welded seam must be a full (a) The type and thickness of mate-
penetration butt weld. rial for DOT 407 specification cargo
(iii) No more than one seam may be tanks must conform to § 178.345–2, but
used per bulkhead. in no case may the thickness be less
(iv) The welded seam must be com- than that determined by the minimum
pleted before forming the dish radius thickness requirements in § 178.320(a).
and knuckle radius. Tables I and II identify the specified
(v) Compliance test: Two test speci- minimum thickness values to be em-
mens of materials representative of ployed in that the determination:
TABLE I—SPECIFIED MINIMUM THICKNESS OF HEADS (OR BULKHEADS AND BAFFLES WHEN USED AS
TANK REINFORCEMENT) USING MILD STEEL (MS), HIGH STRENGTH LOW ALLOY STEEL (HSLA),
AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL (SS), OR ALUMINUM (AL)—EXPRESSED IN DECIMALS OF AN INCH
AFTER FORMING
10 or Over 10 Over 14 Over 18 Over 22 Over 26
Volume capacity in gallons per inch Over 30
less to 14 to 18 to 22 to 26 to 30
Thickness (MS) ....................................................... 0.100 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.129 0.143 0.156
Thickness (HSLA) ................................................... 0.100 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.129 0.143 0.156
Thickness (SS) ........................................................ 0.100 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.129 0.143 0.156
Thickness (AL) ........................................................ 0.160 0.160 0.173 0.187 0.194 0.216 0.237
180
TABLE II—SPECIFIED MINIMUM THICKNESS OF SHELL USING MILD STEEL (MS), HIGH STRENGTH LOW
ALLOY STEEL (HSLA), AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL (SS), OR ALUMINUM (AL)—EXPRESSED IN
DECIMALS OF AN INCH AFTER FORMING
10 or Over 10 Over 14 Over 18 Over 22 Over 26
Volume capacity in gallons per inch Over 30
less to 14 to 18 to 22 to 26 to 30
Thickness (MS) ....................................................... 0.100 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.129 0.143 0.156
Thickness (HSLA) ................................................... 0.100 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.129 0.143 0.156
Thickness (SS) ........................................................ 0.100 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.129 0.143 0.156
Thickness (AL) ........................................................ 0.151 0.151 0.160 0.173 0.194 0.216 0.237
(b) [Reserved]
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25030, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178–
104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; 68 FR 19285, Apr. 18, 2003]
§ 178.347–3 Manhole assemblies. must be included on the metal speci-

fication plate.
Each manhole assembly must con-
form to § 178.345–5, except that each [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25030, June 12, 1989, as
manhole assembly must be capable of amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990. Redes-
withstanding internal fluid pressures of ignated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, Apr.
29, 1996; 76 FR 43532, July 20, 2011]
40 psig or test pressure of the tank,
whichever is greater. § 178.347–5 Pressure and leakage test.
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25030, June 12, 1989. Re- (a) Each cargo tank must be tested in
designated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, accordance with § 178.345–13 and this
Apr. 29, 1996] section.
(b) Pressure test. Test pressure must
§ 178.347–4 Pressure relief.
be as follows:
(a) Each cargo tank must be equipped (1) Using the hydrostatic test meth-
with a pressure and vacuum relief sys- od, the test pressure must be at least 40
tem in accordance with § 178.345–10 and psig or 1.5 times tank MAWP, which-
this section. ever is greater.
(b) Type and construction. Vacuum re- (2) Using the pneumatic test method,
lief devices are not required for cargo the test pressure must be 40 psig or 1.5
tank motor vehicles that are designed times tank MAWP, whichever is great-
to be loaded by vacuum in accordance er, and the inspection pressure is tank
with § 178.347–1(c) or built to withstand MAWP.
full vacuum in accordance with [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25030, June 12, 1989. Re-
§ 178.347–1(d). designated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934,
(c) Pressure settings of relief valves. Apr. 29, 1996]
The setting of pressure relief valves
must be in accordance with § 178.345– § 178.348 Specification DOT 412; cargo
tank motor vehicle.
10(d).
(d) Venting capacities. (1) The vacuum § 178.348–1 General requirements.
relief system must limit the vacuum to
(a) Each specification DOT 412 cargo
less than 80 percent of the design vacu-
tank motor vehicle must conform to
um capability of the cargo tank.
the general design and construction re-
(2) If pressure loading or unloading quirements in § 178.345 in addition to
devices are provided, the relief system the specific requirements of this sec-
must have adequate vapor and liquid tion.
capacity to limit the tank pressure to (b) The MAWP of each cargo tank
the cargo tank test pressure at max- must be at least 5 psig.
imum loading or unloading rate. The (c) The MAWP for each cargo tank
maximum loading or unloading rate designed to be loaded by vacuum must
181
§ 178.348–2 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
be at least 25 psig internal and 15 psig tion need not be given a preliminary
external. curvature, as prescribed in UG–79(b).
(d) Each cargo tank having a MAWP (iv) Marking, certification, data re-
greater than 15 psig must be of circular ports, and nameplates must be as pre-
cross-section. scribed in §§ 178.345–14 and 178.345–15.
(e) Each cargo tank having a— (v) Manhole closure assemblies must
(1) MAWP greater than 15 psig must conform to §§ 178.345–5.
be ‘‘constructed and certified in con- (vi) Pressure relief devices must be as
formance with Section VIII of the prescribed in § 178.348–4.
ASME Code’’ (IBR, see § 171.7 of this (vii) The hydrostatic or pneumatic
subchapter); or test must be as prescribed in § 178.348–5.
(2) MAWP of 15 psig or less must be (viii) The following paragraphs in
parts UG and UW in Section VIII of the
‘‘constructed in accordance with Sec-
ASME Code do not apply: UG–11, UG–
tion VIII of the ASME Code,’’ except as
12, UG–22(g), UG–32(e), UG–34, UG–35,
modified herein:
UG–44, UG–76, UG–77, UG–80, UG–81,
(i) The recordkeeping requirements UG–96, UG–97, UW–13(b)(2), UW–13.1(f),
contained in Section VIII of the ASME and the dimensional requirements
Code do not apply. Parts UG–90 found in Figure UW–13.1.
through 94 in Section VIII do not
apply. Inspection and certification [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25031, June 12, 1989, as
must be made by an inspector reg- amended at 55 FR 37065, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt.
178–89, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991; 65 FR 58632,
istered in accordance with subpart F of Sept. 29, 2000; 68 FR 19285, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 fR
part 107. 75756, Dec. 31, 2003]
(ii) Loadings must be as prescribed in
§ 178.345–3. § 178.348–2 Material and thickness of
(iii) The knuckle radius of flanged material.
heads must be at least three times the (a) The type and thickness of mate-
material thickness, and in no case less rial for DOT 412 specification cargo
than 0.5 inch. Stuffed (inserted) heads tanks must conform to § 178.345–2, but
may be attached to the shell by a fillet in no case may the thickness be less
weld. The knuckle radius and dish ra- than that determined by the minimum
dius versus diameter limitations of thickness requirements in § 178.320(a).
UG–32 do not apply for cargo tank The following Tables I and II identify
motor vehicles with a MAWP of 15 psig the ‘‘Specified Minimum Thickness’’
or less. Shell sections of cargo tanks values to be employed in that deter-
designed with a non-circular cross sec- mination.
182
VerDate Mar<15>2010
TABLE I—SPECIFIED MINIMUM THICKNESS OF HEADS (OR BULKHEADS AND BAFFLES WHEN USED AS TANK REINFORCEMENT) USING MILD STEEL
(MS), HIGH STRENGTH LOW ALLOY STEEL (HSLA), AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL (SS), OR ALUMINUM (AL)—EXPRESSED IN DECIMALS OF AN
14:56 Jan 03, 2012

INCH AFTER FORMING
Volume capacity (gallons per inch) 10 or less Over 10 to 14 Over 14 to 18 18 and over
Jkt 223216
Lading density at 60 °F in pounds per gallon ..................................... 10 lbs Over Over Over 10 lbs Over Over Over 10 lbs Over Over 10 lbs Over Over
and 10 to 13 to 16 lbs and 10 to 13 to 16 lbs and 10 to 13 to and 10 to 13 to
less 13 lbs 16 lbs less 13 lbs 16 lbs less 13 lbs 16 lbs less 13 lbs 16 lbs
Thickness (inch), steel ......................................................................... .100 .129 .157 .187 .129 .157 .187 .250 .157 .250 .250 .157 .250 .312
Thickness (inch), aluminum ................................................................. .144 .187 .227 .270 .187 .227 .270 .360 .227 .360 .360 .227 .360 .450
PO 00000
TABLE II—SPECIFIED MINIMUM THICKNESS OF SHELL USING MILD STEEL (MS), HIGH STRENGTH LOW ALLOY STEEL (HSLA), AUSTENITIC STAINLESS
STEEL (SS), OR ALUMINUM (AL)—EXPRESSED IN DECIMALS OF AN INCH AFTER FORMING
Frm 00195
Volume capacity in gallons per inch 10 or less Over 10 to 14 Over 14 to 18 18 and over
Lading density at 60 °F in pounds per gallon ..................................... 10 lbs Over Over Over 10 lbs Over Over Over 10 lbs Over Over 10 lbs Over Over
Fmt 8010
and 10 to 13 to 16 lbs and 10 to 13 to 16 lbs and 10 to 13 to and 10 to 13 to
less 13 lbs 16 lbs less 13 lbs 16 lbs less 13 lbs 16 lbs less 13 lbs 16 lbs
183
Thickness (steel):
Distances between heads (and bulkheads baffles and ring
stiffeners when used as tank reinforcement):
Sfmt 8010
36 in. or less ............................................................ .100 .129 .157 .187 .100 .129 .157 .187 .100 .129 .157 .129 .157 .187
Over 36 in. to 54 inches .......................................... .100 .129 .157 .187 .100 .129 .157 .187 .129 .157 .187 .157 .250 .250
Over 54 in. to 60 inches .......................................... .100 .129 .157 .187 .129 .157 .187 .250 .157 .250 .250 .187 .250 .312
Thickness (aluminum):
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT
Distances between heads (and bulkheads baffles and ring

stiffeners when used as tank reinforcement):
36 in. or less ............................................................ .144 .187 .227 .270 .144 .187 .227 .270 .144 .187 .227 .187 .227 .270
Over 36 in. to 54 inches .......................................... .144 .187 .227 .270 .144 .187 .227 .270 .187 .227 .270 .157 .360 .360
Over 54 in. to 60 inches .......................................... .144 .187 .227 .270 .187 .227 .270 .360 .227 .360 .360 .270 .360 .450
Y:\SGML\223216.XXX
223216
§ 178.348–2
§ 178.348–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(b) [Reserved]
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25031, June 12, 1989; 54 FR 28750, July 7, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37065,
Sept. 7, 1990; 68 FR 19285, Apr. 18, 2003]
§ 178.348–3 Pumps, piping, hoses and Formula in Nonmetric Units

connections.
Q = 37,980,000 A0.82 (ZT)0.5 / (LC)(M0.5)
Each pump and all piping, hoses and
Where:
connections on each cargo tank motor
vehicle must conform to § 178.345–9, ex- Q = The total required venting capacity, in
cubic meters of air per hour at standard
cept that the use of nonmetallic pipes, conditions of 15.6 °C and 1 atm (cubic feet
valves, or connections are authorized of air per hour at standard conditions of 60
on DOT 412 cargo tanks. °F and 14.7 psia);
T = The absolute temperature of the vapor at
[Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37065, Sept. 7, 1990. Re- the venting conditions—degrees Kelvin (
designated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, °C+273) [degrees Rankine ( °F+460)];
Apr. 29, 1996] A = The exposed surface area of tank shell—
square meters (square feet);
§ 178.348–4 Pressure relief. L = The latent heat of vaporization of the
(a) Each cargo tank must be equipped lading—calories per gram (BTU/lb);
with a pressure and vacuum relief sys- Z = The compressibility factor for the vapor
(if this factor is unknown, let Z equal 1.0);
tem in accordance with § 178.345–10 and M = The molecular weight of vapor;
this section. C = A constant derived from (K), the ratio of
(b) Type and construction. Vacuum re- specific heats of the vapor. If (K) is un-
lief devices are not required for cargo known, let C = 315.
tanks designed to be loaded by vacuum C = 520[K(2/(K+1))[(K∂1)/(K¥1)]]0.5
or built to withstand full vacuum. Where:
(c) Pressure settings of relief valves. K = Cp / Cv
The setting of the pressure relief de- Cp = The specific heat at constant pressure,
vices must be in accordance with in -calories per gram degree centigrade
§ 178.345–10(d), except as provided in (BTU/lb °F.); and
paragraph (d)(3) of this section. Cv = The specific heat at constant volume, in
-calories per gram degree centigrade (BTU/
(d) Venting capacities. (1) The vacuum lb °F.).
relief system must limit the vacuum to
less than 80 percent of the design vacu- [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as
amended at 55 FR 37065, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt.
um capability of the cargo tank.
178–104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994. Redesig-
(2) If pressure loading or unloading nated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, Apr. 29,
devices are provided, the pressure relief 1996; 72 FR 55696, Oct. 1, 2007; 72 FR 59146,
system must have adequate vapor and Oct. 18, 2007]
liquid capacity to limit tank pressure
to the cargo tank test pressure at the § 178.348–5 Pressure and leakage test.
maximum loading or unloading rate. (a) Each cargo tank must be tested in
The maximum loading and unloading accordance with § 178.345–13 and this
rates must be included on the metal section.
specification plate. (b) Pressure test. Test pressure must
(3) Cargo tanks used in dedicated be as follows:
service for materials classed as corro- (1) Using the hydrostatic test meth-
sive material, with no secondary haz- od, the test pressure must be at least
ard, may have a total venting capacity 1.5 times MAWP.
which is less than required by § 178.345– (2) Using the pneumatic test method,
10(e). The minimum total venting ca- the test pressure must be at least 1.5
pacity for these cargo tanks must be times tank MAWP, and the inspection
determined in accordance with the fol- pressure is tank MAWP.

lowing formula (use of approximate [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989. Re-
values given for the formula is accept- designated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934,
able): Apr. 29, 1996]
184
Subpart K—Specifications for 5 cm (2 inches) and gaps between mat-

Packagings for Class 7 (Ra- ing surfaces must not exceed 5 mm (0.2
dioactive) Materials inch). Gaps between foam surface of
top section and liner lid must not ex-
§ 178.350 Specification 7A; general ceed 1 cm (0.4 inch) or 5 cm (2 inches)
packaging, Type A. where taper is required for mold strip-
(a) Each packaging must meet all ap- ping. For the specification 20PF–1, the
plicable requirements of subpart B of top section may consist of a plug of
part 173 of this subchapter and be de- foam insulation and a steel cover. The
signed and constructed so that it meets liner and shell closures must each be
the requirements of §§ 173.403, 173.410, gasketed against moisture penetration.
173.412, 173.415 and 173.465 of this sub- The liner must have a bolted flange
chapter for Type A packaging. closure. Shell closure must conform to
(b) Each Specification 7A packaging paragraph (d) of this section.
must be marked on the outside ‘‘USA (d) Drums over 5 gallons capacity
DOT 7A Type A.’’ must be closed by means of 12-gauge
(c) Each Specification 7A packaging bolted ring with drop forged lugs, one
must comply with the marking re- of which is threaded, and having 3/8
quirements of § 178.3. In paragraph inch bolt and nut for drums not over 30
178.3(a)(2), the term ‘‘packaging manu- gallons capacity and 5/8 inch bolt and
facturer’’ means the person certifying nut for drums over 30 gallons capacity.
that the package meets all require- Five gallon drums must be of lug type
ments of this section. closure with cover having at least 16
lugs.
[Amdt. 178–109, 60 FR 50336, Sept. 28, 1995; 60 (e) Drawings in DOE CAPE–1662, Rev.
FR 54409, Oct. 23, 1995, as amended at 69 FR
3696, Jan. 26, 2004; 70 FR 56099, Sept. 23, 2005]
1 and Supplement 1 (IBR, see § 171.7 of
this subchapter), which include bills of
§ 178.356 Specification 20PF phenolic- material, are a part of this specifica-
foam insulated, metal overpack. tion.
§ 178.356–1 General requirements. [Amdt. 178–35, 39 FR 45247, Dec. 31, 1974. Re-
designated by Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52716, Dec.
(a) Each overpack must meet all of 21, 1990; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR
the applicable requirements of § 173.24 45386, 45389, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75757, Dec. 31,
of this subchapter. 2003]
(b) The maximum gross weight of the
package, including the inner cylinder § 178.356–2 Materials of construction
and its contents, must not exceed the and other requirements.
following: (a) Phenolic foam insulation must be
(1) Specification 20PF–1—138 kg (300 fire-resistant and fabricated in accord-
pounds). ance with USDOE Material and Equip-
(2) Specification 20PF–2—320 kg (700 ment Specification SP–9, Rev. 1 and
pounds). Supplement (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
(3) Specification 20PF–3—455 kg (1000 chapter), which is a part of this speci-
pounds). fication. (Note: Packagings manufac-
(c) The general configuration of the tured under USAEC Specification SP–9
overpack must be a right cylinder, con- and Rev. 1 thereto are authorized for
sisting of an insulated base section, a continued manufacture and use.) A 13.7
steel liner lid, and an insulated top sec- cm (5.4-inch) minimum thickness of
tion. The inner liner and outer shell foam must be provided over the entire
must be at least 16-gauge and 18-gauge liner except:
steel, respectively, with the inter- (1) Where wood spacers replace the
vening cavity filled with a molded-in- foam; or
place, fire-resistant, phenolic-foam in- (2) At protrusions of liner or shell,
sulation interspersed with wooden such as flanges, baffles, etc., where
members for bracing and support Wood minimum insulation thickness is 9 cm
pieces must be securely attached to (3.5 inches); or

both the liner and shell. No hole is per- (3) Where alternate top section (spec-
mitted in the liner. Each joint between ification 20PF–1) is used. Foam must
sections must be stepped a minimum of not interfere with proper seating of
185
§ 178.356–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
screws in inner liner flange assembly. including any vent hole, must be sealed
Average density of insulation must be with waterproofing material as pre-
0.13 g/cc (8 pounds per cubic foot (pcf)) scribed in USDOE Material and Equip-
minimum for bottom section and 0.16 g/ ment Specification SP–9, Rev. 1 and
cc (10 pcf) minimum for top section, ex- Supplement, or equivalent.
cept 0.1 g/cc (6.5 pcf) for the specifica-
[Amdt. 178–35, 39 FR 45247, Dec. 31, 1974, as
tion 20PF–1 top section.
amended by Amdt. 178–56, 44 FR 49458, Aug.
(b) Gaskets must be as follows: 23, 1979. Redesignated by Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR
(1) Inner liner flange—Neoprene rub- 52716, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001;
ber of 30 to 60 type A durometer hard- 68 FR 75757, Dec. 31, 2003]
ness or other equivalent gasket mate-
rial which is compatible with the spe- § 178.356–3 Tests.
cific contents.
(a) Leakage test—Each inner liner
(2) Outer shell—Synthetic rubber
assembly must be tested for leakage
conforming to MIL-R-6855 (available
prior to installation. Seam welds of the
from the Naval Publications Forms
liner must be covered for a distance of
Center, 5801 Tabor Avenue, Philadel-
at least 15 cm (6 inches) on either side
phia, Pennsylvania 19120) class 2, grade
of the seam with soapsuds, heavy oil,
60.
or equivalent material, and interior air
(3) Support and pressure pads for
pressure applied to at least 776 mm Hg
inner liner top and bottom must be
(15 p.s.i.g.) above atmospheric pressure
sponge rubber or equivalent.
must be held for at least 30 seconds.
(c) Alternate top section (specifica-
Liners failing to pass this test may not
tion 20PF–1 only). Average insulation
be used until repairs are made, and
density must be 0.16 g/cc (10 pcf min-
retests successfully passed.
imum). Thickness of plug must be 11
cm (4.3 inches) minimum, except thick- (b) [Reserved]
ness may be reduced to 10 cm (4 inches) [Amdt. 178–35, 39 FR 45247, Dec. 31, 1974. Re-
to clear bolt heads. A flush mounted designated by Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52716, Dec.
top lifting device must be securely fas- 21, 1990; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61016,
tened to a wood block encapsulated by Sept. 27, 2002]
the foam.
(d) Vent holes 5 mm (0.2-inch) diame- § 178.356–4 Required markings.
ter must be drilled in the outer shell to (a) Marking must be as prescribed in
provide pressure relief during the insu- § 178.3.
lation foaming and in the event of a (b) Marking on the outside of each
fire. These holes, which must be drilled overpack must be as follows:
in all areas of the shell that mate with (1) ‘‘USA-DOT-20PF-1’’ or ‘‘–2,’’ as ap-
the foam insulation, must be spaced in propriate, and if the entire liner is
accordance with DOE CAPE–1662, Rev. made of stainless steel, additional
1 and Supplement 1 (IBR, see § 171.7 of marking such as ‘‘3041–SS’’ to indicate
this subchapter). the type of stainless steel used.
(e) Welding must be by a fusion weld-
(2) ‘‘TARE WT: xxx lbs.’’ where xxx is
ing process in accordance with Amer-
the tare weight of the assembled over-
ican Welding Society Codes B–3.0 and
pack without the inner container.
D–1.0 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
chapter). Body seams and joints for the (3) Year of manufacture.
liner or shell must be continuous [Amdt. 178–35, 39 FR 45247, Dec. 31, 1974. Re-
welds. designated by Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52716, Dec.
(f) Waterproofing. Each screw hole in 21, 1990, as amended at 63 FR 37462, July 10,
the outer shell must be sealed with ap- 1998]
propriate resin-type sealing material,
or equivalent, during installation of § 178.356–5 Typical assembly detail.
the screw. All exposed foam surfaces, (a) Specifications 20PF–1.
186
(b) Specification 20PF–2.

187
EC02MR91.077</GPH>
§ 178.356–5 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(c) Specification 20PF–3.
188
EC02MR91.078</GPH>
[Amdt. 178–35, 39 FR 45247, Dec. 31, 1974. Redesignated by Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21,
1990]
189
EC02MR91.079</GPH>
§ 178.358 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
§ 178.358 Specification 21PF fire and (d) Specification 21PF–1 overpacks in

shock resistant, phenolic-foam insu- use or under construction before April
lated, metal overpack. 1, 1989, must be modified to Specifica-
tion 21PF–1A before April 1, 1991. All
§ 178.358–1 General requirements. new construction to Specification
(a) Each overpack must meet all of 21PF–1 beginning after March 31, 1989,
the applicable requirements of §§ 173.24, must meet Specification 21PF–1B. Use
173.411, and 173.412 of this subchapter. of unmodified 21PF–1 overpacks after
(1) Specification 21PF–1 overpacks in- March 31, 1991, is prohibited.
cludes the series of 21PF–1, 21PF–1A, [Amdt. 178–35, 39 FR 45250, Dec. 31, 1974; 40 FR
and 21PF–1B models. Details of the 2435, Jan. 13, 1975, as amended by Amdt. 178–
three models are included in DOE 90, 53 FR 36551, Sept. 20, 1988. Redesigntated
CAPE–1662, Rev. 1 and Supplement 1 by Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990; 66
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75757, Dec. 31,
(2) Drawings in CAPE–1662, Rev. 1 and 2003]
Supplement 1, that include bills of ma-
§ 178.358–2 Materials of construction
terials, and KSS–471 (IBR, see § 171.7 of and other requirements.
this subchapter), are a part of this
specification. (a) Phenolic foam insulation must be
(b) Each overpack is authorized for fire resistant and fabricated in accord-
use in applications where the max- ance with USDOE Material and Equip-
imum gross weight of the package, in- ment Specification SP–9, Rev. 1 and
cluding the inner container and con- Supplement (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
tents does not exceed 3725 kg (8200 chapter), which is a part of this speci-
pounds), (horizontally-loaded specifica- fication. (Note: Packagings manufac-
tion 21 PF–1 unit), or 3900 kg (8600 tured under USAEC Specification SP–9,
pounds), (end-loaded specification 21 and Rev. 1 thereto are authorized for
PF–2 unit). continued manufacture and use.) A 14
(c) The general configuration of the cm (5.5-inch) minimum thickness of
overpack must be a right cylinder, con- foam must be provided over the entire
sisting of a steel inner liner (at least liner except where:
16-gauge) and steel outer shell (at least (1) Wood spacers replace the foam
14-gauge) with the intervening cavity material; or
filled with a molded-in-place, fire-re- (2) At protrusions of liner or shell,
sistant, phenolic foam insulation and such as flanges, baffles, etc., where the
interspersed wooden members for brac- minimum thickness of foam, wood, or a
ing and support. Two specific configu- combination of these is 10 cm (4
rations are authorized; a horizontal inches).
loading unit (specification 21PF–1) con- (3) Solid wood or laminated wood sol-
sisting of insulated base and top sec- idly glued may be used to replace the
tions jointed in a longitudinal periph- foam between liner and shell (i.e., in
eral closure joint; or an end-loading ends of overpack). In this case, min-
unit (specification 21PF–2), consisting imum wood thickness is 10 cm (4
of an insulated main section, a steel inches). Average density of insulation
plate liner lid, and an insulated end must be 0.1g/cc (6.75 pounds per cubic
cap. For either type each joint between foot (pcf)) minimum, except that 0.13 g/
sections must be stepped at least 1.8 cc (8 pcf) is required in the removable
cm (0.75-inch) and gaps between mating end cap of the specification 21PF–2,
surfaces may not exceed 5 mm (0.2- which must have a minimum foam
inch). Bolted closures, which must each thickness of 12.7 cm (5 inches).
be gasketed against moisture penetra- (b) Gaskets for inner liner, outer
tion, must be in accordance with shell, or where otherwise specified in
CAPE–1662. Each bolt must be equipped DOE CAPE–1662, Rev. 1 (IBR, see § 171.7
with a locking device to prevent loos- of this subchapter), must be as speci-
ening from vibration. Outer steel brac- fied in DOE CAPE–1662, Rev. 1.
ing and support framework must be at- (c) Support and pressure pads for the
tached to the shell to facilitate normal inner liner must be of neoprene, sponge
handling. rubber, or equivalent.
190
(d) Fire-retardant (intumescent) 1662, Revision 1, Supplement 1, for loca-

paint must be applied to any wood tions.
blocking which is located at any joint (2) Weigh each packaging element
in the shell. (top and bottom halves) separately to
(e) Vent holes 5 mm (0.2-inch) diame- an accuracy of ±2.3 kg (±5 pounds) and
ter must be drilled in the outer shell to record the weights. If this measured
provide pressure relief during the insu- weight exceeds the initially measured
lation foaming and in the event of a weight at the time of fabrication by
fire. These holes, which must be drilled 11.3 kg (25 pounds) (indicating a signifi-
in all areas of the shell which made cant retained water content), the pack-
with the foam insulation, must be aging element must be dried.
spaced in accordance with CAPE–1662.
(3) Place overpack element in drying
(f) Welding must be by a fusion proc-
oven; maintain temperature between
ess in accordance with the American
Welding Society Codes B–3.0 and D–1.0 87.8–98.9 °C (190° and 210 °F) for a min-
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). imum of 72 hours. The oven should
Body seams and joints for the liner and have a provision for air exchange or
shell must be continuous welds. other means of removing moisture
(g) Waterproofing. Each screw hole in driven from the foam structure.
the outer shell must be sealed with ap- (4) Drying may be discontinued after
propriate resin-type sealing material, 72 hours if the weight of the packaging
or equivalent, during installation of element does not exceed the initially
the screw. All exposed foam surfaces, measured tare weight of that element
including any vent hole, must be sealed at the time of fabrication by more than
with either: 11.3 kg (25 pounds). If the weight of the
(1) Waterproofing material as pre- packaging element exceeds the initial
scribed in USDOE Material and Equip- fabricated weight (indicating a signifi-
ment Specification SP–9, Rev. 1 and cant remaining water content) by more
Supplement, or than 11.3 kg (25 pounds), drying must
(2) As specified in CAPE–1662, Revi- be continued until the weight differen-
sion 1. tial is not higher than 11.3 kg (25
[Amdt. 178–35, 39 FR 45250, Dec. 31, 1974, as pounds), or until the rate of weight loss
amended by Amdt. 178–56, 44 FR 49459, Aug. is less than 1.1 kg (2.5 pounds) per day.
23, 1979; Amdt. 178–90, 53 FR 36551, Sept. 20, (5) As an alternate moisture meas-
1988. Redesigntated by Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR urement, a calibrated moisture meter
52716, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001;
reading for 20 percent maximum water
68 FR 75757, Dec. 31, 2003]
content may be used to indicate an end
§ 178.358–3 Modification of Specifica- point in the drying cycle, which is de-
tion 21PF–1 overpacks. tailed in report ‘‘Renovation of DOT
(a) Each Specification 21PF–1 over- Specification 21PF–1 Protective Ship-
pack for which construction began or ping Packages,’’ Report No. K–2057, Re-
was completed before April 1, 1989, in vision 1, November 21, 1986, available
conformance with drawing E-S-31536-J, from the USDOE and part of USDOE
Rev. 1 of DOE CAPE–1662 (IBR, see Report No. KSS–471 (IBR, see § 171.7 of
§ 171.7 of this subchapter), must be this subchapter).
modified in conformance with drawing (6) Following drying, each overpack
S1E–31536–J1–D of DOE CAPE–1662, element (top and bottom halves) must
Rev. 1, Supplement 1, before April 1, be weighed and the weight in both
1991. pounds and kilograms must be en-
(b) Each such existing Specification graved on the identification plate re-
21PF–1 overpack must be dried and quired by § 178.358–5(c).
weighed in accordance with the fol- (c) After modification as provided for
lowing procedures: herein, each Specification 21PF–1 over-
(1) Drill out or otherwise clean the pack must be marked ‘‘USA-DOT-21PF-
plug material from the vent holes
originally provided for foam expansion.
See drawing S1E–31536–J1–D of CAPE–
191
§ 178.358–4 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
1A’’. See the marking requirements of (2) For Specification 21PF–1 and
§ 178.358–5. 21PF–2 only, ‘‘TARE WT: * * * lbs.
[Amdt. 178–90, 53 FR 36551, Sept. 20, 1988. (* * * kg)’’ where * * * is the tare
Redesigntated by Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52716, weight in pounds and kilograms, re-
Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 178–110, 60 FR 49111, Sept. spectively, of the assembled overpack
21, 1995; 63 FR 37462, July 10, 1998; 66 FR 45389, without the inner product container.
Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75757, Dec. 31, 2003] (3) For Specification 21PF–1A and
21PF–1B only: ‘‘TARE WT. of Cover:
§ 178.358–4 Construction of Specifica-
tion 21PF–1B overpacks. * * * lbs (* * * kg) TARE WT. of BOT-
TOM: * * * lbs (* * * kg)’’ where
(a) Each Specification 21PF–1 over- * * * is the tare weight in pounds and
pack for which construction began kilograms, respectively, of the sepa-
after March 31, 1989, must meet the re-
rate halves of the overpack without the
quirements of Specification 21PF–1B,
inner product container. For Specifica-
in conformance with drawings E-S-
tion 21PF–1A overpacks, the previous
31536-J-P, and S1E–31536–J2–B of DOE
CAPE–1662, Rev. 1, Supplement 1 (IBR, tare weight must be changed to reflect
see § 171.7 of this subchapter). the modified tare weight value or must
(b) With the exception of the closure be covered or removed.
nuts and bolts, all metal parts of the (4) Year of manufacture followed by
Specification 21PF–1B must be of stain- the year of modification, if applicable.
less steel as shown on the drawings re- (5) The name or symbol of maker or
ferred to in paragraph (a) of this sec- party certifying compliance with speci-
tion. fication requirements. A symbol, if
used, must be registered with the Asso-
[Amdt. 178–90, 53 FR 36551, Sept. 20, 1988.
Redesigntated by Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52716, ciate Administrator.
Dec. 21, 1990; 68 FR 75757, Dec. 31, 2003] (c) For Specification 21PF–1A and –1B
only, the markings required by this
§ 178.358–5 Required markings. section must be affixed to each over-
(a) Markings must be as prescribed in pack by inscription upon a metal iden-
§ 178.3. tification plate 11 inches wide × 15
(b) Specification marking on the out- inches long (28 cm × 38 cm), fabricated
side of each overpack must be as fol- of 16 to 20 gauge stainless steel sheet,
lows: ‘‘USA-DOT-21PF-1’’, ‘‘1A’’, ‘‘1B’’, ASTM A–240/A 240M (IBR, see § 171.7 of
or ‘‘2’’, as appropriate. this subchapter), Type 304L.
(1) For Specifications 21PF–1 and
[Amdt. 178–90, 53 FR 36552, Sept. 20, 1988.
21PF–2 only, if the inner shell is con-
Redesigntated by Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52716,
structed of stainless steel, additional Dec. 21, 1990, and amended at Amdt. 178–97, 56
marking such as ‘‘304L-SS’’ are to be FR 66287, Dec. 20, 1991; 63 FR 37462, July 10,
marked on the outside of the overpack 1998; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51660,
to indicate the type of stainless steel Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR
used. 54046, Sept. 7, 2004]
§ 178.358–6 Typical assembly detail.

(a) Specification 21PF–1 (horizontal loading overpack).
192
(b) Specification 21PF–1A and 21PF–1B (horizontal loading overpack).

193
EC02MR91.080</GPH>
§ 178.358–6 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(c) Specification 21PF–2 (end loading overpack).

194
EC02MR91.081</GPH>
[Amdt. 178–90, 53 FR 36552, Sept. 20, 1988. Redesignated by Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21,
1990]
195
EC02MR91.082</GPH>
§ 178.360 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
§ 178.360 Specification 2R; inside con- § 178.360–2 Manufacture.

tainment vessel. The ends of the vessel must be fitted
with screw-type closures or flanges (see
§ 178.360–1 General requirements.
§ 178.360–4), except that one or both
(a) Each vessel must be made of ends of the vessel may be permanently
stainless steel, malleable iron, or brass, closed by a welded or brazed plate.
or other material having equivalent Welded or brazed side seams are au-
physical strength and fire resistance. thorized.
(b) Each vessel must meet all of the [Amdt. 178–35, 39 FR 45245, Dec. 31, 1974. Re-
applicable requirements of § 173.24 (c) designated by Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52716, Dec.
and (d) of this subchapter. Letters and 21, 1990, as amended at 63 FR 37462, July 10,
numerals at least 6 mm (1⁄4-inch) in 1998]
height are authorized for the marking
§ 178.360–3 Dimensions.
of a vessel not exceeding 5 cm (2
inches) inside diameter. (a) The inside diameter of the vessel
may not exceed 30 cm (12 inches) exclu-
[Amdt. 178–35, 39 FR 45245, Dec. 31, 1974. Re- sive of flanges for handling or fastening
designated by Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. devices and must have wall thickness
21, 1990; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]
and length in accordance with the fol-
lowing:
Inside diameter Threaded closure Length maximum
maximum Wall thickness minimum—Flanged closure
Inches Mm Inches Cm
Inches Cm
2 5 ⁄
3 32 2.5 Not less than that prescribed for schedule 40 pipe ................. 16 41
6 15 18 ⁄ 3.2 ................................................................................................... 72 183
12 30 14 ⁄ 6.5 ................................................................................................... 72 183
(b) [Reserved]
[Amdt. 178–35, 39 FR 45245, Dec. 31, 1974. Redesignated by Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21,
1990; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]
§ 178.360–4 Closure devices. § 171.7 of this subchapter). A torque

wrench must be used in securing the
(a) Each closure device must be as
flange with a corresponding torque of
follows:
no more than twice the force necessary
(1) Screw-type cap or plug; number of
to seal the selected gasket. Gasket ma-
threads per inch must not be less than
terial must be capable of withstanding
United States standard pipe threads
up to 149 °C (300 °F) without loss of effi-
and must have sufficient length of
ciency. The flange, whether of ferrous
thread to engage at least 5 threads
when securely tightened. Pipe threads or nonferrous metal, must be con-
must be luted with an appropriate non- structed from the same metal as the
hardening compound which must be ca- vessel and must meet the dimensional
pable of withstanding up to 149 °C (300 and fabrication specifications for weld-
°F) without loss of efficiency. Tight- ed construction as follows:
ening torque must be adequate to (i) Pipe flanges described in Tables
maintain leak tightness with the spe- 13, 14, 16, 17, 19, 20, 22, 23, 25 and 26 of
cific luting compound. ANSI B16.5 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
(2) An opening may be closed by a se- chapter).
curely bolted flange and leak-tight gas- (ii) For nominal pipe sizes, 6, 8, 10,
ket. Each flange must be welded or and 12 inches, AWWA Standard C207–55,
brazed to the body of the 2R vessel per Table 1, class B, may be used in place
(ANSI) Standard B16.5 or (AWWA) of the tables prescribed by paragraph
Standard C207–55, section 10 (IBR, see (a)(2)(i) of this section.
196
(iii) Sizes under 6 inches, nominal AWWA C207–55, Table 1, class B, may
pipe size, the following table with the be used in place of paragraph (a)(2)(i) of
same configuration as illustrated in this section.
Nominal pipe size Flange O.D. Bolt circle diameter Diameter of bolts Flange thickness
Number
of bolts
Inches Cm Inches Cm Inches Cm Inches Cm Inches Cm
2 5 6 15 4 43⁄4 11.8 ⁄
12 1.2 ⁄
58 1.6
21⁄2 6.2 7 17.5 4 51⁄2 13.8 1⁄2 ............... 5⁄8 ...............
3 7.5 71⁄2 18.8 4 6 15 1⁄2 ............... 5⁄8 ...............
31⁄2 8.8 81⁄2 21.3 8 7 17.5 1⁄2 ............... 5⁄8 ...............
4 10 9 22.5 8 7 ⁄2
1 18.8 1⁄2 ............... 5⁄8 ...............
5 12.6 10 25.4 8 8 ⁄2
1 21.3 1⁄2 ............... 5⁄8 ...............
(iv) Cast iron flanges prohibited. (iii) ‘‘C’’ means natural wood.
(b) [Reserved] (iv) ‘‘D’’ means plywood.
(v) ‘‘F’’ means reconstituted wood.
[Amdt. 178–35, 39 FR 45245, Dec. 31, 1974; 40 FR
2435, Jan. 13, 1975, as amended at 40 FR 44327, (vi) ‘‘G’’ means fiberboard.
Sept. 26, 1975. Redesignated by Amdt. 178–97, (vii) ‘‘H’’ means plastic.
56 FR 66284, Dec. 20, 1991; 68 FR 75757, Dec. 31, (viii) ‘‘L’’ means textile.
2003] (ix) ‘‘M’’ means paper, multi-wall.
(x) ‘‘N’’ means metal (other than
Subpart L—Non-bulk Perform- steel or aluminum).
ance-Oriented Packaging (xi) ‘‘P’’ means glass, porcelain or
stoneware.
Standards (3) A numeral indicating the category
of packaging within the kind to which
SOURCE: Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, the packaging belongs. For example,
1990, unless otherwise noted. for steel drums (‘‘1A’’), ‘‘1’’ indicates a
§ 178.500 Purpose, scope and defini- non-removable head drum (i.e., ‘‘1A1’’)
tions. and ‘‘2’’ indicates a removable head
drum (i.e., ‘‘1A2’’).
(a) This subpart prescribes certain re- (b) For composite packagings, two
quirements for non-bulk packagings for capital letters are used in sequence in
hazardous materials. Standards for the second position of the code, the
these packagings are based on the UN first indicating the material of the
Recommendations. inner receptacle and the second, that of
(b) Terms used in this subpart are de- the outer packaging. For example, a
fined in § 171.8 of this subchapter. plastic receptacle in a steel drum is
§ 178.502 Identification codes for pack- designated ‘‘6HA1’’.
agings. (c) For combination packagings, only
the code number for the outer pack-
(a) Identification codes for desig- aging is used.
nating kinds of packagings consist of (d) Identification codes are set forth
the following: in the standards for packagings in
(1) A numeral indicating the kind of
§§ 178.504 through 178.523 of this sub-
packaging, as follows:
part.
(i) ‘‘1’’ means a drum.
(ii) ‘‘2’’ means a wooden barrel. NOTE TO § 178.502: Plastics materials in-
(iii) ‘‘3’’ means a jerrican. clude other polymeric materials such as rub-
(iv) ‘‘4’’ means a box. ber.
(v) ‘‘5’’ means a bag. [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
(vi) ‘‘6’’ means a composite pack- amended by Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67519, Dec.
aging. 29, 1994; 74 FR 2269, Jan. 14, 2009]
(vii) ‘‘7’’ means a pressure receptacle.
(2) A capital letter indicating the § 178.503 Marking of packagings.
material of construction, as follows: (a) A manufacturer must mark every

(i) ‘‘A’’ means steel (all types and packaging that is represented as manu-
surface treatments). factured to meet a UN standard with
(ii) ‘‘B’’ means aluminum. the marks specified in this section. The
197
§ 178.503 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
markings must be durable, legible and (i) For packagings without inner
placed in a location and of such a size packagings intended to contain liquids,
relative to the packaging as to be read- the designation shall be the specific
ily visible, as specified in § 178.3(a). Ex- gravity rounded down to the first dec-
cept as otherwise provided in this sec- imal but may be omitted when the spe-
tion, every reusable packaging liable cific gravity does not exceed 1.2; and
to undergo a reconditioning process (ii) For packagings intended to con-
which might obliterate the packaging tain solids or inner packagings, the
marks must bear the marks specified designation shall be the maximum
in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(6) and gross mass in kilograms;
(a)(9) of this section in a permanent (5)(i) For single and composite pack-
form (e.g. embossed) able to withstand agings intended to contain liquids, the
the reconditioning process. A marking test pressure in kilopascals rounded
may be applied in a single line or in down to the nearest 10 kPa of the hy-
multiple lines provided the correct se- drostatic pressure test that the pack-
quence is used. As illustrated by the aging design type has successfully
examples in paragraph (e) of this sec- passed;
tion, the following information must (ii) For packagings intended to con-
be presented in the correct sequence. tain solids or inner packagings, the let-
Slash marks should be used to separate ter ‘‘S’’;
this information. A packaging con- (6) The last two digits of the year of
forming to a UN standard must be manufacture. Packagings of types 1H
marked as follows: and 3H shall also be marked with the
(1) Except as provided in paragraph month of manufacture in any appro-
(e)(1)(ii) of this section, the United Na- priate manner; this may be marked on
tions symbol as illustrated in para- the packaging in a different place from
graph (e)(1)(i) of this section (for em- the remainder of the markings;
bossed metal receptacles, the letters (7) The state authorizing allocation
‘‘UN’’) may be applied in place of the of the mark. The letters ‘USA’ indicate
symbol;; that the packaging is manufactured
and marked in the United States in
(2) A packaging identification code
compliance with the provisions of this
designating the type of packaging, the
subchapter;
material of construction and, when ap-
(8) The name and address or symbol
propriate, the category of packaging
of the manufacturer or the approval
under §§ 178.504 through 178.523 of this
agency certifying compliance with sub-
subpart within the type to which the
part L and subpart M of this part.
packaging belongs. The letter ‘‘V’’
Symbols, if used, must be registered
must follow the packaging identifica-
with the Associate Administrator;
tion code on packagings tested in ac-
(9) For metal or plastic drums or
cordance with § 178.601(g)(2); for exam-
jerricans intended for reuse or recondi-
ple, ‘‘4GV’’. The letter ‘‘W’’ must fol-
tioning as single packagings or the
low the packaging identification code
outer packagings of a composite pack-
on packagings when required by an ap-
aging, the thickness of the packaging
proval under the provisions of
material, expressed in mm (rounded to
§ 178.601(h) of this part;
the nearest 0.1 mm), as follows:
(3) A letter identifying the perform- (i) Metal drums or jerricans must be
ance standard under which the pack- marked with the nominal thickness of
aging design type has been successfully the metal used in the body. The
tested, as follows: marked nominal thickness must not
(i) X—for packagings meeting Pack- exceed the minimum thickness of the
ing Group I, II and III tests; steel used by more than the thickness
(ii) Y—for packagings meeting Pack- tolerance stated in ISO 3574 (IBR, see
ing Group II and III tests; or § 171.7 of this subchapter). (See appen-
(iii) Z—for packagings only meeting dix C of this part.) The unit of measure
Packing Group III tests; is not required to be marked. When the

(4) A designation of the specific grav- nominal thickness of either head of a
ity or mass for which the packaging de- metal drum is thinner than that of the
sign type has been tested, as follows: body, the nominal thickness of the top
198
head, body, and bottom head must be (ii) The name and address or symbol
marked (e.g., ‘‘1.0–1.2–1.0’’ or ‘‘0.9–1.0– of the reconditioner. Symbols, if used,
1.0’’). must be registered with the Associate
(ii) Plastic drums or jerricans must Administrator;
be marked with the minimum thick- (iii) The last two digits of the year of
ness of the packaging material. Min- reconditioning;
imum thicknesses of plastic must be as (iv) The letter ‘‘R’’; and
determined in accordance with
(v) For every packaging successfully
§ 173.28(b)(4). The unit of measure is not
required to be marked; passing a leakproofness test, the addi-
(10) In addition to the markings pre- tional letter ‘‘L’’.
scribed in paragraphs (a)(1) through (2) When, after reconditioning, the
(a)(9) of this section, every new metal markings required by paragraph (a)(1)
drum having a capacity greater than through (a)(5) of this section no longer
100 L must bear the marks described in appear on the top head or the side of
paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(6), and the metal drum, the reconditioner
(a)(9)(i) of this section, in a permanent must apply them in a durable form fol-
form, on the bottom. The markings on lowed by the markings in paragraph
the top head or side of these pack- (c)(1) of this section. These markings
agings need not be permanent, and may identify a different performance
need not include the thickness mark capability than that for which the
described in paragraph (a)(9) of this original design type had been tested
section. This marking indicates a and marked, but may not identify a
drum’s characteristics at the time it greater performance capability. The
was manufactured, and the information markings applied in accordance with
in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(6) of this paragraph may be different from
this section that is marked on the top those which are permanently marked
head or side must be the same as the on the bottom of a drum in accordance
information in paragraphs (a)(1) with paragraph (a)(10) of this section.
through (a)(6) of this section perma- (d) Marking of remanufactured pack-
nently marked by the original manu- agings. For remanufactured metal
facturer on the bottom of the drum;
drums, if there is no change to the
and
packaging type and no replacement or
(11) Rated capacity of the packaging
removal of integral structural compo-
expressed in liters may be marked.
nents, the required markings need not
(b) For a packaging with a removable
head, the markings may not be applied be permanent (e.g., embossed). Every
only to the removable head. other remanufactured drum must bear
(c) Marking of reconditioned pack- the marks required in paragraphs (a)(1)
agings. (1) If a packaging is recondi- through (a)(6) of this section in a per-
tioned, it shall be marked by the re- manent form (e.g., embossed) on the
conditioner near the marks required in top head or side. If the metal thickness
paragraphs (a)(1) through (6) of this marking required in paragraph (a)(9)(i)
section with the following additional of this section does not appear on the
information: bottom of the drum, or if it is no
(i) The name of the country in which longer valid, the remanufacturer also
the reconditioning was performed (in must mark this information in perma-
the United States, use the letters nent form.
‘‘USA’’); (1)(i) The United Nations symbol is:
199
§ 178.503 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(ii) The circle that surrounds the let-

ters ‘‘u’’ and ‘‘n’’ may have small
breaks provided the following provi-
sions are met:
(A) The total gap space does not ex-
ceed 15 percent of the circumference of
the circle;
(B) There are no more than four gaps
in the circle;
(C) The spacing between gaps is sepa-
rated by no less than 20 percent of the (as in § 178.503 (a)(1) through (a)(10) of
circumference of the circle (72 degrees); this subpart).
and (iii) For a steel drum to transport
(D) The letters ‘‘u’’ and ‘‘n’’ appear solids or inner packagings:
exactly as depicted in § 178.503(e)(1)(i)
with no gaps.
(2) Examples of markings for a new
packaging are as follows:
(i) For a fiberboard box designed to
contain an inner packaging:
(as in § 178.503 (a)(1) through (a)(8) of

this subpart).
EC02MR91.090</GPH>
(3) Examples of markings for recondi-
tioned packagings are as follows:
EC02MR91.089</GPH>
(as in § 178.503 (a)(1) through (a)(9) of

this subpart).
(ii) For a steel drum designed to con-
tain liquids:
EC02MR91.088</GPH>
(as in § 178.503(c)(1)).
(f) A manufacturer must mark every
UN specification package represented
as manufactured to meet the require-

ments of § 178.609 for packaging of in-
EC02MR91.087</GPH>
fectious substances with the marks

specified in this section. The markings
200
er02fe10.002</GPH>
must be durable, legible, and must be drum. Minimum thickness and mark-
readily visible, as specified in § 178.3(a). ing requirements in §§ 173.28(b)(4) and
An infectious substance packaging that 178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter apply to
successfully passes the tests con- drums intended for reuse.
forming to the UN standard must be (2) Body seams must be welded on
marked as follows: drums designed to contain more than
(1) The United Nations symbol as il- 40 L (11 gallons) of liquids. Body seams
lustrated in paragraph (e) of this sec- must be mechanically seamed or weld-
tion.
ed on drums intended to contain only
(2) The code designating the type of
packaging and material of construc- solids or 40 L (11 gallons) or less of liq-
tion according to the identification uids.
codes for packagings specified in (3) Chimes must be mechanically
§ 178.502. seamed or welded. Separate reinforcing
(3) The text ‘‘CLASS 6.2’’. rings may be applied.
(4) The last two digits of the year of (4) The body of a drum of a capacity
manufacture of the packaging. greater than 60 L (16 gallons) may have
(5) The country authorizing the allo- at least two expanded rolling hoops or
cation of the mark. The letters ‘‘USA’’ two separate rolling hoops. If there are
indicate the packaging is manufac- separate rolling hoops, they must be
tured and marked in the United States fitted tightly on the body and so se-
in compliance with the provisions of cured that they cannot shift. Rolling
this subchapter. hoops may not be spot-welded.
(6) The name and address or symbol
(5) Openings for filling, emptying and
venting in the bodies or heads of non-
parts L and M of this part. Symbols, if removable head (1A1) drums may not
used, must be registered with the Asso- exceed 7.0 cm (3 inches) in diameter.
ciate Administrator for Hazardous Ma- Drums with larger openings are consid-
terials Safety. ered to be of the removable head type
(7) For packagings meeting the re- (1A2). Closures for openings in the bod-
quirements of § 178.609(i)(3), the letter ies and heads of drums must be so de-
‘‘U’’ must be inserted immediately fol- signed and applied that they will re-
lowing the marking designating the main secure and leakproof under nor-
type of packaging and material re- mal conditions of transport. Closure
quired in paragraph (f)(2) of this sec- flanges may be mechanically seamed or
tion. welded in place. Gaskets or other seal-
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as ing elements must be used with clo-
amended at 56 FR 66284, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. sures unless the closure is inherently
178–102, 59 FR 28493, June 2, 1994; Amdt. 178– leakproof.
106, 59 FR 67520, 67521, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. (6) Closure devices for removable
178–107, 60 FR 26806, May 18, 1995; 62 FR 51561,
Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR
head drums must be so designed and
61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 67 FR 53143, Aug. 14, 2002; applied that they will remain secure
68 FR 75757, Dec. 31, 2003; 75 FR 5395, Feb 2, and drums will remain leakproof under
2010; 75 FR 60339, Sept. 30, 2010] normal conditions of transport. Gas-
kets or other sealing elements must be
§ 178.504 Standards for steel drums. used with all removable heads.
(a) The following are identification (7) If materials used for body, heads,
codes for steel drums: closures, and fittings are not in them-
(1) 1A1 for a non-removable head selves compatible with the contents to
steel drum; and be transported, suitable internal pro-
(2) 1A2 for a removable head steel tective coatings or treatments must be
drum. applied. These coatings or treatments
(b) Construction requirements for
must retain their protective properties
steel drums are as follows:
(1) Body and heads must be con- under normal conditions of transport.
structed of steel sheet of suitable type (8) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L
and adequate thickness in relation to (119 gallons).
the capacity and intended use of the
201
§ 178.505 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(9) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 other sealing elements must be used
pounds). with all removable heads.
(6) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
amended at 56 FR 66284, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. (119 gallons).
178–110, 60 FR 49111, Sept. 21, 1995] (7) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882
pounds).
§ 178.505 Standards for aluminum [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
drums. amended at 56 FR 66284, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt.
(a) The following are the identifica- 178–102, 59 FR 28494, June 2, 1994]
tion codes for aluminum drums:
(1) 1B1 for a non-removable head alu- § 178.506 Standards for metal drums
minum drum; and other than steel or aluminum.
(2) 1B2 for a removable head alu- (a) The following are the identifica-
minum drum. tion codes for metal drums other than
(b) Construction requirements for steel or aluminum:
aluminum drums are as follows: (1) 1N1 for a non-removable head
(1) Body and heads must be con- metal drum; and
structed of aluminum at least 99 per- (2) 1N2 for a removable head metal
cent pure or an aluminum base alloy. drum.
Material must be of suitable type and (b) Construction requirements for
adequate thickness in relation to the metal drums other than steel or alu-
capacity and the intended use of the minum are as follows:
drum. Minimum thickness and mark- (1) Body and heads must be con-
ing requirements in §§ 173.28(b)(4) and structed of metal (other than steel or
178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter apply to aluminum) of suitable type and ade-
drums intended for reuse. quate thickness in relation to the ca-
(2) All seams must be welded. Chime pacity and the intended use of the
seams, if any, must be reinforced by drum. Minimum thickness and mark-
the application of separate reinforcing ing requirements in §§ 173.28(b)(4) and
rings. 178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter apply to
(3) The body of a drum of a capacity drums intended for reuse.
greater than 60 L (16 gallons) may have (2) All seams must be welded. Chime
at least two expanded rolling hoops or seams, if any, must be reinforced by
two separate rolling hoops. If there are the application of separate reinforcing
separate rolling hoops, the hoops must rings.
be fitted tightly on the body and so se- (3) The body of a drum of a capacity
cured that they cannot shift. Rolling greater than 60 L (16 gallons) may have
hoops may not be spot-welded. at least two expanded rolling hoops or
(4) Openings for filling, emptying, or two separate rolling hoops. If there are
venting in the bodies or heads of non- separate rolling hoops, the hoops must
removable head (1B1) drums may not be fitted tightly on the body and so se-
exceed 7.0 cm (3 inches) in diameter. cured that they cannot shift. Rolling
Drums with larger openings are consid- hoops may not be spot-welded.
ered to be of the removable head type (4) Openings for filling, emptying, or
(1B2). Closures for openings in the bod- venting in the bodies or heads of non-
ies and heads of drums must be so de- removable head (1N1) drums may not
signed and applied that they will re- exceed 7.0 cm (3 inches) in diameter.
main secure and leakproof under nor- Drums with larger openings are consid-
mal conditions of transport. Closure ered to be of the removable head type
flanges may be welded in place so that (1N2). Closures for openings in the bod-
the weld provides a leakproof seam. ies and heads of drums must be so de-
Gaskets or other sealing elements signed and applied that they will re-
must be used with closures unless the main secure and leakproof under nor-
closure is inherently leakproof. mal conditions of transport. Closure
(5) Closure devices for removable flanges may be welded in place so that
head drums must be so designed and the weld provides a leakproof seam.
applied that they remain secure and Gaskets or other sealing elements
drums remain leakproof under normal must be used with closures unless the
conditions of transport. Gaskets or closure is inherently leakproof.
202
(5) Closure devices for removable tions) firmly glued or laminated to-
head drums must be so designed and gether and may include one or more
applied that they remain secure and protective layers of bitumen, waxed
drums remain leakproof under normal kraft paper, metal foil, plastic mate-
conditions of transport. Gaskets or rial, or similar materials.
other sealing elements must be used (2) Heads must be of natural wood, fi-
with all removable heads. berboard, metal, plywood, plastics, or
(6) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L other suitable material and may in-
(119 gallons). clude one or more protective layers of
(7) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 bitumen, waxed kraft paper, metal foil,
pounds). plastic material, or similar material.
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as (3) The body and heads of the drum
amended at 56 FR 66285, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. and their joints must be of a design ap-
178–102, 59 FR 28494, June 2, 1994] propriate to the capacity and intended
§ 178.507 Standards for plywood use of the drum.
drums. (4) The assembled packaging must be
sufficiently water-resistant so as not
(a) The identification code for a ply-
to delaminate under normal conditions
wood drum is 1D.
(b) Construction requirements for of transport.
plywood drums are as follows: (5) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L
(1) The wood used must be well-sea- (119 gallons).
soned, commercially dry and free from (6) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882
any defect likely to lessen the effec- pounds).
tiveness of the drum for the purpose in- [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
tended. A material other than plywood, amended by Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67521, Dec.
of at least equivalent strength and du- 29, 1994]
rability, may be used for the manufac-
ture of the heads. § 178.509 Standards for plastic drums
(2) At least two-ply plywood must be and jerricans.
used for the body and at least three-ply (a) The following are identification
plywood for the heads; the plies must codes for plastic drums and jerricans:
be firmly glued together, with their
(1) 1H1 for a non-removable head
grains crosswise.
(3) The body and heads of the drum plastic drum;
and their joints must be of a design ap- (2) 1H2 for a removable head plastic
propriate to the capacity of the drum drum;
and its intended use. (3) 3H1 for a non-removable head
(4) In order to prevent sifting of the jerrican; and
contents, lids must be lined with kraft (4) 3H2 for a removable head jerrican.
paper or some other equivalent mate- (b) Construction requirements for
rial which must be securely fastened to plastic drums and jerricans are as fol-
the lid and extend to the outside along lows:
its full circumference. (1) The packaging must be manufac-
(5) Maximum capacity of drum: 250 L tured from suitable plastic material
(66 gallons). and be of adequate strength in relation
(6) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 to its capacity and intended use. No
pounds). used material other than production
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as residues or regrind from the same man-
amended at 57 FR 45465, Oct. 1, 1992] ufacturing process may be used unless
approved by the Associate Adminis-
§ 178.508 Standards for fiber drums. trator. The packaging must be ade-
(a) The identification code for a fiber quately resistant to aging and to deg-
drum is 1G. radation caused either by the sub-
(b) Construction requirements for stance contained or by ultra-violet ra-
fiber drums are as follows: diation. Any permeation of the sub-

(1) The body of the drum must be stance contained may not constitute a
constructed of multiple plies of heavy danger under normal conditions of
paper or fiberboard (without corruga- transport.
203
§ 178.510 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(2) If protection against ultra-violet (7) Maximum capacity of drums and

radiation is required, it must be pro- jerricans: 1H1, 1H2: 450 L (119 gallons);
vided by the addition of carbon black 3H1, 3H2: 60 L (16 gallons).
or other suitable pigments or inhibi- (8) Maximum net mass: 1H1, 1H2: 400
tors. These additives must be compat- kg (882 pounds); 3H1, 3H2: 120 kg (265
ible with the contents and remain ef- pounds).
fective throughout the life of the pack- [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
aging. Where use is made of carbon amended by Amdt. 178–102, 59 FR 28494, June
black, pigments or inhibitors other 2, 1994; 64 FR 10782, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 45386,
than those used in the manufacture of Aug. 28, 2001]
the design type, retesting may be omit-
ted if the carbon black content does § 178.510 Standards for wooden bar-
rels.
not exceed 2 percent by mass or if the
pigment content does not exceed 3 per- (a) The following are identification
cent by mass; the content of inhibitors codes for wooden barrels:
of ultra-violet radiation is not limited. (1) 2C1 for a bung type wooden barrel;
(3) Additives serving purposes other and
than protection against ultra-violet ra- (2) 2C2 for a slack type (removable
diation may be included in the com- head) wooden barrel.
position of the plastic material pro- (b) Construction requirements for
vided they do not adversely affect the wooden barrels are as follows:
chemical and physical properties of the (1) The wood used must be of good
packaging material. quality, straight-grained, well-sea-
(4) The wall thickness at every point soned and free from knots, bark, rotten
wood, sapwood or other defects likely
of the packaging must be appropriate
to lessen the effectiveness of the barrel
to its capacity and its intended use,
for the purpose intended.
taking into account the stresses to
(2) The body and heads must be of a
which each point is liable to be ex-
design appropriate to the capacity and
posed. Minimum thickness and mark-
intended use of the barrel.
ing requirements in §§ 173.28(b)(4) and
(3) Staves and heads must be sawn or
178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter apply to cleft with the grain so that no annual
drums intended for reuse. ring extends over more than half the
(5) Openings for filling, emptying and thickness of a stave or head.
venting in the bodies or heads of non- (4) Barrel hoops must be of steel or
removable head (1H1) drums and iron of good quality. The hoops of 2C2
jerricans (3H1) may not exceed 7.0 cm (3 barrels may be of a suitable hardwood.
inches) in diameter. Drums and (5) For wooden barrels 2C1, the di-
jerricans with larger openings are con- ameter of the bung-hole may not ex-
sidered to be of the removable head ceed half the width of the stave in
type (1H2 and 3H2). Closures for open- which it is placed.
ings in the bodies or heads of drums (6) For wooden barrels 2C2, heads
and jerricans must be so designed and must fit tightly into crozes.
applied that they remain secure and (7) Maximum capacity of barrel: 250 L
leakproof under normal conditions of (66 gallons).
transport. Gaskets or other sealing ele- (8) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882
ments must be used with closures un- pounds).
less the closure is inherently leakproof.
(6) Closure devices for removable § 178.511 Standards for aluminum and
head drums and jerricans must be so steel jerricans.
designed and applied that they remain (a) The following are identification
secure and leakproof under normal con- codes for aluminum and steel jerricans:
ditions of transport. Gaskets must be (1) 3A1 for a non-removable head
used with all removable heads unless steel jerrican;
the drum or jerrican design is such (2) 3A2 for a removable head steel
that when the removable head is prop- jerrican;
erly secured, the drum or jerrican is in- (3) 3B1 for a non-removable head alu-
herently leakproof. minum jerrican; and
204
(4) 3B2 for a removable head alu- § 178.512 Standards for steel or alu-
minum jerrican. minum boxes.
(b) Construction requirements for (a) The following are identification
aluminum and steel jerricans are as codes for steel or aluminum boxes:
follows: (1) 4A for a steel box; and
(1) For steel jerricans the body and (2) 4B for an aluminum box.
heads must be constructed of steel (b) Construction requirements for
sheet of suitable type and adequate steel or aluminum boxes are as follows:
thickness in relation to the capacity of (1) The strength of the metal and the
the jerrican and its intended use. Min- construction of the box must be appro-
imum thickness and marking require- priate to the capacity and intended use
ments in §§ 173.28(b)(4) and 178.503(a)(9) of the box.
of this subchapter apply to jerricans (2) Boxes must be lined with fiber-
intended for reuse. board or felt packing pieces or must
(2) For aluminum jerricans the body have an inner liner or coating of suit-
and heads must be constructed of alu- able material in accordance with sub-
minum at least 99% pure or of an alu- part C of part 173 of this subchapter. If
minum base alloy. Material must be of a double seamed metal liner is used,
a type and of adequate thickness in re- steps must be taken to prevent the in-
lation to the capacity of the jerrican gress of materials, particularly explo-
and to its intended use. sives, into the recesses of the seams.
(3) Chimes of all jerricans must be (3) Closures may be of any suitable
mechanically seamed or welded. Body type, and must remain secure under
seams of jerricans intended to carry normal conditions of transport.
more than 40 L (11 gallons) of liquid (4) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882
must be welded. Body seams of pounds).
jerricans intended to carry 40 L (11 gal- [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
lons) or less must be mechanically amended by Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67521, Dec.
seamed or welded. 29, 1994]
(4) Openings in jerricans (3A1) may
not exceed 7.0 cm (3 inches) in diame- § 178.513 Standards for boxes of nat-
ural wood.
ter. Jerricans with larger openings are
considered to be of the removable head (a) The following are the identifica-
type. Closures must be so designed that tion codes for boxes of natural wood:
they remain secure and leakproof (1) 4C1 for an ordinary box; and
under normal conditions of transport. (2) 4C2 for a box with sift-proof walls.
Gaskets or other sealing elements (b) Construction requirements for
must be used with closures, unless the boxes of natural wood are as follows:
closure is inherently leakproof. (1) The wood used must be well-sea-
(5) If materials used for body, heads, soned, commercially dry and free from
closures and fittings are not in them- defects that would materially lessen
selves compatible with the contents to the strength of any part of the box. The
be transported, suitable internal pro- strength of the material used and the
tective coatings or treatments must be method of construction must be appro-
applied. These coatings or treatments priate to the capacity and intended use
must retain their protective properties of the box. The tops and bottoms may
under normal conditions of transport. be made of water-resistant reconsti-
tuted wood such as hard board, particle
(6) Maximum capacity of jerrican: 60
board or other suitable type.
L (16 gallons).
(2) Fastenings must be resistant to
(7) Maximum net mass: 120 kg (265
vibration experienced under normal
pounds). conditions of transportation. End grain
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as nailing must be avoided whenever prac-
amended by Amdt. 178–102, 59 FR 28494, June ticable. Joints which are likely to be
2, 1994; Amdt. 178–119, 62 FR 24742, May 6, highly stressed must be made using
1997] clenched or annular ring nails or equiv-
alent fastenings.
205
§ 178.514 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(3) Each part of the 4C2 box must be § 178.516 Standards for fiberboard
one piece or equivalent. Parts are con- boxes.
sidered equivalent to one piece when (a) The identification code for a fi-
one of the following methods of glued berboard box is 4G.
assembly is used: Linderman joint, (b) Construction requirements for fi-
tongue and groove joint, ship lap or berboard boxes are as follows:
rabbet joint, or butt joint with at least (1) Strong, solid or double-faced cor-
two corrugated metal fasteners at each rugated fiberboard (single or multi-
joint. wall) must be used, appropriate to the
(4) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 capacity and intended use of the box.
pounds). The water resistance of the outer sur-
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as face must be such that the increase in
amended by Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67521, Dec. mass, as determined in a test carried
29, 1994] out over a period of 30 minutes by the
Cobb method of determining water ab-
§ 178.514 Standards for plywood boxes. sorption, is not greater than 155 g per
(a) The identification code for a ply- square meter (0.0316 pounds per square
wood box is 4D. foot)—see ISO 535 (IBR, see § 171.7 of
(b) Construction requirements for this subchapter). Fiberboard must have
plywood boxes are as follows: proper bending qualities. Fiberboard
(1) Plywood used must be at least 3 must be cut, creased without cutting
ply. It shall be made from well-sea- through any thickness of fiberboard,
soned rotary cut, sliced or sawn veneer, and slotted so as to permit assembly
commercially dry and free from defects without cracking, surface breaks, or
that would materially lessen the undue bending. The fluting of cor-
strength of the box. The strength of the rugated fiberboard must be firmly
material used and the method of con- glued to the facings.
struction must be appropriate to the (2) The ends of boxes may have a
capacity and intended use of the box. wooden frame or be entirely of wood or
All adjacent plies must be glued with other suitable material. Reinforce-
water-resistant adhesive. Other suit- ments of wooden battens or other suit-
able materials may be used together able material may be used.
with plywood in the construction of (3) Manufacturing joints. (i) Manu-
boxes. Boxes must be nailed or secured facturing joints in the bodies of boxes
to corner posts or ends or assembled must be—
with other equally suitable devices. (A) Taped;
(2) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 (B) Lapped and glued; or
pounds). (C) Lapped and stitched with metal
staples.
§ 178.515 Standards for reconstituted (ii) Lapped joints must have an ap-
wood boxes. propriate overlap.
(a) The identification code for a re- (4) Where closing is effected by glu-
constituted wood box is 4F. ing or taping, a water resistant adhe-
(b) Construction requirements for re- sive must be used.
constituted wood boxes are as follows: (5) Boxes must be designed so as to
(1) The walls of boxes must be made provide a snug fit to the contents.
of water-resistant, reconstituted wood (6) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882
such as hardboard, particle board, or pounds).
other suitable type. The strength of [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, and
the material used and the method of amended by Amdt. 178–99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1,
construction must be appropriate to 1993; Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67521, Dec. 29, 1994;
the capacity of the boxes and their in- 68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003]
tended use.
(2) Other parts of the box may be § 178.517 Standards for plastic boxes.
made of other suitable materials. (a) The following are identification
(3) Boxes must be securely assembled codes for plastic boxes:

by means of suitable devices. (1) 4H1 for an expanded plastic box;
(4) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 and
pounds). (2) 4H2 for a solid plastic box.
206
(b) Construction requirements for signed as to prevent the box from unin-
plastic boxes are as follows: tentionally opening.
(1) The box must be manufactured (7) Maximum net mass 4H1: 60 kg (132
from suitable plastic material and be pounds); 4H2: 400 kg (882 pounds).
of adequate strength in relation to its
capacity and intended use. The box § 178.518 Standards for woven plastic
bags.
must be adequately resistant to aging
and to degradation caused either by (a) The following are identification
the substance contained or by ultra- codes for woven plastic bags:
violet radiation. (1) 5H1 for an unlined or non-coated
(2) An expanded plastic box must con- woven plastic bag;
sist of two parts made of a molded ex- (2) 5H2 for a sift-proof woven plastic
panded plastic material: a bottom sec- bag; and
tion containing cavities for the inner (3) 5H3 for a water-resistant woven
receptacles, and a top section covering plastic bag.
and interlocking with the bottom sec- (b) Construction requirements for
woven plastic fabric bags are as fol-
tion. The top and bottom sections must
lows:
be so designed that the inner recep-
(1) Bags must be made from stretched
tacles fit snugly. The closure cap for
tapes or monofilaments of a suitable
any inner receptacle may not be in
plastic material. The strength of the
contact with the inside of the top sec-
material used and the construction of
tion of the box.
the bag must be appropriate to the ca-
(3) For transportation, an expanded pacity and intended use of the bag.
plastic box must be closed with a self- (2) If the fabric is woven flat, the
adhesive tape having sufficient tensile bags must be made by sewing or some
strength to prevent the box from open- other method ensuring closure of the
ing. The adhesive tape must be weath- bottom and one side. If the fabric is tu-
er-resistant and its adhesive compat- bular, the bag must be closed by sew-
ible with the expanded plastic material ing, weaving, or some other equally
of the box. Other closing devices at strong method of closure.
least equally effective may be used. (3) Bags, sift-proof, 5H2 must be made
(4) For solid plastic boxes, protection sift-proof by appropriate means such as
against ultra-violet radiation, if reuse of paper or a plastic film bonded to
quired, must be provided by the addi- the inner surface of the bag or one or
tion of carbon black or other suitable more separate inner liners made of
pigments or inhibitors. These additives paper or plastic material.
must be compatible with the contents (4) Bags, water-resistant, 5H3: To pre-
and remain effective throughout the vent the entry of moisture, the bag
life of the box. Where use is made of must be made waterproof by appro-
carbon black pigment or inhibitors priate means, such as separate inner
other than those used in the manufac- liners of water-resistant paper (e.g.,
ture of the tested design type, re- waxed kraft paper, double-tarred kraft
testing may be waived if the carbon paper or plastic-coated kraft paper), or
black content does not exceed 2 percent plastic film bonded to the inner or
by mass or if the pigment content does outer surface of the bag, or one or more
not exceed 3 percent by mass; the con- inner plastic liners.
tent of inhibitors of ultra-violet radi- (5) Maximum net mass: 50 kg (110
ation is not limited. pounds).
(5) Additives serving purposes other [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, and
than protection against ultra-violet ra- amended by Amdt. 178–99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1,
diation may be included in the com- 1993]
position of the plastic material if they
do not adversely affect the material of § 178.519 Standards for plastic film
the box. Addition of these additives bags.
does not change the design type. (a) The identification code for a plas-
(6) Solid plastic boxes must have clo- tic film bag is 5H4.
sure devices made of a suitable mate- (b) Construction requirements for
rial of adequate strength and so de- plastic film bags are as follows:
207
§ 178.520 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(1) Bags must be made of a suitable (2) 5M2 for a multi-wall water-resist-
plastic material. The strength of the ant paper bag.
material used and the construction of (b) Construction requirements for
the bag must be appropriate to the ca- paper bags are as follows:
pacity and the intended use of the bag. (1) Bags must be made of a suitable
Joints and closures must be capable of kraft paper, or of an equivalent paper
withstanding pressures and impacts with at least three plies. The strength
liable to occur under normal conditions of the paper and the construction of
of transportation. the bag must be appropriate to the ca-
(2) Maximum net mass: 50 kg (110 pacity and intended use of the bag.
pounds). Seams and closures must be sift-proof.
(2) Paper bags 5M2: To prevent the
§ 178.520 Standards for textile bags. entry of moisture, a bag of four plies or
(a) The following are identification more must be made waterproof by the
codes for textile bags: use of either a water-resistant ply as
(1) 5L1 for an unlined or non-coated one of the two outermost plies or a
textile bag; water-resistant barrier made of a suit-
(2) 5L2 for a sift-proof textile bag; able protective material between the
and two outermost plies. A 5M2 bag of
(3) 5L3 for a water-resistant textile three plies must be made waterproof by
bag. the use of a water-resistant ply as the
(b) Construction requirements for outermost ply. When there is danger of
textile bags are as follows: the lading reacting with moisture, or
(1) The textiles used must be of good when it is packed damp, a waterproof
quality. The strength of the fabric and ply or barrier, such as double-tarred
the construction of the bag must be ap- kraft paper, plastics-coated kraft
propriate to the capacity and intended paper, plastics film bonded to the inner
use of the bag. surface of the bag, or one or more inner
plastics liners, must also be placed
(2) Bags, sift-proof, 5L2: The bag
next to the substance. Seams and clo-
must be made sift-proof, by appropriate
sures must be waterproof.
means, such as by the use of paper
bonded to the inner surface of the bag
pounds).
by a water-resistant adhesive such as
bitumen, plastic film bonded to the [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
inner surface of the bag, or one or more amended at 56 FR 66285, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt.
inner liners made of paper or plastic 178–106, 59 FR 67521, Dec. 29, 1994]
material.
§ 178.522 Standards for composite
(3) Bags, water-resistant, 5L3: To pre- packagings with inner plastic re-
vent entry of moisture, the bag must ceptacles.
be made waterproof by appropriate
means, such as by the use of separate (a) The following are the identifica-
inner liners of water-resistant paper tion codes for composite packagings
(e.g., waxed kraft paper, tarred paper, with inner plastic receptacles:
or plastic-coated kraft paper), or plas- (1) 6HA1 for a plastic receptacle with-
tic film bonded to the inner surface of in a protective steel drum;
the bag, or one or more inner liners (2) 6HA2 for a plastic receptacle with-
made of plastic material or metalized in a protective steel crate or box;
(3) 6HB1 for a plastic receptacle with-
film or foil.
in a protective aluminum drum.
(4) 6HB2 for a plastic receptacle with-
pounds).
in a protective aluminum crate or box.
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as (5) 6HC for a plastic receptacle within
amended at 56 FR 66285, Dec. 20, 1991] a protective wooden box.
(6) 6HD1 for a plastic receptacle with-
§ 178.521 Standards for paper bags. in a protective plywood drum;
(a) The following are identification (7) 6HD2 for a plastic receptacle with-
codes for paper bags: in a protective plywood box;
(1) 5M1 for a multi-wall paper bag; (8) 6HG1 for a plastic receptacle with-
and in a protective fiber drum;
208
(9) 6HG2 for a plastic receptacle with- (5) Maximum net mass is as follows:
in a protective fiberboard box; 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1, 6HH1—400kg
(10) 6HH1 for a plastic receptacle (882 pounds); 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2,
within a protective plastic drum; and 6HH2—75 kg (165 pounds).
(11) 6HH2 for a plastic receptacle
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
within a protective plastic box. amended by Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67521, Dec.
(b) Construction requirements for 29, 1994]
composite packagings with inner re-
ceptacles of plastic are as follows: § 178.523 Standards for composite
(1) Inner receptacles must be con- packagings with inner glass, por-
structed under the applicable construc- celain, or stoneware receptacles.
tion requirements prescribed in (a) The following are identification
§ 178.509(b) (1) through (7) of this sub- codes for composite packagings with
part. inner receptacles of glass, porcelain, or
(2) The inner plastic receptacle must stoneware:
fit snugly inside the outer packaging, (1) 6PA1 for glass, porcelain, or stone-
which must be free of any projections ware receptacles within a protective
which may abrade the plastic material. steel drum;
(3) Outer packagings must be con- (2) 6PA2 for glass, porcelain, or stone-
structed as follows: ware receptacles within a protective
(i) 6HA1 or 6HB1: Protective pack- steel crate or box;
aging must conform to the require- (3) 6PB1 for glass, porcelain, or stone-
ments for steel drums in § 178.504(b) of ware receptacles within a protective
this subpart, or aluminum drums in aluminum drum;
§ 178.505(b) of this subpart.
(4) 6PB2 for glass, porcelain, or stone-
(ii) 6HA2 or 6HB2: Protective pack-
ware receptacles within a protective
agings with steel or aluminum crate
aluminum crate or box;
must conform to the requirements for
(5) 6PC for glass, porcelain, or stone-
steel or aluminum boxes found in
ware receptacles within a protective
§ 178.512(b) of this subpart.
wooden box;
(iii) 6HC protective packaging must
conform to the requirements for wood- (6) 6PD1 for glass, porcelain, or stone-
en boxes in § 178.513(b) of this subpart. ware receptacles within a protective
(iv) 6HD1: Protective packaging must plywood drum;
conform to the requirements for ply- (7) 6PD2 for glass, porcelain, or stone-
wood drums, in § 178.507(b) of this sub- ware receptacles within a protective
part. wickerwork hamper;
(v) 6HD2: Protective packaging must (8) 6PG1 for glass, porcelain, or stone-
conform to the requirements of ply- ware receptacles within a protective
wood boxes, in § 178.514(b) of this sub- fiber drum;
part. (9) 6PG2 for glass, porcelain, or stone-
(vi) 6HG1: Protective packaging must ware receptacles within a protective fi-
conform to the requirements for fiber berboard box;
drums, in § 178.508(b) of this subpart. (10) 6PH1 for glass, porcelain, or
(vii) 6HG2: protective packaging stoneware receptacles within a protec-
must conform to the requirements for tive expanded plastic packaging; and
fiberboard boxes, in § 178.516(b) of this (11) 6PH2 for glass, porcelain, or
subpart. stoneware receptacles within a protec-
(viii) 6HH1: Protective packaging tive solid plastic packaging.
must conform to the requirements for (b) Construction requirements for
plastic drums, in § 178.509(b). composite packagings with inner re-
(ix) 6HH2: Protective packaging must ceptacles of glass, porcelain, or stone-
conform to the requirements for plastic ware are as follows:
boxes, in § 178.517(b). (1) Inner receptacles must conform to
(4) Maximum capacity of inner recep- the following requirements:
tacles is as follows: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, (i) Receptacles must be of suitable

6HG1, 6HH1—250 L (66 gallons); 6HA2, form (cylindrical or pear-shaped), be
6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2—60 L (16 made of good quality materials free
gallons). from any defect that could impair their
209
§ 178.600 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
strength, and be firmly secured in the (ix) For receptacles with protective
outer packaging. fiberboard box 6PG2, the requirements
(ii) Any part of a closure likely to of § 178.516(b) of this subpart apply to
come into contact with the contents of the protective packaging.
the receptacle must be resistant to (x) For receptacles with protective
those contents. Closures must be fitted solid plastic or expanded plastic pack-
so as to be leakproof and secured to aging 6PH1 or 6PH2, the requirements
prevent any loosening during transpor- of § 178.517(b) of this subpart apply to
tation. Vented closures must conform the protective packaging. Solid protec-
to § 173.24(f) of this subchapter. tive plastic packaging must be manu-
(2) Protective packagings must con- factured from high-density poly-
form to the following requirements: ethylene from some other comparable
(i) For receptacles with protective plastic material. The removable lid re-
steel drum 6PAl, the drum must com- quired for this type of packaging may
ply with § 178.504(b) of this subpart. be a cap.
However, the removable lid required (3) Quantity limitations are as fol-
for this type of packaging may be in lows:
the form of a cap. (i) Maximum net capacity for pack-
(ii) For receptacles with protective aging for liquids: 60 L (16 gallons).
packaging of steel crate or steel box (ii) Maximum net mass for pack-
6PA2, the protective packaging must agings for solids: 75 kg (165 pounds).
conform to the following:
(A) Section 178.512(b) of this subpart. Subpart M—Testing of Non-bulk
(B) In the case of cylindrical recep- Packagings and Packages
tacles, the protective packaging must,
when upright, rise above the receptacle
and its closure; and SOURCE: Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21,
1990, unless otherwise noted.
(C) If the protective crate surrounds
a pear-shaped receptacle and is of § 178.600 Purpose and scope.
matching shape, the protective pack-
aging must be fitted with a protective This subpart prescribes certain test-
cover (cap). ing requirements for performance-ori-
(iii) For receptacles with protective ented packagings identified in subpart
aluminum drum 6PB1, the require- L of this part.
ments of § 178.505(b) of this subpart [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, and
apply to the protective packaging. amended by Amdt. 178–99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1,
(iv) For receptacles with protective 1993]
aluminum box or crate 6PB2, the re-
quirements of § 178.512(b) of this sub- § 178.601 General requirements.
part apply to the protective packaging. (a) General. The test procedures pre-
(v) For receptacles with protective scribed in this subpart are intended to
wooden box 6PC, the requirements of ensure that packages containing haz-
§ 178.513(b) of this subpart apply to the ardous materials can withstand normal
protective packaging. conditions of transportation and are
(vi) For receptacles with protective considered minimum requirements.
plywood drum 6PD1, the requirements Each packaging must be manufactured
of § 178.507(b) of this subpart apply to and assembled so as to be capable of
the protective packaging. successfully passing the prescribed
(vii) For receptacles with protective tests and of conforming to the require-
wickerwork hamper 6PD2, the ments of § 173.24 of this subchapter at
wickerwork hamper must be properly all times while in transportation.
made with material of good quality. (b) Responsibility. It is the responsi-
The hamper must be fitted with a pro- bility of the packaging manufacturer
tective cover (cap) so as to prevent to assure that each package is capable
damage to the receptacle. of passing the prescribed tests. To the
(viii) For receptacles with protective extent that a package assembly func-
fiber drum 6PG1, the drum must con- tion, including final closure, is per-
form to the requirements of § 178.508(b) formed by the person who offers a haz-
of this subpart. ardous material for transportation,
210
that person is responsible for per- stitute a different design type under
forming the function in accordance the provisions of paragraph (g)(8) of
with §§ 173.22 and 178.2 of this sub- this section.
chapter. (d) Design qualification testing. The
(c) Definitions. For the purpose of this packaging manufacturer shall achieve
subpart: successful test results for the design
(1) Design qualification testing is the qualification testing at the start of
performance of the tests prescribed in production of each new or different
§ 178.603, § 178.604, § 178.605, § 178.606, packaging.
§ 178.607, § 178.608, or § 178.609, as applica- (e) Periodic retesting. The packaging
ble, for each new or different pack- manufacturer must achieve successful
aging, at the start of production of test results for the periodic retesting
that packaging. at intervals established by the manu-
(2) Periodic retesting is the perform- facturer of sufficient frequency to en-
ance of the drop, leakproofness, hydro- sure that each packaging produced by
static pressure, and stacking tests, as the manufacturer is capable of passing
applicable, as prescribed in § 178.603, the design qualification tests. Changes
§ 178.604, § 178.605, or § 178.606, respec- in retest frequency are subject to the
tively, at the frequency specified in approval of the Associate Adminis-
paragraph (e) of this section. For infec- trator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
tious substances packagings required For single or composite packagings,
to meet the requirements of § 178.609, the periodic retests must be conducted
periodic retesting is the performance of at least once every 12 months. For
the tests specified in § 178.609 at the fre- combination packagings, the periodic
quency specified in paragraph (e) of retests must be conducted at least once
this section. every 24 months. For infectious sub-
(3) Production testing is the perform- stances packagings, the periodic
ance of the leakproofness test pre-
retests must be conducted at least once
scribed in § 178.604 of this subpart on
every 24 months.
each single or composite packaging in-
(f) Test samples. The manufacturer
tended to contain a liquid.
(4) A different packaging is one that shall conduct the design qualification
differs (i.e. is not identical) from a pre- and periodic tests prescribed in this
viously produced packaging in struc- subpart using random samples of pack-
tural design, size, material of construc- agings, in the numbers specified in the
tion, wall thickness or manner of con- appropriate test section. In addition,
struction but does not include: the leakproofness test, when required,
(i) A packaging which differs only in shall be performed on each packaging
surface treatment; produced by the manufacturer, and
(ii) A combination packaging which each packaging prior to reuse under
differs only in that the outer pack- § 173.28 of this subchapter, by the re-
aging has been successfully tested with conditioner.
different inner packagings. A variety of (g) Selective testing. The selective
such inner packagings may be assem- testing of packagings that differ only
bled in this outer packaging without in minor respects from a tested type is
further testing; permitted as described in this section.
(iii) A plastic packaging which differs For air transport, packagings must
only with regard to additives which comply with § 173.27(c)(1) and (c)(2) of
conform to § 178.509(b)(3) or § 178.517(b) this subchapter.
(4) or (5) of this part; (1) Selective testing of combination
(iv) A combination packaging with packagings. Variation 1. Variations are
inner packagings conforming to the permitted in inner packagings of a
provisions of paragraph (g) of this sec- tested combination package, without
tion; further testing of the package, pro-
(v) Packagings which differ from the vided an equivalent level of perform-
design type only in their lesser design ance is maintained and, when a pack-
height; or age is altered under Variation 1 after
(vi) For a steel drum, variations in October 1, 2010, the methodology used
design elements which do not con- to determine that the inner packaging,
211
§ 178.601 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
including closure, maintains an equiva- side of the packaging may not be re-
lent level of performance is docu- duced below the corresponding thick-
mented in writing by the person certi- ness in the originally tested packaging;
fying compliance with this paragraph and when a single inner packaging was
and retained in accordance with para- used in the original test, the thickness
graph (l) of this section. Permitted of cushioning between inner pack-
variations are as follows: agings may not be less than the thick-
(i) Inner packagings of equivalent or ness of cushioning between the outside
smaller size may be used provided— of the packaging and the inner pack-
(A) The inner packagings are of simi- aging in the original test. When either
lar design to the tested inner pack- fewer or smaller inner packagings are
agings (i.e. shape—round, rectangular,
used (as compared to the inner pack-
etc.);
agings used in the drop test), sufficient
(B) The material of construction of
the inner packagings (glass, plastic, additional cushioning material must be
metal, etc.) offers resistance to impact used to take up void spaces.
and stacking forces equal to or greater (iv) The outer packaging must have
than that of the originally tested inner successfully passed the stacking test
packaging; set forth in § 178.606 of this subpart
(C) The inner packagings have the when empty, i.e., without either inner
same or smaller openings and the clo- packagings or cushioning materials.
sure is of similar design (e.g., screw The total mass of identical packages
cap, friction lid, etc.); must be based on the combined mass of
(D) Sufficient additional cushioning inner packagings used for the drop
material is used to take up void spaces test;
and to prevent significant moving of (v) Inner packagings containing liq-
the inner packagings; uids must be completely surrounded
(E) Inner packagings are oriented with a sufficient quantity of absorbent
within the outer packaging in the same material to absorb the entire liquid
manner as in the tested package; and, contents of the inner packagings;
(F) The gross mass of the package (vi) When the outer packaging is in-
does not exceed that originally tested.
tended to contain inner packagings for
(ii) A lesser number of the tested
liquids and is not leakproof, or is in-
inner packagings, or of the alternative
types of inner packagings identified in tended to contain inner packagings for
paragraph (g)(1)(i) of this section, may solids and is not siftproof, a means of
be used provided sufficient cushioning containing any liquid or solid contents
is added to fill void space(s) and to pre- in the event of leakage must be pro-
vent significant moving of the inner vided in the form of a leakproof liner,
packagings. plastic bag, or other equally efficient
(2) Selective testing of combination means of containment. For packagings
packagings. Variation 2. Articles or containing liquids, the absorbent mate-
inner packagings of any type, for solids rial required in paragraph (g)(2)(v) of
or liquids, may be assembled and trans- this section must be placed inside the
ported without testing in an outer means of containing liquid contents;
packaging under the following condi- and
tions: (vii) Packagings must be marked in
(i) The outer packaging must have accordance with § 178.503 of this part as
been successfully tested in accordance having been tested to Packing Group I
with § 178.603 with fragile (e.g. glass) performance for combination pack-
inner packagings containing liquids at agings. The marked maximum gross
the Packing Group I drop height; mass may not exceed the sum of the
(ii) The total combined gross mass of mass of the outer packaging plus one
inner packagings may not exceed one- half the mass of the filled inner pack-
half the gross mass of inner packagings
agings of the tested combination pack-
used for the drop test;

aging. In addition, the marking re-
(iii) The thickness of cushioning ma-
terial between inner packagings and quired by § 178.503(a)(2) of this part
between inner packagings and the out- must include the letter ‘‘V’’.
212
(3) Variation 3. Packagings other than nally tested inner packagings in ac-
combination packagings which are pro- cordance with the conditions set out in
duced with reductions in external di- Variation 1 in paragraph (g)(1) of this
mensions (i.e., length, width or diame- section.
ter) of up to 25 percent of the dimen- (5) Variation 5. Single packagings
sions of a tested packaging may be (i.e., non-bulk packagings other than
used without further testing provided combination packagings), that differ
an equivalent level of performance is from a tested design type only to the
maintained. The packagings must, in extent that the closure device or
all other respects (including wall gasketing differs from that used in the
thicknesses), be identical to the tested originally tested design type, may be
design-type. The marked gross mass used without further testing, provided
(when required) must be reduced in an equivalent level of performance is
proportion to the reduction in volume. maintained, subject to the following
(4) Variation 4. Variations are per- conditions (the qualifying tests):
mitted in outer packagings of a tested (i) A packaging with the replacement
design-type combination packaging, closure devices or gasketing must suc-
without further testing, provided an cessfully pass the drop test specified in
equivalent level of performance is § 178.603 in the orientation which most
maintained, as follows: severely tests the integrity of the clo-
(i) Each external dimension (length, sure or gasket;
width and height) is less than or equal (ii) When intended to contain liquids,
to the corresponding dimension of the a packaging with the replacement clo-
tested design-type; sure devices or gasketing must success-
(ii) The structural design of the test- fully pass the leakproofness test speci-
ed outer packaging (i.e. methods of fied in § 178.604, the hydrostatic pres-
construction, materials of construc- sure test specified in § 178.605, and the
tion, strength characteristics of mate- stacking test specified in § 178.606.
rials of construction, method of closure Replacement closures and gasketings
and material thicknesses) is main- qualified under the above test require-
tained; ments are authorized without addi-
(iii) The inner packagings are iden- tional testing for packagings described
tical to the inner packagings used in in paragraph (g)(3) of this section. Re-
the tested design type except that their placement closures and gasketings
size and mass may be less; and they are qualified under the above test require-
oriented within the outer packaging in ments also are authorized without ad-
the same manner as in the tested pack- ditional testing for different tested de-
aging; sign types packagings of the same type
(iv) The same type or design of ab- as the originally tested packaging, pro-
sorbent materials, cushioning mate- vided the original design type tests are
rials and any other components nec- more severe or comparable to tests
essary to contain and protect inner which would otherwise be conducted on
packagings, as used in the tested de- the packaging with the replacement
sign type, are maintained. The thick- closures or gasketings. (For example:
ness of cushioning material between The packaging used in the qualifying
inner packagings and between inner tests has a lesser packaging wall thick-
packagings and the outside of the ness than the packaging with replace-
packaging may not be less than the ment closure devices or gasketing; the
thicknesses in the tested design type gross mass of the packaging used in the
packaging; and qualifying drop test equals or exceeds
(v) Sufficient additional cushioning the mass for which the packaging with
material is used to take up void spaces replacement closure devices or
and to prevent significant moving of gasketing was tested; the packaging
the inner packagings. used in the qualifying drop test was
An outer packaging qualifying for use dropped from the same or greater
in transport in accordance with all of height than the height from which the
the above conditions may also be used packaging with replacement closure
without testing to transport inner devices or gasketing was dropped in de-
packagings substituted for the origi- sign type tests; and the specific gravity
213
§ 178.601 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
of the substance used in the qualifying to a higher packing group, hydrostatic

drop test was the same or greater than test pressure, or specific gravity to
the specific gravity of the liquid used which the packaging has been tested);
in the design type tests of the pack- (vi) Type of side seam welding;
aging with replacement closure devices (vii) Type of steel;
or gasketing.) (viii) An increase greater than 10% or
(6) The provisions in Variations 1, 2, any decrease in the steel thickness of
and 4 in paragraphs (g)(1), (2) and (4) of the head, body, or bottom;
this section for combination pack- (ix) End seam type, (e.g., triple or
agings may be applied to packagings double seam);
containing articles, where the provi- (x) A reduction in the number of roll-
sions for inner packagings are applied ing hoops (beads) which equal or exceed
analogously to the articles. In this the diameter over the chimes;
case, inner packagings need not comply (xi) The location, type or size, and
with § 173.27(c)(1) and (c)(2) of this sub- material of closures (other than the
chapter. cover of UN 1A2 drums);
(7) Approval of selective testing. In ad- (xii) The location (e.g., from the head
dition to the provisions of § 178.601(g)(1) to the body), type (e.g., mechanically
through (g)(6) of this subpart, the Asso- seamed or welded flange), and mate-
ciate Administrator may approve the rials of closure (other than the cover of
selective testing of packagings that UN 1A2 drums); and
differ only in minor respects from a (xiii) For UN 1A2 drums:
tested type. (A) Gasket material (e.g., plastic), or
(8) For a steel drum with a capacity properties affecting the performance of
greater than 12 L (3 gallons) manufac- the gasket;
tured from low carbon, cold-rolled (B) Configuration or dimensions of
sheet steel meeting ASTM designations the gasket;
A 366/A 366M or A 568/A 568M, vari- (C) Closure ring style including bolt
ations in elements other than the fol- size (e.g., square or round back, 0.625
lowing design elements are considered inches bolt); and
minor and do not constitute a different (D) Closure ring thickness,
drum design type, or ‘‘different pack- (E) Width of lugs or extensions in
aging’’ as defined in paragraph (c) of crimp/lug cover.
this section for which design qualifica- (h) Approval of equivalent packagings.
tion testing and periodic retesting are A packaging having specifications dif-
required. Minor variations authorized ferent from those in §§ 178.504–178.523 of
without further testing include this part, or which is tested using
changes in the identity of the supplier methods or test intervals, other than
of component material made to the those specified in subpart M of this
same specifications, or the original part, may be used if approved by the
manufacturer of a DOT specification or Associate Administrator. Such pack-
UN standard drum to be remanufac- agings must be shown to be equally ef-
tured. A change in any one or more of fective, and testing methods used must
the following design elements con- be equivalent.
stitutes a different drum design type: (i) Proof of compliance. Notwith-
(i) The packaging type and category standing the periodic retest intervals
of the original drum and the remanu- specified in paragraph (e) of this sec-
factured drum, i.e., 1A1 or 1A2; tion, the Associate Administrator may
(ii) The style, (i.e., straight-sided or at any time require demonstration of
tapered); compliance by a manufacturer,
(iii) Except as provided in paragraph through testing in accordance with
(g)(3) of this section, the rated this subpart, that packagings meet the
(marked) capacity and outside dimen- requirements of this subpart. As re-
sions; quired by the Associate Administrator,
(iv) The physical state for which the the manufacturer shall either—
packaging was originally approved (1) Conduct performance tests, or

(e.g., tested for solids or liquids); have tests conducted by an inde-
(v) An increase in the marked level of pendent testing facility, in accordance
performance of the original drum (i.e., with this subpart; or
214
(2) Supply packagings, in quantities copy of the test report must be main-
sufficient to conduct tests in accord- tained by a person certifying compli-
ance with this subpart, to the Asso- ance with this part. The test report
ciate Administrator or a designated must be made available to a user of a
representative of the Associate Admin- packaging or a representative of the
istrator. Department upon request. The test re-
(j) Coatings. If an inner treatment or port, at a minimum, must contain the
coating of a packaging is required for following information:
safety reasons, the manufacturer shall (1) Name and address of test facility;
design the packaging so that the treat- (2) Name and address of applicant
ment or coating retains its protective (where appropriate);
properties even after withstanding the (3) A unique test report identifica-
tests prescribed by this subpart. tion;
(k) Number of test samples. Except as (4) Date of the test report;
provided in this section, one test sam- (5) Manufacturer of the packaging;
ple must be used for each test per- (6) Description of the packaging de-
formed under this subpart. sign type (e.g. dimensions, materials,
(1) Stainless steel drums. Provided the closures, thickness, etc.), including
validity of the test results is not af- methods of manufacture (e.g. blow
fected, a person may perform the de- molding) and which may include draw-
sign qualification testing of stainless ing(s) and/or photograph(s);
steel drums using three (3) samples (7) Maximum capacity;
rather than the specified eighteen (18) (8) Characteristics of test contents,
samples under the following provisions: e.g. viscosity and relative density for
(i) The packaging must be tested in liquids and particle size for solids;
accordance with this subpart by sub- (9) Test descriptions and results; and
jecting each of the three containers to (10) Signed with the name and title of
the following sequence of tests: signatory.
(A) The stacking test in § 178.606, [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as
(B) The leakproofness test in § 178.604, amended at 56 FR 66285, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR
(C) The hydrostatic pressure test in 45465, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 178–102, 59 FR 28494,
§ 178.608, and June 2, 1994; Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67521, 67522,
Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 178–117, 61 FR 50628, Sept.
(D) Diagonal top chime and flat on 26, 1996; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 53143,
the side drop tests in § 178.603. Both Aug. 14, 2002; 68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003; 68 FR
drop tests may be conducted on the 61942, Oct. 30, 2003; 75 FR 5396, Feb 2, 2010; 75
same sample. FR 60339, Sept. 30, 2010]
(ii) For periodic retesting of stainless
steel drums, a reduced sample size of § 178.602 Preparation of packagings
one container is authorized. and packages for testing.
(2) Packagings other than stainless steel (a) Except as otherwise provided in
drums. Provided the validity of the test this subchapter, each packaging and
results is not affected, several tests package must be closed in preparation
may be performed on one sample with for testing and tests must be carried
the approval of the Associate Adminis- out in the same manner as if prepared
trator. for transportation, including inner
(l) Record retention. Following each packagings in the case of combination
design qualification test and each peri- packagings.
odic retest on a packaging, a test re- (b) For the drop and stacking test,
port must be prepared. The test report inner and single-unit receptacles other
must be maintained at each location than bags must be filled to not less
where the packaging is manufactured than 95% of maximum capacity (see
and each location where the design § 171.8 of this subchapter) in the case of
qualification tests are conducted, for solids and not less than 98% of max-
as long as the packaging is produced imum in the case of liquids. Bags con-
and for at least two years thereafter, taining solids shall be filled to the
and at each location where the periodic maximum mass at which they may be
retests are conducted until such tests used. The material to be transported in
are successfully performed again and a the packagings may be replaced by a
new test report produced. In addition, a non-hazardous material, except for
215
§ 178.603 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
chemical compatibility testing or within these limits. Short-term fluc-

where this would invalidate the results tuations and measurement limitations
of the tests. may cause individual measurements to
(c) If the material to be transported vary by up to ±5 percent relative hu-
is replaced for test purposes by a non- midity without significant impairment
hazardous material, the material used of test reproducibility; or
must be of the same or higher specific (3) For testing at periodic intervals
gravity as the material to be carried, only (i.e., other than initial design
and its other physical properties qualification testing), at ambient con-
(grain, size, viscosity) which might in- ditions.
fluence the results of the required tests (e) Except as otherwise provided,
must correspond as closely as possible each packaging must be closed in prep-
to those of the hazardous material to aration for testing in the same manner
be transported. Water may also be used as if prepared for actual shipment. All
for the liquid drop test under the con- closures must be installed using proper
ditions specified in § 178.603(e) of this techniques and torques.
subpart. It is permissible to use addi- (f) Bung-type barrels made of natural
tives, such as bags of lead shot, to wood must be left filled with water for
achieve the requisite total package at least 24 hours before the tests.
mass, so long as they are placed so that [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as
the test results are not affected. amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt.
(d) Paper or fiberboard packagings 178–106, 59 FR 67522, Dec. 29, 1994; 69 FR 76186,
must be conditioned for at least 24 Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 78635, Dec. 29, 2006]
hours immediately prior to testing in
an atmosphere maintained— § 178.603 Drop test.
(1) At 50 percent ±2 percent relative (a) General. The drop test must be
humidity, and at a temperature of 23 conducted for the qualification of all
°C±2 °C (73 °F±4 °F). Average values packaging design types and performed
should fall within these limits. Short- periodically as specified in § 178.601(e).
term fluctuations and measurement For other than flat drops, the center of
limitations may cause individual meas- gravity of the test packaging must be
urements to vary by up to ±5 percent vertically over the point of impact.
relative humidity without significant Where more than one orientation is
impairment of test reproducibility; possible for a given drop test, the ori-
(2) At 65 percent ±2 percent relative entation most likely to result in fail-
humidity, and at a temperature of 20 ure of the packaging must be used. The
°C±2 °C (68 °F±4 °F), or 27 °C±2 °C (81 number of drops required and the pack-
°F±4 °F). Average values should fall ages’ orientations are as follows:
Packaging No. of tests (samples) Drop orientation of samples
Steel drums, Aluminum drums, Metal Six—(three for each First drop (using three samples): The package must strike the
drums (other than steel or alu- drop). target diagonally on the chime or, if the packaging has no
minum), Steel Jerricans, Plywood chime, on a circumferential seam or an edge. Second drop
drums, Wooden barrels, Fiber (using the other three samples): The package must strike
drums, Plastic drums and Jerricans, the target on the weakest part not tested by the first drop,
Composite packagings which are in for example a closure or, for some 7 cylindrical drums, the
the shape of a drum. welded longitudinal seam of the drum body.
Boxes of natural wood, Plywood Five—(one for each First drop: Flat on the bottom (using the first sample). Second
boxes, Reconstituted wood boxes, drop). drop: Flat on the top (using the second sample). Third drop:
Fiberboard boxes, Plastic boxes, Flat on the long side (using the third sample). Fourth drop:
Steel or aluminum boxes, Com- Flat on the short side (using the fourth sample). Fifth drop:
posite packagings which are in the On a corner (using the fifth sample).
shape of a box.
Bags—single-ply with a side seam ..... Three—(three drops First drop: Flat on a wide face (using all three samples). Sec-
per bag). ond drop: Flat on a narrow face (using all three samples).
Third drop: On an end of the bag (using all three samples).
Bags—single-ply without a side seam, Three—(two drops per First drop: Flat on a wide face (using all three samples). Sec-
or multi-ply. bag). ond drop: On an end of the bag (using all three samples).
(b) Exceptions. For testing of single or stainless steel, nickel, or monel at

composite packagings constructed of periodic intervals only (i.e., other than
216
design qualification testing), the drop 1.2, drop height must be determined ac-
test may be conducted with two sam- cording to packing group, as follows:
ples, one sample each for the two drop (A) Packing Group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet).
orientations. These samples may have (B) Packing Group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet).
been previously used for the hydro- (C) Packing Group III: 0.8 m (2.6 feet).
static pressure or stacking test. Excep-
(ii) Where the materials to be trans-
tions for the number of steel and alu-
ported have a specific gravity exceed-
minum packaging samples used for
ing 1.2, the drop height must be cal-
conducting the drop test are subject to
the approval of the Associate Adminis- culated on the basis of the specific
trator. gravity (SG) of the material to be car-
(c) Special preparation of test samples ried, rounded up to the first decimal, as
for the drop test. (1) Testing of plastic follows:
drums, plastic jerricans, plastic boxes (A) Packing Group I: SG × 1.5 m (4.9
other than expanded polystyrene boxes, feet).
composite packagings (plastic mate- (B) Packing Group II: SG × 1.0 m (3.3
rial), and combination packagings with feet).
plastic inner packagings other than (C) Packing Group III: SG × 0.67 m
plastic bags intended to contain solids (2.2 feet).
or articles must be carried out when (f) Criteria for passing the test. A pack-
the temperature of the test sample and age is considered to successfully pass
its contents has been reduced to ¥18 °C the drop tests if for each sample test-
(0 °F) or lower. Test liquids must be ed—
kept in the liquid state, if necessary,
(1) For packagings containing liquid,
by the addition of anti-freeze. Water/
each packaging does not leak when
anti-freeze solutions with a minimum
equilibrium has been reached between
specific gravity of 0.95 for testing at
¥18 °C (0 °F) or lower are considered the internal and external pressures, ex-
acceptable test liquids. Test samples cept for inner packagings of combina-
prepared in this way are not required tion packagings when it is not nec-
to be conditioned in accordance with essary that the pressures be equalized;
§ 178.602(d). (2) For removable head drums for sol-
(d) Target. The target must be a rigid, ids, the entire contents are retained by
non-resilient, flat and horizontal sur- an inner packaging (e.g., a plastic bag)
face. even if the closure on the top head of
(e) Drop height. Drop heights, meas- the drum is no longer sift-proof;
ured as the vertical distance from the (3) For a bag, neither the outermost
target to the lowest point on the pack- ply nor an outer packaging exhibits
age, must be equal to or greater than any damage likely to adversely affect
the drop height determined as follows: safety during transport;
(1) For solids and liquids, if the test (4) The packaging or outer packaging
is performed with the solid or liquid to of a composite or combination pack-
be transported or with a non-hazardous aging must not exhibit any damage
material having essentially the same likely to affect safety during transport.
physical characteristic, the drop height Inner receptacles, inner packagings, or
must be determined according to pack- articles must remain completely with-
ing group, as follows: in the outer packaging and there must
(i) Packing Group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet). be no leakage of the filling substance
(ii) Packing Group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet). from the inner receptacles or inner
(iii) Packing Group III: 0.8 m (2.6 packagings;
feet). (5) Any discharge from a closure is
(2) For liquids in single packagings slight and ceases immediately after
and for inner packagings of combina- impact with no further leakage; and
tion packagings, if the test is per-

(6) No rupture is permitted in pack-
formed with water:
agings for materials in Class 1 which
(i) Where the materials to be carried
have a specific gravity not exceeding
217
§ 178.604 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
would permit spillage of loose explo- minutes. Other methods, at least

sive substances or articles from the equally effective, may be used in ac-
outer packaging. cordance with appendix B of this part.
(e) Pressure applied. An internal air
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as
amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR pressure (gauge) must be applied to the
45465, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 178–99, 58 FR 51534, packaging as indicated for the fol-
Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67522, Dec. lowing packing groups:
29, 1994; 65 FR 50462, Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 45386, (1) Packing Group I: Not less than 30
Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 69 FR kPa (4 psi).
76186, Dec. 20, 2004; 76 FR 3389, Jan. 19, 2011] (2) Packing Group II: Not less than 20
kPa (3 psi).
§ 178.604 Leakproofness test. (3) Packing Group III: Not less than
(a) General. The leakproofness test 20 kPa (3 psi).
must be performed with compressed air (f) Criteria for passing the test. A pack-
or other suitable gases on all packaging passes the test if there is no
agings intended to contain liquids, ex- leakage of air from the packaging.
cept that: [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as
(1) The inner receptacle of a com- amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt.
posite packaging may be tested with- 178–106, 59 FR 67522, Dec. 29, 1994; 66 FR 45386,
out the outer packaging provided the Aug. 28, 2001]
test results are not affected; and
(2) This test is not required for inner § 178.605 Hydrostatic pressure test.
packagings of combination packagings. (a) General. The hydrostatic pressure
(b) Number of packagings to be tested— test must be conducted for the quali-
(1) Production testing. All packagings fication of all metal, plastic, and com-
subject to the provisions of this section posite packaging design types intended
must be tested and must pass the to contain liquids and be performed pe-
leakproofness test: riodically as specified in § 178.601(e).
(i) Before they are first used in trans- This test is not required for inner
portation; and packagings of combination packagings.
(ii) Prior to reuse, when authorized For internal pressure requirements for
for reuse by § 173.28 of this subchapter. inner packagings of combination pack-
(2) Design qualification and periodic agings intended for transportation by
testing. Three samples of each different aircraft, see § 173.27(c) of this sub-
packaging must be tested and must chapter.
pass the leakproofness test. Exceptions (b) Number of test samples. Three test
for the number of samples used in con- samples are required for each different
ducting the leakproofness test are sub- packaging. For packagings constructed
ject to the approval of the Associate of stainless steel, monel, or nickel,
Administrator. only one sample is required for periodic
(c) Special preparation—(1) For design retesting of packagings. Exceptions for
qualification and periodic testing, the number of aluminum and steel
packagings must be tested with clo- sample packagings used in conducting
sures in place. For production testing, the hydrostatic pressure test are sub-
packagings need not have their clo- ject to the approval of the Associate
sures in place. Removable heads need Administrator.
not be installed during production test- (c) Special preparation of receptacles
ing. for testings. Vented closures must ei-
(2) For testing with closures in place, ther be replaced by similar non-vented
vented closures must either be replaced closures or the vent must be sealed.
by similar non-vented closures or the (d) Test method and pressure to be ap-
vent must be sealed. plied. Metal packagings and composite
(d) Test method. The packaging must packagings other than plastic (e.g.,
be restrained under water while an in- glass, porcelain or stoneware), includ-
ternal air pressure is applied; the ing their closures, must be subjected to
method of restraint must not affect the the test pressure for 5 minutes. Plastic
results of the test. The test must be packagings and composite packagings
conducted, for other than production (plastic material), including their clo-
testing, for a minimum time of five sures, must be subjected to the test
218
pressure for 30 minutes. This pressure packaging. For periodic retesting of

is the one to be marked as required in packagings constructed of stainless
§ 178.503(a)(5). The receptacles must be steel, monel, or nickel, only one test
supported in a manner that does not sample is required. Exceptions for the
invalidate the test. The test pressure number of aluminum and steel sample
must be applied continuously and even- packagings used in conducting the
ly, and it must be kept constant stacking test are subject to the ap-
throughout the test period. In addition, proval of the Associate Administrator.
packagings intended to contain haz- Notwithstanding the provisions of
ardous materials of Packing Group I § 178.602(a) of this subpart, combination
must be tested to a minimum test pres- packagings may be subjected to the
sure of 250 kPa (36 psig). The hydraulic stacking test without their inner pack-
pressure (gauge) applied, taken at the agings, except where this would invali-
top of the receptacle, and determined date the results of the test.
by any one of the following methods (c) Test method—(1) Design qualifica-
must be: tion testing. The test sample must be
(1) Not less than the total gauge pres- subjected to a force applied to the top
sure measured in the packaging (i.e., surface of the test sample equivalent to
the vapor pressure of the filling mate- the total weight of identical packages
rial and the partial pressure of the air which might be stacked on it during
or other inert gas minus 100 kPa (15 transport; where the contents of the
psi)) at 55 °C (131 °F), multiplied by a test sample are non-hazardous liquids
safety factor of 1.5. This total gauge with specific gravities different from
pressure must be determined on the that of the liquid to be transported, the
basis of a maximum degree of filling in
force must be calculated based on the
accordance with § 173.24a(d) of this sub-
specific gravity that will be marked on
chapter and a filling temperature of 15
the packaging. The minimum height of
°C (59 °F);
the stack, including the test sample,
(2) Not less than 1.75 times the vapor
must be 3.0 m (10 feet). The duration of
pressure at 50 °C (122 °F) of the mate-
the test must be 24 hours, except that
rial to be transported minus 100 kPa (15
plastic drums, jerricans, and composite
psi) but with a minimum test pressure
packagings 6HH intended for liquids
of 100 kPa (15 psig); or
(3) Not less than 1.5 times the vapor shall be subjected to the stacking test
pressure at 55 °C (131 °F) of the mate- for a period of 28 days at a temperature
rial to be transported minus 100 kPa (15 of not less than 40°C (104°F). Alter-
psi), but with a minimum test pressure native test methods which yield equiv-
of 100 kPa (15 psig). alent results may be used if approved
by the Associate Administrator. In
Packagings intended to contain haz-
guided load tests, stacking stability
ardous materials of Packing Group I
must be assessed after completion of
must be tested to a minimum test pres-
the test by placing two filled pack-
sure of 250 kPa (36 psig).
agings of the same type on the test
(e) Criteria for passing the test. A pack-
sample. The stacked packages must
age passes the hydrostatic test if, for
maintain their position for one hour.
each test sample, there is no leakage of
Plastic packagings must be cooled to
liquid from the package.
ambient temperature before this stack-
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as ing stability assessment.
amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. (2) Periodic retesting. The test sample
178–99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 178–102,
59 FR 28494, June 2, 1994; 65 FR 50462, Aug. 18,
must be tested in accordance with:
2000; 66 FR 45386, 45390, Aug. 28, 2001; 73 FR (i) Section 178.606(c)(1) of this sub-
57007, Oct. 1, 2008] part; or
(ii) The packaging may be tested
§ 178.606 Stacking test. using a dynamic compression testing
(a) General. All packaging design machine. The test must be conducted
types other than bags must be sub- at room temperature on an empty, un-
jected to a stacking test. sealed packaging. The test sample
(b) Number of test samples. Three test must be centered on the bottom platen
samples are required for each different of the testing machine. The top platen
219
§ 178.607 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
must be lowered until it comes in con- expected contents; in no case may the
tact with the test sample. Compression maximum deflection exceed one inch.
must be applied end to end. The speed [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as
of the compression tester must be one- amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR
half inch plus or minus one-fourth inch 45465, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 178–102, 59 FR 28494,
per minute. An initial preload of 50 June 2, 1994; Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67522, Dec.
pounds must be applied to ensure a 29, 1994; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR
45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 70 FR 34076, June 13, 2005;
definite contact between the test sam-
72 FR 55696, Oct. 1, 2007]
ple and the platens. The distance be-
tween the platens at this time must be § 178.607 Cooperage test for bung-type
recorded as zero deformation. The force wooden barrels.
A to then be applied must be calculated (a) Number of samples. One barrel is
using the formula: required for each different packaging.
Liquids: A = (n¥1) [w + (s × v × 8.3 × (b) Method of testing. Remove all
.98)] × 1.5; hoops above the bilge of an empty bar-
Solids: A = (n¥1) (m × 2.2 × 1.5) rel at least two days old.
(c) Criteria for passing the test. A pack-
Where: aging passes the cooperage test only if
A = applied load in pounds the diameter of the cross-section of the
m = the certified maximum gross mass for upper part of the barrel does not in-
the container in kilograms. crease by more than 10 percent.
n = minimum number of containers that,
when stacked, reach a height of 3 meters. § 178.608 Vibration standard.
s = specific gravity of lading. (a) Each packaging must be capable
w = maximum weight of one empty container of withstanding, without rupture or
in pounds. leakage, the vibration test procedure
v = actual capacity of container (rated ca- outlined in this section.
pacity + outage) in gallons.
(b) Test method. (1) Three sample
And: packagings, selected at random, must
8.3 corresponds to the weight in pounds of 1.0 be filled and closed as for shipment.
gallon of water. (2) The three samples must be placed
.98 corresponds to the minimum filling per- on a vibrating platform that has a
centage of the maximum capacity for liq- vertical or rotary double-amplitude
uids. (peak-to-peak displacement) of one
1.5 is a compensation factor that converts inch. The packages should be con-
the static load of the stacking test into a strained horizontally to prevent them
load suitable for dynamic compression
from falling off the platform, but must
testing.
be left free to move vertically, bounce
2.2 is the conversion factor for kilograms to
pounds.
and rotate.
(3) The test must be performed for
(d) Criteria for passing the test. No test
one hour at a frequency that causes the
sample may leak. In composite pack- package to be raised from the vibrating
agings or combination packagings, platform to such a degree that a piece
there must be no leakage of the filling of material of approximately 1.6 mm
substance from the inner receptacle, or (0.063 inch) thickness (such as steel
inner packaging. No test sample may strapping or paperboard) can be passed
show any deterioration which could ad- between the bottom of any package
versely affect transportation safety or and the platform.
any distortion likely to reduce its (4) Immediately following the period
strength, cause instability in stacks of of vibration, each package must be re-
packages, or cause damage to inner moved from the platform, turned on its
packagings likely to reduce safety in side and observed for any evidence of
transportation. For the dynamic com- leakage.
pression test, a container passes the (5) Other methods, at least equally
test if, after application of the required effective, may be used, if approved by
load, there is no buckling of the side- the Associate Administrator.
walls sufficient to cause damage to its (c) Criteria for passing the test. A pack-
aging passes the vibration test if there
220
is no rupture or leakage from any of animal being replaced by an appro-

the packages. No test sample should priate dummy of similar mass.
show any deterioration which could ad- (c) Packagings prepared as for trans-
versely affect transportation safety or port must be subjected to the tests in
any distortion liable to reduce pack- Table I of this paragraph (c), which, for
aging strength. test purposes, categorizes packagings
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as according to their material character-
amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR istics. For outer packagings, the head-
45386, Aug. 28, 2001] ings in Table I relate to fiberboard or
§ 178.609 Test requirements for pack- similar materials whose performance
agings for infectious substances. may be rapidly affected by moisture;
plastics that may embrittle at low
(a) Samples of each packaging must
temperature; and other materials, such
be prepared for testing as described in
paragraph (b) of this section and then as metal, for which performance is not
subjected to the tests in paragraphs (d) significantly affected by moisture or
through (i) of this section. temperature. Where a primary recep-
(b) Samples of each packaging must tacle and a secondary packaging of an
be prepared as for transport except inner packaging are made of different
that a liquid or solid infectious sub- materials, the material of the primary
stance should be replaced by water or, receptacle determines the appropriate
where conditioning at ¥18 °C (0 °F) is test. In instances where a primary re-
specified, by water/antifreeze. Each pri- ceptacle is made of more than one ma-
mary receptacle must be filled to 98 terial, the material most likely to be
percent capacity. Packagings for live damaged determines the appropriate
animals should be tested with the live test.
TABLE I—TESTS REQUIRED
Material of Tests required
Outer packaging Inner packaging Refer to para. (d) Refer to

para. (h)
Fiberboard Plastics Other Plastics Other (d) (e) (f) (g)
X X X X When dry ice X

is used
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
(d) Samples must be subjected to dropped, one in each of the following

free-fall drops onto a rigid, nonresil- orientations:
ient, flat, horizontal surface from a (i) Diagonally on the top chime, with
height of 9 m (30 feet). the center of gravity directly above the
The drops must be performed as fol- point of impact;
lows: (ii) Diagonally on the base chime;
(1) Where the samples are in the and
shape of a box, five samples must be (iii) Flat on the side.
dropped, one in each of the following (3) While the sample should be re-
orientation: leased in the required orientation, it is
(i) Flat on the base; accepted that for aerodynamic reasons
(ii) Flat on the top; the impact may not take place in that
(iii) Flat on the longest side; orientation.
(iv) Flat on the shortest side; and (4) Following the appropriate drop se-
(v) On a corner. quence, there must be no leakage from

(2) Where the samples are in the the primary receptacle(s) which should
shape of a drum, three samples must be remain protected by absorbent mate-
rial in the secondary packaging.
221
§ 178.609 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(e) The samples must be subjected to mary receptacle(s) and the outer sur-
a water spray to simulate exposure to face of the outer packaging with a min-
rainfall of approximately 50 mm (2 imum of 200 mm (7.9 inches). One sam-
inches) per hour for at least one hour. ple must be dropped in a vertical free
They must then be subjected to the fall from a height of 1 m (3 feet), meas-
test described in paragraph (d) of this ured from the top of the steel rod. A
section. second sample must be dropped from
(f) The sample must be conditioned in the same height in an orientation per-
an atmosphere of ¥18 °C (0 °F) or less pendicular to that used for the first. In
for a period of at least 24 hours and each instance, the packaging must be
within 15 minutes of removal from that oriented so the steel rod will impact
atmosphere be subjected to the test de- the primary receptacle(s). For a suc-
scribed in paragraph (d) of this section. cessful test, there must be no leakage
Where the sample contains dry ice, the from the primary receptacle(s) fol-
conditioning period may be reduced to
lowing each impact.
4 hours.
(i) Variations. The following vari-
(g) Where packaging is intended to
contain dry ice, a test additional to ations in the primary receptacles
that specified in paragraph (d) or (e) or placed within the secondary packaging
(f) of this section must be carried out. are allowed without additional testing
One sample must be stored so that all of the completed package. An equiva-
the dry ice dissipates and then be sub- lent level of performance must be
jected to the test described in para- maintained.
graph (d) of this section. (1) Variation 1. Primary receptacles of
(h) Packagings with a gross mass of 7 equivalent or smaller size as compared
kg (15 pounds) or less should be sub- to the tested primary receptacles may
jected to the tests described in para- be used provided they meet all of the
graph (h)(1) of this section and pack- following conditions:
agings with a gross mass exceeding 7 (i) The primary receptacles are of
kg (15 pounds) to the tests in paragraph similar design to the tested primary re-
(h)(2) of this section. ceptacle (e.g., shape: round, rectan-
(1) Samples must be placed on a gular, etc.).
level, hard surface. A cylindrical steel (ii) The material of construction of
rod with a mass of at least 7 kg (15 the primary receptacle (glass, plastics,
pounds), a diameter not exceeding 38 metal, etc.) offers resistance to impact
mm (1.5 inches), and, at the impact end and a stacking force equal to or greater
edges, a radius not exceeding 6 mm (0.2 than that of the originally tested pri-
inches), must be dropped in a vertical mary receptacle.
free fall from a height of 1 m (3 feet), (iii) The primary receptacles have
measured from the impact end of the the same or smaller openings and the
sample’s impact surface. One sample closure is of similar design (e.g., screw
must be placed on its base. A second cap, friction lid, etc.).
sample must be placed in an orienta-
(iv) Sufficient additional cushioning
tion perpendicular to that used for the
material is used to fill void spaces and
first. In each instance, the steel rod
must be aimed to impact the primary to prevent significant movement of the
receptacle(s). For a successful test, primary receptacles.
there must be no leakage from the pri- (v) Primary receptacles are oriented
mary receptacle(s) following each im- within the intermediate packaging in
pact. the same manner as in the tested pack-
(2) Samples must be dropped onto the age.
end of a cylindrical steel rod. The rod (2) Variation 2. A lesser number of the
must be set vertically in a level, hard tested primary receptacles, or of the
surface. It must have a diameter of 38 alternative types of primary recep-
mm (1.5 inches) and a radius not ex- tacles identified in paragraph (i)(1) of
ceeding 6 mm (0.2 inches) at the edges this section, may be used provided suf-
of the upper end. The rod must pro- ficient cushioning is added to fill the
trude from the surface a distance at void space(s) and to prevent significant
least equal to that between the pri- movement of the primary receptacles.
222
(3) Variation 3. Primary receptacles of (vii) In addition, the marking re-

any type may be placed within a sec- quired in § 178.503(f) of this subchapter
ondary packaging and shipped without must be followed by the letter ‘‘U’’.
testing in the outer packaging provided [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as
all of the following conditions are met: amended by Amdt. 178–111, 60 FR 48787, Sept.
(i) The secondary and outer pack- 20, 1995; 67 FR 53143, Aug. 14, 2002; 69 FR 54046,
aging combination must be success- Sept. 7, 2004]
fully tested in accordance with para-
graphs (a) through (h) of this section Subpart N—IBC Performance-
with fragile (e.g., glass) inner recep- Oriented Standards
tacles.
(ii) The total combined gross weight § 178.700 Purpose, scope and defini-
of inner receptacles may not exceed tions.
one-half the gross weight of inner re- (a) This subpart prescribes require-
ceptacles used for the drop test in para- ments applying to IBCs intended for
graph (d) of this section. the transportation of hazardous mate-
(iii) The thickness of cushioning ma- rials. Standards for these packagings
terial between inner receptacles and are based on the UN Recommendations.
between inner receptacles and the out- (b) Terms used in this subpart are de-
side of the secondary packaging may fined in § 171.8 of this subchapter and in
not be reduced below the corresponding paragraph (c) of this section.
thicknesses in the originally tested (c) The following definitions pertain
packaging. If a single inner receptacle to the IBC standards in this subpart.
was used in the original test, the thick- (1) Body means the receptacle proper
ness of cushioning between the inner (including openings and their closures,
receptacles must be no less than the but not including service equipment)
thickness of cushioning between the that has a volumetric capacity of not
outside of the secondary packaging and more than 3 cubic meters (3,000 L, 793
gallons, or 106 cubic feet).
the inner receptacle in the original
(2) Service equipment means filling and
test. When either fewer or smaller
discharge, pressure relief, safety, heat-
inner receptacles are used (as com-
ing and heat-insulating devices and
pared to the inner receptacles used in
measuring instruments.
the drop test), sufficient additional
(3) Structural equipment means the re-
cushioning material must be used to inforcing, fastening, handling, protec-
fill the void. tive or stabilizing members of the body
(iv) The outer packaging must pass or stacking load bearing structural
the stacking test in § 178.606 while members (such as metal cages).
empty. The total weight of identical (4) Maximum permissible gross mass
packages must be based on the com- means the mass of the body, its service
bined mass of inner receptacles used in equipment, structural equipment and
the drop test in paragraph (d) of this the maximum net mass (see § 171.8 of
section. this subchapter).
(v) For inner receptacles containing
[Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as
liquids, an adequate quantity of ab- amended by Amdt. 178–108, 60 FR 40038, Aug.
sorbent material must be present to 4, 1995; 66 FR 45386, 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 73 FR
absorb the entire liquid contents of the 57008, Oct. 1, 2008; 75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010]
inner receptacles.
(vi) If the outer packaging is in- § 178.702 IBC codes.
tended to contain inner receptacles for (a) Intermediate bulk container code
liquids and is not leakproof, or is in- designations consist of: two numerals
tended to contain inner receptacles for specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this sec-
solids and is not sift proof, a means of tion; followed by the capital letter(s)
containing any liquid or solid contents specified in paragraph (a)(2) of this sec-
in the event of leakage must be pro- tion; followed, when specified in an in-
vided. This can be a leakproof liner, dividual section, by a numeral indi-
plastic bag, or other equally effective cating the category of intermediate
means of containment. bulk container.
223
§ 178.703 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(1) IBC code number designations are symbol as illustrated in

as follows: § 178.503(e)(1)(i). For metal IBCs on
which the marking is stamped or em-
For solids, discharged
bossed, the capital letters ‘‘UN’’ may
Under pres- be applied instead of the symbol.
Type sure of For liquids
by gravity more than (ii) The code number designating IBC
10 kPa
(1.45 psig) design type according to § 178.702(a).
The letter ‘‘W’’ must follow the IBC de-
Rigid .................. 11 21 31 sign type identification code on an IBC
Flexible .............. 13
when the IBC differs from the require-
(2) Intermediate bulk container code ments in subpart N of this part, or is
letter designations are as follows: tested using methods other than those
specified in this subpart, and is ap-
‘‘A’’ means steel (all types and surface treat- proved by the Associate Administrator
ments). in accordance with the provisions in
‘‘B’’ means aluminum.
‘‘C’’ means natural wood.
§ 178.801(i).
‘‘D’’ means plywood. (iii) A capital letter identifying the
‘‘F’’ means reconstituted wood. performance standard under which the
‘‘G’’ means fiberboard. design type has been successfully test-
‘‘H’’ means plastic. ed, as follows:
‘‘L’’ means textile. (A) X—for IBCs meeting Packing
‘‘M’’ means paper, multiwall.
‘‘N’’ means metal (other than steel or alu-
Group I, II and III tests;
minum). (B) Y—for IBCs meeting Packing
Group II and III tests; and
(b) For composite IBCs, two capital
(C) Z—for IBCs meeting only Packing
letters are used in sequence following
Group III tests.
the numeral indicating IBC design
type. The first letter indicates the ma- (iv) The month (designated numeri-
terial of the IBC inner receptacle. The cally) and year (last two digits) of
second letter indicates the material of manufacture.
the outer IBC. For example, 31HA1 is a (v) The country authorizing the allo-
composite IBC with a plastic inner re- cation of the mark. The letters ‘USA’
ceptacle and a steel outer packaging. indicate that the IBC is manufactured
and marked in the United States in
[Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as compliance with the provisions of this
amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
subchapter.
§ 178.703 Marking of IBCs. (vi) The name and address or symbol
(a) The manufacturer shall:
(1) Mark every IBC in a durable and
parts N and O of this part. Symbols, if
clearly visible manner. The marking
used, must be registered with the Asso-
may be applied in a single line or in
ciate Administrator.
multiple lines provided the correct se-
quence is followed with the informa- (vii) The stacking test load in kilo-
tion required by this section in letters, grams (kg). For IBCs not designed for
numerals and symbols of at least 12 stacking, the figure ‘‘0’’ must be
mm in height. This minimum marking shown.
size applies only to IBCs manufactured (viii) The maximum permissible
after October 1, 2001). The following in- gross mass in kg.
formation is required in the sequence (2) The following are examples of
presented: symbols and required markings:
(i) Except as provided in (i) For a metal IBC containing solids
§ 178.503(e)(1)(ii), the United Nations discharged by gravity made from steel:
224
(ii) For a flexible IBC containing sol-

ids discharged by gravity and made
from woven plastic with a liner:
(iii) For a rigid plastic IBC con- stack load and with a manufacturer’s
taining liquids, made from plastic with symbol in place of the manufacturer’s
structural equipment withstanding the name and address:
(iv) For a composite IBC containing with the symbol of a DOT approved
liquids, with a rigid plastic inner re- third-party test laboratory:
ceptacle and an outer steel body and
ER26JY94.003</GPH>
(b) Additional marking. In addition to used, the metric unit indicated (e.g.,
ER26JY94.002</GPH>
markings required in paragraph (a) of 450 L) must also appear.

this section, each IBC must be marked (1) For each rigid plastic and com-
as follows in a place near the markings posite IBC, the following markings
required in paragraph (a) of this sec- must be included:

tion that is readily accessible for in- (i) Rated capacity in L of water at 20
ER26JY94.001</GPH>
spection. Where units of measure are °C (68 °F);

(ii) Tare mass in kilograms;
225
ER26JY94.000</GPH>
§ 178.704 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(iii) Gauge test pressure in kPa; (5) Each flexible IBC may be marked
(iv) Date of last leakproofness test, if with a pictogram displaying rec-
applicable (month and year); and ommended lifting methods.
(v) Date of last inspection (month (6) For each composite IBC, the inner
and year). receptacle must be marked with at
(2) For each metal IBC, the following least the following information:
markings must be included on a metal (i) The code number designating the
corrosion-resistant plate: IBC design type, the name and address
(i) Rated capacity in L of water at 20 or symbol of the manufacturer, the
°C (68 °F); date of manufacture and the country
(ii) Tare mass in kilograms; authorizing the allocation of the mark
(iii) Date of last leakproofness test, if as specified in paragraph (a) of this sec-
applicable (month and year); tion;
(iv) Date of last inspection (month (ii) When a composite IBC is designed
and year); in such a manner that the outer casing
(v) Maximum loading/discharge pres- is intended to be dismantled for trans-
sure, in kPa, if applicable; port when empty (such as, for the re-
(vi) Body material and its minimum turn of the IBC for reuse to the origi-
thickness in mm; and nal consignor), each of the parts in-
(vii) Serial number assigned by the tended to be detached when so disman-
manufacturer. tled must be marked with the month
(3) Markings required by paragraph and year of manufacture and the name
(b)(1) or (b)(2) of this section may be or symbol of the manufacturer.
preceded by the narrative description (7) The symbol applicable to an IBC
of the marking, e.g. ‘‘Tare Mass: * * *’’ designed for stacking or not designed
where the ‘‘* * *’’ are replaced with the for stacking, as appropriate, must be
tare mass in kilograms of the IBC. marked on all IBCs manufactured, re-
(4) For each fiberboard and wooden paired or remanufactured after Janu-
IBC, the tare mass in kg must be ary 1, 2011 as follows:
shown. (i)
(ii) Display the symbol in a durable mass must be at least 12 mm (0.48

and visible manner. inches).
(iii) The symbol must not be less [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as
than 100 mm (3.9 inches) by 100 mm (3.9 amended by Amdt. 178–119, 62 FR 24743, May
inches). 6, 1997; 64 FR 10782, Mar. 5, 1999; 65 FR 50462,
(iv) For IBCs designed for stacking, Aug. 18, 2000; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR
the maximum permitted stacking load 33451, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001;
applicable when the IBC is in use must 74 FR 2269, Jan. 14, 2009; 75 FR 74, Jan. 4, 2010;
be displayed with the symbol. The 75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010; 76 FR 3389, Jan.19,
mass in kilograms (kg) marked above 2011]
the symbol must not exceed the load § 178.704 General IBC standards.
imposed during the design test, as indi-
cated by the marking in paragraph (a) Each IBC must be resistant to, or
(a)(1)(vii) of this section, divided by 1.8. protected from, deterioration due to
The letters and numbers indicating the exposure to the external environment.
226
ER04JA10.097</GPH>
IBCs intended for solid hazardous ma- tain liquids and solids. Metal IBC types
terials must be sift-proof and water-re- are designated:
sistant. (1) 11A, 11B, 11N for solids that are
(b) All service equipment must be so loaded or discharged by gravity.
positioned or protected as to minimize (2) 21A, 21B, 21N for solids that are
potential loss of contents resulting loaded or discharged at a gauge pres-
from damage during IBC handling and sure greater than 10 kPa (1.45 psig).
transportation. (3) 31A, 31B, 31N for liquids or solids.
(c) Each IBC, including attachments, (b) Definitions for metal IBCs:
and service and structural equipment, (1) Metal IBC means an IBC with a
must be designed to withstand, without metal body, together with appropriate
loss of hazardous materials, the inter- service and structural equipment.
nal pressure of the contents and the (2) Protected means providing the IBC
stresses of normal handling and trans- body with additional external protec-
port. An IBC intended for stacking tion against impact and abrasion. For
must be designed for stacking. Any example, a multi-layer (sandwich) or
lifting or securing features of an IBC double wall construction or a frame
must be of sufficient strength to with- with a metal lattice-work casing.
stand the normal conditions of han- (c) Construction requirements for
dling and transportation without gross metal IBCs are as follows:
distortion or failure and must be posi- (1) Body. The body must be made of
tioned so as to cause no undue stress in ductile metal materials. Welds must be
any part of the IBC. made so as to maintain design type in-
tegrity of the receptacle under condi-
(d) An IBC consisting of a packaging
tions normally incident to transpor-
within a framework must be so con-
tation.
structed that:
(i) The use of dissimilar metals must
(1) The body is not damaged by the not result in deterioration that could
framework; affect the integrity of the body.
(2) The body is retained within the (ii) Aluminum IBCs intended to con-
framework at all times; and tain flammable liquids must have no
(3) The service and structural equip- movable parts, such as covers and clo-
ment are fixed in such a way that they sures, made of unprotected steel liable
cannot be damaged if the connections to rust, which might cause a dangerous
between body and frame allow relative reaction from friction or percussive
expansion or motion. contact with the aluminum.
(e) Bottom discharge valves must be (iii) Metals used in fabricating the
secured in the closed position and the body of a metal IBC must meet the fol-
discharge system suitably protected lowing requirements:
from damage. Valves having lever clo- (A) For steel, the percentage elon-
sures must be secured against acci- gation at fracture must not be less
dental opening. The open or closed po- than 10,000/Rm with a minimum of 20
sition of each valve must be readily ap- percent; where Rm = minimum tensile
parent. For each IBC containing a liq- strength of the steel to be used, in N/
uid, a secondary means of sealing the mm2; if U.S. Standard units of psi are
discharge aperture must also be pro- used for tensile strength then the ratio
vided, e.g., by a blank flange or equiva- becomes 10,000 × (145/Rm).
lent device. (B) For aluminum, the percentage
(f) IBC design types must be con- elongation at fracture must not be less
structed in such a way as to be bottom- than 10,000/(6Rm) with an absolute min-
lifted or top-lifted as specified in imum of eight percent; if U.S. Standard
§§ 178.811 and 178.812. units of psi are used for tensile
[Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as
strength then the ratio becomes 10,000
amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR × 145 / (6Rm).
61942, Oct. 30, 2003] (C) Specimens used to determine the
elongation at fracture must be taken

§ 178.705 Standards for metal IBCs. transversely to the direction of rolling
(a) The provisions in this section and be so secured that:
apply to metal IBCs intended to con- Lo = 5d
227
§ 178.705 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
or (A) For a reference steel having a

Lo = 5.65 √A product of Rm × Ao = 10,000, where Ao
is the minimum elongation (as a per-
where: centage) of the reference steel to be
Lo = gauge length of the specimen before the used on fracture under tensile stress
test (Rm × Ao = 10,000 × 145; if tensile
d = diameter strength is in U.S. Standard units of
A = cross-sectional area of test specimen.
pounds per square inch), the wall
(iv) Minimum wall thickness: thickness must not be less than:
Wall thickness (T) in mm
Capacity (C) in liters 1 Types 11A, 11B, 11N Types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B, 31N
Unprotected Protected Unprotected Protected
C≤1000 .......................................................... 2.0 ........................ 1.5 ........................ 2.5 ........................ 2.0

1000<C≤2000 ................................................ T=C/2000 + 1.5 ... T=C/2000 + 1.0 ... T=C/2000 + 2.0 ... T=C/2000 + 1.5
2000<C≤3000 ................................................ T=C/2000 + 1.5 ... T=C/2000 + 1.0 ... T=C/1000 + 1.0 ... T=C/2000 + 1.5
(B) For metals other than the ref- (Rm1) must be the minimum value ac-
erence steel described in paragraph cording to material standards. How-
(c)(1)(iii)(A) of this section, the min- ever, for austenitic (stainless) steels,
imum wall thickness is the greater of the specified minimum value for Rm,
1.5 mm (0.059 inches) or as determined according to the material standards,
by use of the following equivalence for- may be increased by up to 15% when a
mula: greater value is provided in the mate-
rial inspection certificate. When no
FORMULA FOR METRIC UNITS material standard exists for the mate-
rial in question, the value of Rm must
21.4 × e 0 be the minimum value indicated in the
e1 = 3 material inspection certificate.
Rm1 × A1 (2) Pressure relief. The following pres-
sure relief requirements apply to IBCs
FORMULA FOR U.S. STANDARD intended for liquids:
UNITS
(i) IBCs must be capable of releasing
a sufficient amount of vapor in the
21.4 × e 0
e1 = event of fire engulfment to ensure that
3
( Rm1 × A1 )/145 no rupture of the body will occur due
to pressure build-up. This can be
where: achieved by spring-loaded or non-re-
e1 = required equivalent wall thickness of the closing pressure relief devices or by
metal to be used (in mm or if eo is in other means of construction.
inches, use formula for U.S. Standard (ii) The start-to-discharge pressure
units). may not be higher than 65 kPa (9 psig)
eo = required minimum wall thickness for
the reference steel (in mm or if eo is in
and no lower than the vapor pressure of
inches, use formula for U.S. Standard the hazardous material plus the partial
units). pressure of the air or other inert gases,
Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength measured in the IBC at 55 °C (131 °F),
of the metal to be used (in N/mm2 or for determined on the basis of a maximum
U.S. Standard units, use psi). degree of filling as specified in
A1 = minimum elongation (as a percentage)
§ 173.35(d) of this subchapter. This does
of the metal to be used on fracture under
tensile stress (see paragraph (c)(1) of this not apply to fusible devices unless such
section). devices are the only source of pressure
relief for the IBC. Pressure relief de-
(C) For purposes of the calculation

vices must be fitted in the vapor space.
EP26JN96.001</MATH>
described in paragraph (c)(1)(iv)(B) of

(d) Metal IBCs may not have a volu-
this section, the guaranteed minimum
tensile strength of the metal to be used metric capacity greater than 3,000 L
228
EP26JN96.000</MATH>
(793 gallons) or less than 450 L (119 gal- content or the inhibitor content do not
lons). adversely affect the physical properties
of the material of construction.
[Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as
amended by Amdt. 178–108, 60 FR 40038, Aug. (2) Additives may be included in the
4, 1995; Amdt. 178–117, 61 FR 50629, Sept. 26, composition of the plastic material to
1996; 66 FR 33452, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45386, improve the resistance to aging or to
45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45041, July 31, 2003; serve other purposes, provided they do
75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010] not adversely affect the physical or
chemical properties of the material of
§ 178.706 Standards for rigid plastic construction.
IBCs. (3) No used material other than pro-
(a) The provisions in this section duction residues or regrind from the
apply to rigid plastic IBCs intended to same manufacturing process may be
contain solids or liquids. Rigid plastic used in the manufacture of rigid plastic
IBC types are designated: IBCs.
(1) 11H1 fitted with structural equip- (4) Rigid plastic IBCs intended for the
ment designed to withstand the whole transportation of liquids must be capa-
load when IBCs are stacked, for solids ble of releasing a sufficient amount of
which are loaded or discharged by grav- vapor to prevent the body of the IBC
ity. from rupturing if it is subjected to an
(2) 11H2 freestanding, for solids which internal pressure in excess of that for
are loaded or discharged by gravity. which it was hydraulically tested. This
(3) 21H1 fitted with structural equip- may be achieved by spring-loaded or
ment designed to withstand the whole non-reclosing pressure relief devices or
load when IBCs are stacked, for solids by other means of construction.
which are loaded or discharged under (d) Rigid plastic IBCs may not have a
pressure. volumetric capacity greater than 3,000
(4) 21H2 freestanding, for solids which L (793 gallons) or less than 450 L (119
are loaded or discharged under pres- gallons).
sure. [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as
(5) 31H1 fitted with structural equip- amended at 66 FR 45386, 45387, Aug. 28, 2001;
ment designed to withstand the whole 75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010]
load when IBCs are stacked, for liquids.
(6) 31H2 freestanding, for liquids. § 178.707 Standards for composite
(b) Rigid plastic IBCs consist of a IBCs.
rigid plastic body, which may have (a) The provisions in this section
structural equipment, together with apply to composite IBCs intended to
appropriate service equipment. contain solids and liquids. To complete
(c) Rigid plastic IBCs must be manu- the marking codes listed below, the
factured from plastic material of letter ‘‘Z’’ must be replaced by a cap-
known specifications and be of a ital letter in accordance with
strength relative to its capacity and to § 178.702(a)(2) to indicate the material
the service it is required to perform. In used for the outer packaging. Com-
addition to conformance to § 173.24 of posite IBC types are designated:
this subchapter, plastic materials must (1) 11HZ1 Composite IBCs with a rigid
be resistant to aging and to degrada- plastic inner receptacle for solids load-
tion caused by ultraviolet radiation. ed or discharged by gravity.
(1) If protection against ultraviolet (2) 11HZ2 Composite IBCs with a
radiation is necessary, it must be pro- flexible plastic inner receptacle for sol-
vided by the addition of a pigment or ids loaded or discharged by gravity.
inhibiter such as carbon black. These (3) 21HZ1 Composite IBCs with a rigid
additives must be compatible with the plastic inner receptacle for solids load-
contents and remain effective through- ed or discharged under pressure.
out the life of the IBC body. Where use (4) 21HZ2 Composite IBCs with a
is made of carbon black, pigments or flexible plastic inner receptacle for sol-
inhibitors, other than those used in the ids loaded or discharged under pres-
manufacture of the tested design type, sure.
retesting may be omitted if changes in (5) 31HZ1 Composite IBCs with a rigid
the carbon black content, the pigment plastic inner receptacle for liquids.
229
§ 178.707 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(6) 31HZ2 Composite IBCs with a (i) If necessary, protection against

flexible plastic inner receptacle for liq- ultraviolet radiation must be provided
uids. by the addition of pigments or inhibi-
(b) Definitions for composite IBC tors such as carbon black. These addi-
types: tives must be compatible with the con-
(1) A composite IBC is an IBC which tents and remain effective throughout
consists of a rigid outer packaging en- the life of the inner receptacle. Where
closing a plastic inner receptacle to- use is made of carbon black, pigments,
gether with any service or other struc- or inhibitors, other than those used in
tural equipment. The outer packaging the manufacture of the tested design
of a composite IBC is designed to bear type, retesting may be omitted if the
the entire stacking load. The inner re- carbon black content, the pigment con-
ceptacle and outer packaging form an tent, or the inhibitor content do not
integral packaging and are filled, adversely affect the physical properties
stored, transported, and emptied as a of the material of construction.
unit. (ii) Additives may be included in the
(2) The term plastic means polymeric composition of the plastic material of
materials (i.e., plastic or rubber). the inner receptacle to improve resist-
(3) A ‘‘rigid’’ inner receptacle is an ance to aging, provided they do not ad-
inner receptacle which retains its gen- versely affect the physical or chemical
eral shape when empty without clo- properties of the material.
sures in place and without benefit of (iii) No used material other than pro-
the outer casing. Any inner receptacle duction residues or regrind from the
that is not ‘‘rigid’’ is considered to be same manufacturing process may be
‘‘flexible.’’ used in the manufacture of inner recep-
(c) Construction requirements for tacles.
composite IBCs with plastic inner re- (iv) Composite IBCs intended for the
ceptacles are as follows: transportation of liquids must be capa-
(1) The outer packaging must consist ble of releasing a sufficient amount of
of rigid material formed so as to pro- vapor to prevent the body of the IBC
tect the inner receptacle from physical from rupturing if it is subjected to an
damage during handling and transpor- internal pressure in excess of that for
tation, but is not required to perform which it was hydraulically tested. This
the secondary containment function. It may be achieved by spring-loaded or
includes the base pallet where appro- non-reclosing pressure relief devices or
priate. The inner receptacle is not in- by other means of construction.
tended to perform a containment func- (4) The strength of the construction
tion without the outer packaging. material comprising the outer pack-
(2) A composite IBC with a fully en- aging and the manner of construction
closing outer packaging must be de- must be appropriate to the capacity of
signed to permit assessment of the in- the composite IBC and its intended use.
tegrity of the inner container following The outer packaging must be free of
the leakproofness and hydraulic tests. any projection that might damage the
The outer packaging of 31HZ2 com- inner receptacle.
posite IBCs must enclose the inner re- (i) Outer packagings of natural wood
ceptacles on all sides. must be constructed of well seasoned
(3) The inner receptacle must be wood that is commercially dry and free
manufactured from plastic material of from defects that would materially
known specifications and be of a lessen the strength of any part of the
strength relative to its capacity and to outer packaging. The tops and bottoms
the service it is required to perform. In may be made of water-resistant recon-
addition to conformance with the re- stituted wood such as hardboard or
quirements of § 173.24 of this sub- particle board. Materials other than
chapter, the material must be resistant natural wood may be used for construc-
to aging and to degradation caused by tion of structural equipment of the

ultraviolet radiation. The inner recep- outer packaging.
tacle of 31HZ2 composite IBCs must (ii) Outer packagings of plywood
consist of at least three plies of film. must be made of well-seasoned, rotary
230
cut, sliced, or sawn veneer, commer- ance with the relevant provisions of
cially dry and free from defects that paragraph (c)(3) of this section.
would materially lessen the strength of (5) Any integral pallet base forming
the casing. All adjacent plies must be part of an IBC, or any detachable pal-
glued with water-resistant adhesive. let, must be suitable for the mechan-
Materials other than plywood may be ical handling of an IBC filled to its
used for construction of structural maximum permissible gross mass.
equipment of the outer packaging. (i) The pallet or integral base must
Outer packagings must be firmly be designed to avoid protrusions that
nailed or secured to corner posts or may cause damage to the IBC in han-
ends or be assembled by equally suit- dling.
able devices.
(ii) The outer packaging must be se-
(iii) Outer packagings of reconsti-
cured to any detachable pallet to en-
tuted wood must be constructed of
sure stability in handling and transpor-
water-resistant reconstituted wood
tation. Where a detachable pallet is
such as hardboard or particle board.
used, its top surface must be free from
Materials other than reconstituted
wood may be used for the construction sharp protrusions that might damage
of structural equipment of reconsti- the IBC.
tuted wood outer packaging. (iii) Strengthening devices, such as
(iv) Fiberboard outer packagings timber supports to increase stacking
must be constructed of strong, solid, or performance, may be used but must be
double-faced corrugated fiberboard external to the inner receptacle.
(single or multiwall). (iv) The load-bearing surfaces of IBCs
(A) Water resistance of the outer sur- intended for stacking must be designed
face must be such that the increase in to distribute loads in a stable manner.
mass, as determined in a test carried An IBC intended for stacking must be
out over a period of 30 minutes by the designed so that loads are not sup-
Cobb method of determining water ab- ported by the inner receptacle.
sorption, is not greater than 155 grams (6) Intermediate IBCs of type 31HZ2
per square meter (0.0316 pounds per must be limited to a capacity of not
square foot)—see ISO 535 (E) (IBR, see more than 1,250 L.
§ 171.7 of this subchapter). Fiberboard (d) Composite IBCs may not have a
must have proper bending qualities. Fi- volumetric capacity greater than 3,000
berboard must be cut, creased without L (793 gallons) or less than 450 L (119
cutting through any thickness of fiber- gallons).
board, and slotted so as to permit as-
sembly without cracking, surface [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as
breaks, or undue bending. The fluting amended by Amdt. 178–119, 62 FR 24743, May
of corrugated fiberboard must be firm- 6, 1997; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61016,
ly glued to the facings. Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR
54046, Sept. 7, 2004; 75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010]
(B) The ends of fiberboard outer
packagings may have a wooden frame § 178.708 Standards for fiberboard
or be constructed entirely of wood. IBCs.
Wooden battens may be used for rein-
forcements. (a) The provisions of this section
(C) Manufacturers’ joints in the bod- apply to fiberboard IBCs intended to
ies of outer packagings must be taped, contain solids that are loaded or dis-
lapped and glued, or lapped and charged by gravity. Fiberboard IBCs
stitched with metal staples. are designated: 11G.
(D) Lapped joints must have an ap- (b) Definitions for fiberboard IBC
propriate overlap. types:
(E) Where closing is effected by glu- (1) Fiberboard IBCs consist of a fiber-
ing or taping, a water-resistant adhe- board body with or without separate
sive must be used. top and bottom caps, appropriate serv-

(F) All closures must be sift-proof. ice and structural equipment, and if
(v) Outer packagings of plastic mate- necessary an inner liner (but no inner
rials must be constructed in accord- packaging).
231
§ 178.709 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(2) Liner means a separate tube or ical handling of an IBC filled to its
bag, including the closures of its open- maximum permissible gross mass.
ings, inserted in the body but not form- (i) The pallet or integral base must
ing an integral part of it. be designed to avoid protrusions that
(c) Construction requirements for fi- may cause damage to the IBC in han-
berboard IBCs are as follows: dling.
(1) Top lifting devices are prohibited (ii) The outer packaging must be se-
in fiberboard IBCs. cured to any detachable pallet to en-
(2) Fiberboard IBCs must be con- sure stability in handling and trans-
structed of strong, solid or double- port. Where a detachable pallet is used,
faced corrugated fiberboard (single or its top surface must be free from sharp
multiwall) that is appropriate to the protrusions that might damage the
capacity of the outer packaging and its IBC.
intended use. Water resistance of the (iii) Strengthening devices, such as
timber supports to increase stacking
outer surface must be such that the in-
performance, may be used but must be
crease in mass, as determined in a test
external to the inner liner.
carried out over a period of 30 minutes
(iv) The load-bearing surfaces of IBCs
by the Cobb method of determining
intended for stacking must be designed
water absorption, is not greater than
to distribute loads in a stable manner.
155 grams per square meter (0.0316
(d) Fiberboard IBCs may not have a
pounds per square foot)—see ISO 535 (E) volumetric capacity greater than 3,000
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). Fi- L (793 gallons) or less than 450 L (119
berboard must have proper bending gallons).
qualities. Fiberboard must be cut,
creased without cutting through any [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as
thickness of fiberboard, and slotted so amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR
75758, Dec. 31, 2003; 75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010]
as to permit assembly without crack-
ing, surface breaks, or undue bending. § 178.709 Standards for wooden IBCs.
The fluting of corrugated fiberboard
must be firmly glued to the facings. (a) The provisions in this section
apply to wooden IBCs intended to con-
(i) The walls, including top and bot-
tain solids that are loaded or dis-
tom, must have a minimum puncture
charged by gravity. Wooden IBC types
resistance of 15 Joules (11 foot-pounds
are designated:
of energy) measured according to ISO
(1) 11C Natural wood with inner liner.
3036 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). (2) 11D Plywood with inner liner.
(ii) Manufacturers’ joints in the bod- (3) 11F Reconstituted wood with
ies of IBCs must be made with an ap- inner liner.
propriate overlap and be taped, glued, (b) Definitions for wooden IBCs:
stitched with metal staples or fastened (1) Wooden IBCs consist of a rigid or
by other means at least equally effec- collapsible wooden body together with
tive. Where joints are made by gluing an inner liner (but no inner packaging)
or taping, a water-resistant adhesive and appropriate service and structural
must be used. Metal staples must pass equipment.
completely through all pieces to be fas- (2) Liner means a separate tube or
tened and be formed or protected so bag, including the closures of its open-
that any inner liner cannot be abraded ings, inserted in the body but not form-
or punctured by them. ing an integral part of it.
(3) The strength of the material used (c) Construction requirements for
and the construction of the liner must wooden IBCs are as follows:
be appropriate to the capacity of the (1) Top lifting devices are prohibited
IBC and the intended use. Joints and in wooden IBCs.
closures must be sift-proof and capable (2) The strength of the materials used
of withstanding pressures and impacts and the method of construction must
liable to occur under normal conditions be appropriate to the capacity and in-
of handling and transport. tended use of the IBC.

(4) Any integral pallet base forming (i) Natural wood used in the con-
part of an IBC, or any detachable pal- struction of an IBC must be well-sea-
let, must be suitable for the mechan- soned, commercially dry, and free from
232
defects that would materially lessen used, its top surface must be free from
the strength of any part of the IBC. sharp protrusions that might damage
Each IBC part must consist of uncut the IBC.
wood or a piece equivalent in strength (iii) Strengthening devices, such as
and integrity. IBC parts are equivalent timber supports to increase stacking
to one piece when a suitable method of performance, may be used but must be
glued assembly is used (i.e., a external to the inner liner.
Lindermann joint, tongue and groove (iv) The load-bearing surfaces of IBCs
joint, ship lap or rabbet joint, or butt intended for stacking must be designed
joint with at least two corrugated to distribute loads in a stable manner.
metal fasteners at each joint, or when (d) Wooden IBCs may not have a vol-
other methods at least equally effec- umetric capacity greater than 3,000 L
tive are used). Materials other than (793 gallons) or less than 450 L (119 gal-
natural wood may be used for the con- lons).
struction of structural equipment of [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as
the outer packaging. amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 75 FR
(ii) Plywood used in construction of 5397, Feb. 2, 2010]
bodies must be at least 3-ply. Plywood
must be made of well-seasoned, rotary- § 178.710 Standards for flexible IBCs.
cut, sliced or sawn veneer, commer- (a) The provisions of this section
cially dry, and free from defects that apply to flexible IBCs intended to con-
would materially lessen the strength of tain solid hazardous materials. Flexi-
the body. All adjacent plies must be ble IBC types are designated:
glued with water-resistant adhesive. (1) 13H1 woven plastic without coat-
Materials other than plywood may be ing or liner.
used for the construction of structural (2) 13H2 woven plastic, coated.
equipment of the outer packaging. (3) 13H3 woven plastic with liner.
(iii) Reconstituted wood used in con- (4) 13H4 woven plastic, coated and
struction of bodies must be water re- with liner.
sistant reconstituted wood such as (5) 13H5 plastic film.
hardboard or particle board. Materials (6) 13L1 textile without coating or
other than reconstituted wood may be liner.
used for the construction of structural (7) 13L2 textile, coated.
equipment of the outer packaging. (8) 13L3 textile with liner.
(iv) Wooden IBCs must be firmly (9) 13L4 textile, coated and with
nailed or secured to corner posts or liner.
ends or be assembled by similar de- (10) 13M1 paper, multiwall.
vices. (11) 13M2 paper, multiwall, water re-
(3) The strength of the material used sistant.
and the construction of the liner must (b) Definitions for flexible IBCs:
be appropriate to the capacity of the (1) Flexible IBCs consist of a body con-
IBC and its intended use. Joints and structed of film, woven plastic, woven
closures must be sift-proof and capable fabric, paper, or combination thereof,
of withstanding pressures and impacts together with any appropriate service
liable to occur under normal conditions equipment and handling devices, and if
of handling and transportation. necessary, an inner coating or liner.
(4) Any integral pallet base forming (2) Woven plastic means a material
part of an IBC, or any detachable pal- made from stretched tapes or
let, must be suitable for the mechan- monofilaments.
ical handling of an IBC filled to its (3) Handling device means any sling,
maximum permissible gross mass. loop, eye, or frame attached to the
(i) The pallet or integral base must body of the IBC or formed from a con-
be designed to avoid protrusions that tinuation of the IBC body material.
may cause damage to the IBC in han- (c) Construction requirements for
dling. flexible IBCs are as follows:
(ii) The outer packaging must be se- (1) The strength of the material and
cured to any detachable pallet to en- the construction of the flexible IBC
sure stability in handling and transpor- must be appropriate to its capacity and
tation. Where a detachable pallet is its intended use.
233
§ 178.800 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(2) All materials used in the con- (2) Must be designed and tested to a
struction of flexible IBCs of types 13M1 capacity of no less than 50 kg (110
and 13M2 must, after complete immer- pounds).
sion in water for not less than 24 hours, [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as
retain at least 85 percent of the tensile amended by Amdt. 178–108, 60 FR 40038, Aug.
strength as measured originally on the 4, 1995; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 75 FR 5397,
material conditioned to equilibrium at Feb. 2, 2010]
67 percent relative humidity or less.
(3) Seams must be stitched or formed Subpart O—Testing of IBCs
by heat sealing, gluing or any equiva-
lent method. All stitched seam-ends § 178.800 Purpose and scope.
must be secured. This subpart prescribes certain test-
(4) In addition to conformance with ing requirements for IBCs identified in
the requirements of § 173.24 of this sub- subpart N of this part.
chapter, flexible IBCs must be resistant [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as
to aging and degradation caused by ul- amended by 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
traviolet radiation.
(5) For plastic flexible IBCs, if nec- § 178.801 General requirements.
essary, protection against ultraviolet (a) General. The test procedures pre-
radiation must be provided by the addi- scribed in this subpart are intended to
tion of pigments or inhibitors such as ensure that IBCs containing hazardous
carbon black. These additives must be materials can withstand normal condi-
compatible with the contents and re- tions of transportation and are consid-
main effective throughout the life of ered minimum requirements. Each
the container. Where use is made of packaging must be manufactured and
carbon black, pigments, or inhibitors, assembled so as to be capable of suc-
other than those used in the manufac- cessfully passing the prescribed tests
ture of the tested design type, re- and of conforming to the requirements
testing may be omitted if the carbon of § 173.24 of this subchapter at all
times while in transportation.
black content, the pigment content or
(b) Responsibility. It is the responsi-
the inhibitor content does not ad-
bility of the IBC manufacturer to as-
versely affect the physical properties
sure that each IBC is capable of passing
of the material of construction. Addi- the prescribed tests. To the extent that
tives may be included in the composi- an IBC assembly function, including
tion of the plastic material to improve final closure, is performed by the per-
resistance to aging, provided they do son who offers a hazardous material for
not adversely affect the physical or transportation, that person is respon-
chemical properties of the material. sible for performing the function in ac-
(6) No used material other than pro- cordance with §§ 173.22 and 178.2 of this
duction residues or regrind from the subchapter.
same manufacturing process may be (c) Definitions. For the purpose of this
used in the manufacture of plastic subpart:
flexible IBCs. This does not preclude (1) IBC design type refers to an IBC
the re-use of component parts such as that does not differ in structural de-
fittings and pallet bases, provided such sign, size, material of construction,
components have not in any way been wall thickness, manner of construction
damaged in previous use. and representative service equipment.
(7) When flexible IBCs are filled, the (2) Design qualification testing is the
ratio of height to width may not be performance of the drop, leakproofness,
more than 2:1. hydrostatic pressure, stacking, bot-
tom-lift or top-lift, tear, topple, right-
(d) Flexible IBCs: (1) May not have a
ing and vibration tests, as applicable,
volumetric capacity greater than 3,000
prescribed in this subpart, for each dif-
L (793 gallons) or less than 56 L (15 gal- ferent IBC design type, at the start of
lons); and production of that packaging.
(3) Periodic design requalification test is
the performance of the applicable tests
234
specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this sec- shall achieve successful test results for
tion on an IBC design type, in order to the periodic design requalification at
requalify the design for continued pro- sufficient frequency to ensure each
duction at the frequency specified in packaging produced by the manufac-
paragraph (e) of this section. turer is capable of passing the design
(4) Production inspection is the inspec- qualification tests. Design requalifica-
tion that must initially be conducted tion tests must be conducted at least
on each newly manufactured IBC. once every 12 months.
(5) Production testing is the perform- (2) Changes in the frequency of design
ance of the leakproofness test in ac- requalification testing specified in
cordance with paragraph (f) of this sec- paragraph (e)(1) of this section are au-
tion on each IBC intended to contain thorized if approved by the Associate
solids discharged by pressure or in- Administrator. These requests must be
tended to contain liquids. based on:
(6) Periodic retest and inspection is per- (i) Detailed quality assurance pro-
formance of the applicable test and in- grams that assure that proposed de-
spections on each IBC at the frequency creases in test frequency maintain the
specified in § 180.352 of this subchapter. integrity of originally tested IBC de-
(7) Different IBC design type is one sign types; and
that differs from a previously qualified (ii) Demonstrations that each IBC
IBC design type in structural design, produced is capable of withstanding
size, material of construction, wall higher standards (e.g., increased drop
thickness, or manner of construction, height, hydrostatic pressure, wall
but does not include: thickness, fabric weight).
(i) A packaging which differs in sur- (f) Production testing and inspection.
face treatment; (1) Production testing consists of the
(ii) A rigid plastic IBC or composite leakproofness test prescribed in
IBC which differs with regard to addi- § 178.813 of this subpart and must be
tives used to comply with §§ 178.706(c), performed on each IBC intended to con-
178.707(c) or 178.710(c); tain solids discharged by pressure or
(iii) A packaging which differs only intended to contain liquids. For this
in its lesser external dimensions (i.e., test:
height, width, length) provided mate- (i) The IBC need not have its closures
rials of construction and material fitted, except that the IBC must be
thicknesses or fabric weight remain fitted with its primary bottom closure.
the same; (ii) The inner receptacle of a com-
(iv) A packaging which differs in posite IBC may be tested without the
service equipment. outer IBC body, provided the test re-
(d) Design qualification testing. The sults are not affected.
packaging manufacturer shall achieve (2) Applicable inspection require-
successful test results for the design ments in § 180.352 of this subchapter
qualification testing at the start of must be performed on each IBC ini-
production of each new or different IBC tially after production.
design type. The service equipment se- (g) Test samples. The IBC manufac-
lected for this design qualification turer shall conduct the design quali-
testing shall be representative of the fication and periodic design requali-
type of service equipment that will be fication tests prescribed in this subpart
fitted to any finished IBC body under using random samples of IBCs, accord-
the design. Application of the certifi- ing to the appropriate test section.
cation mark by the manufacturer shall (h) Selective testing of IBCs. Variation
constitute certification that the IBC of a tested IBC design type is permitted
design type passed the prescribed tests without further testing, provided selec-
in this subpart. tive testing demonstrates an equiva-
(e) Periodic design requalification test- lent or greater level of safety than the
ing. (1) Periodic design requalification design type tested and which has been
must be conducted on each qualified approved by the Associate Adminis-

IBC design type if the manufacturer is trator.
to maintain authorization for contin- (i) Approval of equivalent packagings.
ued production. The IBC manufacturer An IBC differing from the standards in
235
§ 178.802 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
subpart N of this part, or tested using tive service equipment, etc.); max-
methods other than those specified in imum IBC capacity; characteristics of
this subpart, may be used if approved test contents; test descriptions and re-
by the Associate Administrator. Such sults (including drop heights, hydro-
IBCs must be shown to be equally effec- static pressures, tear propagation
tive, and testing methods used must be length, etc.). Each test report must be
equivalent. signed with the name of the person
(j) Proof of compliance. Notwith- conducting the test, and name of the
standing the periodic design requali- person responsible for testing.
fication testing intervals specified in (2) The person who certifies each IBC
paragraph (e) of this section, the Asso- must make all records of design quali-
ciate Administrator, or a designated fication tests and periodic design re-
representative, may at any time requalification tests available for inspec-
quire demonstration of compliance by tion by a representative of the Depart-
a manufacturer, through testing in ac- ment upon request.
cordance with this subpart, that pack-
[Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as
agings meet the requirements of this
amended by Amdt. 178–108, 60 FR 40038, Aug.
subpart. As required by the Associate 4, 1995; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 66 FR 33452,
Administrator, or a designated rep- June 21, 2001; 68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003; 73 FR
resentative, the manufacturer shall ei- 57008, Oct. 1, 2008; 74 FR 2269, Jan. 14, 2009; 75
ther: FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010]
(1) Conduct performance tests or
have tests conducted by an inde- § 178.802 Preparation of fiberboard
pendent testing facility, in accordance IBCs for testing.
with this subpart; or (a) Fiberboard IBCs and composite
(2) Make a sample IBC available to IBCs with fiberboard outer packagings
the Associate Administrator, or a des- must be conditioned for at least 24
ignated representative, for testing in hours in an atmosphere maintained:
accordance with this subpart. (1) At 50 percent ±2 percent relative
(k) Coatings. If an inner treatment or humidity, and at a temperature of 23°
coating of an IBC is required for safety ±2 °C (73 °F ±4 °F); or
reasons, the manufacturer shall design (2) At 65 percent ±2 percent relative
the IBC so that the treatment or coat- humidity, and at a temperature of 20°
ing retains its protective properties ±2 °C (68 °F ±4 °F), or 27 °C ±2 °C (81 °F
even after withstanding the tests pre- ±4 °F).
scribed by this subpart. (b) Average values for temperature
(l) Record retention. (1) The person and humidity must fall within the lim-
who certifies an IBC design type shall its in paragraph (a) of this section.
keep records of design qualification Short-term fluctuations and measure-
tests for each IBC design type and for ment limitations may cause individual
each periodic design requalification as measurements to vary by up to ±5 per-
specified in this part. These records cent relative humidity without signifi-
must be maintained at each location cant impairment of test reproduc-
where the IBC is manufactured and at ibility.
each location where design qualifica-
(c) For purposes of periodic design re-
tion and periodic design requalification
qualification only, fiberboard IBCs or
testing is performed. These records
composite IBCs with fiberboard outer
must be maintained for as long as IBCs
packagings may be at ambient condi-
are manufactured in accordance with
tions.
each qualified design type and for at
least 2.5 years thereafter. These [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as
records must include the following in- amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
formation: name and address of test fa-
cility; name and address of the person § 178.803 Testing and certification of
certifying the IBC; a unique test report IBCs.
identification; date of test report; man- Tests required for the certification of
ufacturer of the IBC; description of the each IBC design type are specified in
IBC design type (e.g., dimensions, ma- the following table. The letter X indi-
terials, closures, thickness, representa- cates that one IBC (except where
236
noted) of each design type must be sub-

jected to the tests in the order pre-
sented:
IBC type
Performance test Rigid plastic Composite Fiber-board
Metal IBCs Wooden IBCs Flexible IBCs
IBCs IBCs IBCs
Vibration ........................ 6 X 6 X 6 X 6X 6X 1.5 X

Bottom lift ...................... 2 X X X X X
Top lift ........................... 2 X 2 X 2 X 2,5 X
Stacking ......................... 7 X 7 X 7 X 7 X 7 X 5 X
Leakproofness ............... 3 X 3 X 3 X
Hydrostatic .................... 3 X 3 X 3 X
Drop ............................... 4 X 4 X 4 X 4 X 4 X 5 X
Topple ........................... 5 X
Righting ......................... 2,5 X
Tear ............................... 5 X
1 Flexible IBCs must be capable of withstanding the vibration test.
2 This test must be performed only if IBCs are designed to be handled this way. For metal IBCs, at least one of the bottom lift
or top lift tests must be performed.
3 The leakproofness and hydrostatic pressure tests are required only for IBCs intended to contain liquids or intended to contain
solids loaded or discharged under pressure.
4 Another IBC of the same design type may be used for the drop test set forth in § 178.810 of this subchapter.
5 Another different flexible IBC of the same design type may be used for each test.
6 The vibration test may be performed in another order for IBCs manufactured and tested under provisions of an exemption be-
fore October 1, 1994 and for non-DOT specification portable tanks tested before October 1, 1994, intended for export.
7 This test must be performed only if the IBC is designed to be stacked.
[Amdt. 178–108, 60 FR 40039, Aug. 4, 1995, as amended at 64 FR 51919, Sept. 27, 1999; 66 FR 45386,
45390, Aug. 28, 2001]
§ 178.810 Drop test. freeze solutions with a minimum spe-

(a) General. The drop test must be cific gravity of 0.95 for testing at ¥18
conducted for the qualification of all °C (0 °F) or lower are considered ac-
IBC design types and performed peri- ceptable test liquids, and may be con-
odically as specified in § 178.801(e) of sidered equivalent to water for test
this subpart. purposes. IBCs conditioned in this way
(b) Special preparation for the drop test. are not required to be conditioned in
(1) Metal, rigid plastic, and composite accordance with § 178.802.
IBCs intended to contain solids must (c) Test method. (1) Samples of all IBC
be filled to not less than 95 percent of design types must be dropped onto a
their maximum capacity, or if intended rigid, non-resilient, smooth, flat and
to contain liquids, to not less than 98 horizontal surface. The point of impact
percent of their maximum capacity. must be the most vulnerable part of
Pressure relief devices must be re- the base of the IBC being tested. Fol-
moved and their apertures plugged or lowing the drop, the IBC must be re-
rendered inoperative. stored to the upright position for ob-
(2) Fiberboard and wooden IBCs must servation.
be filled with a solid material to not (2) IBC design types with a capacity
less than 95 percent of their maximum of 0.45 cubic meters (15.9 cubic feet) or
capacity; the contents must be evenly less must be subject to an additional
distributed. drop test.
(3) Flexible IBCs must be filled to the (d) Drop height. (1) For all IBCs, drop
maximum permissible gross mass; the heights are specified as follows:
contents must be evenly distributed. (i) Packing Group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet).
(4) Rigid plastic IBCs and composite (ii) Packing Group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet).
IBCs with plastic inner receptacles (iii) Packing Group III: 0.8 m (2.6
must be conditioned for testing by re- feet).
ducing the temperature of the pack- (2) Drop tests are to be performed
aging and its contents to ¥18 °C (0 °F) with the solid or liquid to be trans-
or lower. Test liquids must be kept in ported or with a non-hazardous mate-
the liquid state, if necessary, by the rial having essentially the same phys-
addition of anti-freeze. Water/anti- ical characteristics.
237
§ 178.811 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(3) The specific gravity and viscosity the dimension of the side of entry (un-
of a substituted non-hazardous mate- less the points of entry are fixed). The
rial used in the drop test for liquids forks must penetrate to three quarters
must be similar to the hazardous mate- of the direction of entry. The test must
rial intended for transportation. Water be repeated from each possible direc-
also may be used for the liquid drop tion of entry.
test under the following conditions: (d) Criteria for passing the test. For all
(i) Where the substances to be carried IBC design types designed to be lifted
have a specific gravity not exceeding from the base, there may be no perma-
1.2, the drop heights must be those nent deformation which renders the
specified in paragraph (d)(1) of this sec- IBC unsafe for transportation and no
tion for each IBC design type; and loss of contents.
(ii) Where the substances to be car- [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as
ried have a specific gravity exceeding amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
1.2, the drop heights must be as fol-
lows: § 178.812 Top lift test.
(A) Packing Group I: SG × 1.5 m (4.9 (a) General. The top lift test must be
feet). conducted for the qualification of all
(B) Packing Group II: SG × 1.0 m (3.3 IBC design types designed to be lifted
feet). from the top or, for flexible IBCs, from
(C) Packing Group III: SG × 0.67 m the side.
(2.2 feet). (b) Special preparation for the top lift
(e) Criteria for passing the test. For all test. (1) Metal, rigid plastic, and com-
IBC design types, there may be no dam- posite IBC design types must be loaded
age which renders the IBC unsafe to be to twice the maximum permissible
transported for salvage or for dispos- gross mass with the load being evenly
able, and no loss of contents. The IBC distributed.
shall be capable of being lifted by an (2) Flexible IBC design types must be
appropriate means until clear of the filled to six times the maximum net
floor for five minutes. A slight dis- mass, the load being evenly distrib-
charge from a closure upon impact is uted.
not considered to be a failure of the (c) Test method. (1) A metal or flexible
IBC provided that no further leakage IBC must be lifted in the manner for
occurs. A slight discharge (e.g., from which it is designed until clear of the
closures or stitch holes) upon impact is floor and maintained in that position
not considered a failure of the flexible for a period of five minutes.
IBC provided that no further leakage (2) Rigid plastic and composite IBC
occurs after the IBC has been raised design types must be:
clear of the ground. (i) Lifted by each pair of diagonally
[Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as opposite lifting devices, so that the
amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 69 FR hoisting forces are applied vertically,
76186, Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 78635, Dec. 29, 2006; for a period of five minutes; and
74 FR 2269, Jan. 14, 2009; 75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, (ii) Lifted by each pair of diagonally
2010] opposite lifting devices, so that the
hoisting forces are applied towards the
§ 178.811 Bottom lift test. center at 45° to the vertical, for a pe-
(a) General. The bottom lift test must riod of five minutes.
be conducted for the qualification of (3) If not tested as indicated in para-
all IBC design types designed to be lift- graph (c)(1) of this section, a flexible
ed from the base. IBC design type must be tested as fol-
(b) Special preparation for the bottom lows:
lift test. The IBC must be loaded to 1.25 (i) Fill the flexible IBC to 95% full
times its maximum permissible gross with a material representative of the
mass, the load being evenly distrib- product to be shipped.
uted. (ii) Suspend the flexible IBC by its
(c) Test method. All IBC design types lifting devices.

must be raised and lowered twice by a (iii) Apply a constant downward force
lift truck with the forks centrally posi- through a specially designed platen.
tioned and spaced at three quarters of The platen will be a minimum of 60%
238
and a maximum of 80% of the cross sec- tain solids that are loaded or dis-
tional surface area of the flexible IBC. charged under pressure or intended to
(iv) The combination of the mass of contain liquids, there may be no leak-
the filled flexible IBC and the force ap- age of air from the IBC.
plied through the platen must be a [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as
minimum of six times the maximum amended at 64 FR 10782, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR
net mass of the flexible IBC. The test 45185, 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
must be conducted for a period of five
minutes. § 178.814 Hydrostatic pressure test.
(v) Other equally effective methods (a) General. The hydrostatic pressure
of top lift testing and preparation may test must be conducted for the quali-
be used with approval of the Associate fication of all metal, rigid plastic, and
Administrator. composite IBC design types intended to
(d) Criteria for passing the test. For all contain solids that are loaded or dis-
IBC design types designed to be lifted charged under pressure or intended to
from the top, there may be no perma- contain liquids.
nent deformation which renders the (b) Special preparation for the hydro-
IBC, including the base pallets when static pressure test. For metal IBCs, the
applicable, unsafe for transportation, test must be carried out before the fit-
and no loss of contents. ting of any thermal insulation equip-
[Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as ment. For all IBCs, pressure relief de-
amended at 66 FR 33452, June 21, 2001; 66 FR vices and vented closures must be re-
45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45042, July 31, 2003] moved and their apertures plugged or
rendered inoperative.
§ 178.813 Leakproofness test. (c) Test method. Hydrostatic gauge
(a) General. The leakproofness test pressure must be measured at the top
must be conducted for the qualification of the IBC. The test must be carried
of all IBC design types and on all pro- out for a period of at least 10 minutes
duction units intended to contain sol- applying a hydrostatic gauge pressure
ids that are loaded or discharged under not less than that indicated in para-
pressure or intended to contain liquids. graph (d) of this section. The IBCs may
(b) Special preparation for the not be mechanically restrained during
leakproofness test. Vented closures must the test.
either be replaced by similar non-vent- (d) Hydrostatic gauge pressure applied.
ed closures or the vent must be sealed. (1) For metal IBC design types, 31A,
For metal IBC design types, the initial 31B, 31N: 65 kPa gauge pressure (9.4
test must be carried out before the fit- psig).
ting of any thermal insulation equip- (2) For metal IBC design types 21A,
ment. The inner receptacle of a com- 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B, 31N: 200 kPa (29
posite IBC may be tested without the psig). For metal IBC design types 31A,
outer packaging provided the test re- 31B and 31N, the tests in paragraphs
sults are not affected. (d)(1) and (d)(2) of this section must be
(c) Test method and pressure applied. conducted consecutively.
The leakproofness test must be carried (3) For metal IBCs design types 21A,
out for a suitable length of time using 21B, and 21N, for Packing Group I sol-
air at a gauge pressure of not less than ids: 250 kPa (36 psig) gauge pressure.
20 kPa (2.9 psig). Leakproofness of IBC (4) For rigid plastic IBC design types
design types must be determined by 21H1 and 21H2 and composite IBC de-
coating the seams and joints with a sign types 21HZ1 and 21HZ2: 75 kPa (11
heavy oil, a soap solution and water, or psig).
other methods suitable for the purpose (5) For rigid plastic IBC design types
of detecting leaks. Other methods, if at 31H1 and 31H2 and composite IBC de-
least equally effective, may be used in sign types 31HZ1 and 31HZ2: whichever
accordance with appendix B of this is the greater of:
part, or if approved by the Associate (i) The pressure determined by any
Administrator, as provided in one of the following methods:

§ 178.801(i)). (A) The gauge pressure (pressure in
(d) Criterion for passing the test. For the IBC above ambient atmospheric
all IBC design types intended to con- pressure) measured in the IBC at 55 °C
239
§ 178.815 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(131 °F) multiplied by a safety factor of sign types must be loaded to their max-
1.5. This pressure must be determined imum permissible gross mass.
on the basis of the IBC being filled and (2) The flexible IBC must be filled to
closed to no more than 98 percent ca- not less than 95 percent of its capacity
pacity at 15 °C (60 °F); and to its maximum net mass, with the
(B) If absolute pressure (vapor pres- load being evenly distributed.
sure of the hazardous material plus at- (c) Test method. (1) Design Qualifica-
mospheric pressure) is used, 1.5 multi- tion Testing. All IBCs must be placed on
plied by the vapor pressure of the haz- their base on level, hard ground and
ardous material at 55 °C (131 °F) minus subjected to a uniformly distributed
100 kPa (14.5 psi). If this method is cho- superimposed test load for a period of
sen, the hydrostatic test pressure ap- at least five minutes (see paragraph
plied must be at least 100 kPa gauge (c)(5) of this section).
pressure (14.5 psig); or (2) Fiberboard, wooden and composite
(C) If absolute pressure (vapor pres- IBCs with outer packagings con-
sure of the hazardous material plus at- structed of other than plastic mate-
mospheric pressure) is used, 1.75 multi- rials must be subject to the test for 24
plied by the vapor pressure of the haz- hours.
ardous material at 50 °C (122 °F) minus (3) Rigid plastic IBC types and com-
100 kPa (14.5 psi). If this method is cho- posite IBC types with plastic outer
sen, the hydrostatic test pressure ap- packagings (11HH1, 11HH2, 21HH1,
plied must be at least 100 kPa gauge 21HH2, 31HH1 and 31HH2) which bear
pressure (14.5 psig); or the stacking load must be subjected to
(ii) Twice the greater of: (A) The the test for 28 days at 40 °C (104 °F).
static pressure of the hazardous mate- (4) For all IBCs, the load must be ap-
rial on the bottom of the IBC filled to plied by one of the following methods:
98 percent capacity; or (i) One or more IBCs of the same type
(B) The static pressure of water on loaded to their maximum permissible
the bottom of the IBC filled to 98 per- gross mass and stacked on the test
cent capacity. IBC;
(e) Criteria for passing the test(s). (1) (ii) The calculated superimposed test
For metal IBCs, subjected to the 65 load weight loaded on either a flat
kPa (9.4 psig) test pressure specified in plate or a reproduction of the base of
paragraph (d)(1) of this section, there the IBC, which is stacked on the test
may be no leakage or permanent defor- IBC.
mation that would make the IBC un- (5) Calculation of superimposed test
safe for transportation. load. For all IBCs, the load to be placed
(2) For metal IBCs intended to con- on the IBC must be 1.8 times the com-
tain liquids, when subjected to the 200 bined maximum permissible gross mass
kPa (29 psig) and the 250 kPa (36 psig) of the number of similar IBCs that may
test pressures specified in paragraphs be stacked on top of the IBC during
(d)(2) and (d)(3) of this section, respec- transportation.
tively, there may be no leakage. (d) Periodic Retest. (1) The package
(3) For rigid plastic IBC types 21H1, must be tested in accordance with
21H2, 31H1, and 31H2, and composite paragraph (c) of this section; or
IBC types 21HZ1, 21HZ2, 31HZ1, and (2) The packaging may be tested
31HZ2, there may be no leakage and no using a dynamic compression testing
permanent deformation which renders machine. The test must be conducted
the IBC unsafe for transportation. at room temperature on an empty, un-
[Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as sealed packaging. The test sample
amended at 66 FR 45185, 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] must be centered on the bottom platen
of the testing machine. The top platen
§ 178.815 Stacking test. must be lowered until it comes in con-
(a) General. The stacking test must tact with the test sample. Compression
be conducted for the qualification of must be applied end to end. The speed
all IBC design types intended to be of the compression tester must be one-
stacked. half inch plus or minus one-fourth inch
(b) Special preparation for the stacking per minute. An initial preload of 50
test. (1) All IBCs except flexible IBC de- pounds must be applied to ensure a
240
definite contact between the test sam- not less than 95 percent of its capacity
ple and the platens. The distance be- and to its maximum net mass, with the
tween the platens at this time must be load being evenly distributed.
recorded as zero deformation. The force (c) Test method. A flexible IBC must
‘‘A’’ then to be applied must be cal- be toppled onto any part of its top
culated using the applicable formula: upon a rigid, non-resilient, smooth,
Liquids: A = (1.8)(n – 1) [w + (s × v × 8.3 flat, and horizontal surface.
× .98)] × 1.5; (d) Topple height. For all flexible
IBCs, the topple height is specified as
or follows:
Solids: A = (1.8)(n – 1) [w + (s × v × 8.3 (1) Packing Group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet).
× .95)] × 1.5 (2) Packing Group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet).
(3) Packing Group III: 0.8 m (2.6 feet).
Where:
(e) Criteria for passing the test. For all
A = applied load in pounds.
n = maximum number of IBCs being stacked
flexible IBCs, there may be no loss of
during transportation. contents. A slight discharge (e.g., from
w = maximum weight of one empty container closures or stitch holes) upon impact is
in pounds. not considered to be a failure, provided
s = specific gravity (liquids) or density (sol- no further leakage occurs.
ids) of the lading.
v = actual capacity of container (rated ca- [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as
pacity + outage) in gallons. amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
and:
8.3 corresponds to the weight in pounds of 1.0 § 178.817 Righting test.
gallon of water. (a) General. The righting test must be
1.5 is a compensation factor converting the conducted for the qualification of all
static load of the stacking test into a load
flexible IBCs designed to be lifted from
suitable for dynamic compression testing.
the top or side.
(e) Criteria for passing the test. (1) For (b) Special preparation for the righting
metal, rigid plastic, and composite test. The flexible IBC must be filled to
IBCs, there may be no permanent de- not less than 95 percent of its capacity
formation, which renders the IBC un- and to its maximum net mass, with the
safe for transportation, and no loss of load being evenly distributed.
contents. (c) Test method. The flexible IBC,
(2) For fiberboard and wooden IBCs, lying on its side, must be lifted at a
there may be no loss of contents and no speed of at least 0.1 m/second (0.33 ft/s)
permanent deformation, which renders to an upright position, clear of the
the whole IBC, including the base pal- floor, by one lifting device, or by two
let, unsafe for transportation. lifting devices when four are provided.
(3) For flexible IBCs, there may be no (d) Criterion for passing the test. For
deterioration, which renders the IBC all flexible IBCs, there may be no dam-
unsafe for transportation, and no loss age to the IBC or its lifting devices
of contents. which renders the IBC unsafe for trans-
(4) For the dynamic compression portation or handling.
test, a container passes the test if,
[Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as
after application of the required load,
amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
there is no permanent deformation to
the IBC, which renders the whole IBC, § 178.818 Tear test.
including the base pallet, unsafe for
(a) General. The tear test must be
transportation; in no case may the
conducted for the qualification of all
maximum deflection exceed one inch.
flexible IBC design types.
[75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010] (b) Special preparation for the tear test.
The flexible IBC must be filled to not
§ 178.816 Topple test. less than 95 percent of its capacity and
(a) General. The topple test must be to its maximum net mass, the load
conducted for the qualification of all being evenly distributed.

flexible IBC design types. (c) Test method. Once the IBC is
(b) Special preparation for the topple placed on the ground, a 100-mm (4-inch)
test. The flexible IBC must be filled to knife score, completely penetrating the
241
§ 178.819 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
wall of a wide face, is made at a 45° (c) Criteria for passing the test. An IBC
angle to the principal axis of the IBC, passes the vibration test if there is no
halfway between the bottom surface rupture or leakage.
and the top level of the contents. The [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as
IBC must then be subjected to a uni- amended by Amdt. 178–108, 60 FR 40038, Aug.
formly distributed superimposed load 4, 1995; Amdt. 178–110, 60 FR 49111, Sept. 21,
equivalent to twice the maximum net 1995; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 75 FR 5397,
Feb. 2, 2010]
mass. The load must be applied for at
least five minutes. An IBC which is de-
signed to be lifted from the top or the Subpart P—Large Packagings
side must, after removal of the super- Standards
imposed load, be lifted clear of the
floor and maintained in that position SOURCE: 75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010, unless oth-
for a period of five minutes. erwise noted.
(d) Criterion for passing the test. The § 178.900 Purpose and scope.
IBC passes the tear test if the cut does
not propagate more than 25 percent of (a) This subpart prescribes require-
its original length. ments for Large Packaging intended
for the transportation of hazardous
[Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as materials. Standards for these pack-
amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] agings are based on the UN Rec-
ommendations.
§ 178.819 Vibration test. (b) Terms used in this subpart are de-
(a) General. The vibration test must fined in § 171.8 of this subchapter.
be conducted for the qualification of
§ 178.905 Large Packaging identifica-
all rigid IBC design types. Flexible IBC tion codes.
design types must be capable of with-
standing the vibration test. Large packaging code designations
consist of: two numerals specified in
(b) Test method. (1) A sample IBC, se-
paragraph (a) of this section; followed
lected at random, must be filled and
by the capital letter(s) specified in
closed as for shipment. IBCs intended paragraph (b) of this section.
for liquids may be tested using water (a) Large packaging code number
as the filling material for the vibration designations are as follows: 50 for rigid
test. Large Packagings; or 51 for flexible
(2) The sample IBC must be placed on Large Packagings.
a vibrating platform with a vertical or (b) Large Packagings code letter des-
rotary double-amplitude (peak-to-peak ignations are as follows:
displacement) of one inch. The IBC (1) ‘‘A’’ means steel (all types and
must be constrained horizontally to surface treatments).
prevent it from falling off the plat- (2) ‘‘B’’ means aluminum.
form, but must be left free to move (3) ‘‘C’’ means natural wood.
vertically and bounce. (4) ‘‘D’’ means plywood.
(3) The test must be performed for (5) ‘‘F’’ means reconstituted wood.
(6) ‘‘G’’ means fiberboard.
one hour at a frequency that causes the
(7) ‘‘H’’ means plastic.
package to be raised from the vibrating
(8) ‘‘M’’ means paper, multiwall.
platform to such a degree that a piece (9) ‘‘N’’ means metal (other than
of material of approximately 1.6-mm steel or aluminum).
(0.063-inch) thickness (such as steel
strapping or paperboard) can be passed § 178.910 Marking of Large Pack-
between the bottom of the IBC and the agings.
platform. Other methods at least (a) The manufacturer must:
equally effective may be used (see (1) Mark every Large Packaging in a
§ 178.801(i)). durable and clearly visible manner.
The marking may be applied in a single

line or in multiple lines provided the
correct sequence is followed with the
information required by this section.
242
The following information is required (C) Z—for Large Packagings meeting

in the sequence presented: Packing Group III test.
(i) Except as provided in (iv) The month (designated numeri-
§ 178.503(e)(1)(ii), the United Nations cally) and year (last two digits) of
packaging symbol as illustrated in manufacture;
§ 178.503(e)(1)(i). For metal Large Pack- (v) The country authorizing the allo-
agings on which the marking is cation of the mark. The letters ‘‘USA’’
stamped or embossed, the capital let- indicate that the Large Packaging is
ters ‘‘UN’’ may be applied instead of manufactured and marked in the
the symbol; United States in compliance with the
(ii) The code number designating the provisions of this subchapter.
Large Packaging design type according to
(vi) The name and address or symbol
§ 178.905. The letter ‘‘W’’ must follow
the Large Packaging design type iden-
tification code on a Large Packaging
part P and subpart Q of this part. Sym-
when the Large Packaging differs from
bols, if used, must be registered with
the requirements in subpart P of this
the Associate Administrator.
part, or is tested using methods other
than those specified in this subpart, (vii) The stacking test load in kilo-
and is approved by the Associate Ad- grams (kg). For Large Packagings not
ministrator in accordance with the designed for stacking the figure ‘‘0’’
provisions in § 178.955; must be shown.
(iii) A capital letter identifying the (viii) The maximum permissible
performance standard under which the gross mass or for flexible Large Pack-
design type has been successfully test- agings, the maximum net mass, in kg.
ed, as follows: (2) The following are examples of
(A) X—for Large Packagings meeting symbols and required markings:
Packing Groups I, II and III tests; (i) For a steel Large Packaging suit-
(B) Y—for Large Packagings meeting able for stacking; stacking load: 2,500
Packing Groups II and III tests; and kg; maximum gross mass: 1,000 kg.
(ii) For a plastic Large Packaging

not suitable for stacking; maximum
gross mass: 800 kg.
(iii) For a Flexible Large Packaging

not suitable for stacking; maximum

gross mass: 500 kg.
ER02FE10.004</GPH>
243
ER02FE10.003</GPH>
§ 178.915 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(b) [Reserved] tended to contain liquids and solids.

Metal Large Packaging types are des-
[75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR
60339, Sept. 30, 2010] ignated:
(1) 50A steel
§ 178.915 General Large Packaging (2) 50B aluminum
standards. (3) 50N metal (other than steel or alu-
(a) Each Large Packaging must be re- minum)
(b) Each Large Packaging must be
sistant to, or protected from, deterio-
made of suitable ductile metal mate-
ration due to exposure to the external
rials. Welds must be made so as to
environment. Large Packagings in-
maintain design type integrity of the
tended for solid hazardous materials
receptacle under conditions normally
must be sift-proof and water-resistant.
incident to transportation. Low-tem-
(b) All service equipment must be po-
perature performance must be taken
sitioned or protected to minimize po-
into account when appropriate.
tential loss of contents resulting from
(c) The use of dissimilar metals must
damage during Large Packaging han-
not result in deterioration that could
dling and transportation.
affect the integrity of the Large Pack-
(c) Each Large Packaging, including
aging.
attachments and service and structural
(d) Metal Large Packagings may not
equipment, must be designed to with-
have a volumetric capacity greater
stand, without loss of hazardous mate-
than 3,000 L (793 gallons) and not less
rials, the internal pressure of the con-
than 450 L (119 gallons).
tents and the stresses of normal han-
dling and transport. A Large Pack- § 178.925 Standards for rigid plastic
aging intended for stacking must be de- Large Packagings.
signed for stacking. Any lifting or se-
(a) The provisions in this section
curing features of a Large Packaging
apply to rigid plastic Large Packagings
must be sufficient strength to with-
intended to contain liquids and solids.
stand the normal conditions of han-
Rigid plastic Large Packaging types
dling and transportation without gross
are designated:
distortion or failure and must be posi-
(1) 50H rigid plastics.
tioned so as to cause no undue stress in (2) [Reserved]
any part of the Large Packaging. (b) A rigid plastic Large Packaging
(d) A Large Packaging consisting of must be manufactured from plastic
packagings within a framework must material of known specifications and
be so constructed that the packaging is be of a strength relative to its capacity
not damaged by the framework and is and to the service it is required to per-
retained within the framework at all form. In addition to conformance to
times. § 173.24 of this subchapter, plastic mate-
(e) Large Packaging design types rials must be resistant to aging and to
must be constructed in such a way as degradation caused by ultraviolet radi-
to be bottom-lifted or top-lifted as ation.
specified in §§ 178.970 and 178.975. (1) If protection against ultraviolet
[75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR radiation is necessary, it must be pro-
60339, Sept. 30, 2010] vided by the addition of a pigment or
inhibiter such as carbon black to plas-
§ 178.920 Standards for metal Large tic materials. These additives must be
Packagings. compatible with the contents and re-
(a) The provisions in this section main effective throughout the life of
apply to metal Large Packagings in- the plastic Large Packaging body.
244
ER02FE10.005</GPH>
Where use is made of carbon black, pig- The fluting or corrugated fiberboard
ments or inhibitors, other than those must be firmly glued to the facings.
used in the manufacture of the tested (i) The walls, including top and bot-
design type, retesting may be omitted tom, must have a minimum puncture
if changes in the carbon black content, resistance of 15 Joules (11 foot-pounds
the pigment content or the inhibitor of energy) measured according to ISO
content do not adversely affect the 3036 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter).
physical properties of the material of (ii) Manufacturers’ joints in the
construction. outer packaging of Large Packagings
(2) Additives may be included in the must be made with an appropriate
composition of the plastic material to overlap and be taped, glued, stitched
improve the resistance to aging or to with metal staples or fastened by other
serve other purposes, provided they do means at least equally effective. Where
not adversely affect the physical or joints are made by gluing or taping, a
chemical properties of the material of water resistant adhesive must be used.
construction. Metal staples must pass completely
(3) No used material other than pro- through all pieces to be fastened and be
duction residues or regrind from the formed or protected so that any inner
same manufacturing process may be liner cannot be abraded or punctured
used in the manufacture of rigid plastic by them.
Large Packagings. (2) Integral and detachable pallets. (i)
(c) Rigid plastic Large Packagings: Any integral pallet base forming part
(1) May not have a volumetric capac- of a Large Packaging or any detach-
ity greater than 3,000 L (793 gallons); able pallet must be suitable for me-
and chanical handling with the Large
(2) May not have a volumetric capac- Packaging filled to its maximum per-
ity less than 450 L (119 gallons). missible gross mass.
(ii) The pallet or integral base must
§ 178.930 Standards for fiberboard be designed to avoid protrusions caus-
Large Packagings. ing damage to the fiberboard Large
(a) The provisions in this section Packagings in handling.
apply to fiberboard Large Packagings (iii) The body must be secured to any
intended to contain solids. Rigid fiber- detached pallet to ensure stability in
board Large Packaging types are des- handling and transport. Where a de-
ignated: tachable pallet is used, its top surface
(1) 50G fiberboard must be free from protrusions that
(2) [Reserved] might damage the Large Packaging.
(b) Construction requirements for fiber- (3) Strengthening devices, such as
board Large Packagings. (1) Fiberboard timber supports to increase stacking
Large Packagings must be constructed performance may be used but must be
of strong, solid or double-faced cor- external to the liner.
rugated fiberboard (single or (4) The load-bearing surfaces of Large
multiwall) that is appropriate to the Packagings intended for stacking must
capacity of the Large Packagings and be designed to distribute the load in a
to their intended use. Water resistance stable manner.
of the outer surface must be such that (c) Fiberboard Large Packagings may
the increase in mass, as determined in not have a volumetric capacity greater
a test carried out over a period of 30 than 3,000 L (793 gallons) and not less
minutes by the Cobb method of deter- than 450 L (119 gallons).
mining water absorption, is not greater [75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR
than 155 grams per square meter (0.0316 60339, Sept. 30, 2010]
pounds per square foot)—see ISO 535 (E)
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). Fi- § 178.935 Standards for wooden Large
berboard must have proper bending Packagings.
qualities. Fiberboard must be cut, (a) The provisions in this section
creased without cutting through any apply to wooden Large Packagings in-
thickness of fiberboard, and slotted so tended to contain solids. Wooden Large
as to permit assembly without crack- Packaging types are designated:
ing, surface breaks or undue bending. (1) 50C natural wood.
245
§ 178.940 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(2) 50D plywood. handling and transportation. Where a

(3) 50F reconstituted wood. detachable pallet is used, its top sur-
(b) Construction requirements for face must be free from protrusions that
wooden Large Packagings are as fol- might damage the Large Packaging.
lows: (3) Strengthening devices, such as
(1) The strength of the materials used timber supports to increase stacking
and the method of construction must performance, may be used but must be
be appropriate to the capacity and in- external to the liner.
tended use of the Large Packagings. (4) The load bearing surfaces of the
(i) Natural wood used in the con- Large Packaging must be designed to
struction of Large Packagings must be distribute loads in a stable manner.
well-seasoned, commercially dry and (c) Wooden Large Packagings:
free from defects that would materially (1) May not have a volumetric capac-
lessen the strength of any part of the ity greater than 3,000 L (793 gallons);
Large Packagings. Each Large Pack- and
aging part must consist of uncut wood (2) May not have a volumetric capac-
or a piece equivalent in strength and ity less than 450 L (119 gallons).
integrity. Large Packagings parts are
equivalent to one piece when a suitable § 178.940 Standards for flexible Large
method of glued assembly is used (i.e., Packagings.
a Lindermann joint, tongue and groove (a) The provisions in this section
joint, ship, lap or babbet joint; or butt apply to flexible Large Packagings in-
joint with at least two corrugated tended to contain liquids and solids.
metal fasteners at each joint, or when Flexible Large Packagings types are
other methods at least equally effec- designated:
tive are used). (1) 51H flexible plastics.
(ii) Plywood used in construction (2) 51M flexible paper.
must be at least 3-ply. Plywood must (b) Construction requirements for
be made of well-seasoned rotary cut, flexible Large Packagings are as fol-
sliced or sawn veneer, commercially lows:
dry and free from defects that would (1) The strength of the material and
materially lessen the strength of the the construction of the flexible Large
Large Packagings. All adjacent piles Packagings must be appropriate to its
must be glued with water resistant ad- capacity and its intended use.
hesive. Materials other than plywood (2) All materials used in the con-
may be used for the construction of the struction of flexible Large Packagings
Large Packaging. of types 51M must, after complete im-
(iii) Reconstituted wood used in the mersion in water for not less than 24
construction of Large Packagings must hours, retain at least 85 percent of the
be water resistant reconstituted wood tensile strength as measured originally
such as hardboard, particle board or on the material conditioned to equi-
other suitable type. librium at 67 percent relative humidity
(iv) Wooden Large Packagings must or less.
be firmly nailed or secured to corner (3) Seams must be stitched or formed
posts or ends or be assembled by simi- by heat sealing, gluing or any equiva-
lar devices. lent method. All stitched seam-ends
(2) Integral and detachable pallets. (i) must be secured.
Any integral pallet base forming part (4) In addition to conformance with
of a Large Packaging, or any detach- the requirements of § 173.24 of this sub-
able pallet must be suitable for me- chapter, flexible Large Packaging must
chanical handling of a Large Pack- be resistant to aging and degradation
aging filled to its maximum permis- caused by ultraviolet radiation.
sible gross mass. (5) For plastic flexible Large Pack-
(ii) The pallet or integral base must agings, if necessary, protection against
be designed to avoid protrusion that ultraviolet radiation must be provided
may cause damage to the Large Pack- by the addition of pigments or inhibi-
aging in handling. tors such as carbon black. These addi-
(iii) The body must be secured to any tives must be compatible with the con-
detachable pallet to ensure stability in tents and remain effective throughout
246
the life of the Large Packaging. Where performed by the person who offers a
use is made of carbon black, pigments hazardous material for transportation,
or inhibitors other than those used in that person is responsible for per-
the manufacture of the tested design forming the function in accordance
type, retesting may be omitted if the with §§ 173.22 and 178.2 of this sub-
carbon black content, the pigment con- chapter.
tent or the inhibitor content do not ad- (c) Definitions. For the purpose of this
versely affect the physical properties subpart:
of the material of construction. (1) Large packaging design type refers
(6) Additives may be included in the to a Large Packaging which does not
composition of the material of the differ in structural design, size, mate-
Large Packaging to improve the resist- rial of construction and packing.
ance to aging, provided they do not ad-
(2) Design qualification testing is the
versely affect the physical or chemical
performance of the drop, stacking, and
properties of the material.
(7) When flexible material Large bottom-lift or top-lift tests, as applica-
Packagings are filled, the ratio of ble, prescribed in this subpart, for each
height to width must be no more than different Large Packaging design type,
2:1. at the start of production of that pack-
(c) Flexible Large Packagings: aging.
(1) May not have a volumetric capac- (3) Periodic design requalification test is
ity greater than 3,000 L (793 gallons); the performance of the applicable tests
(2) May not have a volumetric capac- specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this sec-
ity less than 56 L (15 gallons); and tion on a Large Packaging design type,
(3) Must be designed and tested to a to requalify the design for continued
capacity of not less than 50 kg (110 production at the frequency specified
pounds). in paragraph (e) of this section.
(4) Production inspection is the inspec-
Subpart Q—Testing of Large tion, which must initially be conducted
Packagings on each newly manufactured Large
Packaging.
(5) Different Large Packaging design
SOURCE: 75 FR 5400, Feb. 2, 2010, unless oth-
erwise noted. type is one which differs from a pre-
viously qualified Large Packaging de-
§ 178.950 Purpose and scope. sign type in structural design, size, ma-
This subpart prescribes certain test- terial of construction, wall thickness,
ing requirements for Large Packagings or manner of construction, but does
identified in subpart P of this part. not include:
(i) A packaging which differs in sur-
§ 178.955 General requirements. face treatment;
(a) General. The test procedures pre- (ii) A rigid plastic Large Packaging,
scribed in this subpart are intended to which differs with regard to additives
ensure that Large Packagings con- used to comply with § 178.925(b) or
taining hazardous materials can with- § 178.940(b);
stand normal conditions of transpor- (iii) A packaging which differs only
tation. These test procedures are con- in its lesser external dimensions (i.e.,
sidered minimum requirements. Each height, width, length) provided mate-
packaging must be manufactured and rials of construction and material
assembled so as to be capable of suc- thickness or fabric weight remain the
cessfully passing the prescribed tests same;
and to conform to the requirements of (6) Remanufactured Large Packaging is
§ 173.24 of this subchapter while in a metal or rigid Large Packaging that
transportation. is produced as a UN type from a non-
(b) Responsibility. The Large Pack- UN type or is converted from one UN
aging manufacturer is responsible for design type to another UN design type.
ensuring each Large Packaging is capa- Remanufactured Large Packagings are

ble of passing the prescribed tests. To subject to the same requirements of
the extent a Large Packaging’s assem- this subchapter that apply to new
bly function, including final closure, is Large Packagings of the same type.
247
§ 178.955 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(7) Reused Large Packaging is a Large ing by the person certifying compli-
Packaging intended to be refilled and ance with this paragraph and retained
has been examined and found free of de- in accordance with paragraph (l) of this
fects affecting its ability to withstand section. Permitted variations are as
the performance tests. See also follows:
§ 173.36(c) of this subchapter. (1) Inner packagings of equivalent or
(d) Design qualification testing. The smaller size may be used provided—
packaging manufacturer must achieve (i) The inner packagings are of simi-
successful test results for the design lar design to the tested inner pack-
qualification testing at the start of agings (i.e., shape—round, rectangular,
production of each new or different etc.);
Large Packaging design type. Applica- (ii) The material of construction of
tion of the certification mark by the the inner packagings (glass, plastic,
manufacturer constitutes certification metal, etc.) offers resistance to impact
that the Large Packaging design type and stacking forces equal to or greater
passed the prescribed tests in this sub- than that of the originally tested inner
part. packaging;
(e) Periodic design requalification test- (iii) The inner packagings have the
ing. (1) Periodic design requalification same or smaller openings and the clo-
must be conducted on each qualified sure is of similar design (e.g., screw
Large Packaging design type if the cap, friction lid, etc.);
manufacturer is to maintain authoriza-
(iv) Sufficient additional cushioning
tion for continued production. The
material is used to take up void spaces
Large Packaging manufacturer must
and to prevent significant movement of
achieve successful test results for the
the inner packagings;
periodic design requalification at suffi-
(v) Inner packagings are oriented
cient frequency to ensure each pack-
within the outer packaging in the same
aging produced by the manufacturer is
manner as in the tested package; and
capable of passing the design qualifica-
tion tests. Design requalification tests (vi) The gross mass of the package
must be conducted at least once every does not exceed that originally tested.
24 months. (2) A lesser number of the tested
(2) Changes in the frequency of design inner packagings, or of the alternative
requalification testing specified in types of inner packagings identified in
paragraph (e)(1) of this section are au- paragraph (g)(1) of this section, may be
thorized if approved by the Associate used provided sufficient cushioning is
Administrator. added to fill void space(s) and to pre-
(f) Test samples. The manufacturer vent significant movement of the inner
must conduct the design qualification packagings.
and periodic tests prescribed in this (h) Proof of compliance. In addition to
subpart using random samples of pack- the periodic design requalification
agings, in the numbers specified in the testing intervals specified in paragraph
appropriate test section. (e) of this section, the Associate Ad-
(g) Selective testing. The selective ministrator, or a designated represent-
testing of Large Packagings, which dif- ative, may at any time require dem-
fer only in minor respects from a test- onstration of compliance by a manu-
ed type is permitted as described in facturer, through testing in accordance
this section. For air transport, Large with this subpart, to ensure packagings
Packagings must comply with meet the requirements of this subpart.
§ 173.27(c)(1) and (c)(2) of this sub- As required by the Associate Adminis-
chapter. Variations are permitted in trator, or a designated representative,
inner packagings of a tested Large the manufacturer must either:
Packaging, without further testing of (1) Conduct performance tests or
the package, provided an equivalent have tests conducted by an inde-
level of performance is maintained and pendent testing facility, in accordance
the methodology used to determine with this subpart; or

that the inner packaging, including (2) Make a sample Large Packaging
closure, maintains an equivalent level available to the Associate Adminis-
of performance is documented in writ- trator, or a designated representative,
248
for testing in accordance with this sub- pared for transportation, including
part. inner packagings. All closures must be
(i) Record retention. Following each installed using proper techniques and
design qualification test and each peri- torques.
odic retest on a Large Packaging, a (b) For the drop and stacking test,
test report must be prepared. The test inner receptacles must be filled to not
report must be maintained at each lo- less than 95 percent of maximum ca-
cation where the Large Packaging is pacity (see § 171.8 of this subchapter) in
manufactured and each location where the case of solids and not less than 98
the design qualification tests are con- percent of maximum in the case of liq-
ducted, for as long as the Large Pack- uids. Bags must be filled to the max-
aging is produced and for at least two
imum mass at which they may be used.
years thereafter, and at each location
For Large Packagings where the inner
where the periodic retests are con-
packagings are designed to carry liq-
ducted until such tests are successfully
uids and solids, separate testing is re-
performed again and a new test report
produced. In addition, a copy of the quired for both liquid and solid con-
test report must be maintained by a tents. The material to be transported
person certifying compliance with this in the packagings may be replaced by a
part. The test report must be made non-hazardous material, except for
available to a user of a Large Pack- chemical compatibility testing or
aging or a representative of the De- where this would invalidate the results
partment upon request. The test re- of the tests.
port, at a minimum, must contain the (c) If the material to be transported
following information: is replaced for test purposes by a non-
(1) Name and address of test facility; hazardous material, the material used
(2) Name and address of applicant must be of the same or higher specific
(where appropriate); gravity as the material to be carried,
(3) A unique test report identifica- and its other physical properties
tion; (grain, size, viscosity) which might in-
(4) Date of the test report; fluence the results of the required tests
(5) Manufacturer of the packaging; must correspond as closely as possible
(6) Description of the packaging de- to those of the hazardous material to
sign type (e.g., dimensions, materials, be transported. It is permissible to use
closures, thickness, etc.), including additives, such as bags of lead shot, to
methods of manufacture (e.g., blow achieve the requisite total package
molding) and which may include draw- mass, so long as they do not affect the
ing(s) and/or photograph(s);
test results.
(7) Maximum capacity;
(8) Characteristics of test contents, (d) Paper or fiberboard Large Pack-
e.g., viscosity and relative density for agings must be conditioned for at least
liquids and particle size for solids; 24 hours immediately prior to testing
(9) Mathematical calculations per- in an atmosphere maintained—
formed to conduct and document test- (1) At 50 percent ± 2 percent relative
ing (for example, drop height, test ca- humidity, and at a temperature of 23 °C
pacity, outage requirements, etc.); ± 2 °C (73 °F ± 4 °F). Average values
(10) Test descriptions and results; and should fall within these limits. Short-
(11) Signature with the name and term fluctuations and measurement
title of signatory. limitations may cause individual meas-
[75 FR 5400, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR
urements to vary by up to ± 5 percent
60339, Sept. 30, 2010; 76 FR 3389, Jan. 19, 2011] relative humidity without significant
impairment of test reproducibility;
§ 178.960 Preparation of Large Pack- (2) At 65 percent ± 2 percent relative
agings for testing. humidity, and at a temperature of 20 °C
(a) Except as otherwise provided in ± 2 °C (68 °F ± 4 °F), or 27 °C ± 2 °C (81
this subchapter, each Large Packaging °F ± 4 °F). Average values should fall
and package must be closed in prepara- within these limits. Short-term fluc-
tion for testing and tests must be car- tuations and measurement limitations
ried out in the same manner as if pre- may cause individual measurements to
249
§ 178.965 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
vary by up to ± 5 percent relative hu- (3) The specific gravity and viscosity
midity without significant impairment of a substituted non-hazardous mate-
of test reproducibility; or rial used in the drop test for liquids
(3) For testing at periodic intervals must be similar to the hazardous mate-
only (i.e., other than initial design rial intended for transportation. Water
qualification testing), at ambient con- also may be used for the liquid drop
ditions. test under the following conditions:
(i) Where the substances to be carried
§ 178.965 Drop test. have a specific gravity not exceeding
(a) General. The drop test must be 1.2, the drop heights must be those
conducted for the qualification of all specified in paragraph (e)(1) of this sec-
Large Packaging design types and per- tion for each Large Packaging design
formed periodically as specified in type; and
§ 178.955(e) of this subpart. (ii) Where the substances to be car-
(b) Special preparation for the drop test. ried have a specific gravity exceeding
Large Packagings must be filled in ac- 1.2, the drop heights must be as fol-
cordance with § 178.960. lows:
(c) Conditioning. Rigid plastic Large (A) Packing Group I: SG × 1.5 m (4.9
Packagings and Large Packagings with feet).
plastic inner receptacles must be con- (B) Packing Group II: SG × 1.0 m (3.3
ditioned for testing by reducing the feet).
temperature of the packaging and its (C) Packing Group III: SG × 0.67 m
contents to ¥18 °C (0 °F) or lower. Test (2.2 feet).
liquids must be kept in the liquid (f) Criteria for passing the test. For all
state, if necessary, by the addition of Large Packaging design types there
anti-freeze. Water/anti-freeze solutions may be no loss of the filling substance
with a minimum specific gravity of 0.95 from inner packaging(s) or article(s).
for testing at ¥18 °C (0 °F) or lower are Ruptures are not permitted in Large
considered acceptable test liquids, and Packaging for articles of Class 1 which
may be considered equivalent to water permit the spillage of loose explosive
for test purposes. Large Packagings substances or articles from the Large
conditioned in this way are not re- Packaging. Where a Large Packaging
quired to be conditioned in accordance undergoes a drop test, the sample
with § 178.960(d). passes the test if the entire contents
(d) Test method. (1) Samples of all are retained even if the closure is no
Large Packaging design types must be longer sift-proof.
dropped onto a rigid, non-resilient,
smooth, flat and horizontal surface. [75 FR 5400, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR
The point of impact must be the most 60339, Sept. 30, 2010]
vulnerable part of the base of the Large
§ 178.970 Bottom lift test.
Packaging being tested. Following the
drop, the Large Packaging must be re- (a) General. The bottom lift test must
stored to the upright position for ob- be conducted for the qualification of
servation. all Large Packagings design types de-
(2) Large Packaging design types signed to be lifted from the base.
with a capacity of 0.45 cubic meters (b) Special preparation for the bottom
(15.9 cubic feet) or less must be subject lift test. The Large Packaging must be
to an additional drop test. loaded to 1.25 times its maximum per-
(e) Drop height. (1) For all Large missible gross mass, the load being
Packagings, drop heights are specified evenly distributed.
as follows: (c) Test method. All Large Packaging
(i) Packing group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet) design types must be raised and low-
(ii) Packing group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet) ered twice by a lift truck with the
(iii) Packing group III: 0.8 m (2.6 feet) forks centrally positioned and spaced
(2) Drop tests are to be performed at three quarters of the dimension of
with the solid or liquid to be trans- the side of entry (unless the points of
ported or with a non-hazardous mate- entry are fixed). The forks must pene-
rial having essentially the same phys- trate to three quarters of the direction
ical characteristics. of entry.
250
(d) Criteria for passing the test. For all Large Packaging. The test must be
Large Packagings design types de- conducted for a period of five minutes.
signed to be lifted from the base, there (v) Other equally effective methods
may be no permanent deformation of top lift testing and preparation may
which renders the Large Packaging un- be used with approval of the Associate
safe for transport and there must be no Administrator.
loss of contents. (d) Criterion for passing the test. For
all Large Packagings design types de-
§ 178.975 Top lift test. signed to be lifted from the top, there
(a) General. The top lift test must be may be no permanent deformation
conducted for the qualification of all of which renders the Large Packagings
Large Packagings design types to be unsafe for transport and no loss of con-
lifted from the top or, for flexible tents.
Large Packagings, from the side.
(b) Special preparation for the top lift § 178.980 Stacking test.
test. (1) Metal and rigid plastic Large (a) General. The stacking test must
Packagings design types must be load- be conducted for the qualification of
ed to twice its maximum permissible all Large Packagings design types in-
gross mass. tended to be stacked.
(2) Flexible Large Packaging design (b) Special preparation for the stacking
types must be filled to six times the test. (1) All Large Packagings except
maximum permissible gross mass, the flexible Large Packaging design types
load being evenly distributed. must be loaded to their maximum per-
(c) Test method. (1) A Large Pack- missible gross mass.
aging must be lifted in the manner for (2) Flexible Large Packagings must
which it is designed until clear of the be filled to not less than 95 percent of
floor and maintained in that position their capacity and to their maximum
for a period of five minutes. net mass, with the load being evenly
(2) Rigid plastic Large Packaging de- distributed.
sign types must be: (c) Test method. (1) All Large Pack-
(i) Lifted by each pair of diagonally agings must be placed on their base on
opposite lifting devices, so that the level, hard ground and subjected to a
hoisting forces are applied vertically uniformly distributed superimposed
for a period of five minutes; and test load for a period of at least five
(ii) Lifted by each pair of diagonally minutes (see paragraph (c)(5) of this
opposite lifting devices so that the section).
hoisting forces are applied towards the (2) Fiberboard and wooden Large
center at 45° to the vertical, for a pe- Packagings must be subjected to the
riod of five minutes. test for 24 hours.
(3) If not tested as indicated in para- (3) Rigid plastic Large Packagings
graph (c)(1) of this section, a flexible which bear the stacking load must be
Large Packaging design type must be subjected to the test for 28 days at 40
tested as follows: °C (104 °F).
(i) Fill the flexible Large Packaging (4) For all Large Packagings, the
to 95% full with a material representa- load must be applied by one of the fol-
tive of the product to be shipped. lowing methods:
(ii) Suspend the flexible Large Pack- (i) One or more Large Packagings of
aging by its lifting devices. the same type loaded to their max-
(iii) Apply a constant downward force imum permissible gross mass and
through a specially designed platen. stacked on the test Large Packaging;
The platen will be a minimum of 60 (ii) The calculated superimposed test
percent and a maximum of 80 percent load weight loaded on either a flat
of the cross sectional surface area of plate or a reproduction of the base of
the flexible Large Packaging. the Large Packaging, which is stacked
(iv) The combination of the mass of on the test Large Packaging; or
the filled flexible Large Packaging and (5) Calculation of superimposed test
the force applied through the platen load. For all Large Packagings, the
must be a minimum of six times the load to be placed on the Large Pack-
maximum net mass of the flexible aging must be 1.8 times the combined
251
§ 178.985 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
maximum permissible gross mass of renders the Large Packaging unsafe for
the number of similar Large Packaging transportation and no loss of contents.
that may be stacked on top of the (3) For the dynamic compression
Large Packaging during transpor- test, a container passes the test if,
tation. after application of the required load,
(d) Periodic Retest. (1) The package there is no permanent deformation to
must be tested in accordance with the Large Packaging which renders the
§ 178.980(c) of this subpart; or whole Large Packaging; including the
(2) The packaging may be tested base pallet, unsafe for transportation;
using a dynamic compression testing in no case may the maximum deflec-
machine. The test must be conducted tion exceed one inch.
at room temperature on an empty, un-
sealed packaging. The test sample [75 FR 5400, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR
60339, Sept. 30, 2010]
must be centered on the bottom platen
of the testing machine. The top platen § 178.985 Vibration test.
must be lowered until it comes in con-
tact with the test sample. Compression (a) General. All rigid Large Pack-
must be applied end to end. The speed aging and flexible Large Packaging de-
of the compression tester must be one- sign types must be capable of with-
half inch plus or minus one-fourth inch standing the vibration test.
per minute. An initial preload of 50 (b) Test method. (1) A sample Large
pounds must be applied to ensure a Packaging, selected at random, must
definite contact between the test sam- be filled and closed as for shipment.
ple and the platens. The distance be- Large Packagings intended for liquids
tween the platens at this time must be may be tested using water as the filling
recorded as zero deformation. The force material for the vibration test.
‘‘A’’ to then be applied must be cal- (2) The sample Large Packaging must
culated using the applicable formula: be placed on a vibrating platform that
has a vertical or rotary double-ampli-
Liquids: A = (1.8)(n¥1) [w + (s × v × 8.3
tude (peak-to-peak displacement) of
× .98)] × 1.5;
one inch. The Large Packaging must be
or constrained horizontally to prevent it
from falling off the platform, but must
Solids: A = (1.8)(n¥1) [w + (s × v × 8.3 × be left free to move vertically and
.95)] × 1.5 bounce.
Where: (3) The sample Large Packaging must
A = applied load in pounds. be placed on a vibrating platform that
n = maximum number of Large Packagings has a vertical double-amplitude (peak-
that may be stacked during transpor- to-peak displacement) of one inch. The
tation. Large Packaging must be constrained
w = maximum weight of one empty container
in pounds.
horizontally to prevent it from falling
s = specific gravity (liquids) or density (sol- off the platform, but must be left free
ids) of the lading. to move vertically and bounce.
v = actual capacity of container (rated ca- (4) The test must be performed for
pacity + outage) in gallons. one hour at a frequency that causes the
and: package to be raised from the vibrating
8.3 corresponds to the weight in pounds of 1.0 platform to such a degree that a piece
gallon of water.
1.5 is a compensation factor that converts of material of approximately 1.6-mm
the static load of the stacking test into a (0.063-inch) in thickness (such as steel
load suitable for dynamic compression strapping or paperboard) can be passed
testing. between the bottom of the Large Pack-
(e) Criterion for passing the test. (1) For aging and the platform. Other methods
metal or rigid plastic Large Pack- at least equally effective may be used
agings, there may be no permanent de- (see § 178.801(i)).
formation which renders the Large (c) Criterion for passing the test. A
Packaging unsafe for transportation Large Packaging passes the vibration

and no loss of contents. test if there is no rupture or leakage.
(2) For flexible Large Packagings, [75 FR 5400, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR
there may be no deterioration which 60339, Sept. 30, 2010]
252
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 178, App. B
APPENDIX A TO PART 178—SPECIFICATIONS FOR STEEL
TABLE 1
[Open-hearth, basic oxygen, or electric steel of uniform quality. The following chemical composition limits are based on ladle
analysis:]
Chemical composition, percent-ladle analysis

Designation
Grade 1 1 Grade 2 1,2 Grade 3 2,4,5
Carbon .......................................... 0.10/0.20 ............................... 0.24 maximum ...................... 0.22 maximum.

Manganese ................................... 1.10/1.60 ............................... 0.50/1.00 ............................... 1.25 maximum.
Phosphorus, maximum ................. 0.04 ....................................... 0.04 ....................................... 0.045.6
Sulfur, maximum .......................... 0.05 ....................................... 0.05 ....................................... 0.05.
Silicon ........................................... 0.15/0.30 ............................... 0.30 maximum ......................
Copper, maximum ........................ 0.40 ....................................... ...............................................
Columbium ................................... ............................................... 0.01/0.04 ...............................
Heat treatment authorized ............ (3) .......................................... (3) .......................................... (3).
Maximum stress (p.s.i.) ................ 35,000 ................................... 35,000 ................................... 35,000.
1 Additionof other elements to obtain alloying effect is not authorized.
2 Ferritic
grain size 6 or finer according to ASTM E 112–96 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter).
3 Anysuitable heat treatment in excess of 1,100 °F., except that liquid quenching is not permitted.
4 Other alloying elements may be added and shall be reported.
5 For compositions with a maximum carbon content of 0.15 percent of ladle analysis, the maximum limit for manganese on
ladle analysis may be 1.40 percent.
6 Rephosphorized Grade 3 steels containing no more than 0.15 percent phosphorus are permitted if carbon content does not
exceed 0.15 percent and manganese does not exceed 1 percent.
CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES

[A heat of steel made under any of the above grades, the ladle analysis of which is slightly out of the specified range is
acceptable if the check analysis is within the following variations:]

under the minimum limit
Element Limit or maximum specified (percent)
Carbon ...................................................................... To 0.15 inclusive .............................................. 0.02 0.03

Over 0.15 to 0.40 inclusive .............................. 0.03 0.04
Manganese ............................................................... To 0.60 inclusive .............................................. 0.03 0.03
Phosphorus 7 ............................................................. All ranges ......................................................... .................... 0.01
Sulfur ......................................................................... All ranges ......................................................... .................... 0.01
Silicon ........................................................................ To 0.30 inclusive .............................................. 0.02 0.03
Copper ...................................................................... To 1.00 inclusive .............................................. 0.03 0.03
Nickel ........................................................................ To 1.00 inclusive .............................................. 0.03 0.03
Chromium .................................................................. To 0.90 inclusive .............................................. 0.03 0.03
Molybdenum .............................................................. To 0.20 inclusive .............................................. 0.01 0.01
Zirconium .................................................................. All ranges ......................................................... 0.01 0.05
Columbium ................................................................ To 0.04 inclusive .............................................. 0.005 0.01
Aluminum .................................................................. Over 0.10 to 0.20 inclusive .............................. 0.04 0.04
[Amdt. 178–3, 34 FR 12283, July 25, 1969; 34 FR 12593, Aug. 1, 1969, as amended by Amdt. 178–
64, 45 FR 81573, Dec. 11, 1980; Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52728, Dec. 21, 1990; 68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003]
APPENDIX B TO PART 178—ALTERNATIVE (1) Helium test. The packaging must be

LEAKPROOFNESS TEST METHODS filled with at least 1 L inert helium gas, air
tight closed, and placed in a testing cham-
In addition to the method prescribed in ber. The testing chamber must be evacuated
§ 178.604 of this subchapter, the following down to a pressure of 5 kPa which equals an
leakproofness test methods are authorized: over-pressure inside the packaging of 95 kPa.
253
Pt. 178, App. C 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
The air in the testing chamber must be ana- resentative of the Department of Transpor-
lyzed for traces of helium gas by means of a tation on request.
mass spectrograph. The test must be con-
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52728, Dec. 21, 1990, as
ducted for a period of time sufficient to evac- amended at 56 FR 66287, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR
uate the chamber and to determine if there 45466, Oct. 1, 1992]
is leakage into or out of the packaging. If he-
lium gas is detected, the leaking packaging APPENDIX C TO PART 178—NOMINAL AND
must be automatically separated from non- MINIMUM THICKNESSES OF STEEL
leaking drums and the leaking area deter-
DRUMS AND JERRICANS
mined according to the method prescribed in
§ 178.604(d) of this subchapter. A packaging For each listed packaging capacity, the
passes the test if there is no leakage of he- following table compares the ISO 3574 (IBR,
lium. see § 171.7 of this subchapter) nominal thick-
(2) Pressure differential test. The packaging ness with the corresponding ISO 3574 min-
shall be restrained while either pressure or a imum thickness.
vacuum is applied internally. The packaging
Cor-
must be pressurized to the pressure required responding
by § 178.604(e) of this subchapter for the ap- ISO nomi-
Maximum capacity (L) ISO min-
nal (mm)
propriate packing group. The method of re- imum
(mm)
straint must not affect the results of the
test. The test must be conducted for a period 20 ................................................... 0.7 0.63
of time sufficient to appropriately pressurize 30 ................................................... 0.8 0.73
or evacuate the interior of the packaging 40 ................................................... 0.8 0.73
and to determine if there is leakage into or 60 ................................................... 1.0 0.92
out of the packaging. A packaging passes the 120 ................................................. 1.0 0.92
220 ................................................. 1.0 0.92
pressure differential test if there is no 450 ................................................. 1.9 1.77
change in measured internal pressure.
(3) Solution over seams. The packaging must
be restrained while an internal air pressure [Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67522, Dec. 29, 1994, as
is applied; the method of restraint may not amended at 68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003]
affect the results of the test. The exterior
surface of all seams and welds must be coat- APPENDIX D TO PART 178—THERMAL
ed with a solution of soap suds or a water RESISTANCE TEST
and oil mixture. The test must be conducted
1. Scope. This test method evaluates the
for a period of time sufficient to pressurize thermal resistance capabilities of a com-
the interior of the packaging to the specified pressed oxygen generator and the outer
air pressure and to determine if there is packaging for a cylinder of compressed oxy-
leakage of air from the packaging. A pack- gen or other oxidizing gas and an oxygen
aging passes the test if there is no leakage of generator. When exposed to a temperature of
air from the packaging. 205 °C (400 °F) for a period of not less than
(4) Solution over partial seams test. For other three hours, the outer surface of the cylinder
than design qualification testing, the fol- may not exceed a temperature of 93 °C (199
lowing test may be used for metal drums: °F) and the oxygen generator must not actu-
The packaging must be restrained while an ate.
internal air pressure of 48 kPa (7.0 psig) is 2. Apparatus.
applied; the method of restraint may not af- 2.1 Test Oven. The oven must be large
fect the results of the test. The packaging enough in size to fully house the test outer
must be coated with a soap solution over the package without clearance problems. The
entire side seam and a distance of not less test oven must be capable of maintaining a
than eight inches on each side of the side minimum steady state temperature of 205 °C
seam along the chime seam(s). The test must (400 °F).
be conducted for a period of time sufficient 2.2 Thermocouples. At least three
to pressurize the interior of the packaging to thermocouples must be used to monitor the
temperature inside the oven and an addi-
the specified air pressure and to determine if
tional three thermocouples must be used to
there is leakage of air from the packaging. A
monitor the temperature of the cylinder.
packaging passes the test if there is no leak-
The thermocouples must be 1⁄16 inch, ceramic
age of air from the packaging. Chime cuts packed, metal sheathed, type K (Chromel-
must be made on the initial drum at the be- Alumel), grounded junction with a nominal
ginning of each production run and on the 30 American wire gauge (AWG) size con-
initial drum after any adjustment to the ductor. The thermocouples measuring the
chime seamer. Chime cuts must be main- temperature inside the oven must be placed
tained on file in date order for not less than at varying heights to ensure even tempera-
six months and be made available to a rep- ture and proper heat-soak conditions. For
254
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 178, App. E
the thermocouples measuring the tempera- delamination, resin ignition, and time of oc-
ture of the cylinder: (1) Two of them must be currence of each event.
placed on the outer cylinder side wall at ap- 6.3 Record the temperature and time his-
proximately 2 inches (5 cm) from the top and tory of the cylinder temperature during the
bottom shoulders of the cylinder; and (2) one entire test for each thermocouple location.
must be placed on the cylinder valve body Temperature measurements must be re-
near the pressure relief device. Alter- corded at intervals of not more than five (5)
natively, the thermocouples may be replaced minutes. Record the maximum temperatures
with other devices such as a remote tempera- achieved at all three thermocouple locations
ture sensor, metal fuse on the valve, or coat- and the corresponding time.
ed wax, provided the device is tested and the 7. Requirements.
test report is retained for verification. Under 7.1 For a cylinder, the outer package
this alternative, it is permissible to record must provide adequate protection such that
the highest temperature to which the cyl- the outer surface of the cylinder and valve
inder is subjected instead of temperature does not exceed a temperature of 93 °C (199
measurements in intervals of not more than °F) at any of the three points where the
five (5) minutes. thermocouples are located.
2.3 Instrumentation. A calibrated recording 7.2 For an oxygen generator, the gener-
device or a computerized data acquisition ator must not actuate.
system with an appropriate range should be
[72 FR 4457, Jan. 31, 2008, as amended at 72
provided to measure and record the outputs
FR 55099, Sept. 28, 2007]
of the thermocouples.
3. Test Specimen. APPENDIX E TO PART 178—FLAME
3.1 Specimen Configuration. Each outer
package material type and design must be
PENETRATION RESISTANCE TEST
tested, including any features such as han- (a) Criteria for Acceptance. (1) At least three
dles, latches, fastening systems, etc., that specimens of the outer packaging materials
may compromise the ability of the outer must be tested;
package to provide thermal protection. (2) Each test must be conducted on a flat 16
3.2 Test Specimen Mounting. The tested inch x 24 inch test specimen mounted in the
outer package must be supported at the four horizontal ceiling position of the test appa-
corners using fire brick or other suitable ratus to represent the outer packaging de-
means. The bottom surface of the outer sign;
package must be exposed to allow exposure (3) Testing must be conducted on all design
to heat. features (latches, seams, hinges, etc.) affect-
4. Preparation for Testing. ing the ability of the outer packaging to
4.1 It is recommended that the cylinder be safely prevent the passage of fire in the hori-
closed at ambient temperature and config- zontal ceiling position; and
ured as when filled with a valve and pressure (4) There must be no flame penetration of
relief device. The oxygen generator must be any specimen within 5 minutes after applica-
filled with an oxidizing agent and may be tion of the flame source and the maximum
tested with or without packaging. allowable temperature at a point 4 inches
4.2 Place the package or generator onto above the test specimen, centered over the
supporting bricks or a stand inside the test burner cone, must not exceed 205 °C (400 °F).
oven in such a manner to ensure even tem- (b) Summary of Method. This method pro-
perature flow. vides a laboratory test procedure for meas-
5. Test Procedure. uring the capability of cargo compartment
5.1 Close oven door and check for proper lining materials to resist flame penetration
reading on thermocouples. with a 2 gallon per hour (GPH) #2 Grade ker-
5.2 Raise the temperature of the oven to a osene or equivalent burner fire source. Ceil-
minimum temperature of 205 °C ± 2 °C (400 °F ing and sidewall liner panels may be tested
± 5 °F). Maintain a minimum oven tempera- individually provided a baffle is used to sim-
ture of 205 °C ± 2 °C (400 °F ± 5 °F) for at least ulate the missing panel. Any specimen that
three hours. Exposure time begins when the passes the test as a ceiling liner panel may
oven steady state temperature reaches a be used as a sidewall liner panel.
minimum of 205 °C ± 2 °C (400 °F ± 5 °F). (c) Test Specimens. (1) The specimen to be
5.3 At the conclusion of the three-hour pe- tested must measure 16 ±1⁄8 inches (406 ±3
riod, the outer package may be removed mm) by 24+1⁄8 inches (610 ±3 mm).
from the oven and allowed to cool naturally. (2) The specimens must be conditioned at
6. Recordkeeping. 70 °F. ±5 °F. (21 °C. ±2 °C.) and 55% ±5% hu-
6.1 Record a complete description of the midity for at least 24 hours before testing.
material being tested, including the manu-
(d) Test Apparatus. The arrangement of the

facturer, size of cylinder, etc. test apparatus must include the components
6.2 Record any observations regarding the described in this section. Minor details of the
behavior of the test specimen during expo- apparatus may vary, depending on the model
sure, such as smoke production, of the burner used.
255
Pt. 178, App. E 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–11 Edition)
(1) Specimen Mounting Stand. The mounting must be adjusted as specified in paragraph
stand for the test specimens consists of steel (d)(2).
angles. (f) Calibration. To ensure the proper ther-
(2) Test Burner. The burner to be used in mal output of the burner the following test
tesing must— must be made:
(i) Be a modified gun type. (1) Remove the burner extension from the
(ii) Use a suitable nozzle and maintain fuel end of the draft tube. Turn on the blower
pressure to yield a 2 GPH fuel flow. For ex- portion of the burner without turning the
ample: An 80 degree nozzle nominally rated fuel or igniters on. Measure the air velocity
at 2.25 GPH and operated at 85 pounds per using a hot wire anemometer in the center of
square inch (PSI) gauge to deliver 2.03 GPH. the draft tube across the face of the opening.
(iii) Have a 12 inch (305 mm) burner exten- Adjust the damper such that the air velocity
sion installed at the end of the draft tube is in the range of 1550 to 1800 ft./min. If tabs
with an opening 6 inches (152 mm) high and are being used at the exit of the draft tube,
11 inches (280 mm) wide. they must be removed prior to this measure-
(iv) Have a burner fuel pressure regulator ment. Reinstall the draft tube extension
that is adjusted to deliver a nominal 2.0 GPH cone.
of #2 Grade kerosene or equivalent. (2) Place the calorimeter on the test stand
Burner models which have been used suc- as shown in Figure 2 at a distance of 8 inches
cessfully in testing are the Lenox Model OB– (203 mm) from the exit of the burner cone to
32, Carlin Model 200 CRD and Park Model simulate the position of the horizontal test
DPL. specimen.
(3) Calorimeter. (i) The calorimeter to be
(3) Turn on the burner, allow it to run for
used in testing must be a total heat flux Foil
2 minutes for warm-up, and adjust the damp-
Type Gardon Gage of an appropriate range
er to produce a calorimeter reading of 8.0 ±0.5
(approximately 0 to 15.0 British thermal unit
BTU per ft.2 sec. (9.1 ±0.6 Watts/cm2).
(BTU) per ft.2 sec., 0–17.0 watts/cm2). The cal-
(4) Replace the calorimeter with the ther-
orimeter must be mounted in a 6 inch by 12
mocouple rake.
inch (152 by 305 mm) by 3⁄4 inch (19 mm) thick
insulating block which is attached to a steel (5) Turn on the burner and ensure that
angle bracket for placement in the test stand each of the seven thermocouples reads 1700
during burner calibration as shown in Figure °F. ±100 °F. (927 °C. ±38 °C.) to ensure steady
2 of this part of this appendix. state conditions have been achieved. If the
(ii) The insulating block must be mon- temperature is out of this range, repeat steps
itored for deterioration and the mounting 2 through 5 until proper readings are ob-
shimmed as necessary to ensure that the cal- tained.
orimeter face is parallel to the exit plane of (6) Turn off the burner and remove the
the test burner cone. thermocouple rake.
(4) Thermocouples. The seven thermocouples (7) Repeat (1) to ensure that the burner is
to be used for testing must be 1⁄16 inch ce- in the correct range.
ramic sheathed, type K, grounded (g) Test Procedure. (1) Mount a thermo-
thermocouples with a nominal 30 American couple of the same type as that used for cali-
wire gage (AWG) size conductor. The seven bration at a distance of 4 inches (102 mm)
thermocouples must be attached to a steel above the horizontal (ceiling) test specimen.
angle bracket to form a thermocouple rake The thermocouple should be centered over
for placement in the test stand during burn- the burner cone.
er calibration. (2) Mount the test specimen on the test
(5) Apparatus Arrangement. The test burner stand shown in Figure 1 in either the hori-
must be mounted on a suitable stand to posi- zontal or vertical position. Mount the insu-
tion the exit of the burner cone a distance of lating material in the other position.
8 inches from the ceiling liner panel and 2 (3) Position the burner so that flames will
inches from the sidewall liner panel. The not impinge on the specimen, turn the burn-
burner stand should have the capability of er on, and allow it to run for 2 minutes. Ro-
allowing the burner to be swung away from tate the burner to apply the flame to the
the test specimen during warm-up periods. specimen and simultaneously start the tim-
(6) Instrumentation. A recording potentiom- ing device.
eter or other suitable instrument with an ap- (4) Expose the test specimen to the flame
propriate range must be used to measure and for 5 minutes and then turn off the burner.
record the outputs of the calorimeter and The test may be terminated earlier if flame
the thermocouples. penetration is observed.
(7) Timing Device. A stopwatch or other de- (5) When testing ceiling liner panels,
vice must be used to measure the time of record the peak temperature measured 4
inches above the sample.
flame application and the time of flame pen-

etration, if it occurs. (6) Record the time at which flame pene-
(e) Preparation of Apparatus. Before calibra- tration occurs if applicable.
tion, all equipment must be turned on and (h) Test Report. The test report must in-
allowed to stabilize, and the burner fuel flow clude the following:
256
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 179
(1) A complete description of the materials 179.100–13 Venting, loading and unloading
tested including type, manufacturer, thick- valves, measuring and sampling devices.
ness, and other appropriate data. 179.100–14 Bottom outlets.
(2) Observations of the behavior of the test 179.100–16 Attachments.
specimens during flame exposure such as 179.100–17 Closures for openings.
delamination, resin ignition, smoke, etc., in- 179.100–18 Tests of tanks.
cluding the time of such occurrence. 179.100–19 Tests of safety relief valves.
(3) The time at which flame penetration 179.100–20 Stamping.
occurs, if applicable, for each of the three 179.101 Individual specification require-
specimens tested. ments applicable to pressure tank car
[72FR55099, Sept. 28, 2007] tanks.
179.101–1 Individual specification require-
ments.
PART 179—SPECIFICATIONS FOR 179.102 Special commodity requirements for
TANK CARS pressure tank car tanks.
179.102–1 Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid.
Subpart A—Introduction, Approvals and 179.102–2 Chlorine.
Reports 179.102–3 Materials poisonous by inhalation.
179.102–4 Vinyl fluoride, stabilized.
Sec. 179.102–17 Hydrogen chloride, refrigerated
179.1 General. liquid.
179.2 Definitions and abbreviations. 179.103 Special requirements for class 114A
179.3 Procedure for securing approval. * * * tank car tanks.
179.4 Changes in specifications for tank 179.103–1 Type.
cars. 179.103–2 Manway cover.
179.5 Certificate of construction. 179.103–3 Venting, loading and unloading
179.6 Repairs and alterations. valves, measuring and sampling devices.
179.7 Quality assurance program. 179.103–4 Safety relief devices and pressure
179.8 Limitation on actions by states, local regulators.
governments, and Indian tribes. 179.103–5 Bottom outlets.
Subpart B—General Design Requirements Subpart D—Specifications for Nonpressure

179.10 Tank mounting. Tank Car Tanks (Classes DOT-111AW
179.11 Welding certification. and 115AW)
179.12 Interior heater systems.
179.200 General specifications applicable to
179.13 Tank car capacity and gross weight
non-pressure tank car tanks (Class DOT
limitation.
111).
179.14 Coupler vertical restraint system.
179.200–1 Tank built under these specifica-
179.15 Pressure relief devices.
tions must meet the requirements of
179.16 Tank-head puncture-resistance sys-
§§ 179.200, and 179.201.
tems.
179.200–3 Type.
179.18 Thermal protection systems.
179.20 Service equipment; protection sys- 179.200–4 Insulation.
tems. 179.200–6 Thickness of plates.
179.22 Marking. 179.200–7 Materials.
179.200–8 Tank heads.
Subpart C—Specifications for Pressure 179.200–9 Compartment tanks.
Tank Car Tanks (Classes DOT-105, 109, 179.200–10 Welding.
179.200–11 Postweld heat treatment.
112, 114, and 120)
179.200–13 Manway ring or flange, pressure
179.100 General specifications applicable to relief device flange, bottom outlet nozzle
pressure tank car tanks. flange, bottom washout nozzle flange and
179.100–1 Tanks built under these specifica- other attachments and openings.
tions shall comply with the requirements 179.200–14 Expansion capacity.
of §§ 179.100, 179.101 and when applicable, 179.200–15 Closures for manways.
§§ 179.102 and 179.103. 179.200–16 Gauging devices, top loading and
179.100–3 Type. unloading devices, venting and air inlet
179.100–4 Insulation. devices.
179.100–6 Thickness of plates. 179.200–17 Bottom outlets.
179.100–7 Materials. 179.200–19 Reinforcements, when used, and
appurtenances not otherwise specified.
179.100–8 Tank heads.

179.100–9 Welding. 179.200–21 Closures for openings.
179.100–10 Postweld heat treatment. 179.200–22 Test of tanks.
179.100–12 Manway nozzle, cover and protec- 179.200–23 Tests of pressure relief valves.
tive housing. 179.200–24 Stamping.
257

CFR 2011 Title49 Vol3 Part178

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

CFR 2011 Title49 Vol3 Part178

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

PART 178—SPECIFICATIONS FOR 178.

47 Specification 4DS welded stainless

inders for aircraft use.

178.338–10 Accident damage protection. 178.356–2 Materials of construction and

Subpart L—Non-bulk Performance- Subpart O—Testing of IBCs

Subpart M—Testing of Non-bulk Subpart Q—Testing of Large Packagings

178.604 Leakproofness test.

fying compliance with a UN standard. to indicate the State authorizing the

(c) Where a packaging conforms to § 178.33–3 Inspection.

tested shall be complete with end as- § 178.33a–3 Inspection.

§ 178.33a–8 Tests. § 178.33b–3 Inspection.

at drop must be statistically random, (b) Inspections and analyses. Chemical

specification cylinders. (ii) Inspecting the inside of the cyl-

chapter. applicable specification, the markings

prohibited except as follows:

may be flattened to within 1 inch of strength. In this instance, the flat-

by drilling to remove defective mate- (iii) To calculate the maximum lon-

Molybdenum .......... 0.15/0.25 ......... 0.15/0.25

TABLE 2—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES

Carbon ...................................................... To 0.15 incl .................................................................... 0.02 0.03

D = outside diameter in inches;

before the hydrostatic test, the manu- thicknesses to be measured within an

inders welded or formed by spinning is, leakage, are required.

thorized to be made on a ring at least while the specimen is under a stress of

ment of rejected cylinders is author- finished cylinder appreciably. A rea-

(e) Welding or brazing. Welding or longer to ensure complete expansion.

pansion to an accuracy either of 1 per- may be flattened to within one inch of

tening test is not required. engaged threads are authorized.

cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent finished cylinder has been effected by a

end closure in the finished cylinder has

TABLE 1—AUTHORIZED MATERIALS—Continued ispherical or ellipsoidal with a ratio of

of cylinders closed by spinning may not method to detect the presence of

(h) Openings in cylinders and connec- to be left unattended for periods of

(r) Marking. (1) Cylinders must be ANALYSIS TOLERANCES—Continued

Check Analysis S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2)

(e) Heat treatment. Each completed requirements of NBS Handbook H–28.

TABLE 2—MECHANICAL PROPERTY LIMITS

6061–T6 .................................................................................. 38,000 35,000 214

(ii) Each opening is separated from with the following requirements:

must permit reading to an accuracy of wall thickness is authorized to qualify

mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or

spection. Ultrasonic inspection must be stainless steel sphere (two seamless

304 (percent) 321 (percent) 347 (percent)

Carbon (max) ....................................................... 0.08 0.08 0.08

TABLE 2—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES

Carbon ..................................................... To 0.15 incl ...................................................................... 0.01 0.01

prevent leakage. (m) Flattening test. A flattening test

on a press with welded seam at right (c) Identification of material. Material

apply: any of the following locations on the

bottoms of cylinders is authorized. zone must extend a distance of 6 times wall

t = minimum wall thickness in inches; fit and a calculated shear strength of

following: (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing

(k) Elongation. Physical test speci- psig, as provided in paragraph (k) of

scribed gage lines a to b, must be at ning process are not authorized.

following: Carbon, 0.25; phosphorus, sociate Administrator. The following

304 316 321 347

Carbon (max) ........................................................................ 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08

TABLE 3—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES

Carbon ..................................................... To 0.15 incl ...................................................................... 0.01 0.01

(c) Identification of material. Material (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be

must be identified by any suitable manufactured using equipment and

least 24 times the thickness with a side diameter without cracking.

(h) Openings in cylinders. Openings in must be tested as outlined in para-

over 73 percent of tensile strength. In (3) Subsequent to the operations